JP2022042024A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can enhance the interest.SOLUTION: A game machine includes symbol control means capable of performing a variation display of a symbol on the basis of the satisfaction of a predetermined start condition and performing a symbol game capable of deriving any one of the lottery results including a specific small winning and a special result V small winning that is more advantageous to a player than the specific small winning, and specific game state control means capable of controlling a game state to an A time-saving game state which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game state. The specific game state control means can terminate the A time-saving game state when the specific small winning is derived a specific number of times while the game state is controlled to the A time-saving game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The game state can be controlled to any one of the multiple A time-saving game states including at least the A time-saving game state corresponding to a time-saving type mode 1 and the A time-saving game state corresponding to a time-saving type mode 2.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 125

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a gaming machine that determines a variation pattern by referring to a variation pattern table, displays variation of a symbol according to the determined variation pattern, and displays the result of a symbol game is known. Has been done.

As a gaming machine of this type, for example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that switches a variation pattern table to be referred to according to the number of times a variation display of a symbol is performed (in particular, a paragraph [in particular, Patent Document 1]. 0446].).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2021-191336

According to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the variation display of the symbol can be changed by switching the variation pattern table to be referred to, but the variation to be referred to according to the number of times the variation display of the symbol is performed. Since the pattern table is switched, the switching of the variable pattern table is fixed, and there is a risk that the interest will be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Display means for variable display of patterns and
Based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, the display means displays the variation of the symbol, and a specific result (for example, a specific small hit) and a special result (for example, a special result that is more advantageous to the player than the player than the specific result). , Big hit, V small hit), and a symbol control means (for example, main CPU 2201) capable of performing a symbol game capable of deriving any of the lottery results including.
A game state control means (for example, main CPU 2201) capable of controlling a game state, and
Equipped with
The game state control means
A specific game state control means (for example, main CPU 2201) that can be controlled to a specific game state (for example, A time saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.
When the special result is derived by the symbol control means, the special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 2201) that can be controlled to the special game state (for example, the big hit game state) that can give the player a predetermined game value. ) And,
The symbol control means can select any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns (for example, variation pattern tables A to D) when the gaming state is controlled to the specific gaming state by the gaming state control means. ,
The specific game state control means is
When controlled to the specific gaming state, the specific result is a specific number of times (for example, once (in the case of the time saving type mode 1), 10 times (in the case of the time saving type mode 2, 4, 5), 100 times (time saving). (In the case of type modes 3 and 6), etc.) It is possible to terminate the specific gaming state based on the derivation.
The first specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 1) and the second specific gaming state different from the first specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 2). ), And can be controlled to any one of a plurality of specific gaming states including at least.

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, it is possible to enhance the interest.

(2) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
The symbol control means is
When the control of the first specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 1) is started, the first fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern table A) can be selected as the fluctuation pattern. can be,
When the control of the second specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 2) is started, the variation pattern is a second variation pattern (for example, different from the first variation pattern). Fluctuation pattern table B) can be selected,
The first variation pattern (eg, variation pattern table A) has a relatively longer variation time (eg, variation time) than when the second variation pattern (eg, variation pattern table B) is selected. It is preferable to have a fluctuation pattern (with a long average time).

According to the gaming machine described in (2) above, since the variation pattern selected according to the specific gaming state may differ, it is possible to enhance the interest of the gaming.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
The symbol control means is in the first specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving game state corresponding to the time saving type mode 1) or the second specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 2). When controlled, the specific result (for example, a specific small hit) is less than the specific number of times (for example, 10 times) (for example, 8 times (in the case of the A time saving game state corresponding to the time saving type mode 2)). ) It is preferable that the selected variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table B) can be switched to a different variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table A) based on the derivation.

According to the gaming machine described in (3) above, since the fluctuation pattern is switched based on the number of times a specific result (for example, a specific small hit) is derived, the switching timing of the fluctuation pattern is variable, which makes the game interesting. It will be possible to increase. In particular, by making the switching timing of the fluctuation pattern variable according to the specific game state, the player can pay attention to the switching of the fluctuation pattern and play the game, which can further enhance the interest of the game. Will be.

(4) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
The symbol control means is
When controlled to the first specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 1), the first variation pattern among the plurality of types of variation patterns (for example, the variation pattern table A). ) Can be selected,
The specific result (for example, the specific small) is controlled when the second specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 2) is controlled and the second specific gaming state is controlled. When the hit) is not derived, the second variation time is relatively shorter than when the first variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table A) is selected among the plurality of types of variation patterns. It is preferable that the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table B) can be selected.

According to the gaming machine described in (4) above, since the fluctuation time of the symbol can be made variable according to the specific gaming state, it is possible to improve the playability in the specific gaming state and enhance the interest. Become.

(5) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
The symbol control means is
The specific result (for example, a specific small hit) is not derived when the specific game state is controlled to the third specific game state (for example, the A time reduction game state corresponding to the time reduction type mode 6) among the plurality of specific game states. In this case, a third variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table C) can be selected from the plurality of types of variation patterns (for example, variation pattern tables A to D).
When the specific result is derived a number of times (for example, 99 times) less than the specific number of times (for example, 100 times) while being controlled to the third specific gaming state, the variation pattern of the plurality of types is described. It is preferable that a fourth variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table A) having a relatively longer variation time than when the third variation pattern is selected can be selected.

According to the gaming machine described in (5) above, when a specific result (for example, a specific small hit) is not derived, a third variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table C) can be selected, and the specific result can be selected. When is derived less than a specific number of times (for example, 100 times) (for example, 99 times), a fourth variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table A) having a relatively long variation time can be selected. Therefore, when the end timing of the specific game state is near, the progress of the game can be slowed down, the staying time of the specific game state can be made as long as possible, and the interest can be enhanced.

(6) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
In the first specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 1), the first specific number of times (for example, once) is set as the specific number of times.
The second specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 2) is a second specific number of times (for example, one time) that is larger than the first specific number of times (for example, one time) as the specific number of times. 10 times) is preferably set.

According to the gaming machine described in (6) above, since the number of times of derivation of a specific result that can trigger the termination of the specific gaming state differs depending on the type of the special gaming state, the specific result related to the termination of the specific gaming state (for example). , It is possible to make the player pay close attention to the derivation of the specific small hit), and it is possible to enhance the interest. In particular, the derivation of a specific result involves not only the end of the specific game state but also the switching of the fluctuation pattern, so that it is possible to further enhance the interest.

(7) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
The symbol control means is
When it is controlled to the fourth specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 5) among the plurality of specific gaming states and is controlled to the fourth specific gaming state, the said. When a specific result (for example, a specific small hit) is not derived, a fifth variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table D) among the plurality of types of variation patterns can be selected.
The third specific number of times that the number of times the specific result is derived is less than the second specific number of times (for example, 10 times) when controlled to the fifth specific gaming state and controlled to the fifth specific gaming state. (For example, once), the sixth variation time is relatively shorter than when the fifth variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table D) is selected among the plurality of types of variation patterns. A variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table C) can be selected.
When controlled to the fifth specific gaming state and controlled to the fifth specific gaming state, the number of times the specific result is derived is less than the second specific number of times (for example, 10 times), and the third. When the fourth specific number of times (for example, nine times) is larger than the specific number of times (for example, one time), the fifth variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table D) and the sixth variation pattern among the plurality of types of variation patterns are used. It is possible to select a seventh variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table A) whose variation time is relatively longer than when at least one of the variation patterns (for example, variation pattern table C) is selected. preferable.

According to the gaming machine described in (7) above, various variations can be given to the switching of the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern is triggered by an unpredictable result such as the derivation of a specific result (for example, a specific small hit). Since it can be switched, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

(8) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
The plurality of specific gaming states (for example, A time saving gaming states corresponding to time saving type modes 1 to 6) include a third specific gaming state (for example, A time saving gaming state corresponding to time saving type mode 3).
The third specific gaming state includes the first specific gaming state (for example, A time saving game state time saving corresponding to time saving type mode 1) and the second specific gaming state (for example, A time saving game corresponding to time saving type mode 2). In a specific gaming state different from the state), a fifth specific number of times (for example, 100 times), which is a number larger than the second specific number of times (for example, 10 times), is set as the specific number of times.
When the symbol control means is controlled to the third specific gaming state, the symbol control means can be selected in the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table A) that can be selected in the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. It is preferable that an eighth variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table C) having a relatively shorter variation time than any of the variation patterns (for example, variation pattern table A and variation pattern table B) can be selected.

According to the gaming machine described in (8) above, the number of times of derivation of a specific result that can trigger the termination of the specific gaming state is relatively large as compared with the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. When controlled to the third specific gaming state, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation time is shorter than that of either the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, so that the progress of the game can be accelerated, which is faster. It is possible to increase the possibility of being controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) at a stage, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

(9) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
When the symbol control means is controlled to the third specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving game state corresponding to the time saving type mode 3), the number of times the specific result (for example, the specific small hit) is derived. Regardless of the variation pattern that can be selected in the first specific gaming state (for example, A time saving game state time saving corresponding to the time saving type mode 1) and the second specific gaming state (for example, A corresponding to the time saving type mode 2). It is preferable that the eighth specific variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table C) having a shorter variation time than any of the variation patterns that can be selected in the time-saving gaming state) can be selected.

According to the gaming machine of (9) above, in the third specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 3), the specific result (for example, the specific small hit) is derived regardless of the number of times. , Eighth specific variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table C) can be selected. That is, in the third specific gaming state, regardless of the number of times a specific result (for example, a specific small hit) is derived, the first specific gaming state (for example, the time saving game state A corresponding to the time saving type mode 1) is always used. And since it is possible to select a variation pattern in which the variation time is shorter than that of the second specific gaming state (for example, the A time reduction gaming state corresponding to the time reduction type mode 2), it is possible to give a special feeling to the player, and by extension, the second. 3 It is possible to make the player understand that the specific gaming state is controlled, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

(10) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
A predetermined counting means (for example, main CPU 2201) capable of counting the number of times the special result (for example, big hit, V small hit) is derived, and
A specific counting means (for example, main CPU 2201) capable of counting the number of times the specific result (for example, a specific small hit) is derived is provided.
The symbol control means is controlled to a count number based on the predetermined counting means (for example, a count number according to S2270) and a specific gaming state as fluctuation patterns selected in the specific gaming state. It is preferable to control so as to select one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on the number of counts by the specific counting means (for example, the number of counts by S2242).

According to the gaming machine described in (10) above, a variation pattern is based on the number of times a special result (for example, a big hit or a V small hit) is derived and the number of times a specific result (for example, a specific small hit) is derived. Is selected, it is possible to have variations by switching the fluctuation pattern, and it is possible to further enhance the interest.

(11) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
The specific result includes at least a first specific result (for example, specific small hit A) and a second specific result different from the first specific result (for example, specific small hit B).
The symbol control means is controlled to the sixth specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving game state corresponding to the time saving type mode 7 and the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 8) among the plurality of types of specific gaming states. When the first specific result (for example, the specific small hit B in the case of the A time saving game state corresponding to the time saving type mode 7 and the specific small hit A in the case of the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 8) is obtained. When derived, the selected variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table B1) is not switched, while the second specific result (for example, time saving type mode) is controlled when the sixth specific gaming state is controlled. The type of the variation pattern selected when the specific small hit A in the case of the A time saving game state corresponding to 7 and the specific small hit B) in the case of the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 8 are derived. Is preferably switchable to a different type (for example, the variable pattern table B1 can be switched to the variable pattern table A1).

According to the gaming machine described in (11) above, since a plurality of types of specific results (for example, specific small hits) that can trigger the switching of the fluctuation pattern and the termination of the specific gaming state are provided, the interest of the game in the specific gaming state is provided. Can be further enhanced.

(12) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
The specific result includes at least a first specific result (for example, specific small hit A) and a second specific result different from the first specific result (for example, specific small hit B).
A specific first counting means (for example, a main CPU 2201 capable of executing the process of S2352) capable of counting that the first specific result has been derived, and
A specific second counting means (for example, a main CPU 2201 capable of executing the process of S2357) capable of counting that the second specific result has been derived is provided.
The specific gaming state includes the first specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 1) and the second specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 2). Includes a different seventh specific gaming state (eg, A time saving game state corresponding to time saving type mode 9 and A time saving gaming state corresponding to time saving type mode 10).
In the specific game state control means, the first specific result (for example, the specific small hit A) is the sixth specific number of times (for example, 5 times in the case of the A time saving game state corresponding to the time saving type mode 9 and the time saving type mode 10). It was derived (twice in the case of the A time saving game state corresponding to), and the second specific result (for example, the specific small hit B) is the seventh specific number of times (for example, A time saving corresponding to the time saving type mode 9). Derived 10 times in the case of a game state, 4 times in the case of A time-saving game state corresponding to the time-saving type mode 10), and if both are satisfied, the 7th gaming state (for example, corresponding to the time-saving type mode 9) is supported. It is possible to end the A time saving game state (A time saving game state corresponding to the time saving type mode 10).
The symbol control means can select the type of the variation pattern in the seventh specific gaming state based on the combination of the count number of the specific first counting means and the count number of the specific second counting means (for example,). In the case of the A time saving game state corresponding to the time saving type mode 9, the variation pattern table B1 can be selected by deriving the specific small hit A 2 times and deriving the specific small hit B 4 times, and the specific small hit A 4 times is derived and the specific small hit is derived. The variation pattern table A1 can be selected by deriving B8 times. In the case of the A time saving game state corresponding to the time saving type mode 10, the variation pattern table A1 can be selected by deriving the specific small hit A1 time and deriving the specific small hit B2 times.) Is preferable.

According to the gaming machine described in (12) above, based on the combination of the number of times the first specific result (for example, the specific small hit A) is derived and the number of times the second specific result (for example, the specific small hit B) is derived. Since the type of variation pattern can be selected, the player can pay attention to the derivation of the first specific result and the derivation of the second specific result, and it becomes possible to further enhance the interest.

(13) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
Further provided with an effect control means (for example, sub CPU 2301) capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The effect control means is
When switching from the variation pattern selected by the symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 2201) to another variation pattern is performed, the selected variation pattern may be any of the plurality of types of variation patterns. , It is preferable that the notification effect indicating that the fluctuation pattern is switched can be executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (13) above, regardless of whether the selected variation pattern is any of a plurality of types of variation patterns, it is possible to execute a notification effect indicating that the variation patterns are switched. , It is possible to enhance the interest.

(14) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
It is preferable that the notification effect is at least partly in common with the effect executed when the variation pattern is not switched.

According to the gaming machine described in (14) above, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the switching of the fluctuation pattern while suppressing the control load, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

In the gaming machines (1) to (14) above, unless otherwise specified, the first specific gaming state to the seventh specific gaming state do not have to be different specific gaming states and can be matched. It may be in the same specific gaming state within the range. Similarly, in the gaming machines (1) to (14), the first variation pattern to the eighth variation pattern do not need to be different variation patterns (for example, variation pattern table) unless otherwise specified. , The same fluctuation pattern may be used as long as matching can be achieved. Similarly, in the above-mentioned gaming machines (1) to (14), the first specific number of times to the seventh specific number of times do not have to be different times, and are the same as long as matching can be achieved, unless otherwise specified. It may be the number of times.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a configuration of a part of the configuration described in (1) above and the configuration described in (2) to (14) above, to the extent that matching can be achieved. Any combination of all configurations may be used. For example, the gaming machine described in (1) above may not have the configuration described in (2) above, but may have a part or all of the configurations described in (3) above. can.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest.

This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above to the right in the front direction. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above to the right in the forward direction. This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally upward to the right in the rear direction. This is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the game flow of a pachinko machine. This is an example of a game state transition diagram showing a transition of a game state. This is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. (A) is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine, and (B) is an example of a table showing an idea related to the determination of the decorative symbol stop mode in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit type determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a modification of the hit type determination table shown in FIG. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a normal symbol in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a type determination table for a normal symbol in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of ordinary symbols in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (2) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (3) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (4) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start-up initial setting process in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the electric power failure processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving management processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counter update processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving counter update processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ceiling counter update processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counter determination processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition determination processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving setting process in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ordinary symbol control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the external masqueradable interrupt processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting confirmation processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st normal game pre-processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd normal game pre-processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start opening winning detection processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-control circuit processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a sub-variation effect pattern determination table in the normal gaming state of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead type effect pattern determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of hit) in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a flowchart showing a look-ahead effect pattern determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern in the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a figure which shows the process of changing the jackpot system look-ahead effect form. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern in the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a figure which shows the process of changing the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern in the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a figure which shows the process which the hold image changes from the common hit system look-ahead effect form to the big hit system look-ahead effect form. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern in the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a figure which shows the process which the hold image changes from the exclusive common hit system look-ahead effect form to the big hit system look-ahead effect form. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern in the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a figure which shows the process which the hold image changes from the exclusive common hit system look-ahead effect form to the time saving hit system look-ahead effect form. It is a table which shows an example of the output condition of the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the timing chart of the signal of "Prize ball information 1" among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a table which shows an example of the outline of the error in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. In the first pachinko gaming machine, it is a table which shows an example of the output condition of the signal which is output to the outside of the machine according to the gaming state. This is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit type determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a low start in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a high start in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in the 2nd pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the front view which shows the appearance of the game board unit in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit type determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the V winning device opening control processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during the execution of the big hit game control process of the extended example, and (A) the opening mode of the specific area. Is the first open mode, (B) the open mode of the specific region is the second open mode, and (C) the open mode of the specific region is the third open mode. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the extended example. This is an example of the jackpot type determination table in the extended example. Another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during the execution of the big hit game control process of the extended example, and is (A) another example of the specific area. It is a figure which shows the case where the opening mode is the 1st opening mode, and (B) the case where the opening mode of a specific region is the 2nd opening mode. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit type determination table in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a table which shows an example of the time saving end condition in the 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the variation pattern table of the special symbol referred to in the normal gaming state in the 4th pachinko gaming machine. In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, it is an example of the variation pattern table of the special symbol referred to in the A time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol referred to in the B time saving gaming state in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, it is a table which shows the relationship between the gaming mode and the internal gaming state. This is an example of a time chart showing the flow of games in the normal mode in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a time chart showing the flow of games in the first chance mode in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, it is an example of a time chart showing the flow of the game in the first rotation of the second chance mode. In the second chance mode of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, it is an example of a time chart showing the flow of the game in the second special symbol game of the remaining reserved portion of the second chance mode. This is an example of a time chart showing the flow of the game in the first rotation of the premium chance mode in the second chance mode of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a time chart showing the flow of games in the first bliss mode in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a time chart showing the flow of games in the second bliss mode in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the first embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit type determination table in the first embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table change condition table in the first embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table (normal table) of a special symbol referred to in the normal gaming state in the first embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol that can be referred to in the A time saving gaming state in the first embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol that can be referred to in the A time saving gaming state in the first embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol that can be referred to in the A time saving gaming state in the first embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol that can be referred to in the A time saving gaming state in the first embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. In the first embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine, it is a figure which shows an example of the notification effect executed by the sub CPU in the display area of a display device. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in 1st Example of the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the specific variation pattern determination processing in 1st Example of the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving management processing in 1st Example of the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern table change condition setting process in 1st Example of the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving continuation determination processing in 1st Example of the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation PTTB change condition management process in 1st Example of the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the transition of the reference variable PTTB in the A time saving gaming state in 1st Example of the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the transition of the variable PTTB referred to in the A time saving gaming state in 2nd Example of the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing in 2nd Example of the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving management processing in 2nd Embodiment of the 5th pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the second embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit type determination table in the second embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table change condition table in the second embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table (normal table 1) of a special symbol referred to in the normal gaming state in the second embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol that can be referred to in the A time saving gaming state in the second embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol that can be referred to in the A time saving gaming state in the second embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol that can be referred to in the A time saving gaming state in the second embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in 2nd Embodiment of the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the specific variation pattern determination processing in 2nd Example of the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving management processing in 2nd Embodiment of the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern table change condition setting process in 2nd Example of the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving continuation determination processing in 2nd Embodiment of the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation PTTB change condition management process in 2nd Example of the 5th pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the transition of the variable PTTB referred to in the A time saving gaming state in 2nd Example of the 5th pachinko gaming machine.

As an example of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko gaming machine is in the front direction, the back side of the pachinko gaming machine is in the rear direction, and the left side when the pachinko gaming machine is viewed from the front is in the left direction. The right side when the machine is viewed from the front is to the right, the upper side of the pachinko machine is upward, the lower side of the pachinko machine is downward, and the clockwise direction when the pachinko machine is viewed from the front is clockwise. , And vice versa, the counterclockwise direction is defined as the counterclockwise direction.

The first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine are both so-called one-type pachinko gaming machines called digital pachinko machines. Of these, the first pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, and only one of them is variably displayed. On the other hand, the second pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

Further, the third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko machine called a one-kind two-kind mixer, which is a mixture of a so-called one-kind type gaming machine called a digital pachi and a two-kind type gaming machine called a wing mono. It is a gaming machine. The third pachinko gaming machine described in this specification also has the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but in this specification, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed in parallel. An example will be described in which only one of them is variably displayed without any problem. However, this does not mean that the pachinko gaming machine, which is a type 1 and type 2 mixer in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, is excluded.

In this specification, when the term "special symbol" is simply referred to, it means both the first special symbol and the second special symbol unless otherwise specified. Similarly, when the term "special symbol game" is simply referred to, it means both the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game (the definition of the special symbol game will be described later) unless otherwise specified.

Further, the "variable display" as used in the present specification is a concept including both "variable display" in which the symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner and "stop display" in which the symbol is stopped and displayed. Yes, the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is referred to as one "variable display". When the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed (hereinafter, also referred to as "derivative"), the result of the special symbol hit determination process (hereinafter, also referred to as "special symbol lottery") described later or the normal symbol hit determination is made. The result of the process (hereinafter, also referred to as "ordinary symbol lottery") is confirmed. In addition, although the symbol appears to be stopped, the symbol may be displayed in a mode in which the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol or the hit determination process of the normal symbol is not determined (for example, a temporarily stopped mode). However, such an embodiment is included in the above variation display. Even when the symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, since the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol or the hit determination process of the normal symbol is not fixed at this point, the symbol can be displayed in a variable manner again.

Further, in this specification, in describing the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine, the number of special symbols is two (first special symbol, second special). The case of (design) will be described as an example. However, the number of special symbols may be one for the first pachinko gaming machine and the third pachinko gaming machine.

[1. First pachinko game machine]
First, the first pachinko gaming machine will be described.

As a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variable. When the display is suspended, for example, a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "priority variable machine") in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is prioritized over the starting condition of the first special symbol and the first. There is a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "sequentially variable machine") in which the starting conditions are satisfied in the order of winning, including the starting port and the second starting port.

In the priority variable machine, the starting conditions of the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is in the variable display, the jackpot game state, etc., and the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended. It is established when all certain requirements are satisfied, such as the fact that the first special symbol is not displayed and the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended. Further, in the priority variable machine, the starting conditions of the second special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being variablely displayed, that the jackpot game state is not present, and that the second special symbol is variable. It is established when all certain requirements such as display is suspended.

Further, in the sequentially variable machine, the starting conditions of the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being variablely displayed, that the jackpot game state is not present, and that the first special symbol is variablely displayed. It is established when at least all of the fact that it is held and that the earliest hold is the hold of the variable display of the first special symbol are satisfied. Further, in the sequentially variable machine, the starting conditions of the second special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is in variable display, that the jackpot game state is not present, and that the second special symbol is variablely displayed. It is established when at least all of the fact that it is held and that the earliest hold is the hold of the variable display of the second special symbol are satisfied.

In the following, a priority variable machine will be described as an example.

[1-1. Appearance composition]
FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above to the right in the front direction. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally upward to the right in the rear direction.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a dish unit 5, a launching device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), and a payout unit. 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a gaming board unit 10 (see FIG. 2), and the like are provided. Further, an LED unit 160 (see FIG. 2) is provided at the lower right of the game board unit 10. Here, the outer frame 2, the base door 3, the glass door 4, the dish unit 5, the launching device 6, the display device 7, the payout unit 8 and the board unit 9 will be briefly described, and the game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be described. Details will be described later. The above parentheses indicate a reference drawing for a configuration (not shown in FIG. 1).

(Outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to the island equipment of the amusement park. A hinge (without reference numeral) is provided on the front side of, for example, the left end portion of the outer frame 2, and the base door 3 is pivotally supported by the hinge. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward with respect to the outer frame 2 with the hinge as the axis.

The outer frame 2 supports a large number of members such as the payout unit 8, the board unit 9, the display device 7, the game board unit 10, the glass door 4, and the dish unit 5, which will be described later, via the base door 3. High strength is required. On the other hand, for the purpose of enhancing the effect of production, for example, the display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and the game board unit 10 are required to be increased in size. Therefore, by forming the outer frame 2 with, for example, a thin metal plate, it is possible to maintain high strength while increasing the size of the display device 7 and the game board unit 10. In particular, if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum, it is possible to reduce the weight.

(Base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a payout unit 8 and a board unit 9 attached to the back surface side, and supports them.

The game board unit 10 is fitted on the surface side of the base door 3. Further, for example, on the front side of the left end portion of the base door 3, hinges (without reference numerals) are provided at the upper end portion, the middle portion below the substantially central portion in the vertical direction, and the lower end portion, respectively, and the upper end portion is provided. The glass door 4 is pivotally supported by the hinges of the middle portion and the middle portion, and the dish unit 5 is pivotally supported by the hinges of the middle portion and the lower end portion, respectively. By doing so, the glass door 4 and the dish unit 5 can be rotated forward integrally or individually with respect to the base door 3 with the hinge as the axis.

Further, the launcher 6 is fixedly attached to, for example, the lower right side of the surface side of the base door 3, and the speaker 32 (see FIG. 2) is fixedly attached to each of the left and right sides of the upper side, for example. There is. From the speaker 32, for example, voice effects such as characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, voice notifications, effect sounds such as error notification, and the like are output.

Further, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the side of the base door 3 opposite to the hinge (that is, the right end portion). This locking device has a function of locking the base door 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 with respect to the base door 3.

(Glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member having an opening 41 formed therein. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear surface side. When the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later) formed in the game board unit 10 and the protective glass 43 face each other. In this way, the game area 105 can be visually recognized from the front in a state where the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, and the game ball flowing down the game area 105 is prevented from jumping forward. be able to.

The protective glass 43 may be attached by attaching a plurality of (for example, two) pieces of glass with a gap between them, or a plurality of pieces of glass are unitized so as to have a gap with each other. You may. Further, when it is unitized, for example, a light guide plate may be provided between the glasses. The protective glass 43 is not limited to glass, and may be made of, for example, a transparent resin.

Further, at the lower part of the glass door 4, an operation unit 66 that can be operated by, for example, a player is provided in order to receive the provision of the game information providing service (for example, "Unimemo (registered trademark)"). The operation unit 66 can also function as an operation unit that can be operated by a game hall manager or the like on the hall menu screen.

Further, a speaker cover 45 arranged in front of the speaker 32 described above is provided on the upper portion of the glass door 4. Further, a large number of LED groups 46 used for light emission effect and the like are arranged on the peripheral edge of the opening 41 of the glass door 4, and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 46. Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 46 shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for convenience, it will be described as an LED group 46. The LED group 46 is, for example, a light emitting means for an effect such as notification by light or an effect of emitting light in various variations, but is not limited to the LED as long as such an effect of light emission can be executed, for example, a liquid crystal display, a lamp, or the like. May be.

(Dish unit)
The plate unit 5 is a unitization of the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 52. The dish unit 5 is located in the lower front part of the base door 3 and below the glass door 4. As described above, the plate unit 5 is configured to be able to be rotated and opened / closed with respect to the base door 3 so that, for example, when a ball jam occurs, a clerk at the amusement park or the like can clear the ball jam. The plate unit 5 does not necessarily have to be provided with the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 52, respectively, and may be configured as an integrated plate.

The upper plate 51 is provided so that the game balls can be stored, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 51 are launched from the launching device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The upper plate 51 is provided with a payout port 53, an effect button 54, and the like. The rented game balls and the game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout port 53 to the upper plate 51. The effect button 54 is a so-called "CHANGE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 54 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined effect function corresponds to, for example, a function of vibrating or protruding upward based on the result of a hit determination process of a special symbol. Further, the function of the operation unit 66 may also be used.

The lower plate 52 is mainly for storing the game balls overflowing from the upper plate 51. The lower plate 52 is provided with a payout outlet 55 communicating with the upper plate 51, and the game ball overflowing from the upper plate 51 is paid out from the payout outlet 55 to the lower plate 52.

An opening (without reference numeral) that can be opened and closed by the operation of the player is formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 52. When the opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 52 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower plate 52 can be transferred to the ball box placed below the lower plate 52. In addition, when the so-called each machine counting system is provided in each machine, not only the ball box is not required, but also the game balls counted by each machine counting system are stored, and the stored game balls are stored again. It can also be used for games.

(Launcher)
The launching device 6 is for launching the game ball stored in the upper plate 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The launcher 6 is located at the lower right front of the base door 3 and at the lower right of the dish unit 5. The launch device 6 includes a panel body 61, a drive device (not shown), and a launch handle 62.

The panel body 61 is provided so that the dish unit 5 and the launching device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 are integrated in appearance when the dish unit 5 is closed with respect to the base door 3.

The firing handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 61. The drive device is arranged on the back surface side of the panel body 61, and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). When the launch handle 62 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched by the operation of the drive device. When operating the firing handle 62, the larger the amount of clockwise rotation (operation amount), the stronger the firing strength of the game ball.

The game ball launched from the launcher 6 arranged at the lower right of the plate unit 5 rolls in an arc shape along the guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described later) via the launch rail (not shown) for the game. It is launched into region 105 (see FIG. 4 below). The position of the launching device 6 is not limited to the lower right of the dish unit 5, and may be the lower left of the dish unit 5. In this case, the above-mentioned launch rail becomes unnecessary, the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively used, and the versatility can be enhanced.

(Display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various effect images related to the game, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100. The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device composed of electroluminescence, or the like, or one that projects an image using a projection device such as a projector. It may be. In the display area of the display device 7, for example, an identification symbol for effect (for example, a decorative symbol) is variably displayed to display the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, or the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is displayed. An effect image, an effect image during a jackpot game state, a demo effect image, an effect image showing the pending status of variable display of a special symbol, and the like are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10, but if the display area of the display device 7 is arranged so as to face the opening of the game panel 100, the display device 7 is attached to the base door 3. It may be attached.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided for displaying the above-mentioned various effect images, but a plurality of (for example, two) display devices are provided and the plurality of display devices are used for the effect. The image may be displayed.

(Payout unit)
The payout unit 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3, and is composed of a ball passage 81, a payout device 82, and the like. A game ball is supplied to the ball passage 81 from the storage tank 80 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). A game ball is supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). When the payout condition is satisfied, the payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number of game balls among the game balls supplied from the storage tank 80 to the ball passage 81 to, for example, the upper plate 51. Further, a power switch 95 is provided on the back side of the payout unit 8 as shown in FIG.

(Board unit)
The board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3. Various control boards and the like are provided on the board unit 9.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 91 on which the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted, and the sub control on which the sub control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted. The board 92, the payout / launch control board 93 on which the payout / launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described later) for controlling the payout / launch of the game ball is mounted, and the power supply circuit 450 for supplying power (see the figure below). A power supply board or the like on which (see 6) is mounted is provided on the board unit 9.

In FIG. 3, for convenience, the main control board 91, the sub control board 92, the payout / emission control board 93, and the power supply board 94 are shown as reference numerals, but all of these boards are housed in the board case. ing.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (a board provided with one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs on one board). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, all or part of the display control circuit 304, the voice control circuit 305, the LED control circuit 306, and the accessory control circuit 307 (all of which are described later with reference to FIG. 6), which will be described later, are separate boards. Therefore, the sub control board 92 may be composed of a plurality of boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
FIG. 4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit 10 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. On the front side surface of the game board unit 10, a game area 105 in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, a guide rail 110, and a substantially center of the game area 105. The center accessory 115, the first starting port 120, the general winning opening 122, the passing gate unit 125, the special electric accessory unit 130, the second starting port 140, and the ordinary electric accessory unit are arranged in the section. It includes a 145, an LED unit 160, an out port 178, and a back unit (not shown) arranged behind the game board unit 10. As described above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(Game panel)
The game panel 100 is formed with an opening (without reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 7. Further, a guide rail 110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 100, and game nails (without reference numerals) and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 110 toward the game area 105, collides with a game nail or the like, and changes the direction of travel toward the lower part of the game area 105. And flow down.

Further, behind the game panel 100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the effect of the effect. The game panel 100 is made of a transparent resin so that the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 100 may be made of a transparent member, or for example, only a portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front may be made of the transparent member. Further, the game panel 100 may be made of a member having no transparent portion (for example, wooden), and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the effect of the effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 100 is made of a transparent resin so that the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. However, the game panel 100 may be entirely transparent or only a part thereof may be transparent. ..

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither of which has a reference reference numeral). The game area 105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIG. 6 described later) to the upper part of the game area 105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 115 is configured to be fitted into the opening (without reference numeral) of the game panel 100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 116 above. The game ball launched toward the game area 105 is distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

In this first pachinko gaming machine, in the gaming area 105, the area on the left side of the center accessory 115 is referred to as the left side area 106, and the area on the right side of the center accessory 115 is referred to as the right side area 107. The definitions of the left side region and the right side region are the same for the second pachinko gaming machine and the third pachinko gaming machine, which will be described later.

The game ball launched toward the game area 105 by the launching device 6 flows down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107. The game ball flowing down the left side region 106 or the right side area 107 flows downward while changing the traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 100. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side region 106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see FIG. 1) is large, the launched game ball flows down the right region 107.

In this specification, as an operation mode (striking method) of the launching handle 62, a striking method of launching a game ball so as to flow down the left side region 106 is referred to as “left-handed striking”, and the launching method is to flow down the right side region 107. The method of firing a game ball is called "right-handed". In this way, it is possible for the player to hit the game ball toward the left side area 106 or the right side area 107.

Further, in the center accessory 115, a warp entrance 117 is formed on the outer peripheral edge portion on the left side so that a game ball flowing down the left side region 106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 117 is configured to be able to be guided to the stage 118 formed in the center accessory 115. The stage 118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 7. The stage 118 may be formed of a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 119 through which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 118 substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 119 is discharged directly above the first starting port 120. It is configured in. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 119 has a higher probability of being the first start than the game ball that has not entered the warp entrance 117 or the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 117 but has not entered the chance entrance 119. It is designed to win (pass) the mouth 120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win a prize (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins in the first starting port 120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later). It should be noted that the game ball hit to the right may be able to win a prize in the first starting port 120. Further, in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting port 120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, per first special symbol). Random values for judgment, symbol random values of the first special symbol, random values for reach judgment of the first special symbol, and various random values such as random values for effect selection of the first special symbol) are extracted and extracted. Various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition of the first special symbol (also referred to as "variation start condition of the first special symbol" in this specification) is satisfied, the various stored data are subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is referred to as the starting winning of the first special symbol, and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the random value for determination per first special symbol, the first). The symbol random value of the special symbol, the reach determination random value of the first special symbol, and various random values such as the effect selection random value of the first special symbol) are referred to as the start information of the first special symbol. Further, storing the start information of the first special symbol until the start condition is satisfied is referred to as hold. The same applies to the second special symbol.

(General winning opening)
A plurality of general winning openings 122 are arranged in the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, and are arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win a prize (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). Has been done. When a game ball wins in any of the plurality of general winning openings 122, it is detected by the general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later), for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 122 is played. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of balls is not limited to four.

Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 122 is arranged so that the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 122 is replaced with the above general winning opening 122. Alternatively, it may be provided with a general winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can be won.

(Passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 125 is arranged in the right side region 107, and is a passage gate 126 configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch for detecting the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126. It is a unit body integrated with 127 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 126 is detected by the passing gate switch 127, various data related to the normal symbol (for example, a random value for determining the normal symbol hit) is extracted, and the extracted various data are a predetermined number. Up to (for example, up to 4) are stored. The various stored data are usually used for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passing gate switch 127 detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 126, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 125 may be arranged in the left side region 106 in place of or in addition to the right side region 107.

In this specification, the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 126 is referred to as a starting passage, and various data related to the ordinary symbol extracted by the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 126 (for example, a random value for determining a normal symbol hit, etc.). ) Is usually referred to as the start information of the symbol. Further, storing the start information of the normal symbol until the start condition is satisfied is referred to as hold.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 130 integrates the large winning opening 131, the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of the game ball to the large winning opening 131, and the special electric accessory 133. It is a unit body that has become. The special electric accessory unit 130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 125 in the right side region 107.

The large winning opening 131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned large winning opening 131, a large winning opening in which a left-handed game ball can win is placed, or a game is played at the upper part of the center accessory 115. A large winning opening where the ball can win may be arranged.

Further, the big winning opening 131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be won (passed) when controlled to the big hit game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. It is a winning opening. When the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects that a game ball has won a prize in the large prize opening 131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric accessory 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 135 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 134. The special electric accessory 133, that is, the shutter 134 for special electric power, can win (pass) the game ball to the big winning opening 131 or is easily opened, and cannot win (pass) the game ball to the big winning opening 131. Or it is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state. In the big hit game state, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the big hit game state is a game state in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big prize opening 131 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. Is.

(2nd starting port)
The second starting port 140 is arranged in the left side region 106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting port 120). However, in the second starting port 140, it is difficult or impossible to win a left-handed game ball, for example, due to a game nail or the like, and the second starting port 140 allows the right-handed game ball to win a prize. It is configured to be guided to the vicinity of. However, it is not essential that the second starting port 140 has such a configuration, and may be provided in, for example, the right side region 107. Further, the second starting port 140 may be configured so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is detected by the second starting port switch 141 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the second special symbol (for example, per second special symbol). Random values for judgment, symbol random values of the second special symbol, random values for reach judgment of the second special symbol, and various random values such as random values for effect selection of the second special symbol) are extracted and extracted. Various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition of the second special symbol (also referred to as "variation start condition of the second special symbol" in this specification) is satisfied, the various stored data are subjected to the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is not limited to this.

(Ordinary electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 145 is arranged in the left side region 106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting port 120), and when the game balls win (pass), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. It is a unit body that integrates a winning opening, a switch for detecting the winning of a game ball to the winning opening, and an ordinary electric accessory 146. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 141.

The ordinary electric accessory 146 includes, for example, a movable member 147 for electric power, which is a so-called electric chew, and a solenoid for general electric use 148 (see FIG. 6 described later) for operating the movable member for general electric power. .. The ordinary electric accessory 146, that is, the movable member 147 for general electric use, is in an open state in which the game ball can be won (passed) to the second starting port 140 or is easily opened, and the game ball cannot be won in the second starting port 140. It is configured to be able to transition to a possible or difficult closed state. The movable member 147 for general electric power includes a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, and the like.

(Out mouth)
The out opening 178 wins any of various winning openings (for example, first starting opening 120, second starting opening 140, large winning opening 131, general winning opening 122, etc.) fired toward the game area 105. The purpose is to eject the missing game ball to the outside of the machine. The out port 178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 105 so that both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning openings 122, so that the game ball flowing down the game area 105 is discharged to the outside of the machine. You may do it.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 10 and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 100. This back unit includes a production accessory group 58 (see FIG. 6 described later) such as a movable accessory controlled by the sub control circuit 300. The effect group 58 is arranged, for example, around the display area of the display device 7. The effect accessory component members constituting at least one or more of the effect effect group 58 function as the effect effect accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is located at the lower right of the game board unit 10 and outside the game area 105 (see, for example, FIG. 4). The LED unit 160 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated.

FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display unit 161, a normal symbol hold display unit 162, a first special symbol display unit 163, a second special symbol display unit 164, and a first special symbol hold display unit. A unit 165, a second special symbol hold display unit 166, a probability change notification display unit 167, and a time saving notification display unit 168 are provided.

(Ordinary pattern display)
The normal symbol display unit 161 displays the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol, and includes the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the normal symbol") is satisfied, the variable display of the normal symbol in which the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b are alternately turned on and off is started. To. When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is a normal symbol hit, the combination of turning on / off the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b is a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a is turned on and the normal symbol display LED 161b is turned off. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is lost, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a is turned off and the normal symbol display LED 161b is turned on. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b showing the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined to operate the normal electric accessory 146, the movable member 147 for general electric power is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port 140 is driven. It becomes easy to win (pass) the game ball to.

(Holding display for ordinary patterns)
The hold display unit 162 for a normal symbol displays the start information of the normal symbol, that is, the number of variable displays of the normal symbol held (hereinafter referred to as "the number of hold of the normal symbol") when the variable display is held. It is provided with hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for ordinary symbols. The above-mentioned "variable display of the normal symbol is suspended" means that the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126 is detected and various data related to the normal symbol (for example, a random value for determining the normal symbol hit) is extracted. It is the state from the time when the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied to the time when the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied. The start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied when at least all of the conditions that the normal symbol is not in the variable display and that the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended are satisfied.

The hold display unit 162 for a normal symbol displays the number of holds for the variable display of the normal symbol by the combination of turning on / off the hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for the normal symbol. For example, when the number of hold of the normal symbol is one, the hold display LED 162a for the normal symbol is turned on and the hold display LED 162b for the normal symbol is turned off. Further, when the number of reserved symbols is two, both the reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for ordinary symbols are lit. Further, when the number of hold of the normal symbol is 3, the hold display LED 162a for the normal symbol blinks and the hold display LED 162b for the normal symbol lights up. Further, when the number of reserved symbols is 4, both the reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for ordinary symbols blink. However, the display mode of the hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for the normal symbol indicating the number of hold of the normal symbol is not limited to this.

(Special pattern display section)
The special symbol display unit displays the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, and includes a first special symbol display unit 163 and a second special symbol display unit 164. The first special symbol display unit 163 includes, for example, a first special symbol display LED group including eight LEDs 163a to 163h. Similarly, the second special symbol display unit 164 also includes a second special symbol display LED group including, for example, eight LEDs 164a to 164h.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the first special symbol") is satisfied, all of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h constituting the first special symbol display unit 163 are satisfied. Alternatively, the variable display of the first special symbol is started, in which a part of the first special symbol is repeatedly turned on and off alternately or mutually. When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the combination of turning on / off of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h constituting the first special symbol display unit 163 is a specific stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition to the big hit game state is determined.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the second special symbol") is satisfied, all of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h constituting the second special symbol display unit 164 are satisfied. Alternatively, the variable display of the second special symbol, in which a part of the pattern is alternately or mutually turned on and off, is started. When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the combination of turning on / off of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h constituting the second special symbol display unit 164 is a specific stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition to the big hit game state is determined.

(Holding display for special patterns)
When the start information of the special symbol, that is, the variable display is suspended, the reserved display unit for the special symbol displays the number of variable displays of the reserved special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "the number of reserved special symbols"). It includes a first special symbol hold display unit 165 and a second special symbol hold display unit 166.

The hold display unit 165 for the first special symbol displays the number of hold of the first special symbol when the variable display of the first special symbol is held, and the hold display LED 165a, 165b for the first special symbol. To prepare for. "The variable display of the first special symbol is suspended" means that after the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected and the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, the first The state until the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied.

The hold display unit 165 for the first special symbol displays the number of hold of the variable display of the first special symbol by the combination of turning on / off the hold display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol. For example, when the number of hold of the first special symbol is one, the hold display LED 165a for the first special symbol is turned on and the hold display LED 165b for the first special symbol is turned off. Further, when the number of holdings of the first special symbol is two, both the holding display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol are lit. When the number of hold of the first special symbol is 3, the hold display LED 165a for the first special symbol blinks and the hold display LED 165b for the first special symbol lights up. Further, when the number of hold of the first special symbol is 4, both the hold display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol blink. However, the display mode of the hold display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol indicating the number of hold of the first special symbol is not limited to this.

The second special symbol hold display unit 166 displays the number of holds of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is held, and the second special symbol hold display LED 166a, 166b. To prepare for. "The variable display of the second special symbol is suspended" means that after the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is detected and the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, the second is The state until the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied.

The hold display unit 166 for the second special symbol displays the number of holds for the variable display of the second special symbol by the combination of turning on / off the hold display LEDs 166a and 166b for the second special symbol. For example, when the number of holdings of the second special symbol is one, the holding display LED 166a for the second special symbol is turned on and the holding display LED 166b for the second special symbol is turned off. When the number of reserved second special symbols is two, both the reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b for the second special symbol are lit. When the number of holdings of the second special symbol is 3, the holding display LED 166a for the second special symbol blinks and the holding display LED 166b for the second special symbol lights up. Further, when the number of reserved second special symbols is four, both the reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b for the second special symbol blink. However, the display mode of the second special symbol hold display LEDs 166a and 166b indicating the number of hold of the second special symbol is not limited to this.

(Display unit for probability change notification)
The probability change notification display unit 167 can be turned on during execution of the probability change control described later, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

The probabilistic change notification display unit 167 may be turned on while the probabilistic change control is being executed. However, for example, the probabilistic change control may be turned off so that it cannot be visually recognized that the probabilistic change control is being executed. You may keep it secret that it is running.

However, when the power is cut off during the execution of the probabilistic control, the data indicating that the probabilistic control is being executed is not lost due to the function of the backup capacitor 207 described later. Therefore, when the power is cut off during the execution of the probability change control and then the power is turned on, the probability change notification display unit 167 is turned on in such a manner that the probability change control is being performed.

Even if it is concealed whether or not the probability change control is being executed before the power is turned off, when the power is turned on, the probability change notification display unit 167 is turned on. By doing so, it is configured so that it can be grasped that the probability change control is being executed.

(Display unit for time saving notification)
The time saving notification display unit 168 can be turned on while the time saving control described later is being executed, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

In the present embodiment, the time-saving notification display unit 168 has, for example, a first time-saving notification display unit 168a and a second time-saving notification display unit 168b, but the number of time-saving notification display units 168 is the same. Not limited.

Further, although the details will be described later, the time-saving game state includes the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. Then, for example, the combination of lighting or extinguishing by the first time saving notification display unit 168a and the second time saving notification display unit 168b is configured so that it is possible to grasp which time saving gaming state is.

The time reduction notification display unit 168 may turn on the first time reduction notification display unit 168a and / and the second time reduction notification display unit 168b according to the time reduction control being executed. By turning on or off in a mode in which it is not possible to visually grasp whether or not it is being executed or the type of time reduction control being executed (for example, all lights are turned off, all lights are turned on, and the mode is not related to the time saving control being executed). It may be concealed so that the fact that the time reduction control is being executed and the type of the time reduction control being executed cannot be grasped by appearance. In particular, it may be possible to grasp from the appearance whether or not the time saving control is being executed, but it may be difficult to grasp which time saving control is being executed from the appearance, so execution is performed. By keeping the type of time reduction control inside secret, it is possible to enhance the interest.

However, when the power is cut off during the execution of the time reduction control, not only the data indicating that the time reduction control is being executed but also the data indicating the type of the time reduction control being executed are obtained by the function of the backup capacitor 207 described later. Does not disappear. Therefore, when the power is cut off during the execution of the time reduction control and then the power is turned on, the time reduction notification display unit 168 can be visually grasped that the time reduction control is in progress and the type of the time reduction control being executed. Turns on or off.

Before the power was turned off, the power was turned on even if the time reduction control was being executed or the type of the time reduction control being executed was hidden so that it could not be visually grasped. In this case, the time saving notification display unit 168 is configured to be turned on or off in such a manner that the time saving control is being executed and the type of the time saving control being executed can be visually grasped.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub control circuit 300 that controls the production according to the progress of the game, and payout / launch. It is composed of a control circuit 400 and a power supply circuit 450.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, processing executed when the power is turned on, processing related to the game operation, and the like, and includes a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (read / write memory), and an initial reset. It includes a circuit 204, a backup capacitor 207, and the like, and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main ROM 202, the main RAM 203, the initial reset circuit 204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 201. The main CPU 201 has a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring the operation, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the first pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 202.

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 201. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal as needed.

The backup capacitor 207 has a function of temporarily supplying electric power so that the data stored in the main RAM 203 is not lost in the event of a power failure or the like.

Further, the main control circuit 200 has an I / O port 205 connected so as to be communicable with various devices and the like, a command output port 206 connected so as to be able to output various commands to the sub control circuit 300, and the like. Also prepare.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200. For example, in the main control circuit 200, the above-mentioned normal symbol display unit 161, the normal symbol hold display unit 162, the first special symbol display unit 163, the second special symbol display unit 164, and the first special symbol hold display unit 165 , The second special symbol hold display unit 166, the probability change notification display unit 167, the time reduction notification display unit 168, the general electric solenoid 148, the special electric solenoid 135, and the like are connected. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 170, the error notification monitor 172, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 200. The main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by transmitting signals via the I / O port 205.

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data, setting values described later, and the like under the control of the main CPU 201. The performance display data is, for example, data showing the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) game balls, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 172. Further, in the error notification monitor 172, in addition to the error code, for example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine having a setting function described later, a setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing is in progress and a setting confirmation process are in progress. It is also possible to display a code or the like during setting confirmation indicating. As the setting changing code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol display (for example, a setting changing symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Further, a first start port switch 121, a second start port switch 141, a passing gate switch 127, a count switch 132, a general winning port switch 123, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 200. When these switches are detected, the detection signal is output to the main control circuit 200 via the I / O port 205.

Further, the main control circuit 200 is used when transmitting data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 186 that manages a pachinko gaming machine for the entire hall. External terminal board 184, setting key 174 operated when changing or checking the set value if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function described later, backup data stored in the main RAM 203 is stored in the game hall administrator. A backup clear switch 176 or the like that can be cleared according to the operation of is connected. In the present embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing the set value described later, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing the set value may be provided.

Further, it is preferable that the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the game hall cannot easily touch the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176. "Inside the predetermined case" is not limited to the configuration in which the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 cannot be contacted unless the case is opened, but only the corresponding parts of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 of the case are turned off. When a notch is provided and the pachinko machine is rotated from the island facility to expose the back using a key managed by the game hall manager, the game hall manager sets the key 174 and / and backs up. Those configured to be in contact with the clear switch 176 are also included.

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but are not limited to this, and are connected to, for example, the payout / emission control circuit 400 and the power supply circuit 450. It may be configured as follows. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the manager of the amusement park from easily contacting the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176.

[1-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a voice control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, an accessory control circuit 307, a command input port 308, and the like. The sub control circuit 300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 200. Although not shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the first pachinko gaming machine by the sub CPU 301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 301 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 302. In particular, the sub CPU 301 controls the game effect according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

The work RAM 303 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 301.

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 7. The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, and image data. Is provided with a D / A converter or the like that converts the data as an image signal.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command from the sub CPU 301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 7 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative symbol image data showing decorative symbols, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 7, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7. In this way, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 32. The voice control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 32. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to a voice generation command from the sub CPU 301. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 32.

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46 including the decorative LED and the like. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decorative data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decorative patterns are stored, and the like.

The bonus control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each bonus (for example, one or a plurality of bonuses in the effect group 58). The accessory control circuit 307 is a accessory data ROM in which a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern are stored for each accessory. Etc. are provided.

Further, the accessory control circuit 307 selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each accessory. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

[1-2-3. Payout / launch control circuit]
The payout / launch control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout / launch control circuit 400 launches a payout device 82 and a game ball capable of paying out the game balls. A launching device 6 capable of enabling the ball lending, a card unit 180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

Upon receiving the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82, and controls the payout device 82 to pay out the game ball. ..

A ball lending operation panel 182 is connected to the card unit 180. The ball lending operation panel 182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving ball lending and a lending / returning button (both not shown) for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored. For example, when a ball lending operation is performed by a player, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180. The payout / launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out the game ball based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 180. The operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

Further, the payout / launch control circuit 400 applies electric power to the launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount) based on the rotation operation of the launch handle 62 in the clockwise direction. It supplies and controls the launch of the game ball.

[1-2-4. Power supply circuit]
The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for the game to the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout / emission control circuit 400, and the like.

A power switch 95 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 450. The power switch 95 is turned on when supplying the power required for the pachinko gaming machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout / launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, an example of the game flow will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 7 is an example of a game flow. FIG. 8 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing a transition of the game state. The game flow shown in FIG. 7 is not a control flow but a flow that can be grasped by appearance.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is launched by a user operation of a player or the like, and when the game ball wins a prize in various winning openings (for example, the first starting opening 120 or the like), the gaming ball The payout control process is performed. The pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a hit determination process of a special symbol is executed based on a winning of a game ball to the start ports 120 and 140, and whether or not to shift to a big hit game state is determined. Further, in the ordinary symbol game, for example, a hit determination process of the ordinary symbol is executed based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126, and the ordinary electric accessory 146 is operated to win a winning opening (second in this embodiment). This is a game for determining whether or not to open the starting port 140). In this specification, the "special symbol game" may be referred to as "game", but "game" is a term used in a broad concept, and for example, an operation unit such as a normal symbol game or an effect button 54 ( For example, a game or the like for directing using (see FIG. 1) is also included in the "game".

Further, in this specification, from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the end of the variable display and the final display (derivation) of the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (more specifically, the special symbol is confirmed). (Until the passage of time) is regarded as one special symbol game. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is derived and then the game is controlled to the big hit game state, the game is considered to be one special symbol game until the end of the big hit game state. In the first pachinko gaming machine, the small hit is not included in the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, but in the pachinko gaming machine in which the small hit is included in the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the hit determination of the special symbol is included. When the result of the process is derived and then controlled to the small hit game state, one special symbol game is set until the end of the small hit game state.

When the stop display mode indicating the jackpot in the special symbol game is derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. In the big hit game state, a round game is executed in which the big winning opening 131 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, up to 30,000 msec) by the operation of the special electric accessory 133, and the possibility of winning the big winning opening 131 is relatively high. Be done.

Further, in the normal symbol game, when the stop display mode indicating the normal symbol hit is derived to the normal symbol display unit 161, the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 in this embodiment) is opened by the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 146. It becomes an open state, and for example, the possibility of winning a prize in the second starting port 140 is relatively increased.

The game that can be executed in the pachinko game is not limited to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, and a new game different from these may be able to be executed.

The outline of the game flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below.

[1-3-1. Special design game]
As shown in FIG. 7, in the special symbol game, the special symbol start winning process performed when there is a prize (passing) to the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 140, and the special symbol This includes special symbol control processing, etc., which is performed based on the establishment of the start condition of.

When the game ball is won in the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 140, the special symbol start winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data related to the special symbol (for example, special symbol hit determination random value, special symbol) from various counters for the special symbol (for example, special symbol hit determination counter, symbol determination counter, etc.) The symbol random value, the reach determination random value, and various random values such as the effect selection random value) are extracted (acquired). Each extracted random number value is reserved as start information. This special symbol start winning process is performed even while the special symbol control process is being executed.

Further, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied. When the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, the hit determination process of the special symbol for determining whether or not it is a "big hit" is performed by referring to the random value for the special symbol hit determination extracted from the special symbol hit determination counter. .. After that, the stop symbol determination process for determining the stop symbol is performed. In the stop symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the symbol determination random value extracted from the symbol determination counter of the special symbol and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, if the probability change flag is on, the probability change control is executed. In the hit determination process of the above special symbol, when the probability variation flag is off, it is determined to be a "big hit" with a relatively low probability, and when the probability variation flag is on, it is a "big hit" with a relatively high probability. Is determined. Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "big hit" is referred to as a "big hit probability".

The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute the probability change control. When the probability change flag is on, the game progresses in the game state in which the probability change control is executed (for example, the high probability time-short game state in this embodiment). On the other hand, when the probability change flag is off, the game progresses in a game state in which the probability change control is not executed (for example, a normal game state or a low probability time short game state).

Next, the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol is performed. In this process, a random value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the random value, the result of the hit determination processing of the above-mentioned special symbol, and the above-mentioned special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is referred to. (Variable display pattern) is determined. Then, the variable display control process of the special symbol is performed based on the result of the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol.

When the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern is performed next. Then, based on the result of the effect pattern determination process, a display effect such as a decorative pattern or a character effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7, a sound effect such as a sound or a sound effect output from the speaker 32, etc. The effect control process is performed. The effect control process is performed by the sub CPU 301.

Then, the variable display control process and the effect control process of the special symbol are completed, and when it is a big hit, the big hit game control process is performed. The jackpot game control process is a process executed in the jackpot game state. When the big hit game state ends, the special symbol game ends, and the game state transition control process to the non-big hit game state that is not a big hit is performed. In this case, the gaming state shifts according to the type of jackpot. For example, when both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are set to the big hit type, the game shifts to the high probability time saving gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit, that is, it is a loss, the special symbol game ends. In the first pachinko gaming machine, the small hit is not included in the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol, but in the pachinko gaming machine in which the small hit is included in the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol, the small hit is won. Small hit game control processing is performed. Further, although not shown in FIG. 7, in the case of a time saving hit, which will be described later, the game shifts to the time saving game state.

Then, each time the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, various processes of the above-mentioned special symbol control process are repeated.

If a game ball is awarded to the starting ports 120 and 140 during the special symbol control process, the special symbol start winning process is executed. Further, the start information of the special symbol extracted at the time of winning the game ball to the start ports 120 and 140 (for example, the random value for determining the special symbol hit, the symbol random value of the special symbol, the random value for reach determination, and the effect selection Various data such as various random values such as random values) are held until the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied.

Further, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the starting information of the special symbol can be reserved up to a total of eight by the four starting information of the first special symbol and the four starting information of the second special symbol. , The number of start information of special symbols that can be reserved is not limited to this. For example, the start information of the first special symbol may be reserved more than the start information of the second special symbol, or the start information of the second special symbol may be reserved more than the start information of the first special symbol. You may do it.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 7, it is extracted when the game ball is won (passed) to the starting openings 120 and 140 between the time when the special symbol is started and the starting condition is satisfied. Based on the start information, a look-ahead determination (for example, see S396 in FIG. 52 described later) for determining a win (whether or not a "big hit" is won) or a fluctuation pattern is performed prior to the hit determination process of the special symbol, and this look-ahead determination is performed. It may be provided with a look-ahead effect function that performs a predetermined effect based on the result. The pre-reading determination may be performed before the start information extracted by winning the game ball to the start ports 120 and 140 is reserved, or may be performed after the start information is reserved.

[1-3-2. Ordinary pattern game]
As shown in FIG. 7, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol start passing process performed mainly when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126, and the normal symbol start condition are satisfied. It includes ordinary symbol control processing, etc., which are performed based on the above.

When the game ball has passed through the passing gate 126, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. In this normal symbol start passing process, the start information of the normal symbol (for example, the random value for the normal symbol hit determination) is extracted (acquired) from the normal symbol hit determination counter, and the extracted start information is reserved.

Further, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied. When starting the variable display of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination random value extracted from the normal symbol hit determination counter, and hits the normal symbol as to whether or not it is "normal symbol hit". The determination process is executed, and then the variation pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol and the determined variation pattern of the normal symbol, performs the variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the normal symbol, and performs a predetermined effect. Execute the effect control process. The effect control process may not be executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the effect control process of the normal symbol are completed, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal hit symbol indicating "normal symbol hit" is derived to the normal symbol display unit 161 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). Is determined. When it is determined that the stop display mode indicating the normal hit is derived, the main CPU 201 executes the normal symbol hit game control process. In this game control process per normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is activated, and a winning ball is won in the winning opening (for example, in the present embodiment, for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4)). It becomes an open state where (passing) is possible or easy. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display mode indicating the normal hit has not been derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol hit game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In the gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) in which the time reduction control is not executed, the probability that the stop display mode indicating the normal hit is derived may be set to 0. The time saving control is a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of the special symbol as compared with the time when the time saving control is not executed, and a winning opening (for example, in this embodiment, the first prize opening) by operating the ordinary electric accessory 146. 2 The control in which at least one of the electric support controls for increasing the frequency of opening the starting port 140 (see FIG. 4)) is performed corresponds to this. This time saving control may be a control that performs both the special figure shortening control and the electric support control, or may be a control that performs only one of the special figure shortening control and the electric support control.

The electric support control improves the time saving performance of at least one of the winning probability of "per ordinary symbol", the variable display time of the ordinary symbol, and the opening pattern (opening number, opening time, wait time) of the ordinary electric accessory 146. It is a control to make it. The time saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to a winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment), and is a winning probability of "normal symbol hit". , The variable display time of the ordinary symbol, or / and the opening pattern (opening number of times, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the ordinary electric accessory 146. Further, improving the time saving performance means, for example, making it easier to win a game ball in a winning opening (for example, in the present embodiment, for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4)). That is, when the electric support control is executed, the winning probability of "per ordinary symbol" is increased, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is shortened, and / or the ordinary electric accessory is increased as compared with the case where the electric support control is not executed. The winning of prizes is facilitated by 146 (increasing the number of opening times, extending the opening time, shortening the waiting time, etc.).

Then, each time the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, various processes of the above-mentioned normal symbol control process are repeated.

If the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 during the normal symbol control process, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. Further, the starting information of the normal symbol (for example, the random value for determining the hit of the normal symbol) extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 is reserved until the starting condition of the normal symbol is satisfied.

The variable display of the normal symbol is started in the order in which it is reserved, and when the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, the variable display of the start information reserved at the earliest among the start information of the reserved normal symbol is displayed. Execute.

In addition, various random value (for example, 1st special symbol hit determination random value, 1st special symbol symbol random value, 1st special symbol reach determination random value, 2nd special symbol hit determination random value, 2nd The extraction method of the symbol random value of the special symbol, the reach determination random value of the second special symbol, the normal symbol hit determination random value, etc.) is within a predetermined range (width) by executing the program by the main CPU 201. A soft random number method for generating a random number value may be used, or a hard random number method for extracting a random number value from a counter in a random number generator in which a random number is updated at a predetermined cycle may be used.

[1-3-3. Game state transition]
As shown in FIG. 8, the game state can be roughly classified into a non-big hit game state and a big hit game state. In the non-big hit game state, the special symbol game is executed as described above, and when the big hit is derived as a result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the game shifts from the non-big hit game state to the big hit game state. In the jackpot game state, the round game is executed as described above, and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. However, the variable display of the normal symbol can be executed even in the big hit game state. The description of the small hit game state will be omitted.

The non-big hit game state includes a low probability state in which the jackpot winning probability in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively low, and a high probability gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively high. It can be roughly divided.

The high-accuracy gaming state includes a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state (high-accuracy high-based) in which the time-saving control is executed. Although not included in the high-accuracy gaming state in the first pachinko gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 8, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state (high-accuracy low-base state) in which the time-saving control is not executed is the high-accuracy gaming state. It may be included in the state.

The low probability state includes a normal gaming state in which the time saving control is not executed (low probability low base) and a time saving gaming state in which the time saving control is executed (low probability high base).

Further, the time-saving game state includes an A time-saving game state, a B time-saving game state, and a C time-saving game state.

The A time-saving game state is a time-saving game state that can be changed after the end of a specific big hit game state, and when a specified number of special symbol games are executed or the game is changed to the big hit game state, the A time-saving game state is changed. finish. When the A time saving game state ends by executing the special symbol game a predetermined number of times, the game state shifts to the normal game state in principle.

In the B time saving game state, for example, the jackpot game state has ended, the variable display of the special symbol in the non-high probability game state (that is, the game state in which the probability change flag is off) has started, and the RAM cleared, which will be described later. When the variable display number (for example, the ceiling counter) of the special symbol starting from such a thing reaches the ceiling value (for example, 1000 times), it is a time-saving game state in which the transition is possible, and the specified number of special symbol games are executed. When the game state is changed to the big hit game state, the B time saving game state ends. When the B time reduction game state ends by executing the special symbol game a predetermined number of times, the game shifts to the normal game state in principle.

The C time saving game state is a time saving game state in which the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol performed in the low probability state is "time saving hit", and can be transferred when the display mode of the time saving hit is derived. When the special symbol game of the specified number of times determined by winning the "time reduction hit" is executed or the game is shifted to the big hit game state, the C time reduction game state ends. When the C time reduction game state ends by executing the above-mentioned specified number of special symbol games, the game state shifts to the normal game state in principle. In addition, for example, when a plurality of time-saving game states overlap, even if the above-mentioned specified number of special symbol games are executed, the C time-saving game state continues instead of shifting to the normal game state.

In this specification, regardless of whether or not a plurality of time-saving gaming states are executed in an overlapping manner, the transition condition to the time-saving gaming state is satisfied in the time-saving gaming state, or the transition condition to the plurality of time-saving gaming states is satisfied at the same time. Doing so is referred to as "overlapping" time-saving gaming states. Then, when a plurality of time-saving gaming states overlap, the control of the main CPU 201 internally activates any of the overlapping time-saving gaming states, that is, the overlapping time-saving gaming states are internally activated. Operating in parallel is called "overlapping execution". However, even if the main CPU 201 internally executes a plurality of time-saving game states in an overlapping manner, the time-saving control actually executed is only the time-saving control corresponding to one of the time-saving gaming states. That is, even when a plurality of time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, the player understands that the time-saving game state is controlled to any one of the plurality of time-saving game states.

Next, the transition of the gaming state will be described.

Even if it is controlled to a normal game state, a time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C time-saving game state), and a high-accuracy game state (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving game state), a special symbol If the result of the hit determination process is a big hit, the game shifts to the big hit game state.

When the jackpot game state ends, it is possible to shift to any of a normal game state, a time-saving game state, and a high-accuracy game state (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving game state), depending on the game specifications. However, the time-saving game state that can be shifted when the jackpot game state ends is limited to the A time-saving game state.

When controlled to a high-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state does not shift to a time-saving gaming state or a normal gaming state, except for some pachinko gaming machines such as so-called ST machines and loop machines. Similarly, the short-time gaming state or the normal gaming state does not shift to the high-accuracy gaming state unless it goes through the jackpot gaming state.

When controlled to the normal gaming state, it is possible to shift to the B time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, but it is not possible to shift to the A time saving gaming state unless the jackpot gaming state is passed. However, since the game shifts to the normal gaming state when the special symbol game is executed a specified number of times in the A time saving gaming state, it is possible to shift from the A time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. Regardless of whether the game is controlled in the B time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state, the game shifts to the normal game state when the specified number of special symbol games are executed. It is also possible to shift from the gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Next, the transition between the time-saving gaming states will be described.

When controlled to the A time-saving game state, the number of times that can be executed in the A time-saving game state is set to be less than the ceiling value that is the transition condition to the B time-saving game state. There is no transition to the time-saving game state. Further, since the A time saving game state is controlled via the big hit game state, the B time saving game state does not shift to the A time saving game state. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the A time-saving game state is "time-saving hit", the transition condition to the C time-saving game state is satisfied, so that the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state may overlap. .. However, as described above, since the A time saving game state is controlled via the big hit game state, the C time saving game state does not shift to the A time saving game state.

When controlled to the B time-saving game state, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time-shortening hit", the transition condition to the C time-saving game state is satisfied, and the B time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state are set. Can overlap. Further, even when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time reduction game state, the C time reduction game state and the B time reduction game state may overlap.

When controlled to the C time-saving game state, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time-saving hit", the transition condition to the C time-shortening game state is satisfied, and the C time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state are set. Can overlap.

The details of the duplication of time-saving gaming states will be described later.

[1-4. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 19.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which neither probabilistic control nor time saving control is executed, a high probabilistic time saving gaming state in which both probabilistic change control and time saving control are executed, and time saving control in which probabilistic change control is not executed but time saving control is performed. A low-probability time-saving gaming state to be executed is prepared, and the main CPU 201 can advance the game in any of these gaming states. However, the gaming state advanced by the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, left-handed is a normal gaming mode in the normal gaming state, and right-handed is the regular gaming mode in the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state and the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state. The sub CPU 301 executes a control for displaying, for example, a striking method, which is regarded as a normal game mode, in a display area of the display device 7. The "regular game mode" corresponds to a game mode that is not the most disadvantageous to the player (advantageous to the player) among the plurality of game modes (for example, the launch mode).

[1-4-1. Jackpot probability for each set value]
FIG. 9 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a plurality of setting values such as setting 1 to setting 6 are used by using the above-mentioned setting key 174, backup clear switch 176 (see FIG. 6), and the like. It can be set to one of the set values. In the case of such a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, and the main CPU 201 executes the hit determination process of the special symbol based on the set set value.

Specifically, the jackpot probability in the game state in which the probability change flag is off (for example, the normal game state and the low probability time-shortening game state in this embodiment) in which the probability change control is not executed is determined by the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the second special. Regardless of which of the symbol hit determination processes is executed, for example, setting 1 is about 1/319, setting 2 is about 1/314, setting 3 is about 1/309, and setting 4 is about. It is 1/304, about 1/299 with setting 5, and about 1/294 with setting 6. Further, the jackpot probability in the game state in which the probability change flag for which the probability change control is executed is on (for example, in the high probability time-short game state in this embodiment) is about 1/77 in the setting 1 and about 1/76 in the setting 2. Setting 3 is about 1/75, setting 4 is about 1/74, setting 5 is about 1/73, and setting 6 is about 1/72.

In addition, unlike the big hit probability, the time saving hit probability is a common probability for all set values. For example, the time saving hit probability when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is executed is 1/160, and the time saving hit probability when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is executed is 1/140. There is. The time saving hit probability may be different between the case where the hit determination process of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the hit determination process of the second special symbol is executed, but it may be the same.

However, even if the time reduction hit probability is a common probability for all the set values, the time reduction continuation rate (for example, the number of time reductions set) may be different depending on the set value. For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", for example, in the case of setting 1, 50 times is set as the number of time reductions, and in the case of setting 6, 100 times is set as the number of time reductions. You may do it.

Although the small hit is not included in the lottery target in the first pachinko gaming machine, the small hit may be included in the lottery target. When the small hit is included in the lottery target, the small hit probability may be a common probability for all the set values. In addition, when a small hit is included in the lottery target, the small hit is won only when the hit determination process of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is performed. You may make it possible. In this case, in the hit determination process of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol), in addition to the mode in which the determination itself as to whether or not the small hit is won is not performed, whether or not the small hit is won with the small hit probability set to 0. May be an embodiment in which the determination is made.

The above-mentioned time saving hit probability and the small hit probability when the small hit is included in the lottery target are common probabilities for all the set values as described above, but the probability is not limited to this and may differ depending on the set value. good.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability is different for all the set values, but the jackpot probability is not limited to this, and is, for example, the jackpot probability common to the setting 1 and the setting 2, and common to the setting 3 and the setting 4. The jackpot probability may be the same for a plurality of set values, such as the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability common to the setting 5 and the setting 6.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, but if the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on the set value, the target different according to the set value is not necessarily limited to the jackpot probability. For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine in which a game ball is controlled to a big hit game state when a game ball wins in a specific winning opening, the winning probability in the specific winning opening may be different according to a set value. It is not essential that the pachinko gaming machine be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 10 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The hit determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 10 shows the case of setting 1 shown in FIG. 9 as an example.

The hit determination table of the special symbol is a table referred to in the hit determination process of the special symbol, that is, based on the random value for the special symbol hit determination extracted when the game ball wins the starting openings 120 and 140, the "time reduction" is achieved. It is a table referred to when determining "hit", "big hit" or "missing" by lottery. In this embodiment, the lottery targets are "time saving hit", "big hit" and "loss", and other lottery targets (for example, small hits) are not included, but the first starting port 120 or / and When a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 140, it may be determined as another lottery target.

As described above, the special symbol hit determination random value is a random value used in the special symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the random value for determining the special symbol hit is extracted from 0 to 65535. However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines "time saving hit", "big hit", or "loss" based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random value in the hit determination process of the first special symbol. In the hit determination table of the first special symbol, the range (width) of the random value for determination for special symbol hit determination determined as "time reduction hit" for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag and the corresponding time reduction hit Relationship with judgment value data, special symbol hit determined as "big hit" Relationship between range (width) of random value for judgment and corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and special symbol hit determined as "miss" The relationship between the range (width) of the judgment random value and the corresponding loss judgment value data is defined.

In the present specification, when the value of the probability change flag is "0", the probability change flag is off, and when the value of the probability change flag is "1", the probability change flag is on.

Further, in the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 has a "time saving hit", a "big hit", or a "big hit" based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random value, as in the hit determination process of the first special symbol. Decide on "missing". In the hit determination table of the second special symbol, the range (width) of the random value for determination for special symbol hit determination determined as "time reduction hit" for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag and the corresponding time reduction hit Relationship with judgment value data, special symbol hit determined as "big hit" Relationship between range (width) of random value for judgment and corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and special symbol hit determined as "miss" The relationship between the range (width) of the judgment random value and the corresponding loss judgment value data is defined.

In this embodiment, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 is set to ". It is determined as "time saving hit", and the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 409 to 613, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit". , The judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "missing" and determines the determination value data as "missing determination value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 is "time saving hit". And the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability change flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit". , The judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines "missing" and determines the determination value data as "missing determination value data".

Similarly, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 is set to "time saving hit". , And the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 273 to 477, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit". , The judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 478 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "missing". , The judgment value data is determined as "missing judgment value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 is "time saving hit". And the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability change flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 273 to 1123, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit". , The judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 1124 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "missing". , The judgment value data is determined as "missing judgment value data".

As described above, in this embodiment, for example, among the special symbol hit determination random values generated in the range of 0 to 65535, 0 to a predetermined width (for example, 0 to 408 in the case of the first special symbol hit determination process). Is assigned to other determination value data (for example, time saving determination value data) excluding the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data. Further, the tail end from the predetermined value (for example, 614 to 65535 if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to the loss determination value data. Further, the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data are assigned adjacent to each other. By doing so, for example, when the probability change flag is changed from off to on (or from on to off), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced by the amount that the width of the jackpot judgment value data is increased (or reduced). It is possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the width of other determination value data (for example, time saving hit determination value data) simply by increasing the size.

Further, in this embodiment, the winning probability of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is performed and the winning of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is performed. By making the probability different, it is possible to give variation to the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 10, the winning probability of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is performed is the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is performed. By making the winning probability higher than the winning probability, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the normal game state, which tends to be a monotonous game.

However, the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit judgment processing of the second special symbol is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit judgment processing of the first special symbol is performed. May be. In this case, for example, if the "time saving game state" is won in the time saving game state, the time saving game state is executed repeatedly, and if the "time saving game state" is won just before the end of the time saving game state, the time saving game state is changed. It will be substantially extended, and it will be possible to suppress the decline in interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, the "time saving hit" can be won regardless of whether the probability change flag is on or off. However, when the probability variation flag is off (normal gaming state, time saving gaming state), the main CPU 201 controls the probability variation flag to the time saving gaming state if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving game state", but the probability variation flag is on. In this case, even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", it is not controlled to the time saving gaming state.

[1-4-3. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 11 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a "selection symbol command" that determines a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins at the start ports 120 and 140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This table is referenced when the "designation command" is selected. The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a hit symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a jackpot, and the "symbol specification command" is a special symbol. This is a command to specify the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of is stopped. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99.

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 uses, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. Select like. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 70 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 10 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 can be used as a selection symbol command regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99. Select "z6" and select "zA5" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the second special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z8" as the selected symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z9" as the selected symbol command and "zA8" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z10" as the selected symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 can be used as a selection symbol command regardless of whether the symbol random value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99. Select "z11" and select "zA10" as the symbol specification command.

In this embodiment, the determination value data is determined based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random value with reference to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), and then the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 10). (See FIG. 11), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random value and the special symbol symbol random value, the winning of the special symbol, the selected symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together.

[1-4-4. Special symbol stop mode determination table]
FIG. 12A is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 5) when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. It is referred to when deciding according to the symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 12A, the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 5) is composed of, for example, a region of 0 to 7. It is composed of a 1-byte control signal. Each region of 0 to 7 of the first special symbol has a one-to-one correspondence with any of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h (see FIG. 5) constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. For example, the area 0 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163a, the area 1 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163b, the area 2 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163c, and the area 3 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163d. The region 4 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163e, the region 5 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163f, the region 6 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163 g, and the region 7 of the first special symbol corresponds to. Corresponds to 163h.

Similarly, each region of 0 to 7 of the second special symbol has a one-to-one correspondence with any of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h (see FIG. 5) constituting the second special symbol display unit 164. For example, the area 0 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164a, the area 1 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164b, the area 2 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164c, and the area 3 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164d. The second special symbol area 4 corresponds to 164e, the second special symbol area 5 corresponds to 164f, the second special symbol area 6 corresponds to 164 g, and the second special symbol area 7 corresponds to. Corresponds to 164h.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the display mode (display mode of time reduction) of the LED derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is determined as follows. Will be done. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 has the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol and the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163h corresponding to the region 7 is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 has the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163b corresponding to 1 and the LED 163h corresponding to the region 7 of the first special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 has the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163c corresponding to 2 and the LED 163h corresponding to the region 7 of the first special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z7", the main CPU 201 has the LED 164a corresponding to the area 0 of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and the second special symbol. It is determined that the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 164b corresponding to the region 1 of the above and the LED 164h corresponding to the region 7 of the second special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z8", the main CPU 201 has the LED 164a corresponding to the area 0 of the second special symbol and the area of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 164c corresponding to 2 and the LED 164h corresponding to the region 7 of the second special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit", the LED display mode (big hit display mode) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 201 has the LED 163d corresponding to the region 3 of the first special symbol and the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163e corresponding to the region 4 of the above and the LED 163g corresponding to the region 6 of the first special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 has the LED 163d corresponding to the region 3 of the first special symbol and the region of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163f corresponding to 5 and the LED 163g corresponding to the region 6 of the first special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 has the LED 163d corresponding to the region 3 of the first special symbol and the region of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. The first special symbol is displayed in such a manner that the LED 163e corresponding to 4 is turned on, the LED 163f corresponding to the region 5 of the first special symbol, and the LED 163 g corresponding to the region 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. It is determined to stop and display the unit 163. When the selected symbol command is "z9", the main CPU 201 has the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol region 3 and the second special symbol region among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 164e corresponding to 4 and the LED 164 g corresponding to the region 6 of the second special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 has the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol region 3 and the second special symbol region among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 164f corresponding to 5 is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing", the LED display mode (missing display mode) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED 163h corresponding to the region 7 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and the others. It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED of the above is turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z11", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED 164h corresponding to the area 7 of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and the other LEDs. Is determined to stop and display the second special symbol display unit 164 in such a manner that the light is turned off.

When the main CPU 201 determines the stop mode of the special symbol based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the control signal corresponding to the determined mode is transmitted to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164. It outputs to each of the constituent LEDs and controls the stop mode of the special symbol led out to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164.

In FIG. 12A, the LED display mode derived from the first special symbol display unit 163 and the LED display mode derived from the second special symbol display unit 164 are shown in the same table for convenience. ing. However, it is preferable that the control signal is transmitted separately by the first special symbol display unit 163 and the second special symbol display unit 164.

FIG. 12B is an example of a table showing an idea related to the determination of the stop mode of the decorative symbol in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 12B, the stop mode (symbol combination) of the decorative symbol derived when the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the display device 7 is stopped is determined according to the symbol designation command. To.

Since only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub CPU 1301 can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is controlled so that the display effect of the special symbol being performed is performed by the display device 7. In this case, it is preferable that the sub CPU 301 performs the display effect in such a manner that it can be grasped whether the special symbol that is variably displayed is the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol displayed on the display device 7 is composed of 9 symbols, for example, 1 to 9 on the left, and 10 symbols, for example, 1 to 9 and a time-saving symbol, on the middle symbol. , The symbol on the right is composed of nine symbols, for example, 1 to 9. The time-saving symbol is a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the gaming state shifts to the time-saving gaming state, for example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a time-saving hit. By stopping and displaying the middle symbol with the time reduction symbol, the player can grasp that the time reduction hit has been won. Further, in the present embodiment, the odd-numbered symbol is defined as a symbol having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the even-numbered symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the special symbol lottery does not include a small hit, but if the result of the special symbol lottery includes a small hit, for example, the symbol constituting the middle symbol has a small hit symbol. (The symbol that is stopped and displayed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit) may be included. In this case, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit, the sub CPU 301 stops and displays the middle symbol with the small hit symbol, so that the player can grasp that the small hit has been won.

As shown in FIG. 12B, when the symbol designation command is "zA1" or "zA6" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time saving hit"), the sub CPU 301 sets a decorative symbol, for example. , The left symbol and the right symbol are stopped at even symbols, and the middle symbol is stopped at the reduced working hours symbol.

When the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time saving hit"), the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbol, for example, the left symbol and the right symbol with odd symbols. And stop the middle symbol at the reduced working hours symbol. When the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"), the symbol designation command is "z2" or "z8", as can be seen with reference to FIG. 13 described later. Compared with the case of "zA1" or "zA6" (when the selected symbol command is "z0", "z1" or "z7"), the number of time reductions set is large, and the degree of advantage for the player is high.

When the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "big hit"), the sub CPU 301 sets the decorative symbol, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol to odd symbols. Stop at the same pattern (doublet).

When the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "big hit"), the sub CPU 301 sets the decorative symbol, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol as even symbols. Stop at the same pattern (doublet). As can be seen by referring to FIG. 13 described later, the symbol designation command "zA4" is used when the probability change flag is set to ON after the end of the jackpot game state (when the selected symbol command is "z4"). There is a case where the probability change flag is not set on (when the selected symbol command is "z5"). Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the selected symbol command is "z4" or "z5", the sub CPU 301 controls to stop the decorative symbol at the even-numbered identical symbols (doublet). In the big hit game state, it is advisable to perform a promotion effect indicating that the hit is a probability change hit (a hit in which the probability change flag is set to ON).

Further, as can be seen by referring to FIG. 13 described later, when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9", the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" as can be seen by referring to FIG. 13 described later. Compared to the case of "", the expected value that the probability change flag is set to on after the end of the big hit game state is small. In this respect, when the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8", the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9".

When the symbol designation command is "zA5" or "zA10" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "missing"), the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbol with a loose stitch or reach loss. For example, the staggered pattern has a different stop mode between the symbol that is stopped first (for example, the left symbol) and the symbol that is stopped second (for example, the right symbol), and the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are all of each other. Different stopping modes correspond. In the reach loss, the symbol that is stopped first (for example, the left symbol) and the symbol that is stopped second (for example, the right symbol) are common, but the symbol that is stopped last (for example, the middle symbol) is another symbol (for example, left). A stop mode different from that of the symbol and the symbol on the right) corresponds.

In FIG. 12B, the decorative symbol stop mode corresponding to the symbol designation command (for example, when the symbol designation command is “zA1”, the left symbol “2”, the middle symbol “time reduction”, and the right symbol “4”) is displayed. Although illustrated, the stopping mode shown in the column of the stopping mode of the decorative symbol in FIG. 12B is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

[1-4-5. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 13 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The hit type determination table determines the mode of the jackpot game state (more specifically, for example, the number of rounds) or / and the mode of the subsequent game state, depending on the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol. It will be referred to when making a decision. The mode of the gaming state after that shows the mode of the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time-saving hit, it is controlled to the C-time-shortened gaming state without being controlled to the big-hit gaming state. The aspect is shown.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the mode of the C time reduction gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and decides to set the time saving number to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7", the main CPU 201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and sets the time saving number to 50 times. To decide. When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8", the main CPU 201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and sets the number of time saving times to 100 times. To decide. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned display mode of the time reduction hit to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, and then the main CPU 201 derives the display mode. Without controlling the jackpot game state, the time saving flag is set to ON and the determined time saving number is set, and the C time saving gaming state can be controlled. If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the mode of the big hit gaming state is not determined because it is not controlled to the big hit gaming state. In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the set number of time reductions is the same regardless of the gaming state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed. It is supposed to be. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set number of time reductions may be different depending on the gaming state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the number of time reductions set according to the selected symbol command determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. Is different. By doing so, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "short-time hit", it is possible to give variation to the progress of the subsequent game, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. It will be possible.

By the way, as described above, when the probability change flag is on, the main CPU 201 does not control to the time saving gaming state even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit". For example, even if the probability change flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 201 draws a "time saving hit" as shown in FIG. 10, and the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit". In this case, the display mode of the time saving hit indicating that the "time saving hit" is won is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, but the high accuracy gaming state is continued without being controlled to the C time saving gaming state. You may do it.

Further, the main CPU 201 performs a lottery of "time saving hit" when the probability change flag is on, and even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", the display mode of the loss is forcibly changed to the special symbol display unit. It may be derived to 163 and 164.

Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is on, the time saving hit judgment value data is not assigned to the random value for special symbol hit judgment, that is, "time saving hit" is included in the lottery result (result of the hit judgment processing of the special symbol). A non-hit determination process may be performed. In this case, when the probability variation flag is off, the time saving hit determination value data is assigned to the special symbol hit determination random value, and when the probability variation flag is on, the time saving hit determination value data is not assigned. Therefore, the width of the random number value assigned to the time saving hit judgment value data when the probability variation flag is off is the loss judgment value data, the big hit judgment value data, or the loss judgment value instead of the time saving hit judgment value data. It is assigned to both the data and the jackpot judgment value data.

In this embodiment, when the probability change flag is on, it is configured not to shift to the C time saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving flag is off even if the probability variation flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving hit", It may be possible to shift to a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit", the mode of the hit gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z9", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 as the mode of the big hit game state. Further, as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, it is determined that both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set to ON, and that both the probability variation number and the time reduction number are set to 10,000 times. In these cases, the main CPU 201 can control the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 and then control the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, control the jackpot gaming state to a high accuracy time and short gaming state. Will be.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 as the mode of the big hit game state. Further, as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, it is determined that both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set to ON, and that both the probability variation number and the time reduction number are set to 10,000 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 can control the jackpot gaming state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163, and can control the jackpot gaming state to a high accuracy time-shortening gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Become.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 as the mode of the big hit game state. Further, as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, it is determined that only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag is set to ON. In addition, it is decided to set the number of time reductions to be set to, for example, 200 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 can control the jackpot gaming state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163, and can control the time-saving gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. The time-saving gaming state controlled here is the A time-saving gaming state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 as the mode of the big hit game state. Further, as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, it is determined that only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag is set to ON. Further, it is decided to set the number of time reductions to be set to, for example, 300 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 can control the jackpot gaming state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display unit 164, and can control the time-saving gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. The time-saving gaming state controlled here is also the A time-saving gaming state.

The time saving performance in the highly accurate time saving gaming state is preferably the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state, but it may be different from the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state.

Further, for example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), the main CPU 201 is in the mode of the big hit gaming state and None of the subsequent aspects of the gaming state are set. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, the main CPU 201 continuously controls the game state up to that point without shifting the game state.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), the mode of the big hit gaming state and the subsequent mode as described above. Since none of the modes of the gaming state is set, it is not necessary to show it in the hit type determination table of FIG. 13. However, in this embodiment, for convenience, in order to clarify that neither the mode of the big hit gaming state nor the mode of the subsequent gaming state is determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing", the figure is shown. It is illustrated in 13.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the hit determination table of the special symbol of FIG. 10, and the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 140. Judgment value data is determined based on the random value for hit determination (winning determination is performed), and the winning (“short-time hit”, “big hit” or “missing”) is determined. After that, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol determination table of FIG. 11, and the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins in the first start port 120 or the second start port 140 and the above determination value. The selected symbol command is determined based on the data, and the type of display mode (type of time saving hit or type of jackpot) derived from the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is determined. It should be noted that the above-mentioned winning determination and determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, but it is excluded that the determination is performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the confirmation display. Not the purpose.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is “z5”) or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z10"). On the other hand, the number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state controlled when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time reduction hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50. The number of times (when the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7") or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"). That is, the expected value of the number of time reductions in the A time reduction gaming state is higher than the expected value of the time reduction number in the C time reduction gaming state. In this way, by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous to the player than the C time-saving game state, the position of the "big hit" can be increased.

Instead of setting the expected value of the number of time reductions in the A time reduction gaming state to be higher than the expected value of the time reduction number in the C time reduction gaming state, for example, as shown in FIG. 14, the expected value of the time reduction number in the C time reduction gaming state. May be set to be higher than the expected value of the number of time reductions in the time reduction game state. FIG. 14 is a modification of the hit type determination table shown in FIG. In FIG. 14, the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol commands are “z5” and “z10”). On the other hand, the number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1", "z7") or 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1", "z7"). When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"). In this way, by making the C time saving game state more advantageous to the player than the A time saving game state, the position of "time saving hit" can be increased. For example, even if the state of not winning the "big hit" continues for a long period of time, if the "time saving hit" is won, it is controlled to a relatively advantageous C time saving gaming state, so that the decline in interest is suppressed. It becomes possible to do.

In the present specification, as in the case of the probability variation flag, the time saving flag is off when the value of the time saving flag is "0", and the time saving flag is turned on when the value of the time saving flag is "1".

The time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203 like the probability change flag, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute the time saving control.

The time reduction number is a variable display number of special symbols that can be continuously executed for time reduction control. That is, for example, when the number of time reductions is determined to be "50", if the special symbol is variably displayed 50 times without winning a big hit in this time reduction game state, the time reduction game state ends and the non-time reduction game ends. It shifts to a state (for example, a normal gaming state).

The probability variation number and time reduction number "10000" shown in FIG. 13 and the like mean that the probability variation control can be continuously executed until it is determined to be a jackpot (that is, the next jackpot) after the end of the jackpot game state. ..

[1-4-6. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 15 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine. The "Remarks" column in FIG. 15 is shown for convenience for easy understanding. The time-saving hit system reach A, B, and C shown in the “Remarks” column of FIG. 15 indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a big hit). It is a production. Similarly, the jackpot system reach A, B, and C are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time saving hit). Further, the common reach A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit or a big hit. Note that FIG. 15 is a variation pattern table of the special symbol when the probability variation flag is off, and the variation pattern table of the special symbol when the probability variation flag is on is omitted.

The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120, and when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140, the main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol. Determine the variation pattern. The variation pattern table of the special symbol of FIG. 15 is a table referred to when executing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol of S96 of FIG. 28, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern of the special symbol is the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (win), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the random value for reach determination, or /. And, it is determined based on a random number value for effect selection and the like, but the determination is not limited to this, and may be determined based on another value or the like in place of or in addition to any of the above.

The reach determination random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249, and the effect selection random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99. However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 sets a look-ahead flag when the effect selection random number value extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is a specific random number value. The sub CPU 301 that has received the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 201 performs a look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 sets the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is off, and does not set the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is on or the probability variation flag is on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 301 may determine.

The main CPU 201 may set the look-ahead flag (so that the look-ahead effect is performed) even when the time saving flag is on or the probability change flag is on. Further, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the look-ahead flag may be set (so that the look-ahead effect is performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol to be determined has a smaller expected value of the number of fluctuations per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is on tends to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is off.

The determined fluctuation pattern information is transmitted from the main CPU 201 to the command input port 308 of the sub CPU 301 via the command output port 206. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the fluctuation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 201.

Although not shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbol to be determined may be different for each set value, for example, by changing the range of the random number value for effect selection.

Further, in this embodiment, for example, when the result of the hit determination process is a loss, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to whether or not the time reduction flag is on regardless of the type of time reduction. , Not limited to this. For example, the expected value of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time may be different depending on the type of time reduction. For example, the expected value of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state.

[1-4-7. Time saving game state]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state are prepared as the time-saving game state. These time-saving gaming states will be described below.

The time-saving game state is controlled after the end of the big hit game state when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is, for example, "z5" or "z10". Is. That is, in this embodiment, the condition for shifting to the A time saving game state is to win a big hit (a big hit whose selected symbol command is "z5" or "z10"). However, even if the condition for transitioning to the A time-saving gaming state is satisfied, the condition for hindering the transition to the A time-saving gaming state is satisfied instead of always transitioning to the A time-saving gaming state (for example, when the backup is cleared). Etc.), do not shift to the A time saving game state.

Further, the end condition of the A time saving game state is determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started, and when the selected symbol command is used. When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the set number of time reductions (hereinafter referred to as "A specified number of time reductions") is executed (see the column of "number of time reductions" in FIG. 13). Of the above, it is the case where any of the conditions is satisfied.

The B time-saving gaming state starts from, for example, when the jackpot gaming state ends and the variable display of the special symbol in the non-high-accuracy gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state in this embodiment) starts. As a result, the ceiling counter is updated (1 addition), and the time-saving gaming state is controlled when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, the condition for shifting to the B time saving game state is that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. The transition to the B time saving game state may be made when the variable display of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value (hereinafter referred to as "ceiling final change") is started, or when the ceiling final change is completed. This may be the case when the variable display of the next special symbol of the final fluctuation of the ceiling is started. That is, the timing of transition to the B time saving game state may be any time between the start of the final ceiling fluctuation and the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the final change of the ceiling is "missing", the display mode of the loss is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, but the game shifts to the B time saving game state. Become. In this case, the sub CPU 301 displays to the player that the condition for transitioning to the B time reduction gaming state is satisfied (for example, the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value in the present embodiment) (for example, the decorative symbol is a special symbol). It may be controlled to display on the display device 7 (an effect in which the character is stopped, a special effect is performed by the character, or both of them are performed). Even if the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state is satisfied, the condition for hindering the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is satisfied instead of always transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state (for example, special in the ceiling final change). When the result of the hit determination process of the symbol is a big hit, etc.), the game is not shifted to the B time saving game state.

The ceiling counter is not updated when the probability change flag is on, and is always counted when the probability change flag is off, regardless of whether the time saving flag is on or off. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the game is controlled to the B time saving game state unless the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit". In a pachinko gaming machine that includes a small hit in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is "small hit", the display mode of the small hit. The B time saving game state may be started when is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, or the B time saving game state may be started after the end of the small hit game state. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is "small hit", the display mode of the small hit is only displayed on the special symbol display units 163 and 164. , The display effect indicating to the player that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value as described above is not displayed. In the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, the ceiling value may be different depending on the set value. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit gaming state without being controlled to the B time saving gaming state.

The ceiling counter has a backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on, when the jackpot game state is controlled, and when the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clear process). When a switch other than the above (for example, setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, in the case of a game machine whose normal symbol hit probability can be changed, when the high probability of normal symbol hit probability ends, etc. It is reset when the condition of is satisfied. Then, when the ceiling counter is allowed to be updated, the ceiling counter is updated each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed. For example, if the probability change flag is on, updating the ceiling counter is not allowed.

After clearing the ceiling counter, the main CPU 201 starts counting the ceiling counter from the variable display of the next special symbol. The ceiling value may be set by the main CPU 201 each time the ceiling counter is cleared, or may be set in advance as a pachinko gaming machine-specific one instead of being set each time.

When the ceiling counter is cleared by being controlled to the jackpot game state, the main CPU 201 is at the start or end of the first variable display of the special symbol unless the probability change flag is turned on after the end of the jackpot game state. Update the ceiling counter (+1). Also, if the probability change flag is on after the end of the big hit game state, the ceiling counter will not be updated even if the special symbol is variablely displayed. Updates the ceiling counter at the start or end of the first variable display of the special symbol after is turned off. In addition, in the case of the specification that performs the probability change fall lottery, the probability change flag is changed from on to off at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, so when updating the ceiling counter at the end of the variable display of the special symbol, the special symbol If the probability change flag is off at the end of the variable display, the ceiling counter may be updated.

In the case of a pachinko gaming machine with specifications in which the probabilistic fall lottery is performed by the main CPU 201, when the sub CPU 301 receives a command transmitted from the main CPU 201, the sub CPU 301 has an effect suggesting that the probabilistic fall lottery has been won, or a high probability game. It is preferable not to perform an effect suggesting a transition from the state to the low probability gaming state. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the start time of counting by the ceiling counter, that is, the transition timing to the B time reduction game state based on the display effect displayed on the display device 7, which is interesting. It is possible to provide a certain game quality. When it is difficult to grasp the transition timing to the B time-saving gaming state, for example, a countdown effect suggesting the transition timing to the B time-saving gaming state or a countdown effect of Gase is displayed on the display device 7 under the control of the sub CPU 301. , It will be possible to further enhance the interest.

Further, when the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clear process), the main CPU 201 starts the first variable display of the special symbol after the clear process in the work area in the RAM 203. Update the ceiling counter (+1) at the hour or end.

Further, when a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, a setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, the main CPU 201 performs the first variable display of the special symbol after the other switch is operated. The ceiling counter is updated (+1) at the start or end of.

Further, the end condition of the B time saving game state is the case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started, and the predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "big hit"). This is the case where one of the conditions is satisfied, that is, the variable display of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) for (referred to as "B time reduction specified number of times") is executed. "When the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of B time reductions is executed", which is one of the end conditions of the B time reduction game state, is the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of B time reductions (hereinafter, "B time reduction final change"). It may be when (referred to as) is started, or when the B time reduction final fluctuation is completed. That is, the end timing of the B time reduction game state may be from the start of the B time reduction final variation to the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to the B time reduction final variation.

The C time-saving game state is a time-saving game state controlled when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is “time-saving hit”. That is, the condition for shifting to the C time saving game state is that the time saving hit (the selected symbol command is a time saving hit of "z0" to "z2", "z7" or "z8") is won, and the display mode of the time saving hit is a special symbol. It is derived (confirmed display) to the display units 163 and 164. Even if the condition for transitioning to the C time-saving gaming state is satisfied, the condition for hindering the transition to the C time-saving gaming state is satisfied instead of always transitioning to the C time-saving gaming state (for example, the B time-saving gaming state). If the specification is such that the C time-saving game state is not executed at the same time (details will be described later), and the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the B time-saving game state is "time-saving hit", etc.), the C time-saving game Do not move to the state. In addition, when the condition for hindering the transition to the C time-saving gaming state is satisfied even though the transition condition to the C time-saving gaming state is satisfied, the main CPU 201 hits the time-saving even though the transition to the C time-saving gaming state is not satisfied. The control for deriving the display mode of the above to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is executed.

Further, the end condition of the C time saving game state is determined according to the case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started, and the case where the selected symbol command is started. When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the set number of time reductions (hereinafter referred to as "C time reduction specified number of times") is executed (see the column of "number of time reductions" in FIG. 13). Of the above, it is the case where any of the conditions is satisfied. As for the C time reduction specified number of times, which is one of the end conditions of the C time reduction game state, the variable display of the special symbol of the time reduction number determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as "C time reduction final variation") starts. It may be when it is done, or when the C time reduction final fluctuation is completed. That is, the end timing of the C time reduction game state may be from the start of the C time reduction final variation to the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to the C time reduction final variation.

The time saving performance may be different between the A time saving gaming state, the B time saving gaming state, and the C time saving gaming state. Further, of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, the time-saving performance of the two time-saving game states is the same, and the time-saving performance of these two time-saving game states and the other one time-saving game state It may be different from the time saving performance. Further, the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, the time saving performance in the B time saving game state, and the time saving performance in the C time saving game state may be the same.

Further, in addition to the above, for example, the variable display number of the second special symbol has reached the specified number of times as the end condition of the A time reduction game state, the end condition of the B time reduction game state, and the end condition of the C time reduction game state. Alternatively, it may be included that the ordinary electric accessory 146 is opened a predetermined number of times, a specific opening mode is selected as the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146, and the like. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine in which the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol includes a small hit, the fact that the number of small hits has reached the specified number of times may be included in the above-mentioned end condition. Further, a time-saving fall lottery may be performed, and the fact that the time-saving fall lottery has been won may be included in the above-mentioned termination condition.

[1-4-8. Ordinary symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 16 is an example of a hit determination table of a normal symbol stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The hit determination table of the normal symbol is a table referred to in the hit determination process of the normal symbol, that is, for the game state and the normal symbol hit determination extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see FIG. 4). It is a table referred to when determining "per ordinary symbol" or "missing" by lottery based on the random number value (that is, when executing the ordinary symbol game determination process of S295 of FIG. 43 described later).

As described above, the normal symbol hit determination random value is a random value used in the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random value for determining a normal symbol hit from 0 to 99. However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the hit determination process of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 determines "hit the normal symbol" or "missing" based on the extracted random value for determining the hit of the normal symbol. In the normal symbol hit judgment table, the relationship between the range (width) of the normal symbol hit judgment random value value determined as "normal symbol hit" and the corresponding normal symbol hit judgment value data for each type of time reduction. , And, the relationship between the range (width) of the random value for normal symbol hit determination determined as "loss" and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this embodiment, in the non-time saving gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state), the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any of 0 to 79 as "normal symbol hit". , Judgment value data is determined as "ordinary symbol hit judgment value data". Further, in the non-time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any of 80 to 99, and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data". To decide.

Further, in the A time saving game state, when the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any of 0 to 98, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "normal symbol hit", and the determination value data is "normal symbol hit". Determined as "judgment value data". Further, in the A time saving game state, when the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is 99, the main CPU 201 determines "missing" and determines the determination value data as "missing determination value data".

Further, in the B time saving game state, when the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any of 0 to 79, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "normal symbol hit", and the determination value data is "normal symbol hit". Determined as "judgment value data". Further, in the B time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any of 80 to 99, and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data". To decide.

Further, in the C time saving game state, when the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any of 0 to 79, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "normal symbol hit", and the determination value data is "normal symbol hit". Determined as "judgment value data". Further, in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any of 80 to 99, and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data". To decide.

As described above, in this embodiment, the winning probability per normal symbol in the A time-saving game state among the non-time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state (shown in FIG. 16). Selection rate (approximate)) is the highest.

Further, the winning probability per normal symbol in the B time-saving game state (selection rate (approximate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. Similarly, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time-shortened gaming state (selection rate (approximate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-short-time gaming state. Therefore, even if the gaming state shifts between the non-time saving gaming state, the B time saving gaming state, and the C time saving gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is not changed.

It should be noted that the winning probability per normal symbol may be the same in the non-time saving game state, the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to make the ratio of the types of ordinary symbols, which will be described later, different for each state without changing the winning probability per ordinary symbol.

[1-4-9. Ordinary symbol judgment table]
FIG. 17 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol judgment table is usually based on the type of time reduction, the above-mentioned judgment value data, and the symbol random value of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see FIG. 4). It is a table referred to when the "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" that determines the stop symbol of the symbol is selected. The "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" is a command for designating a normal symbol hit symbol determined according to the normal symbol hit type when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit. be. The symbol random value of a normal symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 17, when the normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is selected as follows. To.

For example, in the non-time saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 does not have any of 0 to 99 of the normal symbol symbol random value. , Normal symbol hit selection Select "fz0" as the symbol command.

Further, in the A time saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 is normal if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 0 to 29. Select "fz1" as the symbol command to select when hitting a symbol, and select "fz2" as the symbol command to select when hitting a normal symbol if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 30 to 69. If the numerical value is any of 70 to 99, "fz3" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

Further, in the B time saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 is normal if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 0 to 29. Select "fz4" as the symbol command to select when hitting a symbol, and select "fz5" as the symbol command to select when hitting a normal symbol if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 30 to 69. If the numerical value is any of 70 to 99, "fz6" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

Further, in the C time saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 is normal if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 0 to 29. Select "fz7" as the symbol command to select when hitting a symbol, and select "fz8" as the symbol command to select when hitting a normal symbol if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 30 to 69. If the numerical value is any of 70 to 99, "fz9" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first determines the determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value by referring to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), and then determines the determination value data. , The normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) is referred to, and the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is determined based on the symbol random value of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value and the normal symbol symbol random value, the winning of the normal symbol and the selection symbol command at the time of hitting the normal symbol may be determined together.

[1-4-10. Ordinary symbol per type determination table]
FIG. 18 is an example of a normal symbol per type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol hit type determination table sets the open pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), in response to the normal symbol hit selection symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the normal symbol. It is referred to when determining (that is, when executing the opening pattern setting process of the ordinary electric accessory 146 executed in the ordinary symbol game determination process of S295 of FIG. 43, which will be described later).

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz0", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), with the first opening time of 1000 msec and no wait time. It is decided that there will be no second opening. That is, it is determined to be an opening pattern in which the ordinary electric accessory 146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

Further, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz1", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), with a first opening time of 2000 msec and a wait time of 200 msec. The second opening time is determined to be 2000 msec.

Further, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz2", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), with the first opening time of 2500 msec and the wait time of 200 msec. The second opening time is determined to be 2500 msec.

Further, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz3", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), with the first opening time of 3000 msec and the wait time of 200 msec. The second opening time is determined to be 3000 msec.

Further, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz4" or "fz7", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), for the first opening time. It is decided that 2500 msec, no wait time, and no second opening.

Further, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz5" or "fz8", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), for the first opening time. It is determined that the wait time is 2000 msec, the wait time is 600 msec, and the second opening time is 2000 msec.

Further, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz6" or "fz9", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), for the first opening time. It is determined that the wait time is 2500 msec, the wait time is 600 msec, and the second opening time is 2500 msec.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the non-time saving gaming state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is not. Among the open patterns of the ordinary electric accessory 146 in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving gaming state C, the most advantageous degree is the disadvantageous aspect.

The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 146 is the degree of ease of winning the game ball to the second starting port 140 when the ordinary electric accessory 146 is opened.

When the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the A time saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is the non-time saving game state, the A time saving game state, and the B time saving. Among the open patterns of the ordinary electric accessory 146 in the gaming state and the C time saving gaming state, the most advantageous degree is the advantageous mode.

Further, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the B time saving game state is "normal symbol hit" is the hit determination of the normal symbol in the C time saving game state. The degree of advantage is the same as that of the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 146 when the result of the processing is "per ordinary symbol", but the present invention is not limited to this.

[1-4-11. Fluctuation pattern table of ordinary symbols]
FIG. 19 is an example of a variation pattern table of a normal symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine. The variation pattern table of the ordinary symbol executes the variation pattern determination process of the ordinary symbol which is executed in the variable display start process of the ordinary symbol of S293 of FIG. 43 described later when determining the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. When) is referred to. The main CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern table of the normal symbol, and is normal based on the game state and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see FIG. 4). Determine the fluctuation pattern of the symbol. The random value for normal symbol effect selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99. However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the non-time saving game state, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 300,000 msec regardless of whether the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 0 to 99. The variable display time of the normal symbol in the non-time saving game state is the longest among the non-time saving game state, the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state.

Further, in the A time saving game state, when the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 0 to 89, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 90 to 99. In the case of any of the above, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 800 msec.

Further, in the B time saving game state, when the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 0 to 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 40 to 79. If any of the above, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 1000 msec, for example, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 1500 msec, for example. To.

Further, in the C time saving game state, when the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 0 to 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 40 to 79. If any of the above, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 1000 msec, for example, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 1500 msec, for example. To.

As described above, the variable display time of the normal symbol per one variable display is A among the variable display times of the normal symbol in the non-time saving game state, the A time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state, and the C time reduction game state. The expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the time-saving game state is the shortest. Therefore, in the A time-saving game state, the time until the normal electric accessory 146 is released is the shortest among the non-time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state.

Further, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the B time saving game state is the same as the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the C time saving gaming state, but is not limited to this.

[1-5. Details of processing related to the time-saving game state]
[1-5-1. Time reduction number set at the time of time reduction]
In the above description, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the set number of time reductions is the same regardless of the gaming state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed. However, not limited to this, the number of time reductions set when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time reduction hit" is determined according to the gaming state when the hit determination processing of the special symbol is performed. You may do so.

Further, even in the high probability gaming state in which the probability change flag is set to ON, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may include "time saving hit". In this case, although the main CPU derives the display mode of the time saving hit to the special symbol display unit, it does not execute the control to shift to the time saving gaming state, but continuously controls to the high accuracy gaming state. By the way, there is known a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine called a so-called ST machine, which turns the probability change flag from on to off when the variable display of a special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times. In such an ST machine, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol performed in the final game as the high probability gaming state is "time saving hit", the time saving hit is displayed rather than the process of turning off the probability change flag. When the process of deriving the mode is later, the main CPU may control the C time-saving game state after deriving the display mode per time saving.

[1-5-2. Overlapping time-saving game states]
When a plurality of time-saving game states are provided, the time-saving game states may overlap. For example, in the A time saving game state, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state overlap. Further, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time reduction game state, the C time reduction game state and the B time reduction game state overlap. When the time-saving game states overlap in this way, the time-saving game states may be executed in an overlapping manner, or the time-saving gaming states may not be overlapped (that is, "time-saving hit" is ignored and the time-saving hit is invalidated). You may do it. In addition, so that the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state do not overlap, the A time saving specified number of times, which is the end condition of the A time saving game state, is smaller than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time saving game state. It is stipulated.

When the time-saving game states are overlapped, a mode in which the time-saving game states are overlapped and a mode in which the time-saving game states are not overlapped will be described below.

[1-5-2-1. A mode in which time-saving game states are repeatedly executed]
As a mode in which the time-saving game states are repeatedly executed when the time-saving game states overlap, the time-saving game is won in any one of the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C. Occasionally, it is conceivable that the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed and the B time saving game state is repeatedly executed when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-1. A mode in which the C time-saving game state is superimposed on one time-saving game state]
When the "time reduction hit" is won in any one of the time reduction game state A, the time reduction game state B, and the time reduction game state C, the main CPU 201 is displayed on the special symbol display unit 163, 164 for the time reduction. Derivation of display mode. In this case, the main CPU 201 adopts the one having a large number of variable display times of the special symbol that can be executed until the end condition of the time-saving game state is satisfied while maintaining the time-saving performance of one time-saving game state as the time-saving number of times.

For example, if the "time reduction hit" is won in the A time reduction game state and the time reduction remaining number in the A time reduction game state is larger than the time reduction number that can be executed based on this "time reduction hit", the main CPU 201 is A time reduction. While maintaining the time saving performance of the gaming state, unless a "big hit" is derived, the time saving gaming state is controlled until the remaining time saving number of times in the A time saving gaming state is exhausted. To explain by giving specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state is 200 times, the "time reduction hit" is won, and the number of time reductions that can be executed based on this "time reduction hit" is 50. In the case of times, although the display mode of the time reduction hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the time reduction number from here is as long as the "big hit" is not derived while maintaining the time reduction performance in the A time reduction game state. 200 times. Therefore, even if the "time reduction hit" is won in any one of the time reduction game state A, the time reduction game state B, and the time reduction game state C, the appearance of the time reduction number and the time reduction performance is "time reduction". It is the same as the case where the A time saving game state is continued without winning the "hit".

On the other hand, for example, when the "time reduction hit" is won in the A time reduction game state and the number of time reductions that can be executed based on this "time reduction hit" is larger than the time reduction remaining number in the A time reduction game state, the main CPU 201 is A. While maintaining the time saving performance of the time saving game state, unless the "big hit" is derived, the time saving gaming state is controlled until the time saving number set based on the "time saving hit" is exhausted. To explain by giving specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state is 20 times, the "time reduction hit" is won, and the number of time reductions that can be executed based on this "time reduction hit" is 50. In the case of times, the number of time reductions from this point is 50 times unless a "big hit" is derived, while maintaining the time reduction performance in the A time reduction game state. That is, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed 20 times, which is the remaining number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state, after that, the special symbol is executed over 30 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time reduction performance in the A time reduction game state. The variable display of is further executed.

[1-5-2-1-2. A mode in which the B time-saving game state is superimposed on the C time-saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 corresponds to the display mode (that is, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation. Take control.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol does not include the small hit, but in the following, the case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol includes the small hit will be described. ..

First, a case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit" or "missing" in the final change of the ceiling will be described.

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time reduction game state, if the remaining time reduction number in the C time reduction game state is larger than the B time reduction specified number of times, the main CPU 201 maintains the time reduction performance in the C time reduction game state. Unless a "big hit" is derived, the game is controlled to the time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving games in the C time-saving game state is exhausted. To explain with specific numbers, for example, when the number of remaining time reductions in the C time reduction game state is 300, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and when the specified number of time reductions in B is 200 times, the C time reduction game state. The number of time reductions from here is 300 times unless a "big hit" is derived, while maintaining the time reduction performance of. Therefore, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time reduction game state, the appearance of the time reduction frequency and the time reduction performance is the same as the case where the C time reduction game state is continued without the ceiling counter reaching the ceiling value. ..

On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time reduction game state and the B time reduction specified number of times is larger than the time reduction remaining number in the C time reduction game state, the main CPU 201 maintains the time reduction performance in the C time reduction game state. However, unless a "big hit" is derived, the game is controlled to a time-saving game state until the specified number of times of B time-saving is exhausted. Explaining with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state is 20 times, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the number of time reductions that can be executed in the B time reduction game state is 300 times. In this case, the number of time reductions from this point is 300 times unless a "big hit" is derived, while maintaining the time reduction performance in the C time reduction game state. That is, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed 20 times, which is the remaining number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state, after that, the special symbol is executed over 280 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time reduction performance in the C time reduction game state. The variable display of is further executed.

When the variable display of the special symbol is completed in the final change of the ceiling, the main CPU 201 derives the display mode according to the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", the small hit display mode is derived, and when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "miss", the loss display mode is derived. .. When the small hit display mode is derived, it is controlled to the small hit game state, but the main CPU 201 keeps the time saving flag on even during the small hit game state.

Next, in the ceiling final change, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", that is, in the ceiling final change, the transition condition to the B time saving gaming state and the transition condition to the C time saving gaming state are. The case where it holds will be described. In this case, the main CPU 201 starts the control of the B time saving game state before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display units 163, 164, and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is Different controls can be executed depending on whether the control of the B time saving game state is started after being derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164.

First, when the control of the B time saving game state is started before the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the display mode of the time saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. At that time, it is already controlled to the B time reduction game state. Therefore, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance in the B time saving game state, and unless the "big hit" is derived, the time saving number of the B time saving specified number and the time saving number of the C time saving game state is consumed. It is controlled to the time-saving game state.

Next, when the control of the B time saving game state is started after the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the display mode of the time saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. At that time, it is not yet controlled to the B time reduction game state. Therefore, the main CPU 201 satisfies the end condition of the time-saving game state (for example, derivation of a big hit display mode, derivation of a small hit or a specific small hit display mode, etc.) while maintaining the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state. Unless otherwise specified, the control is performed in the time-saving game state until the larger number of time-saving times, the B time-saving specified number of times and the time-saving number of times in the C time-saving gaming state, is exhausted. In this case, when the end condition of the time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving performance is maintained or executed is satisfied, the time-saving gaming state may be terminated.

In addition, when the transition condition to the B time reduction gaming state and the transition condition to the C time reduction gaming state are satisfied in the final change of the ceiling, the sub CPU 301 performs the B time reduction when only the transition condition to the B time reduction gaming state is satisfied. A special display effect different from the transition display effect and the C time reduction transition display effect performed when only the transition condition to the C time reduction gaming state is satisfied may be performed. Further, instead of this, for example, when the time saving performance in the B time saving game state is maintained, the B time saving transition display effect is performed, and when the time saving performance in the C time saving game state is maintained, the C time saving transition display effect is performed. The display effect of either the B time reduction transition display effect or the C time reduction transition display effect may be prioritized.

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state and the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is "big hit", the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state and the B time saving game. It controls the jackpot game state without controlling the state.

[1-5-2-1-3. Time saving performance when executing multiple time saving game states in layers]
In the above, the embodiment in which the C time-saving gaming state is superimposed on one time-saving gaming state and the mode in which the B time-saving gaming state is superimposed on the C time-saving gaming state have been described.

When the specifications are such that a plurality of time-saving game states can be executed in an overlapping manner, the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving game state is maintained. In pachinko gaming machines with such specifications, the time saving performance of multiple time-saving game states that can be executed in layers may be different, but the time-saving performance of multiple time-saving gaming states that can be executed in layers may be the same. preferable.

For example, in the case of a specification in which the C time-saving game state can be executed by superimposing the C time-saving game state on one time-saving game state, it is preferable that the time-saving performance of one time-saving game state and the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state are the same. Further, when the specification is such that the B time saving game state can be superimposed on the C time saving game state, it is preferable that the time saving performance of the C time saving game state and the time saving performance of the B time saving game state are the same.

Further, in a pachinko gaming machine having specifications that allow a plurality of time-saving gaming states to be executed in an overlapping manner, for example, a time-saving gaming state that can be executed later in addition to the previously executed time-saving gaming state is executed first. It may be provided with one time saving performance which is the same as that of the current time saving gaming state, and another time saving performance different from this one time saving performance. Then, when the time-saving game state is executed in combination with the time-saving game state executed earlier, one time-saving performance is activated, and the time-saving gaming state is activated as in the case of activating the time-saving gaming state in the normal gaming state. If it is not executed repeatedly, another time saving performance may be activated.

For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with specifications that can execute the B time-saving game state by superimposing the C time-saving game state on the C time-saving game state, the time-saving performance of the B time-saving game state is the same as that of the C time-saving game state, and this one time-saving performance. For example, two time-saving performances with other time-saving performances different from the performance are provided. Then, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, one time saving performance is activated, and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, for example, in the normal gaming state which is not in any of the time saving gaming states, the other time saving performance is activated. May be activated.

[1-5-3. A mode in which the time-saving game states are not repeatedly executed]
As a mode in which the time-saving game state is not executed repeatedly, a mode in which a hit determination process is performed so that the "time-saving hit" is not included in the lottery target in the time-saving game state, and a mode in which the "time-saving hit" is included in the lottery target in the time-saving game state. It is conceivable that even if the time-saving gaming states overlap, the time-saving gaming states are not executed repeatedly (hereinafter referred to as "the latter aspect"). In the latter aspect, even if one of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state is won in the time-saving game state, this is ignored and the C time-saving game state is repeated. Two modes are conceivable: a mode in which the game is not executed, and a mode in which even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, this is ignored and the B time-saving game state is not executed repeatedly. The above two aspects considered as the latter aspect will be described below.

[1-5-3-1. A mode in which the C time-saving game state is not superimposed on one time-saving game state]
When the "time saving hit" is won in any one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B, and the time saving game state C, as described above, the main CPU 201 is displayed on the special symbol display unit 163, 164. , Derive the display mode per time reduction. However, unless the main CPU 201 has a variable display of the last special symbol in one time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving final variation"), the main CPU 201 does not control to the C time-saving game state based on "time-saving hit", and is one. It is controlled to one time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state is exhausted. In this case, being controlled to one time-saving gaming state (excluding the time-saving final fluctuation) is a condition that hinders the transition to the C time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, when the "time saving hit" is won in the time saving final fluctuation in one time saving game state, the main CPU 201 is set to one time saving gaming state before the display mode of the time saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. Different controls can be executed depending on whether the time saving game state is terminated or when one time saving game state is terminated when the display mode of the time saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163, 164.

First, when one time-saving game state ends before the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the main CPU 201 derives the display mode of the time-saving hit and then changes to the C time-saving game state. Start control.

Next, when one time-saving game state ends when the display mode of time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163, 164, that is, the derivation of the display mode of time-saving hit and the end of one time-saving gaming state are determined. When the interrupt processing is performed within the same interrupt processing, the main CPU 201 may or may not start the control of the C time saving game state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the process of deriving (confirming display) the display mode per time saving is performed before the ending process of the one time saving game state, the main CPU 201 does not control to the C time saving game state. End the time-saving game state. In this case, performing the process of deriving the display mode of the time saving game before the ending process of one time saving game state is a condition that hinders the transition to the C time saving game state.

On the other hand, when the process of deriving (confirming display) the display mode of the time saving hit is performed after the ending process of the one time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the one time saving game state and controls to the C time saving game state. do. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not maintain the time saving performance in one time saving game state, but makes it the time saving performance in the C time saving game state. That is, at the time when the display mode for hitting the time reduction is derived, the main CPU 201 ends the one time reduction game state without controlling to the C time reduction game state if the end processing of the one time reduction game state is not processed. If the end processing of one time-saving game state has already been performed, it is controlled to the C time-saving game state.

[1-5-3-2. A mode in which the B time-saving game state is not superimposed on the C time-saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 corresponds to the display mode (that is, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation. Take control.

First, a case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", "small hit", or "missing" in the final ceiling variation will be described.

In the C time saving game state, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the ceiling final fluctuation is "time saving hit", "small hit" or "loss", the main CPU 201 consumes the remaining time saving number of times in the C time saving game state. Until it is played, it is controlled to the C time saving game state.

However, when the number of remaining time reductions in the C time reduction game state is 0 in the final ceiling variation, the main CPU 201 may or may not start the control of the B time reduction game state according to the processing of the program. Specifically, when the end processing of the C time reduction game state is performed before the start processing of the B time reduction game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time reduction game state and controls the B time reduction game state. On the other hand, when the end processing of the C time reduction game state is performed after the start processing of the B time reduction game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time reduction game state without controlling to the B time reduction game state. That is, at the time when the main CPU 201 is about to start the B time saving game state, if the end processing of the C time saving game state is not processed, the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state without controlling to the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state is finished. If the end processing of the game state has already been performed, the game state is controlled to the B time reduction game state. In this case, performing the end processing of the C time reduction game state after the start processing of the B time reduction game state is a condition that hinders the transition to the B time reduction game state.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit" in the final ceiling variation, the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state and starts controlling the big hit game state.

[1-6. Main control process]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be described.
[1-6-1. Main control main processing]
First, the main process (main control main process) executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 23. 20 to 23 are flowcharts showing an example of the main control main process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure signal is at the High level (S11). Although not shown, it goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table prior to S11.

When it is determined in S11 that the power failure signal is not at the High level (when the determination in S11 is NO), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process in S11.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is at the High level (when the determination in S11 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 (S12). In this process, the backup clear switch 176 is turned on / off and the setting key 174 is turned on / off. That is, the ON / OFF state of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is stored in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. Further, in this process, the game permission flag is set to off. After executing the process of S12, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs wait processing. In this process, the start wait on the sub control circuit 300 side is performed. The start-up waiting time (wait period) in this case is, for example, 1200.07 msec. After executing the process of S13, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S14.

While waiting for the sub-control circuit 300 to start, the main CPU 201 may, for example, check the interrupt request signal, output the WDT when the interrupt request signal is generated, and initialize various sensors at predetermined timings. The output processing of the conversion signal may be performed.

In S14, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure before startup (previous time) was a normal power failure. In this process, it is determined whether the power failure is normal or abnormal based on the value stored in the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 203.

When it is determined in S14 that the power failure is not normal (NO in S14), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S14 that the power is normally cut off (YES in S14), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15), and then works. The checksum value of the area is collated (S16). After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the collation result is abnormal.

When it is determined in S17 that the collation result is not abnormal, that is, normal (when the determination in S17 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22. The processing after S22 will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S17 that the collation result is abnormal, that is, not normal (YES in S17), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. That is, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, a NO determination is made, and if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, or any of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176. If either one is off, a YES judgment is made.

When it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not off, that is, both are on (NO in S18), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S21. The processing of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off (when the determination in S18 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 sets the security signal of the external terminal to ON. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs an error display process on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). In this process, data for error display is set in the output port of the I / O port 205 to which the signal is output to the performance display monitor 170. As a result, the predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 170 lights up, and an error display is performed. The main CPU 201 enters an endless loop after executing the process of S20.

In this way, if the previous power failure was not a normal power failure, or if the collation result of the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 was not normal, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch Until it is determined that both of the 176 are on, the game cannot be executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

Next, the processing of S21 will be described. In S21, the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating that the setting has been changed in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. This process is performed at the time of abnormal startup, and the value indicating that the setting is changed is stored again. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22.

In S22, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S22, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs a startup state determination process. In this process, the current start state (power recovery / setting change / setting confirmation / RAM clear) is determined based on the value of the start control flag stored in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S23, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs RAM setting processing at startup. In this process, a process of clearing a work area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags and the like (for example, construction of a work area and address setting) is performed. It should be noted that this process is performed in common at the time of recovery from power failure and the time of initialization, and the backup area is not cleared. After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S25.

In S25, the main CPU 201 performs a startup initial setting process. In this process, the initial setting process according to the current startup state (power recovery / setting change / setting confirmation / RAM clear) is performed. The details of the initial setting process at startup will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. After executing the process of S25, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt prohibition process. After executing the process of S26, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs a power interruption process. After executing the process of S27, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S28. The details of the power interruption process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

In S28, the main CPU 201 performs an initial value random number update process. In this process, the initial value random number of various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a special symbol hit) is updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S29.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. This determination process is performed based on the value of the game permission flag.

When it is determined in S29 that the game is not permitted (NO in S29), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S30.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S29 that the game is permitted (YES in S29), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the process after S26.

In S31, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing the process of S31, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 201 performs the performance display monitor aggregation calculation process. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. Further, this process is performed using an area (outside the area) different from the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S32, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 performs a restore process of the register saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S34, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the system cycle time has elapsed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 msec, which is three times the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec).

When it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO in S35), the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the processing of S26 and performs the processing after S26.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (YES in S35), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt-prohibited section in the main control main process. After executing the process of S36, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S37.

In this embodiment, in the main control main process, for example, an interrupt prohibition section of 6 msec (process section of S26 to S35) is performed before execution of various processes related to game control (for example, processes of S37 to S44) described later. Is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed every 6 msec (every system cycle), for example. In this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt prohibition section is set to three times the interrupt cycle has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 updates the system timer. The system timer is a timer that manages the system cycle (for example, 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in the system cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission / reception processing. In this process, a command transmission / reception process for payout control is mainly performed. After executing the process of S38, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol control process. In this process, a process related to the special symbol game is performed. The details of this special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26. After executing the process of S39, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 201 normally performs a symbol control process. In this process, a process related to a normal symbol game is performed. The details of this ordinary symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. After executing the process of S40, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs a game operation display unit control process. In this process, display data to be output to each display unit of the LED unit 160 (for example, the first special symbol display unit 163, the second special symbol display unit 164, etc.) is set. After executing the process of S41, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S42.

In S42, the main CPU 201 performs game information data generation processing. In this process, external terminal board pulse signal control process, output data setting process, test firing test signal generation process, and the like are performed. The test firing test signal generation process is performed using an area (outside the area) different from the working area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs a state monitoring process. In this process, launch position determination process, game abnormality detection determination process, payout abnormality detection determination process, and the like are performed. In the launch position determination process, if there is a change in the launch position (for example, right-handed or left-handed), the launch position command is reserved for transmission. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, the game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, the payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the process after S26.

[1-6-2. Initial setting process at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the startup initial setting process performed in S25 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the startup initial setting process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of loading the start control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S52.

In S52, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure.

When it is determined in S52 that the value of the start control flag is not a value indicating recovery from power failure (when the determination in S52 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S54.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S52 that the value of the start control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure (when the determination in S52 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs the second normal game pre-processing. The details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. When the second normal pre-game processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to on, and the game permission state is set. After executing the process of S53, the main CPU 201 ends the initial setting process at startup, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation.

When it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation state flag is not a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation, that is, a value indicating RAM clear (when S54 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S56.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation state flag is a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation (when the determination in S54 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the setting operation command. The setting operation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S336 in FIG. 46 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 ends the initial setting process at startup, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S56, the main CPU 201 performs the first normal game pre-processing. The details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. When the first normal pre-game processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to on, and the game permission state is set. After executing the process of S56, the main CPU 201 ends the initial setting process at startup, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

[1-6-3. Power failure processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the power interruption process performed in S27 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of power interruption processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is on (S61).

When it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not on (NO determination in S61), the main CPU 201 ends the power interruption process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is ON (when the determination in S61 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs a checksum value calculation process. After executing the process of S62, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the value of the power failure detection flag in the corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203, respectively. In this case, it is stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the XINT detection flag. Then, after executing the process of S64, the main CPU 201 performs the RAM access prohibition value setting process (S65). After executing the process of S65, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset wait process until the power is cut off.

[1-6-4. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol control process performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 26, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S71. The control status number of the special symbol is a number indicating the status (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S71, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S72.

Although not shown, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S71 in executing the special symbol control process.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols when executing the special symbol control process. Then, when both the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs the demo display command transmission reservation process. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 300 receives the demo display command, the sub CPU 301 performs a demo display effect.

In S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S71 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in the variable display waiting state.

When it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S72 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S75.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S72 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S73.

In S73, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not reserved (when the determination in S73 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is not held (NO determination in S74), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process. , The process is returned to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S74 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs processing, S75. Move to.

Returning to S73, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S73 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs processing. Move to S75.

In S75, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol management process. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. After executing the process of S75, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S71 to S75) within the interrupt prohibition section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved as the first pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S75) is executed in a higher priority than the first special symbol. The priority variable machine to be used has been explained, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S75) is executed in a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 120. Alternatively, it may be a sequentially variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning the second starting port 140.

[1-6-5. Special design management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S75 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When the control status number is "0" (when S72 is YES determination), the second special symbol is the processing target when S73 is YES determination, and when S74 is YES determination, the special symbol management processing is performed. The first special symbol is the processing target. Further, when the control state number is not "0" (when the determination in S72 is NO), the special symbol being executed is the processing target of the special symbol management process.

Further, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 27 are the control state numbers of the special symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S81).

When it is determined in S81 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S81 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in S81 that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S81 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S83. The main CPU 201 performs the processing after S83 based on the control state number read out in the processing of S82.

In S83, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. The process of S83 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. The process of S84 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S85.

In S85, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. The process of S85 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S86.

In S86, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process. The process of S86 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of the large winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S87.

In S87, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening control process. The process of S87 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this large winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S88.

In S88, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end process. The process of S88 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

After completing the processes of S83 to S88, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26).

[1-6-6. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the special symbol variable display start processing executed by the main CPU 201 in S83 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 28, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is “0” (S91).

When it is determined in S91 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "0" (when the determination in S91 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when the determination in S91 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 shifts the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs a hit determination process for a special symbol. In this process, the hit determination of the special symbol is performed by referring to the hit determination table of the special symbol (see FIG. 10) and using the random value for the special symbol hit determination. Further, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving hit flag on when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a time saving hit, and sets the big hit flag on when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a big hit. do. In the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol does not include a small hit, but if the pachinko gaming machine includes a small hit in the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol, the hit of the special symbol If the result of the judgment process is a small hit, the small hit flag is set to on. After executing the process of S93, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S94. The time saving hit flag is turned off at the transition to the C time saving gaming state, and the big hit flag is turned off at the start of the big hit gaming state. If the pachinko gaming machine includes a small hit as a result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the small hit flag is turned off at the start of the small hit gaming state.

In the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S93), first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined by this process that it is not a big hit, a process of determining whether or not it is a time saving hit is performed. If it is determined in this process that it is not a time saving hit, it is determined to be a loss.

In S94, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination process (S93) of the special symbol (for example, time saving hit, big hit or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S94, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs a hit type determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the type of hit when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a hit (time saving hit, big hit). In this process, the hit type is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S94) with reference to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 13). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of hits are used, but one type of big hit may be used, and one type of hit may be one. Further, instead of or in addition to having a plurality of types of hits, a plurality of types of loss may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol does not include the small hit, but the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may include the small hit, and a plurality of types of such small hits may be provided. good. After executing the process of S95, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol. This process is a process of determining or determining a variation pattern of a special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referred to, for example, the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process (S93) of the special symbol, the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), and the random value for reach determination. Or / and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random value for effect selection and the like. It should be noted that the variation pattern table referred to when performing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol may be different depending on the game state and the like. After executing the process of S96, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process of the special symbol. In this process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process (S96) of the special symbol is determined as the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15). After executing the process of S97, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S98.

In S98, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting "1" in the control state number of the special symbol. In this way, by performing the process of setting the control status number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control status number, the special symbol variable display end process (FIG. 27) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display start process. S84) will be performed. After executing the process of S98, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S99.

In S99, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state (for example, the number of remaining probable changes, the number of remaining time reductions, etc.) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are updated. After executing the process of S99, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S100.

In S100, the main CPU 201 performs a game state management process. In this process, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc.) are mainly updated. After executing the process of S100, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-disabled section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly, game state management process (S100), special symbol effect start command transmission reservation process (S101)) within the interrupt-disabled section. It is preferable to do it in.

[1-6-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S84 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S111).

When it is determined in S111 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "1" (when the determination in S111 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when the determination in S111 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S85 in FIG. 27) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be done. After executing the process of S112, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S113.

In S113, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S113, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S114.

In S114, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. The symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol is fixed (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state such as the number of remaining probable changes and the number of remaining time reductions. You may manage the number. After executing the process of S114, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-6-8. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S85 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S121).

When it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (when the determination in S121 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 27). See).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when the determination in S121 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a big hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a big hit.

In S122, when it is determined that the special symbol that is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating the big hit (when the determination in S122 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 201 performs the start setting process of the jackpot game control process. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal or the like) output to the hall computer 186 (both see FIG. 6) is generated and updated via the external terminal board 184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S123, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S124. The signal output to, for example, the hall computer 186 or the island computer via the external terminal board 184 will be described later.

Further, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control of S123, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a probability change flag, a probability change counter, a time reduction flag, and a time reduction counter.

In S124, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201, for example, performs a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening 131 is opened (S125), a process of setting a big hit signal to the external terminal board 184 (S126), and sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". Processing (S127), game state specification parameter setting processing (S128), transmission reservation processing (S129) of the jackpot start display command, and the like are performed. By performing the process (S127) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the completion of this special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening opening preparation process (FIG. 27). S86) will be performed. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

Returning to S122, when it is determined in this S122 that the special symbol that is not a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is not the stop display mode indicating a big hit (when the determination in S122 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S130.

In S130, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end process. This special symbol game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. When the special symbol game end process is performed, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S121 to S130) within the interrupt prohibition section.

[1-6-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S130 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving management process (S131). The details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process of S131, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 201 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" in this way, it is possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process (S134) of the special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S134, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 30).

If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S93 in FIG. 28) is a loss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time reduction flag. Therefore, even if the display mode of loss is derived, the gaming state does not shift.

[1-6-10. Time saving management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S131 during the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 31) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a counter update process (S141). The details of this counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. After executing the process of S141, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 performs a counter determination process. The details of this counter determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. After executing the process of S142, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving management process, and returns the process to the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 31).

[1-6-11. Counter update process]
Next, the counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of a counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S141 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 performs a time reduction counter update process (S151). The details of the time reduction counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. After executing the process of S151, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 201 performs a ceiling counter update process. The details of this ceiling counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. After executing the process of S152, the main CPU 201 ends the counter update process and returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-12. Time saving counter update process]
Next, the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S151 during the counter update process (see FIG. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The time saving counter update process shown in FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a process when a plurality of time saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner when a plurality of time saving game states are overlapped.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving flag is turned on and the time saving counter is larger than 0 (S161). In this process, YES is determined when both the time saving flag on and the time saving counter is larger than 0 are satisfied, and NO is determined if either one is not satisfied.

The time saving flag is set to on when shifting to the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state. The probability change flag is set to on when shifting to the high probability gaming state.

The time reduction counter indicates the number of time reductions executed in each of the A time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state, or the C time reduction game state.

When the transition condition to the A time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state or / and the C time reduction game state is satisfied, the time reduction counter for the time reduction game state in which the transition condition is satisfied is set.

In this embodiment, a subtraction method is adopted in which the time reduction counter is subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol is completed, and the time reduction game state is terminated when the time reduction counter becomes 0, but this is not limited to this. Instead, an addition method may be adopted in which the time reduction counter is added when the variable display of the special symbol is completed, and the time reduction game state is terminated when the time reduction counter is set. Also, instead of updating (subtracting or adding) the time reduction counter when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the time reduction counter is updated at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the time reduction counter becomes 0 (). The time saving game state may be completed when the time saving counter is set (in the case of the subtraction method) or when the time saving number is reached (in the case of the addition method).

In S161, when it is determined that both the time saving flag on and the time saving counter being larger than 0 are not satisfied (NO in S161), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process and performs the process. The process returns to the counter update process (FIG. 33).

On the other hand, when the time saving flag is turned on and the time saving counter is determined to be larger than 0 in S161 (when the determination in S161 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving counter (S162). After executing the process of S162, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving mode = 3 and the C time saving counter is larger than 0. In this process, when the time saving mode = 3 and the C time saving counter is larger than 0, a YES determination is made. When the determination in S163 is YES, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S164.

The C time saving counter is a counter set when the transition condition to the C time saving gaming state is satisfied during the time saving gaming state. Although not shown in the flowchart, this C time reduction counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when the B time reduction counter, which will be described later, is set.

The time saving mode is a flag set when a plurality of time saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner. In this embodiment, when the time saving mode is configured with, for example, 2 bits, and the C time saving game state is executed overlapping with the time saving game state executed earlier, "time saving mode = 3" is set. Further, when the B time saving game state is executed overlapping with the time saving game state executed earlier, "time saving mode = 2" is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S163 that both the time saving mode = 3 and the C time saving counter being larger than 0 are not satisfied (NO in S163), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S165.

In S164, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the C time reduction counter. For this process as well, an addition method may be adopted instead of the subtraction method. After executing the process of S164, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S165.

In S165, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving mode = 2 and the B time saving counter is larger than 0. In this process, when the time saving mode = 2 and the B time saving counter is larger than 0, a YES determination is made. When the determination in S165 is YES, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S166.

The B time reduction counter is a counter set when the transition condition to the B time reduction game state is satisfied during the time reduction game state (in the present embodiment, during the C time reduction game state). Although not shown in the flowchart, this B time reduction counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when the C time reduction counter is set.

On the other hand, in S165, when it is determined that both the time reduction mode = 2 and the B time reduction counter is larger than 0 are not satisfied (NO determination in S165), the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction counter update process. , The process is returned to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In S166, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the B time reduction counter. For this process as well, an addition method may be adopted instead of the subtraction method. After executing the process of S166, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

Although not shown, when the C time reduction counter = 0 as a result of the processing of S164 or when the B time reduction counter = 0 as a result of the processing of S166, the main CPU 201 is subjected to the time reduction. Set the mode to off (= 0).

By the way, when a plurality of time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, not only the two time-saving gaming states may be overlapped, but also three or more time-saving gaming states may be executed in an overlapping manner. In this case, since the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state do not overlap as described above, the case where three or more time-saving game states overlap is the A time-saving game state or the B time-saving game state. It corresponds to the case where one or more C time saving gaming states overlap, and the case where three or more C time saving gaming states overlap.

[1-6-13. Ceiling counter update process]
Next, the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S152 during the counter update process (see FIG. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (S171). The ceiling count prohibition flag is a flag that is set on when the probability variation flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, when the probability variation flag is off and the ceiling counter has not reached the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is off. The value of the ceiling counter is stored in the main RAM 203.

The ceiling value is predetermined as a value peculiar to the pachinko gaming machine as a condition for shifting to the B time saving gaming state. However, instead of this, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling value when the jackpot game state ends, the backup clear process is performed, the dedicated operating means for resetting the value of the ceiling counter is operated, and the like. The processing may be performed.

In S171, when the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (when the determination in S171 is NO), that is, when the ceiling count prohibition flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and performs the counter update process (counter update process). (See FIG. 33).

In S171, when the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (when the determination in S171 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S172.

In S172, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

[1-6-14. Counter judgment processing]
Next, the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of a counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S142 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving transition determination process (S181). The details of this time saving transition determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. After executing the process of S181, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S182.

In S182, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving transition process. The details of this time saving transition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S183.

In S183, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time reduction counter is smaller than 1.

In S183, when it is determined that the time reduction counter is not smaller than 1 (NO determination in S183), that is, when the time reduction counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S185.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S183 that the time reduction counter is smaller than 1 (YES in S183), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S184.

In S184, the main CPU 201 turns off the time saving flag. After executing the process of S184, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S185.

When it is determined in S183 that the time reduction counter is smaller than 1 (YES in S183), both the B time reduction counter and the C time reduction counter should be smaller than 1 (that is, should be 0). However, in view of the possibility that some trouble may occur in executing the process by the main CPU 201, for example, when the B time reduction counter or the time reduction counter is 1 or more even though S183 is a YES determination. , An abnormality alarm may be output, or other abnormality processing may be executed. Further, in place of or in addition to this abnormal time processing, when S183 is determined to be YES, not only the time saving flag is turned off (see S184), but also the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter are reset to shorten the time. Consistency between the counter, the B time reduction counter, and the C time reduction counter may be achieved.

In S185, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process (S186) of the time saving transition command. The time saving transition command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S186, the main CPU 201 ends the counter determination processing and returns the processing to the time saving management processing (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-15. Time saving transition judgment processing]
Next, the time saving transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. In this process, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, a determination process for shifting to the B time saving game state is performed. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S181 during the counter determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is off (S191).

In S191, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not off (when S191 is NO determination), that is, when the probability variation flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition determination process, and performs the process as a counter determination process (counter determination process). (See FIG. 36). That is, when the probability change flag is on, it is possible not to shift to the B time saving game state.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S191 that the probability change flag is off (when the determination in S191 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling arrival flag is off and the ceiling counter is the ceiling value.

The ceiling arrival flag is a flag that is set to be turned on when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and is a flag indicating whether or not the B time reduction game state has been controlled in the past.

In this embodiment, the maximum number of times that the game can be changed to the B time reduction game state between the end of the big hit game state and the end of the next big hit game state is, for example, once unless RAM clearing or the like is performed. That is, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value and is controlled to the B time saving gaming state, but the B time saving gaming state ends and shifts to the normal gaming state without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, for example, RAM clear etc. is performed. Unless it is done, it will not be controlled to the B time reduction game state again until the next big hit game state ends.

Therefore, in S192, not only whether or not the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value, but also whether or not the ceiling arrival flag is off is determined, so that the B time shortening game state is once controlled. However, when the B time-shortening gaming state ends and the game shifts to the normal gaming state, the B time-saving gaming state is not controlled again.

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 2201 sets the ceiling arrival flag to off and clears the ceiling counter, for example, when the condition device is operated.

However, the process of setting the ceiling arrival flag to off and / and the process of clearing the ceiling counter are executed when the condition device is activated and when the RAM is cleared by changing the setting (for example, the setting change in FIG. 47 described later). The first normal game pre-processing (see S344) that is called as a subroutine during the execution of the process, or when the RAM is cleared without changing the settings (for example, the first that is called as a subroutine during the execution of the startup initial setting process of FIG. 24). (1) The normal game pre-processing (see S56) may also be executed.

When it is determined in S192 that both the ceiling arrival flag is off and the ceiling counter is the ceiling value (NO determination in S192), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition determination process. , The process is returned to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36). When the ceiling arrival flag is on, S192 is determined to be NO. Further, even if the ceiling arrival flag is off, if the ceiling counter is not the ceiling value, S192 is determined as NO.

On the other hand, in S192, when the ceiling arrival flag is off and the ceiling counter is determined to be the ceiling value (when the determination in S192 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON. After executing the process of S193, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling flag to ON. The ceiling flag is a flag indicating that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S196.

In S196, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling arrival flag to ON. After executing the process of S196, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving shift determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-16. Time saving transition processing]
Next, the time saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 in S182 during the counter determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the probability change flag is off (S202).

In S202, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not off (when S202 is NO determination), that is, when the probability variation flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process, and the process is counter determination process (FIG. FIG. 36). By doing so, when the probability change flag is on, neither the B time saving game state nor the C time saving game state can be started.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S202 that the probability change flag is off (S202 is determined to be YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S203.

In S203, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON.

In S203, when it is determined that the ceiling flag is not on (NO in S203), that is, when the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S206.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is on (YES in S203), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S205.

In S205, the main CPU 201 executes the B time saving control mode determination process as the process related to the transition to the B time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of time reductions to be set in the B time reduction counter, the time reduction mode to be set to 2, the time reduction performance, and the like are determined. After executing the process of S205, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S208.

The number of time reductions set in the B time reduction counter is a predetermined number of times. Further, among the time saving performances, the winning probability of "normal symbol hit" is as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16). Further, among the time saving performances, the opening pattern (opening number of times, opening time, wait time) of the ordinary electric accessory 146 is shown in the ordinary symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the ordinary symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 18). As you can see. Further, among the time saving performances, the variable display time of the normal symbol is as shown in the variation pattern table of the normal symbol (see FIG. 19).

In S206, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving hit flag is on.

In S206, when it is determined that the time reduction hit flag is not on (NO determination in S206), that is, when the time reduction hit flag is off, the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction transition process, and the process is counter determination process. Return to (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, in S206, when it is determined that the time reduction hit flag is ON (S206 is YES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S207.

In S207, the main CPU 201 executes a C time saving control mode determination process as a process related to the transition to the C time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of time reductions to be set in the C time reduction counter, the time reduction mode to be set to 3, and the time reduction performance are determined. After executing the process of S207, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S208.

The number of time reductions set in the C time reduction counter is determined according to the selected symbol command with reference to the hit type determination table (see, for example, FIG. 13). Further, among the time saving performances, the winning probability of "normal symbol hit" is as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16). Further, among the time saving performances, the opening pattern (opening number of times, opening time, wait time) of the ordinary electric accessory 146 is shown in the ordinary symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the ordinary symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 18). As you can see. Further, among the time saving performances, the variable display time of the normal symbol is as shown in the variation pattern table of the normal symbol (see FIG. 19).

In S208, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving setting process. The details of this time reduction setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. After executing the process of S208, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving shift process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-17. Time saving setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 in S208 during the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving flag is on (S211).

When it is determined in S211 that the time saving flag is on (when the determination in S211 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S212.

The case where S211 is YES is determined when the probability change flag is off and, for example, the B time reduction game state is repeatedly executed while the C time reduction game state is executed first (ceiling counter = ceiling value). Case), or when the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state is executed first and the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed (when the "time saving hit" is won) is equivalent. do.

Although not shown, when the B time saving game state is repeatedly executed in the state where the C time saving game state is executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time saving mode = 2" and is determined in S205. B Set the time reduction counter. Further, when the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed in the state where the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state is executed first, the main CPU 201 is set to "time saving mode = 3". At the same time, the C time reduction counter determined in S207 is set.

In S211 when it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (S211 is NO determination), that is, when the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S214.

In S212, the main CPU 201 compares the current time reduction counter (the number of time reduction remaining in the previously executed time reduction game state) with the new time reduction number (the number of time reductions determined in S205 or S207), and presents the current time. Determines if the time reduction counter is less than the new number of time reductions.

In S212, when it is determined that the current time reduction counter is not smaller than the new time reduction number (when S212 is NO determination), that is, when the current time reduction counter is larger than the new time reduction number, the main CPU 201 is subjected to the time reduction. The setting process is terminated, and the process is returned to the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, in S212, when it is determined that the current time reduction counter is larger than the new time reduction number (YES in S212), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving counter resetting process. In this process, when the C time-saving game state is executed first and the B time-saving game state is repeatedly executed, or when the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, or the C time-saving game state is executed first. When the C time reduction game state is repeatedly executed in the present state, the larger time reduction number of the current time reduction counter value (that is, the time reduction remaining number) and the new time reduction number is reset as a new time reduction counter. .. However, even if the time reduction counter resetting process (S213) is performed, the main CPU 201 does not reset the B time reduction counter and the C time reduction counter. After executing the process of S213, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 38).

It should be noted that, when the C time-saving game state is executed first and the B time-saving game state is repeatedly executed, or when the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, or the C time-saving game state is executed first. When the C time-saving game states are repeatedly executed, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving game state. That is, the time saving performance of the previously executed time saving game state can be changed to the time saving performance of the new time saving game state, or the time saving game corresponding to the larger of the current time saving counter and the new time saving number of times. It will not be changed to the time saving performance of the state.

As described above, the time saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment), and is a "normal symbol hit". The winning probability, the variable display time of the normal symbol, or / and the opening pattern (opening number, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the normal electric accessory 146.

By the way, in this embodiment, by providing the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter, it is possible to internally manage that the two time saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner. Then, in the above-mentioned time saving counter resetting process (S213), the larger number of the current time saving counter value and the new time saving number is reset as a new time saving counter. However, even if the two time-saving game states are executed internally, the time-saving performance that appears on the surface (which the player can grasp) is the above-mentioned two time-saving game states that are executed internally. Of these, only the time-saving performance for any one of the time-saving gaming states. Therefore, when a plurality of time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner without internally managing that two time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner (that is, without providing a B time-saving counter and a C time-saving counter). , The value of the current time reduction counter and the new time reduction number, whichever is greater, may be reset as a new time reduction counter.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving mode setting process. This process is executed when S211 is determined to be NO, that is, when the non-time-saving game state is changed to the B time-saving game state (when the ceiling counter = ceiling value), or when the non-time-saving game state is changed to the C time-saving game state. This is the process to be performed when the process is transferred to and executed (when the "time saving hit" is won). In this process, the number of time reductions and the time reduction performance determined by the B time reduction control mode determination process (S205) or the C time reduction control mode determination process (S207) are set. After executing the process of S214, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag on. After executing the process of S215, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 38).

As described above, in the above-mentioned time saving management process described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, when the main CPU 201 finishes the process of shifting to the B time saving gaming state and the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation is completed. I'm going to. In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol does not include the small hit, but in the case of the pachinko gaming machine in which the result of the hit determination process of the hit determination process includes the small hit, the first in the ceiling final change. The result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a small hit. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol in the final ceiling variation is a small hit, the main CPU 201 performs a process of shifting to the B time saving game state based on the end of the small hit game state. Good to do.

Further, in the above-mentioned time saving management process described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the main CPU 201 performs the transition process to the B time saving gaming state when the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transition process to the B time reduction gaming state may be performed based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the final fluctuation of the ceiling. In particular, in the first pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, the B time saving game is based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the final fluctuation of the ceiling. It is preferable to perform the transition process to the state. This is because if the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation is completed, the game shifts to the B time saving game state, and the other special symbol is variable during the variable display of one of the special symbols as the final ceiling variation. This is because when the display is started, the other variable display of the special symbol cannot benefit from the B time reduction game state, and the interest may be reduced. In the first pachinko gaming machine, the variable display of the special symbol is not performed with a long fluctuation such as 600,000 msec. However, in a pachinko gaming machine that can perform variable display of a special symbol due to such a long fluctuation, the transition process to the B time shortening gaming state is performed based on the start of variable display of the special symbol as the final fluctuation of the ceiling. As a result, even when the variable display of the special symbol, which is the final variation of the ceiling, is performed with a long variation, it is possible to avoid the delay of the start of the B time-shortening gaming state.

Further, in the above-mentioned time saving management process described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the B time saving control mode determination process (S205) as the process related to the transition to the B time saving gaming state is shifted to the C time saving gaming state. The process is prioritized over the C time saving control mode determination process (S207) as the process related to the above (see S203 to S207 in FIG. 38), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the C time saving control mode determination process (S207) as a process related to the transition to the C time saving gaming state has priority over the B time saving control mode determination process (S205) as a process related to the transition to the B time saving gaming state. You may do it.

Further, in the above-mentioned ceiling counter update process described with reference to FIG. 35, the ceiling counter is not updated when the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (S171 in FIG. 35 is NO determination), but this is limited to this. I can't. For example, in the ST machine or the pachinko gaming machine that performs the probability change fall lottery, the ceiling counter may be updated when the variable display of the special symbol is performed even when the probability change flag is on. In this case, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it does not shift to the B time reduction game state, and when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability variation counter reaches the ceiling value, it may shift to the B time reduction game state. .. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not shift to the B time saving game state only when "ceiling counter = ceiling value", but shifts to the B time saving gaming state when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability variation counter becomes the ceiling value. Processing will be performed.

Further, the ceiling value, which is a condition for shifting to the B time saving game state, is preferably within a predetermined range (for example, 2.5 to 3.0 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off. In this embodiment, for example, as shown in the hit determination table of the special symbol (see FIG. 10), the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off is 1/319 (when the set value is 1), so the ceiling value. Is preferably in the range of 319 × 2.5 to 319 × 3.0 (times).

Further, it is preferable that the upper limit of the B time reduction specified number of times, which is the end condition of the B time reduction game state, is a specified multiple (for example, 3.8 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off. Similarly, regarding the upper limit of the C time reduction specified number of times, which is the end condition of the C time reduction game state, up to the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off by the specified number (for example, 3. (Up to 8 times) is preferable. In this embodiment, since the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off is 1/319 (when the set value is 1), the B time reduction specified number and the C time reduction specified number are both approximately 1212 (319 × 319 ×). It is preferable to set 3.8) as the upper limit. It is not essential that the upper limit of the specified number of times of B time reduction and the upper limit of the specified number of times of C time reduction are the same value.

By the way, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine such as the first pachinko gaming machine, which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different jackpot probabilities such as setting 1 to setting 6, as described above. , The time saving hit probability is a common probability for all set values. In such a case, the ceiling value, which is the condition for shifting to the B time saving game state, is the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the probability variation flag is off) by a specified number (for example, 3.0) regardless of the set value. If this is the case, the ceiling value will differ depending on the set value, and there is a risk that the set set value will be detected by the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of the set value, the ceiling value is not determined by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the probability variation flag is off) by a specified number. It is preferable to set the same value regardless of the set value.

[1-6-18. Modification example related to time saving management processing]
In the above-mentioned time saving management process (hereinafter referred to as “time saving management process of this embodiment”) described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the ceiling counter update process (see FIG. 35) is the special symbol game end process. (See FIG. 31). Further, the process related to the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is prioritized over the process related to the transition to the C time-saving gaming state. Furthermore, a transition flag to the B time reduction gaming state (ceiling flag) and a transition flag to the C time reduction gaming state (time reduction hit flag) are separately provided, and when the ceiling flag is on, the transition to the B time reduction gaming state is performed. When the time saving hit flag is on, the state is changed to the C time saving game state. However, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process, the priority of the transition to the B time saving game state and the transition to the C time saving game state, the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state. Whether to make the migration flag separate or common is not limited to the above, and the time saving management process can be performed in various variations.

For example, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the variable stop time, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the transition flag of the C time saving game state are set. May be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the fluctuation start time, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the transition flag of the C time saving game state are set. May be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the fluctuation start time, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the transition flag of the C time saving game state are set. May be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the fluctuation start time, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the transition flag of the C time saving game state are set. May be provided as a common flag.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the fluctuation start time, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the transition flag of the C time saving game state are set. May be provided as a common flag.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the variable stop time, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the transition flag of the C time saving game state are set. May be provided separately.

Also, even if the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the variable stop time, and after confirming that the "time saving hit" is not won when reaching the ceiling, the game is shifted to the B time saving game state. good.

Further, when a plurality of time saving game states are not executed in an overlapping manner, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving counter when the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is larger than 0, and 1 in other cases. It is better not to subtract.

[1-7. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the large winning opening opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S86 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S251).

When it is determined in S251 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "3" (when the determination in S251 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when the determination in S251 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S252.

In S252, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. The count value (round counter value) of the round counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S252, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit value.

When it is determined in S253 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value (when the determination in S253 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S254. On the other hand, when it is determined in S253 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not the upper limit value (when the determination in S253 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S257.

In S254, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process (S254) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, the big hit end process (FIG. 27) is performed after the end of the special winning opening opening preparation process. S88) will be performed. After executing the process of S254, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S255.

In S255, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the jackpot end display command (S256). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S256, the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S257, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S258.

In S258, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 131, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 131, the number of winning balls at the time of winning the large winning opening 131, and the like are set. .. The number of times the large winning opening 131 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude those whose big prize openings are opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to control the number of rounds to be managed and the control to manage the number of times the large winning opening is opened / closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S258, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S259.

In S259, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening / closing control process. In this process, the opening / closing control data generation process of the large winning opening 131 is performed. After executing the process of S259, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S260.

In S260, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S260) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process, the large winning opening opening control process ( (See S87 in FIG. 27) will be performed. After executing the process of S260, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S261.

In S261, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S261, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S262.

In S262, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the display command during the opening of the large winning opening. The large winning opening open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-1. Grand prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the large winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S87 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S271).

When it is determined in S271 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "4" (when the determination in S271 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when the determination in S271 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S272.

In S272, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won a prize in the large winning opening 131 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6) for counting the number of winning balls to the large winning opening 131 is the value of the maximum winning number. The value of the large winning opening winning counter counted by the count switch 132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S272, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 131 is not the maximum winning number (when the determination in S272 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S273.

On the other hand, in S272, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 131 is the maximum winning number (when the determination in S272 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S274.

In S273, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the large winning opening (see S258 in FIG. 40) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 131 has not elapsed (when the determination in S273 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process as a special symbol management process. Return to (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 131 has elapsed (when the determination in S273 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S274.

In S274, the main CPU 201 performs the closing setting process of the large winning opening 131. After executing the process of S274, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S275.

In S275, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process (S275) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, the preparation for opening the large winning opening is made again after the completion of the large winning opening opening control process. Processing (see S86 in FIG. 27) will be performed. After executing the process of S275, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S276.

In S276, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S276, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S277.

In S277, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S277, the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-2. Big hit end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S88 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S281).

When it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (when the determination in S281 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

When it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when the determination in S281 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S282.

In S282, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, the values of various flags (for example, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.) and various counters (for example, probability variation counter, time reduction counter, symbol fixed number counter, round counter, big winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or the process of resetting is performed. After executing the process of S282, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S283.

In S283, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. However, in the special symbol game end process of FIG. 31, for convenience of explanation, it is shown that the time saving management process (S131) is performed, but strictly speaking, this time saving management process (S131) is a special of S130. Although it is executed in the symbol game end process (see FIG. 30), it is not executed in the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 42) of S283, and the process is skipped. After executing the process of S283, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibition section.

[1-7-3. Ordinary symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S40 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. Needless to say, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 43, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. The numerical values (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 43 are control state numbers of ordinary symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. Note that each process shown in FIG. 43 is not shown as a subroutine for convenience.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the waiting time of the normal symbol is 0 (S291).

When it is determined in S291 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S291 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S291 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is 0 (when the determination in S291 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S292.

In S292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S292, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S293. The main CPU 201 performs the processing after S293 based on the control state number read out in the processing of S292.

In S293, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display start processing of a normal symbol. The process of S293 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". In this variable display start processing of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 is a normal electric accessory when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol, the variation pattern determination process of the normal symbol, and the hit determination process of the normal symbol is the normal symbol hit. The opening pattern (opening number of times, opening time, wait time) of 146 is set. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs the variable display end processing of the normal symbol. The process of S294 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In this process, the main CPU 201 performs various processes when the variable display of the normal symbol is terminated. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S295.

In S295, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol game determination process. The process of S295 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal symbol game determination process, a determination process of a derivation result of a normal symbol (for example, a normal symbol hit or a loss) is performed. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S296.

In S296, the main CPU 201 normally performs an electric accessory opening process. The process of S296 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the opening process of the ordinary electric accessory 146 is performed in a predetermined manner. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S297.

In S297, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol hit termination process. The process of S297 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 finishes the normal symbol per-end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In this embodiment, as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), a random number for normal symbol hit determination is generated in the range (width) of, for example, 0 to 99, and for example, 0 to 79 is normal. It is used as the judgment value data per symbol (in the case of non-time saving game state). Since the normal symbol hit probability is determined by the number of normal symbol hit determination value data with respect to the total random number of the normal symbol hit determination random number, for example, the normal symbol hit probability is 80/100 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is different between the case where the time saving control is executed and the case where the time saving control is not executed, but it may be the same or almost the same. Further, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a relatively long time, for example, 600,000 msec in the non-time reduction game state in which the time reduction control is not executed, whereas it is relatively long, for example, 1000 msec in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed. Only run for a short time. When the time saving control is executed in this way, the execution frequency of the normal electric accessory opening process, that is, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is increased.

[1-7-4. External masquerade interrupt processing]
Next, the external masqueradable interrupt process executed by the control of the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 44. This process is an interrupt process performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, when a power is cut off. Note that FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the external masqueradable interrupt process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S301). After executing the process of S301, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S302.

In S302, the main CPU 201 reads out the state of a predetermined input port of the I / O port 205. The above-mentioned predetermined input port has, for example, a set of states such as a power failure detection line, a backup clear switch line, a sensor abnormality detection line, a radio wave sensor line, an open detection line, a magnetic sensor line, a vibration sensor line, and a solenoid monitoring sensor line. The input port to be used. After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S303.

In S303, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure is detected.

When it is determined in S303 that the power failure is not detected (NO in S303), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S305. On the other hand, when it is determined in S303 that the power failure is detected (when the determination in S303 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S304.

In S304, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating that the power is cut off, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S304, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S305.

In S305, the main CPU 201 performs the restoration processing of the protection register saved in S301. After executing the process of S305, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S306.

In S306, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the external masquerade interrupt process.

[1-7-5. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 with an interrupt cycle of, for example, 2 msec will be described. Note that FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the system timer interrupt process executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S311).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is off (S312). When it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, when the power failure is detected) (when the determination in S312 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326. On the other hand, when it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, when the power failure is not detected) (when the determination in S312 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reading the state of the input port of the I / O port 205 (S314), and shifts the process to S315.

In S315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted based on, for example, the value of the activation control flag. The start control flag is a flag for determining which of the power-on recovery, setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, and the like is the start state when the power is turned on. For example, in the case of recovery from power failure, it is determined that the game is permitted, and in the case of setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, etc., it is determined that the game is not permitted.

The start control flag is composed of a combination of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 on / off information when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, the power is restored, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the setting is changed, and the backup clear switch 176 is off and If the setting key 174 is on, the setting is confirmed, and if the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, it is determined that the RAM is cleared.

When it is determined in S315 that the game is not permitted (NO in S315), the main CPU 201 performs a setting control process (S316). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed in, for example, the system timer interrupt process performed at a cycle of 2 msec, and are performed when the game is not permitted, that is, when the game is not permitted. After executing the setting control process (S316), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326. The details of the setting control process of S316 will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

When the game is not permitted (NO is determined in S315), the main CPU 201 prohibits the launch of the game ball from the launching device 6 (see FIG. 6), a specific switch (for example, setting key 174, backup clear switch 176). Etc.), it is preferable to disable various switches, prohibit payout of prize balls from the payout device 82, and the like.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S315 that the game is permitted (YES in S315), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S317.

In S317, the main CPU 201 executes a process of adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23), and the count value of the interrupt counter is the interrupt in the work area of the main RAM 203. Stored in the counter area. After executing the process of S317, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S318.

In S318, the main CPU 201 updates the interrupt cycle timer. After executing the process of S318, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S319. The interrupt cycle timer is a timer for managing the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec), and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203.

In S319, the main CPU 201 performs a random number update process. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a special symbol hit) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to guarantee the reliability of various random numbers, which are important factors related to the payout. After executing the process of S319, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S320.

In S320, the main CPU 201 performs a switch input detection process. The details of this switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51. After executing the process of S320, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S321.

In S321, the main CPU 201 performs a winning information command setting process. In this process, the winning information command (payout information) is set. After executing the process of S321, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S322.

In S322, the main CPU 201 performs an effect control command transmission process. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process of S322, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S323.

In S323, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing the process of S323, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S324.

In S324, the main CPU 201 performs the performance display monitor control process. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6), and the like are performed. The data stored in this process is in an area (outside the area) different from the work area (outside the area) in which the data necessary for the progress of the game is stored, that is, in the area to be backed up and, for example, when the RAM is cleared. Is stored in the area where the data is not cleared. After executing the process of S324, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S325.

In S325, the main CPU 201 performs a restore process of the register saved in S323. After executing the process of S325, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326.

In S326, the main CPU 201 performs the restoration processing of the protection register saved in S311 and ends the system timer interrupt processing.

[1-7-6. Setting control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the setting control process performed in S316 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 46, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating a setting change (S331).

When it is determined in S331 that the value of the start control flag is a value indicating a setting change (when the determination in S331 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs the setting change process (S332). The details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. After executing the setting change process (S332), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S335.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S331 that the value of the start control flag is not a value indicating a setting change (when the determination in S331 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S333.

In S333, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation.

When it is determined in S333 that the value of the start control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation (YES determination in S333), the main CPU 201 performs the setting confirmation process (S334). The details of this setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. After executing the setting confirmation process (S334), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S335.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S333 that the value of the start control flag is not the value indicating the setting confirmation, that is, when it is determined that the RAM is clear (when the determination in S333 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S337. ..

In S335, the main CPU 201 performs a setting operation display process. In this process, the currently set value is displayed. After executing the process of S335, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S336.

In S336, the main CPU 201 performs an effect control command transmission process. In this process, a command (initialization command, power failure recovery command, or setting operation command) reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S332), the setting confirmation process (S334), or the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 25). Is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process of S336, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S337.

In S337, the main CPU 201 performs WDT (watchdog timer) output processing. In this process (WDT output process), the WDT clear register address read process, the WDT clear process, and the WDT restart process are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is appropriately performed. Then, after the processing of S337, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control processing and returns the processing to the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 45).

[1-7-7. Setting change process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the setting change process performed in S332 during the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. Note that FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the backup clear switch 176 is pressed (S341). This process is performed by reading out the information set in the input port of the I / O port 205.

When it is determined in S341 that the backup clear switch 176 is not pressed (when the determination in S341 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S343. On the other hand, when it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 is pressed (YES in S341), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S342.

In S342, the main CPU 201 performs the update process within the range of the set value. After executing the process of S342, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S343.

In this embodiment, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176 in the setting change process. However, in place of or in addition to this, for example, a setting switch is provided to operate this setting switch. The set value may be changed by operation.

In S343, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key 174 has been turned off (S343).

When it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (when the determination in S343 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46). On the other hand, when it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is turned off (when the determination in S343 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S344.

In S344, the main CPU 201 performs the first normal game pre-processing. The details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. As described above, when this first normal pre-game processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is set. After executing the first normal game pre-processing (S344), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change processing and returns the processing to the setting control processing (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-8. Setting confirmation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the setting confirmation process performed in S334 during the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. Note that FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the setting key 174 has been turned off (S351). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S343 in the above-mentioned setting change process (see FIG. 47).

When it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (when the determination in S351 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is turned off (when the determination in S351 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs the second normal pre-game processing (S352). The details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. As described above, when this second normal pre-game processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is set. After executing the second normal game pre-processing (S352), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-9. 1st normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the first normal pre-game processing performed in S344 during the setting change processing (see FIG. 47) will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the first normal game preprocessing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this first normal game pre-processing is also performed as an initial setting process when the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 24) is neither a power failure recovery, a setting change, or a setting confirmation, that is, when the RAM is cleared. ..

The main CPU 201 first performs the initialization RAM setting process (S361). In this process, a clear process (for example, construction of a work area and address setting) of an area in the main RAM 203 (hereinafter referred to as a “backup area”) in which backup data is stored at the time of power failure is performed. The area where the data is stored is not cleared by the performance display monitor control process (see S324 in FIG. 45). Further, in this process, initial data is generated, and the generated initial data are stored in the work area in the constructed main RAM 203, respectively. That is, the data backed up at the time of power failure is erased, and the gaming state can be returned to the initialized state. Although not shown, in this process, the game can be started by returning the game state to the initialized state, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is set. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S361), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S362.

In S362, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the initialization command. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S336) during the setting control process (see FIG. 46). When the process of S362 is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal pre-game process. When this first normal pre-game processing is completed, the game permission flag is set to on, and the game permission state is set.

[1-7-10. 2nd normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the second normal pre-game processing performed in S352 during the setting confirmation processing (see FIG. 48) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of a second normal game preprocessing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of recovery from the power failure in the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 24).

First, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM setting process at the time of recovery from power failure (S371). In this process, for example, the data stored in the backup area in the main RAM 203 is read, and the read data is stored in the work area in the constructed main RAM 203, respectively. The above-mentioned data is various information necessary for advancing the game, such as game state information, on / off state of a hit flag of a special symbol or a normal symbol, and information on the number of pending numbers. That is, by returning the data backed up at the time of power failure to the work area in the main RAM 203 again, it is possible to return to the same gaming state as before the power failure. Although not shown, in this process, it is possible to start the game by returning to the same game state as before the power failure, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is set. The main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S372 after executing the RAM setting processing (S371) at the time of recovery from power failure.

In S372, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the probability change flag is on. This process is performed by reading the data stored in the work area in the main RAM 203.

When it is determined in S372 that the probability variation flag is not on (when the determination in S372 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S374.

on the other hand. When it is determined in S372 that the probability change flag is ON (when the determination in S372 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S373.

In S373, the main CPU 201 sets the probability change notification flag to ON. This is done to notify the state of the probability change flag at the time of recovery from the power failure. When the probability change notification flag is on, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, to turn on the probability change notification LED (not shown). This makes it possible to visually grasp whether or not the probability change flag is on when the power is restored. After executing the process of S373, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S374.

In S374, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the power failure return command. The power failure recovery command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S336) during the setting control process (see FIG. 46). When the process of S374 is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal pre-game process.

[1-7-11. Switch input detection process]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the switch input detection process by the main CPU 201. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 201 executes a start opening winning detection process (S381). After executing the process of S381, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S382. The starting opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (S382). In the general winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the general winning opening 122 is set. After executing the process of S382, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S383.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (S383). In the large winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the large winning opening 131 is set. After executing the process of S383, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a ball passage detection process (S384). In the ball passage detection process, various random value values (ordinary symbol hit determination random value, etc.) for the normal symbol are extracted based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 by the passage gate switch 127. The main RAM 203 holds various random value values (normal symbol hit determination random value, etc.) extracted based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126 until the normal symbol start condition is satisfied. It has a storage area (1) to a normal symbol start storage area (4). Then, in the ball passage detection process, it is extracted based on whether or not there is an empty area in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to the normal symbol start storage area (4), that is, the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126. It is also determined whether or not the number of reserved symbols is, for example, less than four. When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process.

[1-7-12. Start opening winning detection process]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 201. The start opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the switch input detection process described above.

As shown in FIG. 52, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 121 (S391).

When it is determined that the game ball is not detected by the first start port switch 121 (when the determination in S391 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 121 (when the determination in S391 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S392.

In S392, the main CPU 201 uses various random values (for example, a random value for determining per first special symbol, a symbol random value of the first special symbol, a random value for reach determination of the first special symbol, and a first special symbol. Various random values such as random values for effect selection) are extracted, and payout information according to the first start opening winning is set. After executing the process of S392, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S393.

In S393, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols extracted based on the winning of the first starting port 120 is, for example, less than four. The main RAM 203 holds various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 until the starting condition is satisfied, from the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage. It has an area (4), and in this process, it is determined whether or not there is a free area in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). The main RAM 203 also has a first special symbol start storage area (0) in addition to the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), which will be described later.

When the number of reserved first special symbols is not less than 4, that is, the upper limit of 4 (when the determination in S393 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved first special symbols is less than 4 (when the determination in S393 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S394.

In S394, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved first special symbols. After executing the process of S394, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S395.

In S395, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 in the main RAM 203 until the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied. As a result, the variation display of the first special symbol for the extracted random numbers is suspended until the variation start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S395, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S396.

In S396, the main CPU 201 performs a look-ahead determination process. In this process, prior to the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S93 in FIG. 28), the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined using the random number value extracted in S392, and the hit determination process and the like are performed. It also determines whether the look-ahead flag is set.

The look-ahead determination process may be performed at any timing between the time when the random value is extracted in S392 and the time when the special symbol hit determination process is executed, but the variable display of the special symbol is started. In view of performing the look-ahead effect by the sub control circuit 300, it is preferable to perform the pre-reading effect, for example, before and after the processing of S395. After executing the process of S396, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S397.

In S397, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the winning command of the first special symbol. The winning command of the first special symbol is a command including information for increasing the reserved number of the first special symbol by one, variation pattern information of the first special symbol (that is, variation pattern command of the special symbol), and the like. The winning command of the first special symbol reserved for transmission is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission processing (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt processing. After executing the process of S397, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

In S398, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 141.

When it is determined that the game ball is not detected by the second start opening switch 141 (when the determination in S398 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the start opening winning detection process, and the process is switched input detection process (FIG. FIG. See 51).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 141 (when the determination in S398 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S399.

In S399, the main CPU 201 uses various random values (for example, a random value for determining the second special symbol, a symbol random value of the second special symbol, a random value for reach determination of the second special symbol, and a second special symbol. Various random values such as random values for effect selection) are extracted, and payout information according to the second start opening winning is set. After executing the process of S399, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S400.

In S400, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols extracted based on the winning of the second starting port 140 is, for example, less than four.

The main RAM 203 holds various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140 until the starting conditions are satisfied, and the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special It has a symbol start storage area (4), and in this process, it is determined whether or not there is a free area in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). .. The main RAM 203 also has a second special symbol start storage area (0) in addition to the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), which will be described later.

When the number of reserved second special symbols is not less than 4, that is, the upper limit of 4 (when S400 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the start opening winning detection process, and the process is switched input detection process. Return to (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, when the number of reserved second special symbols is less than 4 (when the determination in S400 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S401.

In S401, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S401, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S402.

In S402, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140 in the main RAM 203 until the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. As a result, the variation display of the second special symbol for the extracted random numbers is suspended until the variation start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S402, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S403.

In S403, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a winning command of the second special symbol (S403). The winning command of the second special symbol is a command including information for increasing the reserved number of the second special symbol by 1, information on the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, and the like, and is a command for the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process. The winning command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S403, the main CPU 201 ends the start opening winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

[1-8. Sub control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 53, the sub CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S501). In this initialization process, for example, initialization processes such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, and the like are performed. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S502.

The initialization process (S501) described above is a process executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes S502 to S508 described later are repeatedly executed.

In S502, the sub CPU 301 performs a read process of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). In this process, a command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) set in the command input port 308 is read and performed. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S503.

In S503, the sub CPU 301 executes a command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S502 is analyzed. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S504.

In S504, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect mode determination process. In this process, for example, based on the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, the mode of the display effect displayed on the display device 7 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) and the output from the speaker 32 (see FIG. 6). The mode of sound production is determined.

In the effect mode determination process (S504), the sub CPU 301 generates an animation request including the specified information of the effect content, and based on the generated animation request, various requests for operating various effect devices (for example, a drawing request). , Sound request, lamp request, and character request, etc.). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S505.

In S505, the sub CPU 301 executes the drawing control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S506.

In S506, the sub CPU 301 executes voice control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 sends a sound request to the voice control circuit 305 (see FIG. 6). The voice control circuit 305 performs voice control for causing the speaker 32 to output voice based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S507.

In S507, the sub CPU 301 executes the LED control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6). The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking all or a part of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on the message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S508.

In S508, the sub CPU 301 executes the accessory control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the accessory request to the accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6). The accessory control circuit 307 mounts an effect drive motor (not shown) on all or part of the effect members constituting the effect item group 58 based on the message (character item request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. Drive control for operation is performed. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit main process.

[1-9. Specific example of the effect mode determination process by the sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 (more specifically, the sub CPU 301) performs the effect mode determination process (see S504 in FIG. 53) based on the winning command transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

The sub CPU 301 is, as one of the various processes performed in the effect mode determination process, for example, an effect pattern (hereinafter, "sub-variation") of the sub-variation effect corresponding to the current special symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as "the variation"). A sub-variable effect pattern determination process for determining (referred to as "effect pattern"), a look-ahead effect pattern determination process for determining an effect pattern for look-ahead effect (hereinafter referred to as "look-ahead effect pattern"), and the like are performed. Further, in the effect mode determination process, for example, the effect mode of the countdown effect suggesting that the ceiling counter is approaching the ceiling value and the effect mode of the B time saving game state transition effect suggesting that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value are determined. The process of determining various production modes related to the progress of the game, such as the process, is also performed.

The sub-variation effect pattern determination process is performed based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. The sub-variation effect pattern is an effect pattern (for example, a variation pattern or a character of a decorative symbol) performed by the sub CPU 301 in the display area of the display device 7 along with the variable display of the special symbol as an effect indicating the expected degree of the result of the variation. Production patterns, etc.).

In the sub-variation effect, the expectation for the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol with the lapse of time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the stop of the special symbol according to the sub-variation effect pattern to be executed. It is possible to show that the degree is maintained or increased.

The sub-variation effect patterns include, for example, time-saving hit system reach A, B, C, big hit system reach A, B, C, and common reach A, B, C, D, E, etc., as shown in FIG. 54 described later. Is included. As described above, the time-saving hit system reach A, B, and C indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S93 in FIG. 28) may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a big hit). It is a production. The jackpot system reach A, B, and C are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time saving hit). The common reach A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit or a big hit.

In addition, for example, when the execution timing of the countdown effect suggesting the transition timing to the B time saving game state and the execution timing of the reach effect overlap, the sub CPU 301 is given priority to execute one of the effects. good.

The look-ahead effect pattern determination process is performed based on, for example, a variation pattern of a special symbol determined as a result of the look-ahead determination process. The look-ahead effect is an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the result of the look-ahead determination process, and is start information such as various random value values extracted based on the winning when the first starting port 120 is in a pending state (that is, after winning a prize in the first starting port 120). Is an effect pattern performed in the display area of the display device 7 by the sub CPU 301 until is subjected to the hit determination process of the special symbol (until the variable display of the special symbol is started).

In the look-ahead effect, according to the look-ahead effect pattern to be executed, the look-ahead determination is made with the passage of time (more specifically, the progress of the variable display of the start information held in advance) while in the hold state. It is possible to show that expectations for the outcome of the treatment are maintained or increased.

The look-ahead effect is performed using, for example, a reserved image displayed on the display device 7. The hold image is an image showing the current hold status.

The look-ahead effect pattern includes a look-ahead hit type effect pattern that can suggest an expected value for the result type (whether it is a time saving hit or a big hit) of the look-ahead determination process, that is, the special symbol hit determination process, and the special symbol. It includes a look-ahead expected value effect pattern that can suggest an expected value for the result of the hit determination process to be a hit (big hit or time saving hit). That is, in the look-ahead effect, it is possible to suggest either or both of an expected value for the result type of the hit determination process of the special symbol and an expected value for the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol to be a hit. Is. Further, in the look-ahead effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 59 described later), the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process (see S3006 in FIG. 59 described later) and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process (see S3008 and S3009 in FIG. 59 described later). See) and is done. Specific examples of the look-ahead hit type effect pattern, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process, and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process will be described later.

[1-9-1. Sub-variation effect pattern determination process]
First, the sub-variation effect pattern determination process will be described. FIG. 54 is an example of a sub-variation effect pattern determination table (detailed description is omitted) in a gaming state (normal gaming state) in which the time reduction flag is off. This sub-variation effect pattern determination table is stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The program ROM 302 also stores a sub-variation effect pattern determination table in a gaming state (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state) in which the time-saving flag is on, but the description thereof will be omitted here.

The sub CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation effect pattern determination table in the normal gaming state of FIG. 54, and displays it as a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation based on the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main control circuit 200. A sub-variation effect pattern (shown as "variation pattern" in FIG. 54) displayed on the device 7 is determined. As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub-variation effect pattern includes the time-saving hit system reach A, B, C, the big hit system reach A, B, C, and the common reach A, B, C, D, E. There is.

The time-saving hit system reach A, B, and C are reach effects indicating that there is a possibility of time-saving hit as described above, and are reach effects that can be grasped from the appearance that there is a possibility of time-saving hit. The time-saving hit system reach A is a time-saving hit confirmed reach effect that is not displayed when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a loss or a big hit, but is displayed only when it is a "time-saving hit" (FIG. 15). reference). The time-saving hit system reach A is not limited to the sub-variation effect pattern of the look-ahead target, but may be a sub-variation effect pattern of the look-ahead mode. The time-saving hit system reach B and the time-saving hit system reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance. However, while the time-saving hit system reach B is not a look-ahead target sub-variation effect pattern, the time-saving hit system reach C is a look-ahead target sub-variation effect pattern (the column of "look-ahead flag" in FIG. 15, FIG. 54, and FIG. See FIG. 55 below).

The jackpot-type reach A, B, and C are reach effects indicating that there is a possibility of a jackpot as described above, and are reach effects that can be grasped from the appearance that there is a possibility of a jackpot. The jackpot system reach A is a jackpot confirmed reach effect that is not displayed when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss or a "time reduction hit", and is displayed only when the result is a "time reduction hit" (Fig.). 15). This jackpot system reach A is not limited to the sub-variation effect pattern of the look-ahead target, but is not limited to this, and may be a sub-variation effect pattern of the look-ahead mode. The jackpot reach B and the jackpot reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance. However, while the jackpot reach B is not a look-ahead target sub-variation effect pattern, the jackpot reach C is a look-ahead target sub-variation effect pattern (see the “look-ahead flag” column in FIG. 15).

The common reach A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects indicating that there is a possibility of a big hit or a short time hit as described above, and in terms of appearance, it is possible to make a big hit or a big hit. It is a reach production mode in which it is difficult to grasp whether or not there is a sex. The common reach A is a hit (big hit, time saving hit) fixed reach effect that is not displayed when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a loss, and is displayed only when it is a big hit or a "time saving hit". (See FIG. 15). The common reach B and the common reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance mode. Further, the common reach D is a production that develops from the common reach C to the time-saving hit system reach C. Further, the common reach E is a production that develops from the common reach C to the jackpot type reach C. The common reach A and the common reach B are not the sub-variable effect patterns to be read ahead, while the common reach C, the common reach D, and the common reach E are the sub-variable effect patterns to be read ahead (“look-ahead” in FIG. 15). See the "Flags" column).

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 54), and determines the sub-variation effect pattern based on the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 201. Then, the sub CPU 301 controls so that the determined sub-variation effect pattern is displayed on the display device 7.

[1-9-2. Look-ahead effect pattern determination process]
Next, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process, which are performed as the look-ahead effect pattern determination process, will be described.

The work RAM 303 (see FIG. 6) has a first special symbol start storage area (0), a first special symbol start storage area (1), and a first special symbol start storage area (2) provided in the main RAM 203. , The first sub-holding area (0), the first sub-holding area (1), and the first sub-holding area (1), as the areas corresponding to the first special symbol start storage area (3) and the first special symbol start storage area (4), respectively. A sub-holding area (2), a first sub-holding area (3), and a first sub-holding area (4) are provided. In the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (4), various kinds of extracted random value values are used. Hold information is stored. Further, information corresponding to the fluctuation is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the first sub-holding area (0). When the sub CPU 301 receives the winning command of the first starting opening winning, the sub CPU 301 stores the received information in the first sub holding area corresponding to the current first special symbol starting storage area.

Further, the work RAM 303 has a second special symbol start storage area (0), a second special symbol start storage area (1), a second special symbol start storage area (2), and a second special symbol provided in the main RAM 203. The second sub-holding area (0), the second sub-holding area (1), and the second sub-holding area (2nd sub-holding area (1)) correspond to the start storage area (3) and the second special symbol start storage area (4), respectively. 2), a second sub-holding area (3), and a second sub-holding area (4) are provided.

In this embodiment, it is assumed that the look-ahead effect for the first special symbol is performed in the normal gaming state, but the pre-reading effect is not limited to this, and it is not limited to this, and it is in other gaming states (for example, high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state). It may be done, or it may be done about the second special symbol.

The look-ahead effect is performed using, for example, a reserved image displayed in the display area of the display device 7. In the display area of the display device 7, as an area for displaying the reserved image, a 0th area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (0), a first holding area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (1), and a first A second reserved area corresponding to the sub-reserved area (2), a third reserved area corresponding to the first sub-reserved area (3), and a fourth reserved area corresponding to the first sub-reserved area (4) are provided. There is.

[1-9-2-1. Table referred to in the look-ahead type effect pattern determination process]
First, the table referred to in the look-ahead type effect pattern determination process will be described.

By the way, the form of the hold image in which the look-ahead effect is executed in the determined look-ahead hit type effect pattern includes a time-saving hit type look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit and a possibility of a big hit. The big hit system look-ahead effect form shown and the common hit system look-ahead effect form showing that there is a possibility of both the time saving hit and the big hit are included.

The look-ahead type effect pattern changes the form of the reserved image from, for example, the common hit type look-ahead effect form to the time-saving hit type look-ahead effect form, or changes from the common hit type look-ahead effect form to the big hit type look-ahead effect form. This is an effect pattern capable of suggesting a change in the expected value with respect to the result type of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

FIG. 55 is an example of a look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number determination table. In FIG. 55, among the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 54, only the fluctuation pattern to be read ahead is shown. Further, FIG. 56 is an example of a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table. These tables are stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in the look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number determination table of FIG. 55, when the sub CPU 301 receives a variation pattern in which the look-ahead flag is set, the sub CPU 301 sets the look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number, for example. , Determined based on fluctuation pattern and number of holds. The number of holds here includes start information to be read ahead. That is, when the start information extracted based on the winning of the first start port 120 is held, the number of holds after the hold corresponds to the number of holds shown in FIG. 55.

For example, when the fluctuation pattern is "03H" and the number of reservations is "3", the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is determined to be "3". Further, for example, when the fluctuation pattern is "0EH" and the number of reservations is "2", the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is determined to be "22".

When the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is determined, the sub CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table of FIG. 56 and determines the look-ahead hit type effect pattern. More specifically, as shown in the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table of FIG. 56, for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is based on the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number and the sub-effect selection random number value 1. It is determined.

In FIG. 56, for convenience, the “look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number” is referred to as “SASPT number”, and the “look-ahead hit type effect pattern” is referred to as “SAS effect pattern”. The sub-effect selection random number value 1 is a random number value extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined trigger, for example, when a variation pattern command of a special symbol is received.

For example, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is "3" and the extracted sub-effect selection random value 1 is "55", the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be "07H". Further, for example, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is "7" and the extracted sub-effect selection random value 1 is "77", the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be "16H".

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the remarks (holding correspondence) column of FIG. 56 indicate the first holding area to the fourth holding area, respectively.

Further, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. 56, "A" shown corresponding to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number and the sub-effect selection random value 1 is , Indicates that the reserved image is displayed in the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect mode, which indicates that the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit. When the reserved image is displayed in the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect mode, it is possible to grasp that there is a possibility of time-saving hit in appearance.

Further, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. 56, "B" shown corresponding to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number and the sub-effect selection random value 1 is , Indicates that the reserved image is displayed in the jackpot-based look-ahead effect mode, which indicates that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot. When the reserved image is displayed in the jackpot-based look-ahead effect mode, it is possible to grasp that there is a possibility of a jackpot in appearance.

Further, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. 56, "C" shown corresponding to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number and the sub-effect selection random value 1 is , Indicates that the reserved image is displayed in the common hit system look-ahead effect mode, which indicates that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time saving hit or a big hit. When the reserved image is displayed in the common hit system look-ahead effect mode, it is difficult to grasp whether there is a possibility of a time saving hit or a big hit in appearance.

For example, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "07H", the common hit system look-ahead effect mode is displayed in the third hold area, and the common hit system is also displayed in the second hold area after shifting from the third hold area. The look-ahead effect form is displayed. Then, when shifting from the second holding area to the first holding area, the common hit system look-ahead effect mode changes to the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form, and in the first hold area, the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form of "A" is displayed. Will be done.

Further, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "16H", the common hit-type look-ahead effect form of "C" is displayed in the third reserved area. Then, when shifting from the third holding area to the second holding area, the common hit system look-ahead effect mode is changed to the big hit system look-ahead effect form, the second hold area, and the first hold after being shifted from the second hold area. In the area, the jackpot look-ahead effect form of "B" is displayed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 56, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern includes the following patterns (a) to (e). In this embodiment, the pattern that changes from the big hit system look-ahead effect mode to the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form and the pattern that changes from the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form to the large-short hit look-ahead effect form are the look-ahead hit type effect patterns. Although not included in, these patterns may be included in the look-ahead type effect pattern.
B) The look-ahead time-saving hit effect pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern) in which the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form is displayed at the time of being held and the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form is displayed without changing the effect form thereafter. "09H").
B) The pre-reading jackpot effect pattern (for example, the pre-reading hit type effect pattern "17H"" in which the jackpot-type look-ahead effect form is displayed at the time of being held and the jackpot-type look-ahead effect form is displayed without changing the effect form thereafter. ).
C) A look-ahead common hit effect pattern A (for example, a look-ahead hit type effect pattern "24H") in which the common hit-type look-ahead effect form is displayed at the time of holding, and then changes to the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form.
D) A look-ahead common hit effect pattern B (for example, a look-ahead hit type effect pattern "12H") that is displayed in the common hit system look-ahead effect form at the time of being held and then changes to the big hit system look-ahead effect form.
E) When it is put on hold, it is displayed in the common hit system look-ahead effect form, and after that, the common hit system look-ahead effect form is displayed without changing the effect form. Look-ahead common hit effect pattern C (for example, look-ahead hit type effect) Pattern "06H").

As described above, the sub CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number determination table (see, for example, FIG. 55), and based on the fluctuation pattern and the number of reservations, the look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number (SASPT number). ) Is determined. Then, the sub CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56), and is based on the determined look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number (SASPT number) and the sub-effect selection random value value 1. The pre-reading hit type effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) is determined.

Note that FIG. 56 does not show a look-ahead hit type effect pattern in which the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form of “A” is displayed at the time of holding, and then changes to the jackpot-type look-ahead effect form of “B”. However, in this way, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern that changes from the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form of "A" to the jackpot-type look-ahead effect form of "B" may be determined by the sub CPU 301. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the interest that can be given to the player by the look-ahead effect.

Further, in FIG. 56, as described above, in the jackpot-based look-ahead effect mode of “B”, the jackpot-based look-ahead indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (that is, it may be lost). Although it is an effect form, in addition to this, a big hit confirmation look-ahead effect form indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit confirmation may be displayed. In this case, the look-ahead type effect pattern determined by the sub CPU 301 may include any or all of the look-ahead type effect patterns in (f) to (h) below.
F) A look-ahead jackpot confirmed effect pattern A in which the jackpot confirmed look-ahead effect form is displayed at the time of being held, and the jackpot confirmed look-ahead effect form is displayed without changing the effect form thereafter.
G) At the time of suspension, other look-ahead effect forms (for example, "A" time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form, "B" big hit-type look-ahead effect form, "C" common hit-type look-ahead effect form, etc.) are displayed. Then, the look-ahead jackpot confirmed effect pattern B that changes to the jackpot confirmed look-ahead effect form.
H) At the time of being put on hold, another look-ahead effect form (for example, "A" time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form, "C" common hit-type look-ahead effect form, etc.) is displayed, and then "B" big hit system. A look-ahead jackpot confirmed effect pattern C in which the look-ahead effect form is displayed, and then the jackpot confirmed look-ahead effect form is changed.

Further, in FIG. 56, of the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form of "A", the big hit system look-ahead effect form of "B", and the common hit system look-ahead effect form of "C", "C" is reserved. The display frequency of the common hit system look-ahead effect form is the highest, but it is not limited to this. For example, at the time of holding, the display frequency of the time-saving pre-reading effect form of "A" may be the highest, and at the time of holding, the display frequency of the jackpot-based pre-reading effect form of "B" is the highest. It may be made higher. Further, at the time of holding, the display frequency of the common hit system look-ahead effect form of "C" may be set to be the lowest.

Further, in FIG. 56, a random value 1 for sub-effect selection having a predetermined width is assigned to all “look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table numbers (SASPT numbers)”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific SASPT number is assigned. It is also possible not to assign a random value for sub-effect selection only to (that is, it is not selected by setting the distribution rate of a specific SASPT number to 0).

[1-9-2-2. Table referenced in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process]
Next, the table referred to in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process will be described.

FIG. 57 is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of hit), which is referred to when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is “time saving hit” or “big hit”. Further, FIG. 58 is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss), which is referred to when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost.

By the way, the form of the reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is executed in the determined look-ahead expected value effect pattern differs depending on the expected value for the hit (time saving hit, big hit).

When the reserved image is displayed as a time-saving look-ahead effect mode, for example, the reserved image, which is usually represented by a triangle, is changed in shape such as "quadrangle <pentagon <hexagon <circle <star". Can represent the change in expected value. In this case, the expected value is the lowest when the reserved image is a rectangle, and the expected value is the highest when the reserved image is a star.

When a hold image is displayed as a jackpot look-ahead effect mode, for example, the color of the hold image, which is usually represented by white, is changed to "blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow". Can represent the change in the expected value. In this case, the expected value is the lowest when the reserved image is blue, and the expected value is the highest when the reserved image is a rainbow.

Although the details will be described later, when the hold image is displayed as a common hit system look-ahead effect mode indicating that there is a possibility of both a big hit and a time saving hit, the hold image is used, for example, the expected value for the big hit. It may be represented by both a color indicating a level and a shape indicating an expected value level for a time saving hit, or it may be represented by a dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form.

The hold image on which the look-ahead effect is performed can change from an effect form in which the expected value is relatively low to an effect form in which the expected value is relatively high, but the expected value is relative from the effect form in which the expected value is relatively high. It is preferable that it does not change to a low production form. In addition, when changing the production form of the reserved image, it is not always necessary to change one by one in the order of "quadrangle <pentagon <hexagon <circle <star" or "blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow". For example, it may be changed to "pentagon-> circle" or "yellow-> rainbow". Further, the form of the reserved image does not necessarily have to start from the quadrangle or blue having the lowest expected value, and may start from, for example, a circle or red.

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the remarks (holding correspondence) column of FIG. 57 indicate the first holding area to the fourth holding area, respectively, as in FIG. 56.

Further, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. 57, "0" is shown corresponding to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number and the sub-effect selection random value 2. ~ "5" indicates the high expected value for a hit (time saving hit, big hit). For example, the above-mentioned "triangle" and "white" correspond to "0", the above-mentioned "quadrangle" and "blue" correspond to "1", and the above-mentioned "pentagon" and "yellow" correspond to "2". The above-mentioned "hexagon" and "green" correspond to "3", the above-mentioned "circle" and "red" correspond to "4", and the above-mentioned "star" and "rainbow" correspond to "5". Is equivalent to.

Hereinafter, in each of the columns "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. 57, "0" is shown corresponding to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number and the sub-effect selection random value 2. ~ "5" is referred to as an expected value level "0" to "5".

The look-ahead expected value effect pattern when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is “time saving hit” or “big hit” is, for example, as shown in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (hit time) in FIG. It is determined based on the number of holdings and the random value 2 for sub-effect selection. Similarly, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is, for example, a hold number and, as shown in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) in FIG. It is determined based on the random value 2 for sub-effect selection. The sub-effect selection random number value 2 is a random number value extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined trigger, for example, when a variation pattern command of a special symbol is received. Note that, in FIGS. 57 and 58, only the case where the number of holds is “1” to “3” is shown, and the case where the number of holds is “4” is omitted for convenience.

For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, the number of holds is "3", and the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection is "750", the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be "43H". .. When the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "43H", the expected value level is "2" in the third reserved area, and the expected value level is "2" when shifting from the third reserved area to the second reserved area. To "3", and the expected value level changes from "3" to "5" when shifting from the second reserved area to the first reserved area.

Further, for example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, the number of hold is "3", and the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection is "680", the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be "3FH". Will be done. When the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "3FH", the expected value level is "2" in the third hold area, the expected value level is "2" in the second hold area, and the first hold from the second hold area. The expected value level changes from "2" to "4" when shifting to the region.

As described above, the sub CPU 301 has a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of hit) (see FIG. 57) or a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) (at the time of loss) based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. Refer to), and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined based on the number of holds and the random value 2 for sub-effect selection.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit" or "big hit", the distribution rate of each look-ahead expected value effect pattern is not limited to the distribution rate shown in FIG. 57 and can be changed as appropriate. Is.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing", the selection rate of the look-ahead expected value effect pattern (for example, "01H", "0BH", etc.) whose expected value level is relatively low is increased. However, the bias is not limited to this, and it can be changed as appropriate, for example, evenly distributed.

Further, in FIGS. 57 and 58, the random value 2 for sub-effect selection having a predetermined width is assigned to all the “look-ahead expected value effect patterns”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific “look-ahead expected value effect pattern” is assigned. The sub-effect selection random value 2 may not be assigned only to "" (that is, the distribution rate of the specific "look-ahead expected value effect pattern" may be set to 0 and not selected).

[1-9-3. Look-ahead effect pattern determination process]
Next, the look-ahead effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 with reference to the tables of FIGS. 54 to 58 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is an example of a flowchart showing a look-ahead effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301. As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect pattern determination process only in the normal gaming state in which the left-handed strike is a normal gaming mode, but the present invention is not limited to this.

First, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201 has been received (S3001).

If the winning command has not been received (NO determination in S3001), the sub CPU 301 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning command has been received (when the determination in S3001 is YES), the sub CPU 301 shifts the processing to S3002.

In S3002, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the hold of the look-ahead target is not the current time, that is, whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed for the current hold. When there are a plurality of holds, the look-ahead effect may be performed on a plurality of hold images, but in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only on one hold image.

When the look-ahead effect is executed for the current hold (NO determination in S3002), the sub CPU 301 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, when the look-ahead effect is not executed for the current hold (when the determination in S3002 is YES), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3003.

In S3003, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern information received by the winning command is the read-ahead target (see FIG. 55).

When the fluctuation pattern information received by the winning command is not the look-ahead target (NO determination in S3003), the sub CPU 301 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern information received by the winning command is the read-ahead target (when the determination in S3003 is YES), the sub CPU 301 shifts the processing to S3004.

In S3004, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is larger than, for example, the upper limit number that can be held (for example, 4 or 8). This process is for avoiding the transition to the B time saving game state before the variable display of the special symbol is executed for the hold for which the look-ahead effect is performed, even though the look-ahead effect is performed. This makes it possible to suppress the decline in interest. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3005.

In this embodiment, in S3004, it is determined whether or not the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is larger than the maximum number that can be held, but the variation pattern information received by the winning command is not limited to this. When it is a look-ahead target (when the determination in S3003 is YES), it may be determined whether or not the number is larger than the number of holds including the look-ahead target. Further, the ceiling value and the ceiling counter may receive information from the main CPU 201 as a command, or may be managed by the sub CPU 301 separately from the main CPU 201.

In S3005, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination process. In this process, the look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number determination table (see FIG. 55) is referred to, and the look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number is determined. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3006.

In S3006, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process. In this process, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined with reference to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3007.

In S3007, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit" or "big hit". In this process, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is determined based on the fluctuation pattern information received by the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, and if this result is a "time saving hit" or a "big hit", a YES determination is made. Will be done. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "time saving hit" or the "big hit" may be determined by transmitting the winning information of the special symbol from the main CPU 201 to the sub CPU 301.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit" or "big hit" (YES determination in S3007), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3008.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is neither "time saving hit" nor "big hit" (S3007 is NO determination), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3009.

In S3008, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead expected value effect pattern (hit time) determination process. In this process, the look-ahead effect pattern (at the time of hit) is determined with reference to the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of hit) of FIG. 57. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 completes the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

Further, in S3009, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead effect pattern determination process at the time of loss. In this process, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) is referred to in FIG. 58, and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern (at the time of loss) is determined. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 completes the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

[1-9-4. Action effect by performing look-ahead effect, extended example of look-ahead effect]
In the above-mentioned look-ahead effect, not only is it interesting to see whether the pre-reading effect form of the big hit system or the look-ahead effect form of the time-saving hit system changes due to the change in the form of the reserved image, but also the expected value of the hit (big hit, time-saving hit). It is possible to change the level, and it is possible to enhance the interest by performing new productions that have never been seen before. The timing for changing the form of the hold image is not limited to the time when the hold shifts, and may be, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

Further, regarding the form of the reserved image performed as the look-ahead effect (for example, the form of the reserved image displayed within the range of the first sub-reserved area (4) to the first sub-reserved area (1)), the first start port 120 It may be determined at the time of winning a prize, and the form of the reserved image in the variable display of the special symbol of the change may be determined at the start of the variable display of the special symbol.

By the way, the probability of being determined by the fluctuation pattern (see, for example, "03H" and "0EH" in FIG. 54) in which the look-ahead effect is executed in the look-ahead time-shortening effect pattern, and the variation in which the look-ahead effect is executed in the look-ahead jackpot effect pattern. Comparing with the probabilities determined by the pattern (see, eg, "06H", "11H" in FIG. 54), the former probability is higher (see, eg, FIG. 15). That is, as for the execution rate of the look-ahead effect, the execution rate of the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead time-shortening effect pattern is higher than the execution rate of the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead jackpot effect pattern. Therefore, compared to the conventional pachinko gaming machine where the look-ahead effect is performed only when there is a possibility of a big hit, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the look-ahead effect while suppressing the decrease in the expected value of the hit. It will be possible to increase.

The execution rate of the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead jackpot effect pattern may be higher than the execution rate of the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead time-shortening effect pattern. In this case, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the expected value for the big hit is higher than the expected value for the short-time hit, so that it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the gaming state in which the probability change flag is off (in the present embodiment, the normal gaming state and the low probability time saving gaming state), the "time saving hit" can be won in the hit determination process of the special symbol (FIG. 10). reference). However, in this embodiment, although the look-ahead effect is performed in the normal gaming state, the look-ahead effect is not performed in the low-probability time-saving gaming state. Even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving gaming state is "time-saving hit", when the C-time-shortening gaming state is executed in combination with the A-time-saving gaming state, and for the A-time-saving gaming state. It is unlikely that the number of time reductions will increase in any of the cases where the C time reduction game states are not executed repeatedly. Therefore, by making it as little as possible for the player to know that there is a possibility of winning the "time saving hit" in the A time saving game state, the disappointment given to the player by winning the "time saving hit" is reduced. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

However, it is not essential to prevent the look-ahead effect from being performed in the low-accuracy time-short game state, and the look-ahead effect is performed not only in the normal game state but also in the low-accuracy time-short game state and the high-accuracy low-time-short game state. You may. Further, in the present embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only for the first special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect may be performed for the second special symbol as well.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, as the sub-variation effect pattern, a time-saving hit system reach, a big hit system reach, or a common reach can be executed. In this embodiment, as can be seen with reference to FIGS. 15, 54 to 56, when the pre-reading effect is executed by the pre-reading time-saving effect pattern, the sub CPU 301 executes the time-saving hit system reach as the sub-variable effect pattern. However, the jackpot reach is not executed. Further, when the pre-reading effect is executed by the look-ahead jackpot effect pattern, the sub CPU 301 executes the jackpot system reach as the sub-variable effect pattern, and does not execute the time saving hit system reach.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pre-reading effect is executed by the look-ahead time-saving effect pattern or the look-ahead common hit effect pattern, the sub CPU 301 can execute the time-saving hit system reach as the sub-variable effect pattern. However, when the pre-reading effect is executed by the pre-reading jackpot effect pattern, the sub CPU 301 does not execute the time-saving hit system reach as the sub-variable effect pattern.

Further, a look-ahead jackpot effect pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) “37H” shown in FIG. 56) and a look-ahead time-short hit effect pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern “29H” shown in FIG. 56). ”) And the look-ahead common hit effect pattern (for example, the look-ahead effect pattern (SAS effect pattern)“ 27H ”shown in FIG. 56), the sub CPU 301 uses the sub-variation effect pattern. (For example, the sub-variation effect patterns “0AH” and “0BH” shown in FIG. 55) may be executed.

Further, an effect pattern may be provided in which the time-saving hit system reach is executed, the loss is clearly indicated in the time-saving hit system reach, and then the big hit system reach is executed. In this case, the player can play the game with a sense of expectation until the end whether or not the jackpot reach with a high profit margin is executed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, when the common reach E is executed in the variable display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “target fluctuation”) performed for the start information in which the look-ahead effect is executed, the common reach C and the common reach C are executed. After the common effect is displayed, it is possible to shift to the effect common to the jackpot reach C. On the other hand, if no effect common to the common reach C is executed, the game does not shift to the jackpot reach C. Similarly, when the common reach E is executed in the target variation, after the effect common to the common reach C is displayed, it is possible to shift to the effect common to the time-saving hit system reach C. On the other hand, if no effect common to the common reach C is executed, the process does not shift to the time saving hit system reach C.

By the way, in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only for one reserved image (see S3002). Therefore, even when the look-ahead effect mode (hereinafter referred to as “big hit look-ahead effect”) indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a big hit is already executed, the sub CPU 301 is new. Do not execute look-ahead effect. Even in a pachinko gaming machine in which a look-ahead effect is performed on a plurality of reserved images, it is preferable not to execute a new look-ahead effect when the jackpot look-ahead effect has already been executed.

For example, any one hold (hereinafter referred to as "first hold") and another hold (hereinafter referred to as "second hold") in which the variable display of the special symbol is started after this first hold. ), And when the look-ahead jackpot effect pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern “17H” in FIG. 56) is executed in the first hold, the look-ahead effect is performed in the second hold. Even if it is executed, the look-ahead effect in this second hold may be meaningless. In particular, when the jackpot is derived for the first hold and controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and is controlled to the A time saving gaming state after the end of this jackpot gaming state, for example, "time saving hit" is derived for the second hold. Even so, there is a possibility that the player will not be able to receive the benefits of this "time saving hit", and in this case, the interest will be significantly reduced. Therefore, when the jackpot look-ahead effect has already been executed, it is preferable not to execute the look-ahead effect for the hold that is digested after the hold on which the jackpot look-ahead effect is executed.

Even if the first hold is a big hit hold (a hold from which a big hit is derived), if the look-ahead effect is not executed for the first hold, the look-ahead effect is executed in the second hold. It may or may not be executed.

Further, even when the big hit look-ahead effect of Gase (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern “53H” in FIG. 56) is executed in the first hold, it is preferable not to execute the look-ahead effect in the second hold.

However, when the time saving hit look-ahead effect (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern “05H” in FIG. 56) is executed in the first hold, the big hit look-ahead effect or the time-saving hit look-ahead effect is executed in the second hold. You may. This is because even if a time-saving hit is derived for the first hold, it is possible to expect a big hit with a higher degree of profit for the player.

Further, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol does not include the small hit, but in the pachinko gaming machine including the small hit in the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol, the small hit is small in the first hold. Even when the hit look-ahead effect is executed, the big hit look-ahead effect or the time-saving hit look-ahead effect may be executed in the second hold. This is because even if a small hit is derived for the first hold, it is possible to expect a big hit with a higher degree of profit for the player.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol includes a small hit, the look-ahead effect mode indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a small hit (hereinafter referred to as "small hit look-ahead effect"). ) Is executed in the first hold, the jackpot look-ahead effect or the time-saving hit look-ahead effect may be executed in the second hold. This is because even if a small hit is derived for the first hold, it is possible to expect a small hit with a higher degree of profit for the player.

Further, as a sub-variation effect pattern, for example, when the first start port 120 is won and the start information is reserved during the execution of the jackpot system reach, the sub CPU 301 does not execute the look-ahead effect for this hold.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect only in the normal gaming state. Therefore, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the jackpot display mode is derived, the start information determined to be "time saving hit" by the look-ahead determination performed by the main CPU 201 is reserved (this). This hold is referred to as "specific hold" in the paragraph), and the sub CPU 301 is after the end of the jackpot gaming state regardless of whether the look-ahead effect is executed or the look-ahead effect is not executed for this specific hold. , The look-ahead effect is not executed for the specific hold unless it is in the normal gaming state. However, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to execute the look-ahead effect for the specific hold even if it is in the normal gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state. Furthermore, even if it is a pachinko gaming machine that executes a look-ahead effect in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, a low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state), it is specified when the jackpot display mode is derived. When there is a hold, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to execute the look-ahead effect for the specific hold after the end of the big hit game state.

Further, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the jackpot display mode is derived, the start information determined to be "time saving hit" by the look-ahead determination performed by the main CPU 201 is suspended (this). This hold is referred to as "specific hold" in the paragraph), and even if this specific hold is a "time saving hit" hold, the main CPU 201 will perform a C time saving game based on the "time saving hit" after the end of the big hit game state. It may not be controlled by the state. For example, if the specification does not execute a plurality of time-saving game states in an overlapping manner when the time-saving game states overlap, and the game is controlled to the A time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game state, the specific hold is "time-saving hit". Even if it is on hold, the main CPU 201 will not execute the C time saving game state based on the "time saving hit".

[1-10. Specific example of look-ahead production]
Hereinafter, specific examples of the look-ahead effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. In this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 can execute the look-ahead effect using the reserved image based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

[1-10-1. Specific example when the look-ahead effect is performed with the look-ahead jackpot effect pattern]
As described above, the look-ahead effect pattern includes a look-ahead hit type effect pattern and a look-ahead expected value effect pattern. Here, first, as the pre-reading hit type effect pattern, a specific example in which the pre-reading effect is performed by the pre-reading jackpot effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 60.

60 (a) to 60 (f) are examples of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and the big hit system look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility of a big hit changes. It is a figure which shows the process. The look-ahead hit type effect pattern shown in FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (f) corresponds to “1CH”, “3CH”, “58H”, or “78H” in FIG. 56. Further, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern corresponding to the look-ahead expected value effect pattern shown in FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (f) is not shown in FIG. 57.

As shown in FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (f), the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 are displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7. As described above, the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 are areas indicating whether or not the reserved information is stored in the first sub-reserved area (1) to the first sub-reserved area (4), respectively. be. Further, the 0th area 410 is an area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (0) in which the information corresponding to the fluctuation is stored.

In this embodiment, when the hold information is stored in the first sub hold area, the sub CPU 301 indicates the hold areas 411 to 414 corresponding to the first sub hold area in which the hold information is stored by a triangle. It is displayed as a hold image (hereinafter, simply referred to as "hold image"). Further, when the hold information is not stored in the first sub hold area, the sub CPU 301 does not display the hold image and displays only the frame of the hold area.

In FIG. 60A, a normal reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413, and the reserved image is displayed in the fourth reserved area 414. Only the frame is displayed. This indicates that the reserved information is stored in the first sub-reserved area (1) to (3), and the reserved information is not stored in the first sub-reserved area (4).

In FIG. 60 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 60 (a). This indicates that the reserved information is newly stored in the first sub-reserved area (4) from the state shown in FIG. 60 (a).

As described above, the sub CPU 301 displays the form (for example, color) of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 so as to be different depending on the expected value for the jackpot. In this embodiment, the difference in color is illustrated by the shade of color except for the rainbow.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 60B, the color of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is white (expected value level “0”), and is shown in the fourth reserved area 414. The color of the reserved image is blue (expected value level "1").

FIG. 60 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b), and the color of the hold image displayed in the fourth hold area 414 in FIG. 60 (b) is , Is an image showing that the color has changed from blue to yellow (expected value level “2”) when shifted to the third reserved area 413.

FIG. 60 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60 (c), and the color of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 60 (c) is , Is an image showing a change from yellow to green (expected value level "3") when shifted to the second reserved region 412.

FIG. 60 (e) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60 (d), and the color of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 60 (d) is , Is an image showing a change from green to red (expected value level "4") when shifted to the first reserved area 411.

FIG. 60 (f) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60 (e), and the color of the hold image displayed in the first hold area 411 in FIG. 60 (e) is , Is an image showing that the color changed from red to rainbow (expected value level "5") when shifted to the 0th region 410.

Further, the color (expected value level) of the hold image indicating the expected value for the jackpot does not necessarily have to be changed when the hold shifts, and may be changed, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change. ..

Further, in FIG. 60, the jackpot system look-ahead effect mode is changed to show the change in the expected value from which the jackpot is derived. The look-ahead effect that changes to the effect form may be executed by the sub CPU 301. In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before the change to the jackpot fixed look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-2. Specific example when the look-ahead effect is performed with the look-ahead time saving effect pattern]
Next, as the pre-reading hit type effect pattern, a specific example in which the pre-reading effect is performed by the pre-reading time-shortening effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

FIGS. 61 (a) to 61 (f) are examples of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect mode indicating that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit is provided. It is a figure which shows the changing process. The look-ahead time-saving hit type effect pattern shown in FIGS. 61 (a) to 61 (f) corresponds to “0EH”, “2EH”, “4AH”, or “6AH” in FIG. 56. Further, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern corresponding to the look-ahead expected value effect pattern shown in FIGS. 61 (a) to 61 (f) is not shown in FIG. 57.

In FIG. 61A, a normal reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413, and the reserved image is displayed in the fourth reserved area 414. Only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 61 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 61 (a). As described above, the sub CPU 301 displays the form (for example, shape) of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 so as to be different depending on the expected value for the time saving hit.

As described above, in this embodiment, the expected value for the big hit is represented by the color of the reserved image, and the expected value for the time saving hit is represented by the shape of the reserved image.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 61B, the shape of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is a triangle (expected value level “0”), which is shown in the fourth reserved area 414. The shape of the reserved image is a quadrangle (expected value level "1").

FIG. 61 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61 (b), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the fourth hold area 414 in FIG. 61 (b) is , Is an image showing that the quadrangle has changed to a pentagon (expected value level "2") when shifted to the third reserved area 413.

FIG. 61 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61 (c), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 61 (c) is , Is an image showing a change from a pentagon to a hexagon (expected value level "3") when shifted to the second reserved region 412.

FIG. 61 (e) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61 (d), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 61 (d) is , Is an image showing that the hexagon has changed to a circle (expected value level "4") when shifted to the first reserved area 411.

FIG. 61 (f) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61 (e), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the first hold area 411 in FIG. 61 (e) is , Is an image showing that the circle has changed to a star (expected value level "5") when shifted to the 0th region 410.

The shape of the reserved image showing the expected value for the time saving hit does not necessarily have to be changed one by one in the order of "quadrangle <pentagon <hexagon <circle <star", for example, it changes to "pentagon → circle". You may let me.

Further, the shape (expected value level) of the hold image showing the expected value for the time saving hit does not necessarily have to be changed when the hold shifts, and even if it is changed during the variable display of the special symbol of the change, for example. good.

Further, in FIG. 61, the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect mode is changed to show the change in the expected value from which the time-saving hit is derived. It may be executed by the sub CPU 301. In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before the change to the jackpot fixed look-ahead effect form.
-A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit-type look-ahead effect form.
-A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a large-value confirmed look-ahead effect form.
-A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big-hit-type look-ahead effect form, and then changes to a big hit confirmed look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-3. Specific example when the look-ahead effect is performed with the look-ahead common hit effect pattern]
Next, as the pre-reading hit type effect pattern, a specific example in which the pre-reading effect is performed by the pre-reading common hit effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 62.

62 (a) to 62 (d) are examples of pre-reading effect patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and are common hits indicating that there is a possibility of both a big hit and a time saving hit. It is a figure which shows the process which the hold image changes from the system look-ahead effect form to the jackpot system look-ahead effect form. The change in the common hit system look-ahead effect form is that the expected value level of the hit (time saving hit, big hit) changes, and that the type of hit changes to a big hit or a time saving hit. Is included. The look-ahead type effect pattern shown in FIGS. 62 (a) to 62 (d) corresponds to “15H”, “35H”, “51H”, or “71H” in FIG. 56, and corresponds to FIG. 62 (a). )-The look-ahead expected value effect pattern shown in FIG. 62 (d) corresponds to "43H" in FIG. 57.

In this embodiment, both the color indicating the expected value level for the big hit and the shape indicating the expected value level for the time saving hit are both as a common hit system look-ahead effect mode showing that there is a possibility of both the big hit and the time saving hit. Is displayed.

In FIG. 62A, a normal reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412, and the third reserved area 413 and the fourth reserved area 414 display the normal reserved image. The hold image is not displayed and only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 62 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 62 (a). The sub CPU 301 displays the form (for example, color and shape) of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 so as to be different depending on the expected value for the hit (big hit or time saving hit). .. In this embodiment, when the look-ahead effect is not executed or the expected value for the hit is the lowest, the reserved image is displayed as a white triangle, and "blue quadrangle <yellow pentagon <green hexagon <red circle <rainbow". The expected value for short hits increases in the order of "stars".

In this embodiment, in FIG. 62B, the form of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412 is a white triangle (expected value level “0”), and the third reserved area. The form of the reserved image shown in 413 is a yellow pentagon (expected value level "2").

62 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62 (b), and the form of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 62 (b) is , Is an image showing that the yellow pentagon changed to a green hexagon (expected value level "3") when shifted to the second reserved region 412.

62 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62 (c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 62 (c) is , From the green hexagon (common hit system look-ahead effect form of expected value level "3") to the rainbow triangle (big hit system look-ahead effect form of expected value level "5") when shifting to the first reserved area 411. It is an image showing that it has changed to.

That is, in the look-ahead effect shown in FIGS. 62 (b) and 62 (c), it is determined whether the form of the reserved image is a form showing an expected value for a big hit or a form showing an expected value for a time saving hit. It is a production that is difficult to grasp from the form of. On the other hand, in the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 62 (d), the form of the reserved image indicates the expected value for the big hit, and the expected value is extremely high (for example, the expected value level “5”). It is possible to grasp that there is.

As described above, in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is divided into a look-ahead time-saving hit effect pattern showing an expected value for a time-saving hit and a look-ahead jackpot effect pattern showing an expected value for a big hit, depending on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. , A look-ahead common hit effect pattern indicating an expected value for a hit (big hit or time-saving hit) is configured so that the look-ahead effect can be executed by any one of the patterns. Then, when the look-ahead effect is executed in the look-ahead common hit effect pattern, the player is given an interest in whether the reserved image changes to the big hit type look-ahead effect form or the time-saving hit type look-ahead effect form. It is possible to enhance the interest.

It is necessary to change the form of the reserved image showing the expected value for the time saving hit one by one in the order of "blue quadrangle <yellow pentagon <green hexagon <red circle <rainbow star". Instead, for example, it may be changed to "yellow pentagon (common hit system look-ahead effect form) → red triangle (big hit system look-ahead effect form)" or "green hexagon (common hit system look-ahead effect form) → It may be changed to a "triangular star (time saving hit system look-ahead effect form)". Further, the form of the reserved image showing the expected value for the hit does not necessarily have to start from the blue quadrangle having the lowest expected value, and may be started from, for example, the red circle.

Further, the form of the hold image showing the expected value for the hit does not necessarily have to be changed when the hold shifts, and may be changed, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

Further, in FIG. 62, the common hit system look-ahead effect mode is changed to change the expected value from which one of the hits (big hit or time saving hit) is derived, or the expected hit is changed from an unknown state to a big hit. However, instead of or in addition to this, for example, the look-ahead effect shown below may be executed by the sub CPU 301. In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before the change to the jackpot fixed look-ahead effect form.
-A look-ahead effect that changes from a common hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit confirmed look-ahead effect form.
-A look-ahead effect that changes from a common hit type look-ahead effect form to a big hit type look-ahead effect form, and then changes to a big hit confirmed look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-4. Modification example of common hit system look-ahead production form]
In addition, as the form of the reserved image, the common hit system look-ahead effect form showing that there is a possibility of both the big hit and the time saving hit is not necessarily a color showing the expected value for the big hit and a shape showing the expected value for the time saving hit. It is not limited to the form represented by both. Instead of this, for example, a dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect mode may be provided. When a dedicated common hit system look-ahead production form is provided, it becomes possible to have a sense of expectation for both big hits and time-saving hits, and since the expected values for each are unknown, future changes in the production mode will occur. You will be able to play games with a sense of expectation, and you will be able to improve your interest.

63 (a) to 63 (d) are examples of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and the reserved image is changed from the dedicated common hit-type look-ahead effect mode to the jackpot-type look-ahead effect mode. It is a figure which shows the process which changes. The look-ahead type effect pattern shown in FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (d) corresponds to “15H”, “35H”, “51H”, or “71H” in FIG. 56, and corresponds to FIG. 63 (a). )-The look-ahead expected value effect pattern shown in FIG. 63 (d) corresponds to "31H" in FIG. 57 or FIG.

Further, FIGS. 64A to 64D are examples of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, from the dedicated common hit-type look-ahead effect mode to the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect mode. It is a figure which shows the process of changing a hold image. The look-ahead type effect pattern shown in FIGS. 64 (a) to 64 (d) corresponds to “07H”, “27H”, “43H”, or “63H” in FIG. 56, and corresponds to FIG. 64 (a). )-The look-ahead expected value effect pattern shown in FIG. 64 (d) corresponds to "31H" in FIG. 57 or FIG.

In FIGS. 63 (a) and 64 (a), a normal reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412, and the third reserved area 413 and the third reserved area 413 and the third reserved area 412 are displayed. 4 The reserved image is not displayed in the reserved area 414, and only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 63 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 63 (a).

Similarly, in FIG. 64 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 64 (a).

In both of FIGS. 63 (b) and 64 (b), the form of the hold image shown in the third hold area 413 is a dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form, for example, a brilliant form. The expected value level can be changed by changing the degree of brightness of the light.

FIG. 63 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 63 (b), and is a dedicated common hit system displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 63 (b). It is an image which shows that the look-ahead effect form is shifted to the 2nd hold area 412 as it is.

Similarly, FIG. 64 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64 (b), and is a dedicated image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 64 (b). It is an image which shows that the common hit system look-ahead effect form is shifted to the 2nd hold area 412 as it is.

FIG. 63 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 63 (c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 63 (c) is , Is an image showing that when shifted to the first reserved area 411, the dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect mode changed to a red triangle (expected value level “4” of the jackpot).

On the other hand, FIG. 64 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64 (c), and is a hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 64 (c). It is an image showing that when the form is shifted to the first reserved area 411, it changes from the dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form to a white circle (expected value level “4” per time reduction).

In this way, even when the look-ahead effect form is represented by the dedicated common hit-type look-ahead effect form, the big hit-type look-ahead effect form and the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form can be changed from the dedicated common hit-type look-ahead effect form to the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form. It is possible to give the player the fun of which way it will change, and it will be possible to enhance the interest.

[1-11. Signal output outside the machine]
Next, it is output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), an island computer provided on each island (not shown)). The signal will be described. In this embodiment, the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described, but the signal from the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine may be input.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. The signals output from each channel of the external terminal plate 184 to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are, for example, "prize ball information 1", "door / frame opening", "external information 1" to "external information 8". , "Prize ball information 2" and "security". However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals, and these signals may be output. It may be configured so that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 65 is a table showing an example of output conditions of a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 65, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output from CN1, the signal of "door / frame opening" is output from CH2, and the signal of "external information 1" to CH10 is output from CH3 to CH10, respectively. Each signal of "external information 8" is output, a signal of "prize ball information 2" is output from CH11, and a signal of "security" is output from CH12. The output conditions for the signal from the first pachinko gaming machine to the outside of the machine are as shown in FIG. 65.

Next, an example of the timing chart of the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described by taking the signal of "prize ball information 1" as an example. As shown in FIG. 65, in this embodiment, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output for 120 msec for every 10 prize balls paid out.

FIG. 66 is an example of a timing chart of the signal of “Prize ball information 1” among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, the payout detection switch (not shown) turns from off to on each time one prize ball is paid out. As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball wins in the large winning opening 131 (see FIG. 4), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out and the starting opening (first starting opening 120 or second). For example, if a game ball wins in the starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4), three prize balls are paid out, and if a game ball wins in the general winning opening 122 (see FIG. 4), for example, four prize balls are paid out. Prize balls will be paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine for, for example, 120 msec, each time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 is set to "prize ball" at the timing when the payout detection switch of the tenth prize ball is turned on from the time of the previous output of the signal of "prize ball information 1", for example, for 120 msec. The signal of "Information 1" is output. It should be noted that outputting the signal of "prize ball information 1" at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on is only an example, for example, the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is used. It may be between the time it is turned on and the time it is turned off. Further, the signal of "Prize ball information 1" is output every time 10 prize balls are paid out or output for 120 msec, and the output timing and output time of the signal of "Prize ball information 1" is only an example. Can be set as appropriate.

Next, an example of a "security" signal, which is one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine, will be described. The "security" signal is mainly a signal output when an error occurs.

FIG. 67 is a table showing an outline of an error in the first pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, for each error name, the occurrence trigger in the main control circuit 200 and the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6). It is a table showing the output time and remarks of the release trigger in, the signal of "security" (shown as "security signal" in FIG. 67).

Although the first pachinko gaming machine does not have a small hit large winning opening, FIG. 67 also describes a small hit large winning opening abnormal winning error for convenience. Further, in FIG. 67, the big winning opening 131 is described as a big winning opening for big hits.

The outline of the error shown in FIG. 67 is an example, and only a part of them may be determined to be an error. For example, an error not shown in FIG. 67 is determined to be an error. You may do so. Those not shown in FIG. 67 but judged to be an error include, for example, a solenoid monitoring sensor error when the solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is turned on or off for a predetermined time or longer, and a big winning opening (big hit big hit). If there is an undischarged game ball inside the winning opening or the large winning opening for small hits, or if there is a prize in the large winning opening when the large winning opening is not opened, the large winning opening entry / discharge error and the vibration sensor will run for the specified time. This corresponds to a vibration sensor error or the like when the solenoid is turned on. Further, for example, when a specific area is provided in the jackpot game control and the probability variation control is executed after the jackpot game control is completed based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control. In the case of abnormal passage to a specific area, or when a game ball passes through a specific area even though there is no undischarged game ball inside the jackpot for big hits, it is judged as an error. It is preferable to configure it.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) transmits a fraud detection-related command to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6). The sub CPU 301 that has received the fraud detection related execution executes the notification control according to the content of the error.

Hereinafter, control by the main CPU 201 and the sub CPU 301 (both refer to FIG. 6) will be briefly described by taking as an example the case where an abnormal winning error for a big hit is generated.

As shown in FIG. 67, for example, if there is one winning detection after the initial power is turned on and before the first big hit big winning opening is opened, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) will be the big hit big winning. Winning opening abnormality It is determined that a winning error has occurred, and a "security" signal is output for 12 seconds. In addition, a fraud detection-related command indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred in the big winning opening for big hits is transmitted to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, since the output time of the “security” signal is 12 seconds regardless of any error, the device outside the machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (FIG. 6)). (See) and the island computer (not shown) can grasp the occurrence of an error by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot grasp the content of the error. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, by changing the output time of the "security" signal according to the content of the error, the device outside the machine that receives the "security" signal can grasp the content of the error. May be good.

When the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) receives, for example, a fraud detection-related command indicating a jackpot abnormal winning error for a big hit, for example, all or part of the following notification control is executed, and the fraud detection-related command is received. After, for example, 30 seconds have passed since then, the notification control shown below is terminated.
-Notification control for displaying, for example, the characters "large winning opening abnormal winning error" on the display device 7 (see, for example, FIG. 6) via the display control circuit 304.
-Notification control that outputs, for example, the voice of "Abnormal winning error at the large winning opening" from the speaker 32 (see, for example, FIG. 6) via the voice control circuit 305.
-Notification control that outputs, for example, a beep sound from the speaker 32 via the voice control circuit 305.
-Notification control in which the LED group 46 (both, for example, see FIG. 6) is fully lit in red, for example, via the LED control circuit 306.

If, for example, there is a power failure before 30 seconds have elapsed after receiving the fraud detection-related command, the sub CPU 301 ends the above-mentioned notification control.

Further, for example, when the sub CPU 301 receives the fraud detection-related command indicating the jackpot abnormal winning error during the execution of the above-mentioned notification control indicating the occurrence of the jackpot abnormal winning error, the above-mentioned Re-execute the notification control.

Next, a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine according to the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a table showing an example of output conditions of a signal output to the outside of the machine according to the gaming state in the first pachinko gaming machine. In FIG. 68, the signal to be output is indicated by ◯, and the signal not to be output is indicated by ×.

As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, the output signal is different depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201. For example, no signal is output during the normal gaming state (other than big hit / small hit, probable change / short time), and during the low probable time / short game state (other than big hit / small hit), "external information 3". And "external information 7" are output, and the signals of "external information 3", "external information 5" and "external information 7" are output during the high-accuracy time-short game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit). Output. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the signals of "external information 3" and "external information 6" are output during the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit). Will be done.

In this way, by making the output signal different according to the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201, an external device (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or an island computer) capable of receiving the signal (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6)) or an island computer (see FIG. 6). (Not shown)) makes it possible to grasp the state of the game in the pachinko gaming machine that is the source of the external information.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the normal game state) is during the normal game state (other than during the big hit / small hit, during probability change / time reduction). It is the same as the signal output to (other than). Similarly, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the low probability time and short game state) is the same as the signal output during the low probability time and short game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit). The signal output during the small hit game control process (during the high accuracy time and short game state) is the same as the signal output during the high accuracy time and short game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit), and is the same as the signal output during the small hit game. The signal output during the control process (during the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state) is the same as the signal output during the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit). That is, in the device outside the machine capable of receiving the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (not shown)), the small hit game control process is executed in the pachinko gaming machine of the external information transmission source. It is not possible to know whether or not it is. However, instead of this, by making the signal output during the small hit game control process different from the signal output when the small hit game control process is not in progress, the pachinko gaming machine of the external information transmission source has a small hit. Whether or not the game control process is being executed may be grasped by the device outside the machine that can receive the signal.

Further, during the low-accuracy time-short game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), during the high-accuracy time-short game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), and during the small hit game control process (low accuracy) shown in FIG. 68. During the time-saving game state) and during the small hit game control process (during the high-accuracy time-saving game state), the signals are output during the execution of the time-saving control. In this case, it may be assumed that the time saving control is being executed when both the electric support control and the special figure shortening control are executed, or only the electric support control is executed among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control. If this is the case, the time saving control may be being executed, or if only the special figure shortening control is being executed among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control, the time saving control may be being executed.

Further, in the above description of the first pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to control the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state by the control of the main CPU (function of A time saving game state, B). The explanation is based on the premise that the function of the time-saving gaming state and the function of the C time-saving gaming state are installed), but the explanation is not limited to this. For example, only one of the functions of the A time-saving gaming state, the B time-saving gaming state, and the C time-saving gaming state (for example, the function of the A time-saving gaming state) is installed, and the other functions (for example, the function of the A time-saving gaming state) are installed. For example, the pachinko gaming machine may not be equipped with the functions of the B time-saving gaming state and the C time-saving gaming state). Further, of the functions of the A time-saving gaming state, the B time-saving gaming state, and the C time-saving gaming state, two functions (for example, the function of the A time-saving gaming state, and the function of the B time-saving gaming state or the C time-saving). It may be a pachinko gaming machine equipped with only a gaming state function) and not equipped with other functions (for example, a B time saving gaming state function or a C time saving gaming state function).

Further, in a pachinko gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine called an ST machine, in which the probability change flag is set to ON with a 100% probability after the end of the big hit gaming state, the function of the A time saving gaming state and the B time saving gaming state It may be configured not to be equipped with either the function of the above and the function of the C time saving gaming state.

[2. Second pachinko machine]
Next, the second pachinko gaming machine will be described. As described above, the second pachinko gaming machine is a so-called type 1 type pachinko gaming machine called a digital pachi. However, the second pachinko gaming machine is different from the first pachinko gaming machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel. Therefore, the gaming board unit and the electrical configuration are also different from those of the first pachinko gaming machine.

Hereinafter, in explaining the second pachinko gaming machine, for example, the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and the base door 3 and the like, and the outside of the second pachinko gaming machine from the external terminal plate 1184 (see FIG. 70 described later). (For example, a pachinko gaming machine having a function, shape, arrangement position, etc., such as a signal output to a hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 described later) or an island computer (not shown) provided on each island). The explanation of the points in common with the above will be omitted as much as possible.

Further, in explaining the second pachinko gaming machine, the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine uses the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko gaming machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration described with reference to the drawings newly adopted in the description of the second pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko gaming machine, the first pachinko gaming machine The explanation shall be given using a code and a step number different from those of the machine.

[2-1. Game board unit]
FIG. 69 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 69, a game area 1105 is formed in the game board unit 1010.

The various members arranged in the gaming area 1105 of the second pachinko gaming machine (for example, the first starting port 1120 and the like) are various members arranged in the gaming area 105 (see FIG. 4) of the first pachinko gaming machine. There are some things in common with, but I will explain them once again.

As shown in FIG. 69, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, a guide rail 1110, and a substantially center of the game area 1105. Center accessory 1115, first starting port 1120, general winning opening 1122, passage gate unit 1125, special electric accessory unit 1130, second starting port 1140A, 1140B, and ordinary electric combination It includes an object unit 1145, a small hit unit 1150, an LED unit 1160, an out port 1178, and a back unit (not shown) arranged behind the game board unit 1010. The LED unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko gaming machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in the second pachinko gaming machine.

(Game panel)
The game panel 1100 is formed with an opening (without reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007. Further, a guide rail 1110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and game nails (without reference numerals) and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 1110 toward the game area 1105, collides with a game nail or the like, and changes the direction of travel toward the lower part of the game area 1105. And flow down.

Further, behind the game panel 1100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the effect of the effect. The game panel 1100 is made of a transparent resin so that the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 1100 may be made of a transparent member, or for example, only a portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front may be made of the transparent member. Further, the game panel 1100 may be made of a member having no transparent portion (for example, wooden), and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the effect of the effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither of which has a reference reference numeral). The game area 1105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rails 1110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball launched from the launching device 1006 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the upper part of the game area 1105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 1115 is configured to be fitted into the opening (without reference numeral) of the game panel 1100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 1116 above. The game ball launched toward the game area 1105 is distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116.

The game ball launched toward the game area 1105 by the launching device 1006 flows down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107. The game ball flowing down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107 flows downward while changing the traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 1100. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side region 1106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right side region 1107.

Further, in the center accessory 1115, a warp entrance 1117 is formed on the outer peripheral edge portion on the left side so that a game ball flowing down the left side region 1106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 is configured to be guided to the stage 1118 formed in the center accessory 1115. The stage 1118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction in the lower front part of the display area of the display device 1007. The stage 1118 may be formed of a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 1119 through which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 1118 substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 1119 is discharged directly above the first starting port 1120. It is configured in. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 1119 has a higher probability of being the first start than the game ball that has not entered the warp entrance 1117 or the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 but has not entered the chance entrance 1119. It is designed to win (pass) the mouth 1120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 1120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 1007, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win a prize (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins in the first starting port 1120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later). It should be noted that the game ball hit to the right may be able to win a prize in the first starting port 1120. Further, in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting port 1120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 1120 is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted and the extracted starting information. Is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition is satisfied, the reserved start information is used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120 is not limited to this.

(General prize-winning mouth)
A plurality of general winning openings 1122 are arranged in the lower left of the display area of the display device 1007, and are arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win a prize (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). Has been done. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 1122, it is detected by the general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 1122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described later), for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 1122 is played. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of balls is not limited to four.

Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 1122 is arranged so that the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 1122 is replaced with the above general winning opening 1122. Alternatively, it may be provided with a general winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can be won.

(Passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 1125 is arranged in the right side region 1107, and is configured to allow the game ball hit to the right to pass through, and the passage gate switch for detecting the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126. It is a unit body integrated with 1127 (see FIG. 70 described later).

When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126 is detected by the passage gate switch 1127, the start information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted start information of the normal symbol is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). .. The reserved start information of the normal symbol is used for the hit determination process of the normal symbol. Even if the passing gate switch 1127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 1126, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 1125 may be arranged in the left side region 1106 in place of or in addition to the right side region 1107.

Further, the passing gate 1126 may be made to function as an opportunity to operate the accessory continuous actuating device. That is, the transition condition from the non-big hit gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) to the big hit gaming state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous operating device operate, but the stop display mode indicating that the jackpot is a big hit. When (symbol combination) is derived, it is possible to operate the condition device but not the accessory continuous operation device. Then, on the premise that the condition device is operating, the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 1126, that is, the detection of the game ball by the passing gate switch 1127 (see FIG. 70 described later) causes the accessory continuous operating device to operate. It may be activated to shift to the jackpot gaming state.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 1130 includes a jackpot jackpot 1131 and a jackpot jackpot count switch 1132 (see FIG. 70 below) that detects the winning (passing) of a game ball to the jackpot jackpot 1131. , Is a unit body integrated with the special electric accessory 1133. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 1125 in the right region 1107.

The big hit opening 1131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot for jackpot 1131, a jackpot for jackpots where a left-handed game ball can win is placed, or a center accessory 1115. A big hit opening for a big hit may be placed at the top of the game.

Further, the big hit winning opening 1131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be won (passed) when controlled to the big hit gaming state which is advantageous to the player. It is a winning opening to be done. When the jackpot jackpot count switch 1132 (see FIG. 70 described later) detects that a game ball has been won in the jackpot jackpot 1131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the big prize opening 1131 for big hits is not limited to 10.

The special electric accessory 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 1135 that operates the special electric shutter 1134 (see FIG. 70 described later). The special electric accessory 1133, that is, the special electric shutter 1134, is in an open state in which a game ball can or easily wins (passes) the jackpot jackpot 1131, and the game ball wins (passes) through the jackpot jackpot 1131. ) Is impossible or difficult to close, and the state can be transitioned to. The state transition from the closed state to the open state of the big hit winning opening 1131 is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the big hit game state, a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big hit winning opening 1131 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. It is in a gaming state.

(2nd starting port)
In this embodiment, the second starting port 1140A and the second starting port 1140B are arranged in the game area 1105 as the second starting port, and both of these second starting ports 1140A and 1140B are right-handed. It is possible to win a game ball (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win a prize in the second starting opening 1140A and / and the second starting opening 1140B.

When a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 1140A, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141A (see FIG. 70 described later). Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 1140B, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141B (see FIG. 70 described later). Regardless of which of the second starting openings 1140A and 1140B the game ball wins, it triggers the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B is detected by the second starting port switches 1141A and 1141B (see FIG. 70 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted and extracted. The started information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). The reserved start information is used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 1140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B is not limited to this.

By the way, in this embodiment, there are two flow paths 1107a and 1107b on the downstream side as the flow direction of the game ball, which is hit to the right but does not win the big hit big winning opening 1131. Is formed. A game ball that has been hit to the right and has flowed further toward the downstream side without winning a prize in the big hit opening 1131 is placed in the upper flow path 1107a or the lower flow path 1107b by, for example, the branch nail 1108 shown in FIG. It is sorted.

The second starting port 1140A is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win a prize, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a can win a prize. However, it is not essential that most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a win the second starting port 1140A. For example, it is not possible to expect the winning to the second starting port 1140A. Alternatively, the game ball flowing down the upper flow path 1107a may be configured to win a prize with a predetermined expected value (for example, approximately one-third to one-fifth). The game ball that has flowed down the upper flow path 1107a but has not won a prize in the second starting port 1140A is configured to be discharged to the outside of the machine from the out port 1178.

The second starting port 1140B is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the lower flow path 1107b can win a prize, and the details thereof will be described later in the description of the ordinary electric accessory unit 1145.

(Ordinary electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 1145 is arranged on the lower flow path 1107b side, and when a game ball wins (passes), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning opening to the winning opening. It is a unit body that integrates a switch that detects the winning of a game ball and an ordinary electric accessory 1146. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 1140B, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 1141B. However, it is not essential that the above-mentioned winning opening is the second starting opening 1140B, and for example, the first starting opening may be the above-mentioned winning opening.

The ordinary electric accessory 1146 includes a protruding plate-type ordinary electric shutter 1147 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction, and a general electric solenoid 1148 (see FIG. 70 described later) for operating the ordinary electric shutter 1147. The ordinary electric accessory 1146, that is, the shutter 1147 for general electric power, is capable of winning (passing) a game ball to the second starting port 1140B or is easily opened, and it is impossible to win a game ball to the second starting port 1140B. Or it is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state. Instead of the above-mentioned ordinary electric shutter 1147 that can move forward and backward, a movable member made of, for example, a blade member, which is a so-called electric tulip, may be adopted. Further, the movable member is not limited to a pair, and includes a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, and the like.

(Small hit unit)
The small hit unit 1150 is a small hit large winning opening 1151 and a small hit large winning opening count switch 1152 for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball to the small hit large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 70 described later). It is a unit body that integrates a small hit shutter 1153 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction and a small hit solenoid 1154 that can operate the small hit shutter 1153.

By advancing and retreating the small hit shutter 1153 in the front-rear direction, it is possible or easy to win (pass) the game ball to the small hit large winning opening 1151 and the game to the small hit large winning opening 1151. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a ball.

If the game ball wins when the small hit large winning opening 1151 is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the small hit large winning opening count switch 1152 (see FIG. 70 described later). When a game ball is detected in the small hit large prize opening count switch 1152, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 1151 for small hits is not limited to 10.

Further, the small hit unit 1150 is a lower flow path 1107b and is arranged on the downstream side of the ordinary electric accessory unit 1145. Therefore, when the second starting port 1140B is opened by the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 1146, even if the small hit large winning opening 1151 is opened, the game ball flowing down the lower flow path 1107b is small. Since the second starting opening 1140B provided on the upstream side is won before reaching the winning large winning opening 1151, it becomes difficult (or impossible) to win the small winning large winning opening 1151.

In this embodiment, the big hit opening 1131 and the small hit big winning opening 1151 are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big winning opening opened when the big hit game control process is executed and the big winning opening. The large winning opening that is opened when the small hit game control process is executed may be the same large winning opening.

(Out mouth)
The out port 1178 is any of the various winning openings (for example, the first starting opening 1120, the second starting opening 1140A, 1140B, the big winning opening 1131 for big hits, the general winning opening 1122, etc.) of those fired toward the game area 1105. The purpose is to eject the game balls that did not win the prize to the outside of the machine. The out port 1178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 1105 so that both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 1178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning openings 1122, between the ordinary electric accessory unit 1145 and the small hit unit 1150, and the game is played. The game ball flowing down the area 1105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1100 as described above. This back unit includes a production accessory group 1058 such as a movable accessory controlled by a sub control circuit 1300 (see FIG. 70 described later). The effect group 1058 is arranged, for example, around the display area of the display device 1007. Of these production accessory group 1058, at least one of the effects or the effect component components constituting the effect functions as an effectable accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[2-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine. The control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine may be common to the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine, but this will be described once again.

As shown in FIG. 70, the second pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 1200 that controls the game, a sub control circuit 1300 that controls the production according to the progress of the game, and payout / launch. It is composed of a control circuit 1400 and a power supply circuit 1450.

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 controls, for example, the processing executed when the power is turned on, the processing related to the game operation, and the like, and includes the main CPU 1201, the main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), the main RAM 1203 (read / write memory), and the initial reset. It includes a circuit 1204, a backup capacitor 1207, and the like, and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

A main ROM 1202, a main RAM 1203, an initial reset circuit 1204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 1201. The main CPU 1201 has a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring the operation, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 1202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the second pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 1201 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 1202.

The main RAM 1203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 1203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 1201. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 1201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as needed.

The backup capacitor 1207 has a function of temporarily supplying electric power so that the data stored in the main RAM 1203 is not lost in the event of a power failure or the like.

Further, the main control circuit 1200 is connected to an I / O port 1205 that is communicably connected to various devices and the like, and a command output port 1206 that is connected so that various commands can be output to the sub control circuit 1300. Also prepare.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200. For example, in the main control circuit 1200, the normal symbol display unit 1161, the normal symbol hold display unit 1162, the first special symbol display unit 1163, the second special symbol display unit 1164, the first special symbol hold display unit 1165, and the first 2 A hold display unit 1166 for a special symbol, a display unit 1167 for probabilistic change notification, a display unit 1168 for time reduction notification, a solenoid for general electric power 1148, a solenoid for special electric power 1135, a solenoid for small hits 1154, and the like are connected. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 1170, the error notification monitor 1172, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 1200. The main control circuit 1200 can control the operation of these devices by transmitting signals via the I / O port 1205.

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data, setting values described later, and the like under the control of the main CPU 1201. The performance display data is, for example, data showing the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) game balls, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 1172. Further, in the error notification monitor 1172, in addition to the error code, for example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine having a setting function described later, a setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing is in progress and a setting confirmation process are in progress. It is also possible to display a code or the like during setting confirmation indicating. As the setting changing code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol display (for example, a setting changing symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 1200 includes a first start port switch 1121, a second start port switch 1141A, 1141B, a passing gate switch 1127, a big hit large winning opening count switch 1132, a general winning opening switch 1123, and a small hit big winning. The mouth count switch 1152 and the like are also connected. When these switches are detected, the detection signal is output to the main control circuit 1200 via the I / O port 1205.

Further, the main control circuit 1200 is used when transmitting data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 1186 that manages a pachinko gaming machine for the entire hall. The administrator of the game hall uses the external terminal board 1184, the setting key 1174 operated when changing or confirming the set value in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function described later, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 1203. A backup clear switch 1176 or the like that can be cleared according to the operation of is connected. In the present embodiment, the backup clear switch 1176 also serves as a switch for changing the set value described later, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing the set value may be provided.

Further, it is preferable that the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party other than the manager of the game hall (for example, a player) cannot easily touch the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176. "Inside the predetermined case" is not limited to the configuration in which the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 cannot be contacted unless the case is opened, but only the corresponding parts of the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 in the case are turned off. When a notch is provided and the pachinko machine is rotated from the island facility to expose the back using a key managed by the game hall manager, the game hall manager sets the key 1174 or / and backs up. It also includes those configured to be in contact with the clear switch 1176.

In this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but are not limited to this, and are connected to, for example, the payout / emission control circuit 1400 and the power supply circuit 1450. It may be configured as follows. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the manager of the amusement park from easily contacting the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176.

[2-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 1300 includes a sub CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work RAM 1303, a display control circuit 1304, a voice control circuit 1305, an LED control circuit 1306, an accessory control circuit 1307, a command input port 1308, and the like. The sub control circuit 1300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 1200. Although not shown in FIG. 70, an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player is also connected to the sub control circuit 1300.

The program ROM 1302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the second pachinko gaming machine by the sub CPU 1301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 1301 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 1302. In particular, the sub CPU 1301 controls the game effect according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

The work RAM 1303 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 1301.

The display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 1007. The display control circuit 1304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM in which data for generating various image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, and a D / A for converting image data as an image signal. Equipped with a converter and the like.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command from the sub CPU 1301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative symbol image data showing decorative symbols, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal, and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. In this way, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 1032. The voice control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 1032. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to a voice generation command from the sub CPU 1301. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 1032.

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046 including the decorative LED and the like. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decorative data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decorative patterns are stored, and the like.

The bonus control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each bonus (for example, one or a plurality of bonuses in the effect group 1058). The accessory control circuit 1307 is a accessory data ROM in which a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern are stored for each accessory. Etc. are provided.

Further, the accessory control circuit 1307 selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each accessory. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 1308 is connected to the command output port 1206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

The payout / launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout / launch control circuit 1400 launches a payout device 1082 and a game ball capable of paying out game balls. A launching device 1006 capable of enabling the ball lending, a card unit 1180 capable of executing control of ball lending, and the like are connected.

Upon receiving the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200, the payout / launch control circuit 1400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082, and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out the game ball. ..

A ball lending operation panel 1182 is connected to the card unit 1180. The ball lending operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving ball lending and a lending / returning button for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a ball lending operation is performed by a player, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180. The payout / launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out the game ball based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180. The operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

Further, the payout / launch control circuit 1400 is based on the fact that the launch handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, and the launch solenoid is according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Power is supplied to (not shown) to control the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for the game to the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout / emission control circuit 1400, and the like.

A power switch 1095 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 1450. The power switch 1095 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout / launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 75. The second pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description related to the setting function will be omitted below.

In the second pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which neither probabilistic control nor time saving control is executed, a high probabilistic time saving gaming state in which both probabilistic change control and time saving control are executed, and time saving control being executed although probabilistic change control is executed. A high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state that is not performed, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state in which the probability variation control is not executed but the time saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 1201 plays a game in any of these gaming states. It is possible to proceed. However, the gaming state progressed by the control of the main CPU 1201 is not limited to this, and progresses in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. It may not be done. For example, even if the game progresses in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, and the low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the game does not progress in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state. good.

In this embodiment, left-handed is a normal gaming mode in the normal gaming state, and right-handed is the regular gaming mode in the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. The sub CPU 1301 executes a control for displaying a normal game mode (for example, whether to hit right or left) in the display area of the display device 1007, for example.

[2-3-1. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 71 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As for the hit determination table of the special symbol, the game ball has won a prize in the table referred to in the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S1034 of FIG. 78 described later), that is, the first start opening 1120 or the second start opening 1140A, 1140B. It is a table referred to when determining "time saving hit", "small hit", "big hit" or "loss" by lottery based on the random value for determination of special symbol hit extracted at the time. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the hit determination process of the first special symbol are "time saving hit", "big hit", and "loss", and "small hit" is not included in the lottery target. On the other hand, the lottery targets in the hit determination process of the second special symbol are "time saving hit", "small hit", "big hit", and "loss". However, "small hit" may be included in the lottery target in the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

As described above, the special symbol hit determination random value is a random value used in the special symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the random value for determining the special symbol hit is extracted from 0 to 65535. However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines "time saving hit", "big hit", or "loss" based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random value in the hit determination process of the first special symbol. In the hit determination table of the first special symbol, the range (width) of the random value for determination for special symbol hit determination determined as "time reduction hit" for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag and the corresponding time reduction hit Relationship with judgment value data, special symbol hit determined as "big hit" Relationship between range (width) of random value for judgment and corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and special symbol hit determined as "miss" The relationship between the range (width) of the judgment random value and the corresponding loss judgment value data is defined.

Further, in the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 1201 determines "time saving hit", "small hit", "big hit", or "loss" based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random value. .. In the hit determination table of the second special symbol, the range (width) of the random value for determination for special symbol hit determination determined as "time reduction hit" for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag and the corresponding time reduction hit Relationship with judgment value data, relationship between range (width) of random value for judgment of special symbol hit determined by "small hit" and corresponding small hit judgment value data, special symbol determined by "big hit" The relationship between the range (width) of the random value for hit judgment and the corresponding big hit judgment value data, and the range (width) of the random value for hit judgment and the corresponding loss judgment determined as "loss". The relationship with the value data is defined.

In this embodiment, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201 is set to ". It is determined as "time saving hit", and the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 409 to 613, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit". , The judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is "missing" and determines the determination value data as "missing determination value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201 is "time saving hit". And the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability change flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit". , The judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is "missing" and determines the determination value data as "missing determination value data".

Similarly, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201 is set to "time saving hit". , And the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit". Then, the judgment value data is determined as "small hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 22118 to 22322, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit". , The judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 22323 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is "missing". , The judgment value data is determined as "missing judgment value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201 is "time saving hit". And the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit". Then, the judgment value data is determined as "small hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability change flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any of 22118 to 22968, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit". , The judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability change flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted special symbol hit determination random value is any one of 22696 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is "missing". , The judgment value data is determined as "missing judgment value data".

As described above, in this embodiment, for example, among the special symbol hit determination random values generated in the range of 0 to 65535, the range is from 0 to a predetermined width (for example, 0 to 22117 in the case of the second special symbol hit determination process). Is assigned to other determination value data (for example, time saving hit determination value data and small hit determination value data) excluding the big hit determination value data and the loss determination value data. Further, the tail end (for example, 22323 to 65535 if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol) is assigned to the loss determination value data from the predetermined value. Further, the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data are assigned adjacent to each other. By doing so, for example, when the probability change flag changes from OFF to ON (or from ON to OFF), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced by the amount that the width of the jackpot judgment value data is increased (or reduced) ( It is possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the width of other determination value data (for example, time saving hit determination value data and small hit determination value data) simply by increasing the size.

Further, in this embodiment, the winning probability of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is performed and the winning of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is performed. By making the probability different, it is possible to give variation to the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 71, the winning probability of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is performed is the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is performed. By making the winning probability higher than the winning probability, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the normal game state, which tends to be a monotonous game.

However, the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit judgment processing of the second special symbol is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit judgment processing of the first special symbol is performed. May be. In this case, for example, if the "time saving game state" is won in the time saving game state, the time saving game state is overlapped, and if the "time saving game state" is won just before the end of the time saving game state, the time saving game state is substantially changed. It will be extended, and it will be possible to suppress the decline in interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 can determine that the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit" regardless of whether the probability change flag is on or off. .. However, when the probability change flag is off (normal game state, time saving game state), the main CPU 1201 controls to the time saving game state if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving game state", but the probability change flag is on. In this case, even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", it is not controlled to the time saving gaming state.

[2-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 72 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table determines the stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins in the first start opening 1120 or the second start opening 1140A and 1140B and the above-mentioned determination value data. It is a table referred to when selecting a "selection symbol command" and a "symbol designation command" to be determined (that is, when executing the special symbol determination process of S1035 of FIG. 78, which will be described later). The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a symbol determined according to the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, and the "symbol specification command" is a symbol displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. This is a command to specify. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99.

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 72, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201 uses, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. Select like. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 1201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 70 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, the main CPU 1201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 2 to 9, the main CPU 1201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 10 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201 is the selected symbol. Select "z7" as the command and select "zA5" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z8" as the selected symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the second special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z9" as the selected symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201 uses the selected symbol command. Select "z10" as the symbol specification command, and select "zA8" as the symbol specification command.

When the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 1201 executes the small hit game control process. In the small hit game control process, for example, the small hit shutter 1153 (see FIG. 69) can be activated to allow or easily open the game ball to the small hit large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69). The prize ball can be paid out by executing the control to be in the state.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 29, the main CPU 1201 selects "z11" as the selected symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 30 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z12" as the selected symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z13" as the selected symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z14" as the selected symbol command and "zA11" as the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, the determination value data is determined based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random value with reference to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71), and then the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 71). (See FIG. 72), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random value and the special symbol symbol random value, the winning of the special symbol, the selected symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together.

Although the description is omitted in the second pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 corresponds to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164 (see FIG. 70) when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. It is a table that is referred to when deciding according to the symbol command. Further, the special symbol display unit 1163, 1164 derives a time saving hit display mode, a big hit display mode, a small hit display mode, or a loss display mode based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

[2-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 73 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. The hit type determination table determines the mode of the winning game state and / or the mode of the subsequent gaming state according to the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol (that is, described later). (When executing the hit type determination process of S1036 in FIG. 78). The mode of the hit game state shown in FIG. 73 shows the mode of the big hit game state or the mode of the small hit game state. Further, the aspect of the gaming state after that shows the aspect of the gaming state after the end of the hit gaming state. However, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time-saving hit, it is controlled to the C-time-shortened gaming state without being controlled by the hit-game state. The aspect is shown.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the mode of the C time reduction gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 1201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and decides to set the time saving number to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z8", the main CPU 1201 determines that only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag is set to on, and sets the time saving number to 50 times. To decide. When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z9", the main CPU 1201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and sets the time saving number to 100 times. To decide. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned display mode of the time reduction hit to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode. Without controlling the jackpot game state, the time saving flag is set to ON and the determined time saving number is set, and the C time saving gaming state can be controlled. If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the hit game state is not controlled, so that the mode of the hit game state is not determined. In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the set number of time reductions is the same regardless of the gaming state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed. .. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set number of time reductions may be different depending on the gaming state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the number of time reductions set according to the selected symbol command determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. Is different. By doing so, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "short-time hit", it is possible to give variation to the progress of the subsequent game, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. It will be possible.

By the way, as described above, when the probability change flag is on, the main CPU 1201 does not control to the time saving gaming state even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit". For example, even if the probability change flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 1201 performs a lottery for "time saving hit" as shown in FIG. 72, and the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit". In this case, although the display mode of the time saving hit indicating that the "time saving hit" is won is derived to the special symbol display unit 1163, 1164, it is not controlled to the C time saving gaming state. Further, the main CPU 1201 draws a "time saving hit" even if the probability change flag is on, and if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", the display mode of the loss is forcibly changed to a special symbol. It may be derived to the display units 1163 and 1164. Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is on, the time saving hit judgment value data is not assigned to the special symbol hit judgment random value, that is, the hit judgment process is performed so that the "time saving hit" is not included in the lottery result. May be good.

In this embodiment, when the probability change flag is on, it is configured not to shift to the C time saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is off even if the probability change flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the game shifts to the high-probability time-saving game state. You may do so.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", the mode of the winning game state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of times the small hit large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is opened as one mode of the small hit gaming state. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned display mode of the small hit to the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then determines the big prize for the small hit. By setting the number of times the mouth 1151 is opened, it becomes possible to control the small hit game state. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", after the end of the small hit game state, the main CPU 1201 is controlled to the small hit game state without changing either the probability change flag or the time saving flag. Return to the game state just before the flag.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit", the mode of the hit gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z11", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the mode of the big hit game state, and the probability change flag and the time reduction as the mode of the subsequent game state. It is decided to turn on only the probability change flag among the flags, and to set the probability change number to 10000 times. In this case, the main CPU 1201 can control the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then to the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. It becomes.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z4", "z5", and "z12", the main CPU 1201 sets the number of rounds to 10 rounds, 4 rounds, and 10 rounds, respectively, as a mode of the jackpot gaming state. To decide. Further, as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, in each case, it is determined to set both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to ON, and it is determined to set both the probability variation number and the time reduction number to 10,000 times. .. In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then controls the jackpot gaming state. It becomes possible to control the game state with high accuracy and short game time.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z13", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds and 10 as the mode of the jackpot gaming state, respectively. Further, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, in any case, it is determined that only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag is set to ON. Further, the number of time reductions to be set is determined to be set to, for example, 200 times when the selected symbol command is "z6", and to be set to, for example, 300 times when the selected symbol command is "z13". In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then controls the jackpot gaming state. It becomes possible to control the game state in a short time. The time-saving gaming state controlled here is the A time-saving gaming state. The mode of time saving control in the highly accurate time saving gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as “time saving performance”) is preferably the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state, but may be different from the time saving performance in A time saving gaming state. ..

Further, for example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" and "z14"), the main CPU 1201 is in the mode of the winning game state and None of the subsequent aspects of the gaming state are set. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, the main CPU 1201 continuously controls the gaming state without shifting the gaming state.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" and "z14"), as described above, the mode of the winning game state and the subsequent mode of the winning game state and the subsequent Since none of the modes of the gaming state is set, it is not necessary to show it in the hit type determination table of FIG. 73. However, in this embodiment, for convenience, in order to clearly indicate that neither the aspect of the winning gaming state nor the aspect of the subsequent gaming state is determined when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "missing", the figure is shown. It is illustrated in 73.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 1201 is extracted when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 1120 or the second starting port 1140A, 1140B with reference to the hit determination table of the special symbol of FIG. Judgment value data is determined based on the random value for determining the special symbol hit (winning judgment is performed), and the winning (“short hit”, “small hit”, “big hit” or “missing”) is determined. After that, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol determination table of FIG. 72, and the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins in the first starting port 1120 or the second starting port 1140A, 1140B and the above-mentioned The selected symbol command is determined based on the determination value data, and the type of display mode (for example, the type of time saving hit, the type of big hit) derived to the special symbol display units 1163, 1164 is determined. It should be noted that the above-mentioned winning determination and determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, but it is excluded that the determination is performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the confirmation display. Not the purpose.

Further, as shown in FIG. 73, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is “z6”) or 300. Time (when the selected symbol command is "z13"). On the other hand, the number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state controlled when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time reduction hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50. Time (when the selected symbol command is "z1") or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2"). That is, the expected value of the number of time reductions in the A time reduction gaming state is higher than the expected value of the time reduction number in the C time reduction gaming state. In this way, by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous to the player than the C time-saving game state, the position of the "big hit" can be increased. For example, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest that may occur due to a disadvantage compared to the case where the "big hit" is won but the "big hit" is not won (when the "short-time hit" is won). Will be.

In addition, instead of the expected value of the time reduction number in the A time reduction gaming state being higher than the expected value of the time reduction number in the C time reduction gaming state, the expected value of the time reduction number in the C time reduction gaming state is the time reduction number in the A time reduction gaming state. It may be higher than the expected value. In this way, by making the C time saving game state more advantageous to the player than the A time saving game state, the position of "time saving hit" can be increased. For example, even if the state of not winning the "big hit" continues for a long period of time, if the "time saving hit" is won, it is controlled to a relatively advantageous C time saving gaming state, so that the decline in interest is suppressed. It becomes possible to do.

[2-3-4. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 74 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a low start of the second pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 75 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a high start of the second pachinko gaming machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. The columns of "Remarks" in FIGS. 74 and 75 are shown for convenience for easy understanding. The main CPU 1201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120, and the second special when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B. Determine the fluctuation pattern of the symbol. The variation pattern table of the special symbol of FIGS. 74 and 75 is a table referred to when executing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol of S1037 of FIG. 78, which will be described later.

In the normal gaming state in which left-handed strike is a normal gaming mode, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to, for example, the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 74.

As shown in the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start of FIG. 74, the main CPU 1201 uses a specific random number value as the effect selection random value extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 1120. If so, set the look-ahead flag. The sub CPU 1301 that has received the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 1201 performs a look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 1301 may determine.

On the other hand, in a gaming state in which right-handed hitting is a regular gaming mode, that is, a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, or a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, for example, the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 does not set the look-ahead flag when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, but the present invention is not limited to this.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the variation pattern of the special symbol is based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (win), the random value for reach determination, and the random value for effect selection. Will be decided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination may be made in place of or in addition to any of the above values based on other values or the like.

The reach determination random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249, and the effect selection random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99. However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start of FIG. 75, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start of FIG. 74. The expected value of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time is larger than that in the case of determination. In particular, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start, the second special symbol is variable over an extremely long time, for example, approximately 600,000 msec (for example, long variation A to C). The display is done. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, the second special symbol is variablely displayed for an extremely short time, for example, 1000 msec (for example, ultrafast fluctuation). ..

The main CPU 1201 transmits the determined fluctuation pattern information to the sub CPU 1301. The sub CPU 1301 controls a display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and a sound effect output from the speaker 1032 based on the fluctuation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201.

Although not shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, for example, the range of the random value for effect selection is changed for each set value so that the fluctuation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbol to be determined is different. May be good.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, in the normal gaming state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 74). In the time-saving game state and the low-probability time-saving game state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start (see FIG. 75), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a high start, a plurality of variation pattern tables having different expected values of the variable display times of the special symbol per unit time are provided. The tables referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of may be different.

Further, in the time saving hit system reach A and B shown in the “Remarks” column of FIGS. 74 and 75, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol may be a time saving hit (there is no possibility of a big hit). It is a reach production that shows. Similarly, the jackpot system reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time saving hit). Further, the common reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit or a big hit.

Further, although the description is omitted in the second pachinko gaming machine, as in the first pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 has a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16) and a normal symbol determination table. (See FIG. 17), a type determination table for a normal symbol (see FIG. 18), and a variation pattern table of a normal symbol (see FIG. 19) are stored. Then, the main CPU 1201 determines the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 1146 (see FIG. 69) in the same manner as the first pachinko gaming machine, and controls the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 1146 based on this.

[2-4. Main control process]
In the second pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 include the special symbol control process performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, the same applies to other processes. Therefore, in the following, the special symbol control process will be described, and the description of other processes executed by the main CPU 1201 will be omitted. The processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine may be the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, the jackpot end processing (FIG. 42, 86), etc.). ), Hereinafter, the special symbol control process will be described again with different step numbers, including the same process as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the special symbol control process performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 76, the main CPU 1201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S1001. The control status number of the special symbol is a number indicating the status (status) of the control process related to the variable display (special symbol game) of each special symbol. After executing the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the work area or the like of each special symbol in the main RAM 1203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S1001 in executing the special symbol control process. ..

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols when executing the special symbol control process. Then, when the number of reserved first special symbols is "0" for a certain period of time or longer, the main CPU 1201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process for the first special symbol, and the number of reserved second special symbols is for a certain period of time. If it is "0" over the above, the demo display command transmission reservation process for the second special symbol is performed. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 1300 receives the demo display command, the sub CPU 1301 performs a demo display effect when the demo display command is a demo display command of the main special symbol.

In the second pachinko gaming machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, but the sub CPU 1301 is one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The special symbol is used as the main special symbol and the other is used as the sub-special symbol, and the effect control of the main special symbol is mainly performed. In this embodiment, in the normal gaming state in which the left-handed strike is the normal gaming mode, the first special symbol is the main special symbol, and the right-handed hitting is the regular gaming mode (for example, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state). , High probability non-time saving game state, low probability time saving game state), the second special symbol is regarded as the main special symbol. Then, the sub CPU 1301 performs variable display of decorative symbols for the main special symbol, display effect of characters and the like, voice effect for the main special symbol, and the like. For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the sub-special symbol is, for example, a big hit, for example, the sub-special symbol may be produced while the main special symbol is produced. In addition, among the game states in which right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, in the low-accuracy time-shortening game state, other effects are performed instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the main special symbol. An image (for example, a countdown effect of counting down the number of remaining time reductions until the end of the time reduction game state) may be displayed.

In S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the timing of the variable display start based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1001.

When it is determined in S1002 that the second special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (NO determination in S1002), that is, when any process related to the second special symbol is executed, the main CPU 1201 processes. To S1003. For example, NO is determined in S1002 during the execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1002 that the second special symbol is the timing of starting the variable display (YES in S1002), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1004.

In S1003, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol management process. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the process of S1003, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1004, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the timing of the variable display start based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1004.

When it is determined in S1005 that the first special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (NO determination in S1005), that is, when any process related to the first special symbol is executed, the main CPU 1201 processes. To S1006. For example, NO is determined in S1005 during the execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1005 that the first special symbol is the timing for starting the variable display (YES in S1005), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1007.

In S1006, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the process of S1006, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1007.

In S1007, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S1007, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1008.

In S1008, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the timing of the variable display start based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1007.

When it is determined in S1008 that the second special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (NO in S1008), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1010.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1008 that the second special symbol is the timing for starting the variable display (YES in S1008), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is executed and the variable display can be started. If, the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1009.

In S1009, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the process of S1009, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1010.

In S1010, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1010, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1011.

In S1011, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the timing of starting variable display based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1010.

When it is determined in S1011 that the first special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (NO determination in S1011), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and performs the process as the main control main process (FIGS. 20 to 20 to 20). (See FIG. 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1011 that the first special symbol is the timing for starting the variable display (YES in S1011), that is, no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and the variable display can be started. If, the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1012.

In S1012, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the process of S1012, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S1001 to S1012) within the interrupt prohibition section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when any process related to the second special symbol is executed, when any process related to the first special symbol is executed, the process related to the second special symbol is executed. When the variable display can be started without any execution, and when the process related to the first special symbol is not executed and the variable display can be started, the special symbol management process described later is given in the order of priority. Is being executed.

[2-4-2. Special design management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1003, S1006, S1009, and S1012 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76) will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

For example, when the special symbol management process is called and executed by S1003 or S1009 during the special symbol control process, the second special symbol is the processing target, and the special symbol management process is S1006 or S1006 during the special symbol control process. When it is called and executed in S1012, the first special symbol is the processing target.

Further, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 77 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 1201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

First, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S1021).

When it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S1021 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S1021 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1022.

In S1022, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1022, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1023. The main CPU 1201 performs the processing after S1023 based on the control state number read out in the processing of S1022.

In S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. The process of S1023 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 78. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1024.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. The process of S1024 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1025.

In S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game determination process. The process of S1025 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1026.

In S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process. The process of S1026 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of the large winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1027.

In S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs a large winning opening opening control process. This process of S1027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this large winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs a jackpot end process. The process of S1028 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

After completing the processing of S1023 to S1028, the main CPU 1201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 76). The main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1004 when the special symbol management process is called in S1003 during the special symbol control process, returns the process to S1007 when it is called in S1006, and is called in S1009. If so, the process is returned to S1010, and if it is called in S1012, the special symbol control process is also terminated.

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the special symbol variable display start processing executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1023 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display start processing is called in S1023 during the special symbol management processing for which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start processing is called in S1023 during the special symbol management processing for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is “0” (S1031).

When it is determined in S1031 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "0" (when the determination in S1031 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when the determination in S1031 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1032.

In S1032, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S1032, even if S1031 is a YES determination (that is, even if the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is ON (S1032 is a NO determination). If), the special symbol variable display start process ends without proceeding.

When it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (when the determination in S1032 is NO), the special symbol variable display start processing does not proceed as described above, and the main CPU 1201 performs the special symbol variable display. End the start process. After that, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol pause flag is off (when the determination in S1032 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1033.

In S1033, the main CPU 1201 shifts the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1033, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1034.

In S1034, the main CPU 1201 performs a hit determination process for a special symbol. In this process, the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed by referring to the hit determination table of the special symbol (see FIG. 71) and using the random value for the special symbol hit determination. In this embodiment, it is determined whether the first special symbol is a time saving hit, a big hit, or a loss, and the second special symbol is a time saving hit, a small hit, a big hit, or a loss. It is determined whether or not there is. Further, the main CPU 1201 sets the time saving hit flag on when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a time saving hit, and turns on the small hit flag when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a small hit. If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, set the big hit flag to on. After executing the process of S1034, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1035. The time saving hit flag is turned off at the start of the C time saving gaming state, the small hit flag is turned off at the start of the small hit gaming state, and the big hit flag is turned off at the start of the big hit gaming state.

In the hit determination process of the above special symbol (see S1034), first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined by this process that it is not a big hit, a process of determining whether or not it is a small hit is performed. Then, when it is determined that the hit is not a small hit in this process, a determination process for determining whether or not the hit is a time saving hit is performed, and when it is determined that the hit is not a time saving hit in this process, it is determined to be a loss.

In S1035, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination process (S1034) of the special symbol (for example, time saving hit, small hit, big hit, or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. In this embodiment, since there is only one type of loss, it is not necessary to determine the stop symbol when the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, but a plurality of types of loss are provided to perform the hit determination process of the special symbol. If the result is a loss, the stop symbol may be determined. After executing the process of S1035, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1036.

In S1036, the main CPU 1201 performs a hit type determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the type of hit when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a hit (time saving hit, small hit, or big hit). In this process, the hit type is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S1035) with reference to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 73). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of hits, but there may be one type of big hit and one type of time saving hit. Further, instead of or in addition to having a plurality of types of hits, a plurality of types of other hits (for example, small hits) may be provided, or a plurality of types of loss may be provided. good. After executing the process of S1036, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1037.

In S1037, the main CPU 1201 performs a variation pattern determination process of a special symbol. This process is a process of determining or determining a variation pattern of a special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75) is referred to, for example, the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process (S1034) of the special symbol, the reach determination random value and / and the effect selection random. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the numerical value and the like. In this embodiment, in the normal gaming state in which left-handed strike is a normal gaming mode, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 74). In a gaming state in which right-handed is a regular gaming mode (for example, a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), a variation pattern table of special symbols for a high start (see FIG. 75). ) Is referred to to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1037, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1038.

In S1038, the main CPU 1201 performs a variable display time setting process of a special symbol. In this process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process (S1037) of the special symbol is determined as the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75). To. After executing the process of S1038, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1039.

In S1039, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting "1" in the control state number of the special symbol. In this way, by performing the process of setting the control status number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control status number, the special symbol variable display end process (FIG. 77) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display start process. (See S1024) will be performed. After executing the process of S1039, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1040.

In S1040, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a parameter update process related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 is performed. After executing the process of S1040, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1041.

In S1041, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state management process. In this process, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc.) are mainly updated. After executing the process of S1041, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1042.

In S1042, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibition section, and prohibits interrupts from the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly, game state management process (S1041) and special symbol effect start command transmission reservation process (S1042)). It is preferable to do it within the section.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1024 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. 79 and 80 are flowcharts showing an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display end processing is called in S1024 during the special symbol management processing for the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end processing is called in S1024 during the special symbol management processing for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target. Further, in the special symbol variable display end processing described below, the special symbol of the processing target is simply referred to as a "special symbol", and the special symbol of the non-processing target is referred to as "the other special symbol".

First, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1051).

When it is determined in S1051 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "1" (when the determination in S1051 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and performs the processing in the special symbol management processing (FIG. See 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when the determination in S1051 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1052.

In S1052, the main CPU 1201 loads the special symbol pause flag value. After executing the process of S1052, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1053.

In S1053, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off based on the special symbol pause flag value loaded in S1052.

When it is determined in S1053 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (when the determination in S1053 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and performs the processing in the special symbol management processing (FIG. See 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1053 that the special symbol pause flag is off (when the determination in S1053 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1054.

In S1054, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S1025 in FIG. 77) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be done. After executing the process of S1054, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1055.

In S1055, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1055, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1056.

In S1056, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. The symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol is fixed (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state such as the number of remaining probable changes and the number of remaining time reductions. You may manage the number. After executing the process of S1056, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1057.

In S1057, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small hit.

When it is determined in S1057 that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a small hit (when the determination in S1057 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1059.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1057 that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small hit (when the determination in S1057 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1058.

In S1058, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from being started or stopped during the execution of the small hit game control process. After executing the process of S1058, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1059.

In S1059, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a big hit.

In S1059, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a big hit (NO determination in S1059), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and processes it. Is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1059 that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a big hit (when the determination in S1059 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1060.

In S1060, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from being started during the execution of the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S1060, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1061.

In S1061, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the other special symbol is in variable display.

When it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is not in the variable display (when the determination in S1061 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is in variable display (YES in S1061), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1062.

In S1062, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. After executing the process of S1062, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1063.

In S1063, the main CPU 1201 sets the variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the test firing test signal will be output to the outside. This test firing test signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped due to loss. After executing the process of S1063, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1064.

In S1064, the main CPU 1201 forcibly changes the hit flag of the other special symbol to a loss and sets it. By performing this process, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol to be processed (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a big hit, the other special symbol is being variably displayed and the other special symbol is hit. Even if the result of the determination process is a big hit, the other special symbol will be forcibly stopped due to a loss. After executing the process of S1064, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1065.

In S1065, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of clearing the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S1065, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1066.

In S1066, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting a predetermined fixed waiting time in the timer of the other special symbol. In this process, a fixed waiting time is set so that when the special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating a big hit, the other special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating a loss. After executing the process of S1066, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1067.

In S1067, the main CPU 1201 sets "2" to the control state number of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S1067, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1068.

In S1068, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1068, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1069.

In S1069, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the other special symbol effect stop command. The other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1069, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

As described above, in the special symbol variable display end processing of this embodiment, the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the hit determination processing of this special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78). If the result of is a big hit and the other special symbol is in the variable display, the process of forcibly losing the variable display of the other special symbol is performed.

[2-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1025 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. 81 and 82 are flowcharts showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

When this special symbol game determination process is called in S1025 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S1025 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is the processing target.

First, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1071).

When it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (when the determination in S1071 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 77). See).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when the determination in S1071 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1072.

In S1072, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is a big hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a big hit.

In S1072, when it is determined that the special symbol that is not a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is not the stop display mode indicating a big hit (NO in S1072), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1073. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1072 that the special symbol that is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating the big hit (when the determination in S1072 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1075.

In S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is a small hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a small hit.

In S1073, when it is determined that the special symbol which is not a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating a loss (when the determination in S1073 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1074.

In S1074, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end process. This special symbol game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83. When the special symbol game end process is performed, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1073, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is a small hit, that is, the stop display mode indicating the small hit (when the determination in S1073 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1075.

In this embodiment, the following S1075 to S1081 are common processes for convenience of explanation between the case of a big hit (when S1072 is a YES judgment) and the case of a small hit (when S1073 is a YES judgment). Will be described with reference to. However, in the case of a big hit, the condition device operates, while in the case of a small hit, the condition device does not operate. Therefore, strictly speaking, different processes are executed depending on whether the hit is a big hit or a small hit (for example). , Set the number of rounds for big hits, while setting the number of open times for small hits, etc.).

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs a big hit game control process or a small hit game control process start setting process. In this process, a signal output to, for example, a hall computer 1186 (both see FIG. 70) or an island computer (not shown) is generated and updated via the external terminal board 1184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After performing the processing of S1075, the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1076.

Further, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control process of S1075, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a probability change flag, a probability change counter, a time reduction flag, and a time reduction counter.

In S1076, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a process (S1077) of setting an upper limit of the number of times of opening the large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 1131 for big hits or the large winning opening 1151 for small hits) to be opened, the external terminal board 1184. Jackpot signal set processing (S1078), processing to set the control status number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079), game status specification parameter setting processing (S1080), and transmission reservation processing of the jackpot start display command (S1081). ) Etc. are performed. By performing the process (S1079) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the completion of this special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening opening preparation process (FIG. 77). (See S1026) will be performed. After that, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S1071 to S1081) within the interrupt prohibition section.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1074 in the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 81 and 82) will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 1201 performs a time saving management process (S1091). Since the details of this time saving management process are the same as the processes described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko gaming machine, the description thereof will be omitted. After executing the process of S1091, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1092.

In S1092, the main CPU 1201 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol. When the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed in this way, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S1092, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1093.

In S1093, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process (S1094) of the special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S1094, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 81).

If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a loss, the main CPU 1201 does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time reduction flag. Therefore, even if the display mode of loss is derived, the gaming state does not shift.

[2-4-7. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the large winning opening opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1026 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

When this large winning opening opening preparation process is called in S1026 during the special symbol management process for processing the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the large winning opening opening preparation process is called in S1026 during the special symbol management process for processing the second special symbol, the second special symbol is the process target.

First, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1101).

When it is determined in S1101 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "3" (when the determination in S1101 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when the determination in S1101 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1102.

In S1102, the main CPU 1201 loads the large winning opening opening number counter value. The big winning opening open count counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of executions of the round game executed in the big hit game state when the big hit game control process is executed, and when the small hit game control process is executed. , A counter that counts the number of times the small hit game control process is executed corresponds to this. The count value of the large winning opening opening number counter (large winning opening opening number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203. After executing the process of S1102, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of times the large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 1131 for big hits or the large winning opening 1151 for small hits) is opened is the upper limit value. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of times the big hit winning opening 1131 is opened in the big hit gaming state, is, for example, four rounds or four rounds as shown in the hit type determination table (see FIG. 73). 10 rounds. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of times the small hit large winning opening 1151 is opened in the small hit gaming state is, for example, once.

When it is determined in S1103 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value (when the determination in S1103 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1104.

In S1104, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S1104) and switching the control state number, the big hit end process (FIG. 77) is performed after the end of the special winning opening opening preparation process. (See S1028) will be performed. After executing the process of S1104, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1105.

In S1105, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the jackpot end display command (S1106). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S1106, the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

Returning to S1103, when it is determined that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not the upper limit value (when the determination in S1103 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1107.

In S1107, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the large winning opening opening number counter value. After executing the process of S1107, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1108.

In S1108, the main CPU 1201 performs a selection process of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, the big hit big prize opening 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected as the big winning opening for opening when the big hit game control process is executed, and for the small hit when the small hit game control process is executed. The big winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is selected. After executing the process of S1108, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1109.

In S1109, the main CPU 1201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the big winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big hit, large winning opening 1151 for small hit) is opened, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening, the big winning opening winning The number of prize balls at the time is set. The number of times the big winning opening is opened corresponds to the number of rounds when the big hit game control process is executed, and corresponds to the number of times the small hit big winning opening 1151 is opened when the small hit game control process is executed. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude those in which the big winning opening is opened multiple times in one round or the small hit game control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to control the number of rounds to be managed and the control to manage the number of times the large winning opening is opened / closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S1109, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1110.

In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 30,000 msec when the big hit game control process is executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1800 msec when the small hit game control process is executed. To. The maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening is set to, for example, 10 at the time of executing the big hit game control process, and is set to, for example, 5 at the time of executing the small hit game control process. The number of prize balls at the time of winning a large prize is set to 10, for example, for both the large prize opening 1131 for big hits and the large prize opening 1151 for small hits. However, the values set in various setting processes related to the large winning opening are not limited to the above.

In S1110, the main CPU 1201 performs a large winning opening opening / closing control process. In this process, opening / closing control data generation processing of the large winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big hit, large winning opening 1151 for small hit) is performed. After executing the process of S1110, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1111.

In S1111, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S1111) and switching the control state number, the large winning opening opening control process (the large winning opening opening control process) is completed after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process. (See S1027 in FIG. 77) will be performed. After executing the process of S1111, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1112.

In S1112, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1112, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1113.

In S1113, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the display command during the opening of the large winning opening. The large winning opening open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1113, the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-8. Grand prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the large winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1027 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

When this large winning opening opening control process is called by S1027 during the special symbol management process for processing the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the large winning opening opening control process is called in S1027 during the special symbol management process for processing the second special symbol, the second special symbol is the process target.

First, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1121).

When it is determined in S1121 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "4" (when the determination in S1121 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when the determination in S1121 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1122.

In S1122, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won a prize in the big winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big hits, large winning opening 1151 for small hits) is the maximum number of winnings. In this process, the large winning opening winning counter that counts the number of winning balls to the large winning opening (for example, the big winning opening count switch 1132 for big hits and the big winning opening count switch 1152 for small hits (see FIG. 70)). Etc.), it is determined whether or not the value counted is the value of the maximum number of winnings. The large winning opening winning counter value counted by the large winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203.

In S1122, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the large winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big hit, large winning opening 1151 for small hit) is not the maximum winning number (when S1122 is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 Moves the process to S1123.

On the other hand, in S1122, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the large winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big hit, large winning opening 1151 for small hit) is the maximum winning number (when S1122 is YES determination). , The main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1124.

In S1123, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the large winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big hits, large winning opening 1151 for small hits) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the large winning opening (see S1109 in FIG. 84) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big hit, large winning opening 1151 for small hit) has not elapsed (when S1123 is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 wins the big winning. The mouth opening control process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big hit, large winning opening 1151 for small hit) has elapsed (when S1123 is YES determination), the main CPU 1201 The processing is transferred to S1124.

In S1124, the main CPU 1201 closes the big winning opening (big winning big winning opening 1131, small hit big winning opening 1151). After executing the process of S1124, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1125.

In S1125, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process (S1125) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the completion of the large winning opening opening control process, the preparation for opening the large winning opening is made again. Processing (see S1026 in FIG. 77) will be performed. After executing the process of S1125, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1126.

In S1126, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1126, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1127.

In S1127, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S1127, the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-9. Big hit end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

When this jackpot end process is called in S1028 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the process target, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the jackpot end process is called in S1028 during the special symbol management process for which the second special symbol is the process target, the second special symbol is the process target.

First, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1131).

When it is determined in S1131 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "5" (when the determination in S1131 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77). , The process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). In this case, the process returns to the process in which the special symbol management process is called.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when the determination in S1131 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1132.

In S1132, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, the values of various flags (for example, probability change flag, time reduction flag, ceiling count prohibition flag, etc.) are set or reset, and various counters (for example, probability change counter, time reduction counter, symbol fixed number counter, large winning opening opening count, etc.) are set or reset. The process of setting or resetting the value of the counter, the big winning opening winning counter, the ceiling counter, etc. is performed. Both the special symbol pause flag and the ceiling counter are reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S1132). If the probability variation flag is set to on, the ceiling count prohibition flag is also set to on. As a result, the ceiling counter is not updated in the high probability gaming state in which the probability change flag is on. After executing the process of S1132, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1133.

In S1133, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 83 is performed. However, in the special symbol game end process of FIG. 83, for convenience of explanation, it is shown that the time saving management process (S1091) is performed, but strictly speaking, the time saving management process (S1091) is a small hit. In a certain case (when S1073 in FIG. 81 is determined to be YES), it is executed, but when it is a big hit (when S1072 in FIG. 81 is determined to be YES), it is not executed and the process is skipped. After executing the process of S1133, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibition section.

[2-5. Small hit rush]
In the second pachinko gaming machine described above, a so-called small hit rush can be realized. The small hit rush will be described below.

As described above, the second pachinko gaming machine is provided with a normal gaming state, a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the main CPU 1201 is one of these gaming states. Control to one of the gaming states. As described above, in the normal game state, the left-handed game is a normal game mode, so that the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120 is mainly executed. Further, in other gaming states (high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state), right-handed is a normal gaming mode, so that the game is played to the second starting openings 1140A and 1140B. The second special symbol game based on the winning of the ball is mainly executed. When the winning opening included in the ordinary electric accessory unit 1145 is used as the first starting opening, it is the first in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state. The special symbol game is mainly executed, and the second special symbol game is mainly executed in the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the small hit large winning opening 1151 is in another gaming state (for example, normal gaming state, high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state). ), It becomes a small hit rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time can exceed 1.

Here, an example of the mechanism of the small hit rush will be described. First, the game ball hit to the right almost passes through the passing gate 1126. In the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the electric support control that increases the frequency of operating the normal electric accessory 1146 to open the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 1140B in this embodiment) is not executed. Further, since the big hit winning opening 1131 is not opened unless the big hit game control process is executed, the frequency at which the second starting opening 1140B is opened in the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state is the game in which the time-saving control is executed. Low compared to the condition. Therefore, if the small hit large winning opening 1151 is open, the game ball that is hit right and distributed to the lower flow path 1107b can win the small hit large winning opening 1151. When a game ball wins in the small hit large winning opening 1151, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out as described above. Further, the game ball hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win a prize in the second starting port 1140A. When a game ball wins a prize in the second starting openings 1140A and 1140B, for example, a stop indicating a small hit with a relatively high probability of one-third (approximate) as shown in a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71). Not only the display mode is derived, but also the ultra-fast fluctuation (for example, variable display time 1000 msec) is executed as shown in the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 75) of the special symbol for high start, so that the small hit is large. The winning frequency of the game ball to the winning opening 1151 is increased as compared with other gaming states (for example, a normal gaming state, a high-probability short-time gaming state, and a low-probability short-time gaming state). In this way, it is possible to realize a small hit rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time can exceed 1.

On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the time saving control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time saving gaming state and the low accuracy time saving gaming state), the second starting port 1140B is opened by the electric support control, and is hit right. Most of the game balls distributed to the lower flow path 1107b will win a prize in the second starting port 1140B. Therefore, even if the small hit large winning opening 1151 is open, the expected value that the game ball wins in the small hit large winning opening 1151 is low. Moreover, as described above, even if a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 1140B, for example, only one prize ball is paid out. When a game ball hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a wins the second starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out, but the second starting port 1140A is hit to the right and flows upward. Of the game balls distributed to the route 1107a, only about one-third to one-fifth of the game balls win a prize. As described above, in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1.

Further, in the normal game state, left-handed is a normal game mode, but if right-handed is performed, the right-handed game ball passes through the passing gate 1126 and a stop display mode indicating a normal symbol hit is displayed. When it is derived, the ordinary electric accessory 1146 operates, and there is a possibility that the small hit large winning opening 1151 is opened by winning a game ball in the second starting opening 1140B. However, in the normal gaming state, since the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 74), the game ball is tentatively won in the second starting openings 1140A and 1140B. Even so, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in any of the long fluctuations A to C having an extremely long fluctuation time, and the frequency at which the small hit large winning opening 1151 is opened is extremely low. Therefore, there is no actual benefit for the player to hit right in the normal gaming state. When the winning opening included in the ordinary electric accessory unit 1145 is used as the first starting opening, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol in the normal gaming state is set to, for example, 0 so as not to generate the actual profit of right-handed hitting. May be good. In the normal game state, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1, and of course, is smaller than the game state in which the time reduction control is executed. ..

In this embodiment, the game is configured to have a small hit rush in a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a small hit rush may be made in a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state in which the special symbol shortening control for shortening the variable display time of the special symbol is executed without executing the electric support control.

[3. Third pachinko game machine]
Next, the third pachinko gaming machine will be described. As described above, the third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a type 1 and type 2 mixing machine, and the first route and the second route are used as routes until the jackpot gaming state is controlled. There is. The first route is a case where a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "big hit" is derived. In the second route, the V attacker is released by deriving the stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is "the character opening hit", and the game ball that has entered the opened V attacker is V. This is the case when the V winning opening in the attacker is won.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, and the start condition of the second special symbol is prioritized over the start condition of the first special symbol. It is a priority variable machine. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned sequentially variable machine may be used.

Hereinafter, in explaining the third pachinko gaming machine, for example, the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and the base door 3 and the like, and the outside of the third pachinko gaming machine from the external terminal board 2184 (see FIG. 88 described later). (For example, a pachinko gaming machine having a function, shape, arrangement position, etc., such as a signal output to a hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 described later) or an island computer (not shown) provided on each island). As for the points in common with, the explanation will be omitted as much as possible.

In describing the third pachinko gaming machine, the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine uses the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko gaming machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration described with reference to the drawings newly adopted in the description of the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko gaming machine, the first pachinko machine The explanation shall be made using a code and a step number different from those of the gaming machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
With reference to FIG. 87, the gaming board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko gaming machine will be described. The gaming board unit 2010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 87 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko gaming machine. On the front surface of the game board unit 2010, a game area 2105 is formed in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down.

The various members (for example, the first starting port 2120, etc.) arranged in the gaming area 2105 of the third pachinko gaming machine may be common to the various members arranged in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. There is, but I will explain it once again.

As shown in FIG. 87, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, a guide rail 2110, and a substantially center of the game area 2105. The center accessory 2115, the first starting port 2120, the second starting port 2140, the general winning opening 2122, the passing gate unit 2125, the special electric accessory unit 2130, and the ordinary electric accessory unit are arranged in the section. It includes a 2145, an LED unit 2160, a V winning device 2150, an out port 2178, and a back unit (not shown). The LED unit 2160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko gaming machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in the third pachinko gaming machine.

(Game panel)
The game panel 2100 is formed with an opening (without reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007. Further, a guide rail 2110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 2100, and game nails (without reference numerals) and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 2110 toward the game area 2105, collides with a game nail or the like, and changes the direction of travel toward the lower part of the game area 2105. And flow down.

Further, behind the game panel 2100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the effect of the effect. The game panel 2100 is made of a transparent resin so that the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 2100 may be made of a transparent member, or for example, only a portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front may be made of the transparent member. Further, the game panel 2100 may be made of a member having no transparent portion (for example, wooden), and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the effect of the effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (both have no reference numeral) like the first pachinko gaming machine. The game area 2105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 2110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball launched from the launcher 2006 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the upper part of the game area 2105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 2115 is configured to be fitted into the opening (without reference numeral) of the game panel 2100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 2116 above. The game ball launched toward the game area 2105 is distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116.

The game ball launched toward the game area 2105 by the launcher 2006 flows down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107. The game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107 flows downward while changing the traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 2100. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side region 2106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right side region 2107.

Further, in the center accessory 2115, a warp entrance 2117 is formed on the outer peripheral edge portion on the left side so that a game ball flowing down the left side region 2106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 is configured to be guided to the stage 2118 formed in the center accessory 2115. The stage 2118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 2007. The stage 2118 may be formed of a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 2119 through which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 2118 substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2119 is discharged directly above the first starting port 2120. It is configured in. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability of being the first start than the game ball that has not entered the warp entrance 2117 or the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 but has not entered the chance entrance 2119. It is designed to win (pass) the mouth 2120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 2120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 2007, and is arranged so that a left-struck game ball can win a prize (a right-struck game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins in the first starting port 2120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described later). It should be noted that the game ball hit to the right may be able to win a prize in the first starting port 2120. Further, in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting port 2120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted and the extracted starting information. Is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition is satisfied, the reserved start information is used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is not limited to three.

(2nd starting port)
The second starting port 2140 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win a prize in the second starting port 2140.

When the game ball wins in the second starting port 2140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 2141. When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 2140 is detected by the second starting port switch 2141 (see FIG. 88 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted and the extracted starting information. Is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). The reserved start information is used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2140 is not limited to this.

(General prize-winning mouth)
A plurality of general winning openings 2122 are arranged in the lower left of the display area of the display device 2007, and are arranged so that a left-struck game ball can win a prize (a right-struck game ball is difficult or impossible to win). Has been done. When a game ball wins in any of the plurality of general winning openings 2122, it is detected by the general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 2122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later), for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 2122 is played. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of balls is not limited to four.

Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2122 is arranged so that the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 2122 is replaced with the above-mentioned general winning opening 2122. Alternatively, it may be provided with a general winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can be won.

(Passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 2125 is arranged in the right side region 2107, and is configured to allow the game ball hit to the right to pass through, and the passage gate switch for detecting the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126. It is a unit body integrated with 2127 (see FIG. 88 described later). When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126 is detected, the start information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted start information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). The various reserved data are usually used for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passing gate switch 2127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 2126, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 2125 may be arranged in the left side region 2106 in place of or in addition to the right side region 2107.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 includes a large winning opening 2131, a large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball to the large winning opening 2131, and a special electric accessory 2133. It is a unit body that integrates with. The special electric accessory unit 2130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 2125 in the right region 2107.

The large winning opening 2131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned large winning opening 2131, a large winning opening in which a left-handed game ball can win is placed, or a game is played at the upper part of the center accessory 2115. A large winning opening where the ball can win may be arranged.

The big winning opening 2131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be won (passed) when controlled to the big hit gaming state which is an advantageous gaming state for the player. Is. When the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening 2131 is detected by the large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 2131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric accessory 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 2135 that operates the special electric shutter 2134 (see FIG. 88 described later). The special electric accessory 2133, that is, the special electric shutter 2134, is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (passed) into the large winning opening 2131, and it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball in the large winning opening 2131. It is configured to be closed and transitionable to. The big winning opening 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the big hit game state is reached through the first route described above. When the big hit game state is reached through the first route described above, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the big hit game state after passing through the first route, a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big winning opening 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period over multiple rounds. It is a game state that made it possible.

(Ordinary electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 2145 has a winning opening in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game ball wins (passes), a switch for detecting the winning of the game ball in the winning opening, and an ordinary electric. It is a unit body integrated with the accessory 2146, and is arranged in the right side region 2107. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 2140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 2141.

The ordinary electric accessory 2146 includes a protruding plate-type ordinary electric shutter 2147 that can move forward and backward, and a general electric solenoid 2148 (see FIG. 88 described later) that operates the ordinary electric shutter 2147. The ordinary electric accessory 2146, that is, the shutter 2147 for general electric power, is capable of winning (passing) a game ball to the second starting port 2140 or is easily opened, and it is impossible to win a game ball to the second starting port 2140. Or it is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state. In addition, instead of the above-mentioned general electric shutter 2147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be adopted.

(V winning device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided on the downstream side of the passage gate 2126 in the right side region 2107. The V winning device 2150 includes an opening / closing winning opening 2151 opened so that a game ball can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150, a V attacker 2152 capable of opening / closing the opening / closing winning opening 2151, and the V attacker 2152. The V attacker solenoid 2154 that operates to open and close the opening and closing winning opening 2151, and the V that detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152. The attacker count switch 2153, the V winning opening 2155 through which the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening / closing winning opening 2151 can pass, and the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening / closing winning opening 2151 are V. The V winning opening switch 2156 that detects that the game ball has entered (passed) into the winning opening 2155, and the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning opening 2150 from the open / close winning opening 2151 did not enter the V winning opening 2155. A loss opening 2157 through which a game ball can enter (pass), a V shutter 2158 that opens and closes the V winning opening 2155, a V shutter solenoid 2158a that operates this V shutter 2158 to open and close the V winning opening 2155, and a V winning It is provided with a locking member 2159 capable of holding only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the device 2150. The V winning device 2150 may be provided on the upstream side of the passing gate 2126, or may be provided on the left side region 2106.

The V-attacker 2152 is a member along an arc, and is in a closed state in which the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is always closed. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the stop display mode indicating that it is a "feature opening hit" described later is derived, almost at the same time as the variable display of the special symbol is completed, the solenoid for V attacker 2154 ( The operation of FIG. 88 described later) causes the V-attacker 2152 to operate, for example, once. When the V-attacker 2152 is operated once, the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened, for example, by 1800 msec. Then, while the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 is, for example, 10 per opening.

The mode for opening the V-attacker 2152 when the stop display mode indicating "per opening of the accessory" is derived is not limited to the above, and for example, 900 msec may be opened twice. A predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls may be closed based on the entry into the inside of the V winning device 2150.

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 2150. When the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 2150 is detected by the V attacker count switch 2153, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout / launch control circuit 2400, and functions of the main CPU 2201. Add the value of the V attacker winning counter. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches the specified value, the V-attacker 2152 is activated by the V-attacker solenoid 2154 to open / close the winning even if the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec) that can open the opening / closing winning opening 2151 has not passed. The mouth 2151 is closed.

The opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued on the condition that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155. That is, the V winning opening 2155 is a winning opening that triggers control to the jackpot gaming state via the second route described above.

The V winning opening switch 2156 detects the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155. When the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 88) detects the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V attacker 2152 is opened, the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 88) continues the opening control of the V attacker 2152. That is, it is controlled to the big hit game state via the second route. When the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, the round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit game state is controlled via the first route, the round game in which the big winning opening 2131 is changed from the closed state to the open state is executed, whereas the second round game is executed. When controlled to the jackpot game state via the route, a round game is executed in which the V attacker 2152 is changed from the closed state to the open state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when the player is controlled to the big hit game state via the second route, the V attacker 2152 is shifted from the closed state to the open state in the first round, but for example, a big winning opening is made from the middle of the round game. You may perform a round game that shifts the 2131 from the closed state to the open state.

Further, for example, by providing a V winning opening inside the special electric accessory 2133 (that is, an area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is opened), the V winning opening and the big hit game The attackers released in the state may be one by one. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating that the accessory is open is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and the game ball is inserted into the V winning opening 2155 provided inside the special electric accessory 2133. Is controlled to the jackpot gaming state (big hit gaming state via the second route).

The loss opening 2157 is configured so that a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but has not passed through the V winning opening 2155 enters (passes). The game ball that has passed through the loss opening 2157 is discharged to the outside of the machine. If all of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the loss opening 2157 and the game balls do not pass through the V winning opening 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is not continued and ends. do.

The V-shutter 2158 has a closing mode in which the game ball cannot (or is difficult) to pass through the V winning opening 2155 due to the operation of the V-shutter solenoid 2158a (see FIG. 88 described later), and the game to the V winning opening 2155. A constant operation is always performed between the opening mode in which the ball can pass (or easily). In this embodiment, for example, the V shutter 2158 constantly performs a constant operation in a cycle (cycle) of 7000 msec in which the operation of "6000 msec closed ⇒ 1000 msec open ⇒ 6000 msec closed" is repeated.

The locking member 2159 is provided above the V winning opening 2155, and is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one of the game balls that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150. The game ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 but is not held by the locking member 2159 is discharged to the outside of the machine from the loss opening 2157. Even when a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all the game balls not held by the locking member 2159 are discharged to the outside of the machine from the loss opening 2157.

Further, after a certain period of time (for example, 3000 msec) has elapsed from the operation of the V-attacker 2152, the locking member 2159 is released from the locking of the game ball by the operation of the locking solenoid (not shown). The game ball released from the locking member 2159 falls toward the V winning opening 2155, and if the V winning opening 2155 is opened at this timing, the game ball wins (passes) the V winning opening 2155. If the V winning opening 2155 is closed at the timing, it will pass through the losing opening 2157. The game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning opening 2155 or the losing opening 2157 without providing the locking member 2159.

(Out mouth)
The out port 2178 is of various winning openings (for example, first starting opening 2120, second starting opening 2140, large winning opening 2131, V winning device 2150, general winning opening 2122, etc.) fired toward the game area 2105. The purpose is to eject the game balls that have not won or entered any of them to the outside of the aircraft. The out port 2178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 2105 so that both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 2178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning openings 2122 or between the special electric accessory unit 2130 and the second starting port 2140. The game ball flowing down the game area 2105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the gaming board unit 2010 like the first pachinko gaming machine, and is provided on the rear side of the gaming panel 2100. This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 2007, and includes a production accessory group 2058 such as a movable accessory controlled by the sub control circuit 2300. Of these production accessory group 2058, at least one accessory or the effect accessory component constituting the accessory functions as an effectable accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[3-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine. The control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine may be common to the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine, but this will be described once again.

As shown in FIG. 88, the third pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 2200 that controls the game and the effect according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub control circuit 2300, a payout / launch control circuit 2400, and a power supply circuit 2450.

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (read / write memory), an initial reset circuit 2204, a backup capacitor 2207, and the like, and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

The main ROM 2202, the main RAM 2203, the initial reset circuit 2204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 2201. The main CPU 2201 has a built-in WDT for monitoring the operation, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 2202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the third pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 2201 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 2202.

The main RAM 2203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and the main RAM 2203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 2201. .. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 2201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as needed.

The backup capacitor 2207 has a function of temporarily supplying electric power so that the data stored in the main RAM 2203 is not lost in the event of a power failure or the like.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 has an I / O port 2205 that is communicably connected to various devices and the like, and a command output port 2206 that is connected to the sub control circuit 2300 so that various commands can be output. Also prepare.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200. For example, in the main control circuit 2200, the normal symbol display unit 2161, the normal symbol hold display unit 2162, the first special symbol display unit 2163, the second special symbol display unit 2164, the first special symbol hold display unit 2165, and the first 2 The hold display unit 2166 for special symbols, the display unit 2168 for time saving notification, the solenoid 2148 for general electric power, the solenoid 2135 for special electric power, the solenoid 2154 for V attacker, the solenoid 2158a for V shutter, and the like are connected. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 2170, the error notification monitor 2172, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 2200. The main control circuit 2200 can control the operation of these devices by transmitting signals via the I / O port 2205.

The performance display monitor 2170 displays performance display data, set values, and the like under the control of the main CPU 2201. The performance display data is, for example, data showing the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) game balls, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 2172. Further, in addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 2172 indicates, for example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, a setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing is in progress and a setting confirmation process in progress. It is also possible to display the code etc. while checking the settings. As the setting changing code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol display (for example, a setting changing symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 includes a first start port switch 2121, a second start port switch 2141, a passing gate switch 2127, a large winning opening count switch 2132, a V attacker count switch 2153, a V winning opening switch 2156, and general. The winning opening switch 2123 is also connected. When these switches are detected, the detection signal is transmitted to the main control circuit 2200 via the I / O port 2205.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 is used when transmitting data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 2186 that manages a pachinko gaming machine for the entire hall. If it is an external terminal board 2184, a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the setting key 2174 operated when changing or confirming the set value, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 2203 are stored in the game hall administrator. A backup clear switch 2176 or the like that can be cleared according to the operation is connected. If it is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 may also be used as a switch for changing the set value, or a setting switch for changing the set value may be provided. May be good.

Further, it is preferable that the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party other than the manager of the game hall (for example, a player) cannot easily touch the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176. "Inside the predetermined case" is not limited to the configuration in which the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 cannot be contacted unless the case is opened, but only the corresponding parts of the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 in the case are turned off. When a notch is provided and the pachinko machine is rotated from the island facility to expose the back using a key managed by the game hall manager, the game hall manager sets the key 2174 or / and backs up. It also includes those configured to be in contact with the clear switch 2176.

In this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but are not limited to this, and are connected to, for example, the payout / emission control circuit 2400 and the power supply circuit 2450. It may be configured as follows. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the amusement park from easily contacting the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176.

[3-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 2300 includes a sub CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work RAM 2303, a display control circuit 2304, a voice control circuit 2305, an LED control circuit 2306, an accessory control circuit 2307, a command input port 2308, and the like. The sub control circuit 2300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 2200. Although not shown in FIG. 88, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub-control circuit 2300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 2302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the third pachinko gaming machine by the sub CPU 2301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 2301 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 2302. In particular, the sub CPU 2301 controls the game effect according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 2200.

The work RAM 2303 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 2301.

The display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 2007. The display control circuit 2304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D / A that converts image data as an image signal. Equipped with a converter and the like.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command from the sub CPU 2301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative symbol image data showing decorative symbols, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, the image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. In this way, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 2032. The voice control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 2032. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 2301. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 2032.

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046 including the decorative LED and the like. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decorative data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decorative patterns are stored, and the like.

The bonus control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each bonus (for example, one or a plurality of bonuses in the effect group 2058). The accessory control circuit 2307 is a accessory data ROM in which a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern are stored for each accessory. Etc. are provided.

Further, the accessory control circuit 2307 selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each accessory. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 2308 is connected to the command output port 2206 and receives a command transmitted from the main control circuit 2200.

The payout / launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko gaming machine, and the payout / launch control circuit 2400 includes a payout device 2082 and a game ball for paying out the game balls. A launching device 2006 for launching a ball, a card unit 2180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

Upon receiving the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, the payout / launch control circuit 2400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082, and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out the game ball. ..

A ball lending operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180. The ball lending operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving ball lending and a lending / returning button (both not shown) for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored. For example, when a ball lending operation is performed by a player, a lending ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180. The payout / launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out the game ball based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180. The operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

Further, the payout / launch control circuit 2400 is based on the fact that the launch handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, and the launch solenoid is according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Power is supplied to (not shown) to control the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for the game to the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout / emission control circuit 2400, and the like.

A power switch 2095 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 2450. The power switch 2095 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout / launch control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92. The third pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description related to the setting function will be omitted below.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, the probability variation control is not executed. Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which the time saving control is not executed and a time saving gaming state in which the time saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2201 advances the game in the normal gaming state or the time saving gaming state. It is possible.

In this embodiment, left-handed is a normal game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed is the normal game mode in the short-time game state. The sub CPU 2301 executes a control for displaying, for example, a striking method, which is regarded as a normal game mode, in the display area of the display device 2007.

[3-3-1. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 89 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 89, when the game ball wins (passes) in the first starting port 2120, the main CPU 2201 is based on the hit determination process of the first special symbol using the random value for the first special symbol hit determination. , The result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is determined as "time saving hit", "big hit" or "missing". Further, when the game ball wins (passes) in the second starting port 2140, the main CPU 2201 hits the special symbol based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the random value for the second special symbol hit determination. The result of the determination process is determined as "time saving hit", "big hit", or "feature opening hit".

It is not essential that the "feature opening hit" is not determined when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, but even if it is determined as the "feature opening hit". It is preferable that the determination is made only with an extremely low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than the "big hit") as compared with the case where the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. In addition, it is not essential that the hit determination process of the second special symbol is not determined as "missing", but if it is determined as "missing", it is "hit for opening the character". It may be higher than the probability determined by, or it may be lower than the probability determined by "per opening of the character".

In the hit determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 2202, "time saving hit" and "big hit" are used as data used in the hit determination process of the first special symbol executed based on the winning of the first start port 2120. The range (width) of the random value for the special symbol hit judgment determined as "or" Loss "and the corresponding judgment value data ("Time saving hit judgment value data "," Big hit judgment value data "," Loss judgment value data " The relationship with ") is stipulated. In addition, as the data used in the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the winning of the second starting port 2140, the special determined as "time saving hit", "big hit" or "feature opening hit". The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for symbol hit judgment and the corresponding judgment value data ("time saving hit judgment value data", "big hit judgment value data", "feature opening hit judgment value data") is defined. Has been done.

It should be noted that this third pachinko gaming machine does not have a function of changing the jackpot probability determined as "big hit", but this is not essential, and the probability change flag is turned on according to the type of jackpot, for example. It may be set so that the jackpot probability can be increased.

Further, in this third pachinko gaming machine, the total random number value of the random value for determination per special symbol is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, both the first special symbol hit determination random value and the second special symbol hit determination random value are generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

When the third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable to set the jackpot probability and / and the accessory opening hit probability to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting. In this case, for example, both the jackpot probability and the bonus opening hit probability may be set higher at the high setting than at the low setting, or the bonus opening hit probability may be constant regardless of the set value, and the jackpot may be set. The probability may be higher at the high setting than at the low setting, or the jackpot probability may be constant regardless of the set value, and the probability of opening the accessory may be higher at the high setting than at the low setting. May be. However, even if the third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the time saving hit probability is a probability common to all settings.

Further, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot probability and the accessory opening hit probability according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 is changed for each set value to change the winning rate to the V winning device 2150. Alternatively, the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 2155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning opening 2155, or the number of times of shortening of time may be changed for each set value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the winning probability of opening the accessory, the opening frequency of the V winning opening 2155 (that is, the operating frequency of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times of shortening the time reduction. By adopting one or two or more, the expected value controlled in the jackpot gaming state may be configured to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting.

[3-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 90 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a "selection symbol command" that determines a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins in the start ports 2120 and 2140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This table is referenced when the "designation command" is selected. The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a hit symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a jackpot, and the "symbol specification command" is a special symbol. This is a command to specify the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of is stopped. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99.

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 90, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 0 to 99. Even so, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 3, the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 4 to 59, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 60 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 can be used as a selection symbol command regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99. Select "z4" and select "zA3" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the accessory open hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

Although the description is omitted in the third pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 corresponds to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display unit 2163 or the second special symbol display unit 2164 (see FIG. 88) when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. It is a table that is referred to when making a decision according to a symbol command. Further, in the special symbol display unit 2163, 2164, a display mode of a time saving hit, a jackpot display mode, a display mode of a bonus opening, or a loss display mode is derived based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. To.

[3-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 91 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine. The hit type determination table shows the mode of the big hit game state (more specifically, the number of rounds) and the mode of the subsequent game state (more specifically, according to the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol). It is referred to when determining the time saving flag and the time saving end condition). The mode of the gaming state after that shows the mode of the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state. However, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the reduced working hours, the game is controlled to the C reduced working hours state without being controlled to the big hit gaming state. “L” shown in the column in the time saving end condition of FIG. 91 indicates the sum of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol. Similarly, "M" indicates the variable display number of the second special symbol, and "N" indicates the number of times the accessory is opened. The remarks column in FIG. 91 is described for convenience so that it can be easily understood.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the mode of the C time reduction gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time saving flag on, and decides the time saving end condition to L = 30, M = 6, N = 3. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 2201 determines to set the time saving flag on, and determines the time saving end condition to L = 30, M = 3, N = 3. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the number of rounds as the mode of the big hit gaming state is not determined.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit", the number of rounds as the mode of the big hit gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state (A time saving gaming state) are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 2201 decides the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, decides to set the time saving flag to on, and sets the time saving end condition to L = 50, M =. 5. Determine to N = 2. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 2201 decides the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, decides to set the time saving flag to on, and sets the time saving end condition to L = 50, M =. 5. Determine to N = 1. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds and does not set the time saving flag to on. When the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines that the time saving flag is set to ON, and sets the time saving end condition to L = 50, M =. 5. Determine to N = 2.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "character release" (for example, the selected symbol command is "z7") and the game is controlled to the big hit game state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 , The number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, the time reduction flag is set to on, and the time reduction end conditions are determined to L = 50, M = 5, N = 2. However, even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "opening of the accessory", if it is not controlled to the big hit game state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 executes the big hit game state. Not only does it not, but the time reduction flag is not set to on, and after performing control based on the character opening hit, the game state immediately before the character opening hit is returned.

Further, for example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), the main CPU 2201 has a mode of the big hit gaming state and a mode of the subsequent gaming state. Do not set either. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, the main CPU 2201 continuously controls the gaming state without shifting the gaming state.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), both the mode of the big hit gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state as described above. Since it is not set, it is not necessary to show it in the hit type determination table of FIG. 91. However, in this embodiment, for convenience, in order to clarify that neither the mode of the big hit gaming state nor the mode of the subsequent gaming state is determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing", the figure is shown. It is illustrated in 91.

Further, "L", "M", and "N" shown in the column of the end condition of the time reduction in FIG. 91 are all the same conditions regardless of the gaming state, but are not limited to this, depending on the gaming state. May be different conditions. For example, all of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, or the A time-saving game state and B may be different. It may be different only in one of the time-saving game states and the time-saving game state C. Further, only one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state. , A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state may be different only in one of the time-saving game states. That is, the end condition of at least one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" is set to the end condition of at least one of the A time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state, and the C time reduction game state. It may be different in the game state.

[3-3-4. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 92 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the third pachinko gaming machine. The "Remarks" column in FIG. 92 is shown for convenience so that it can be easily understood. The main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first starting port 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball wins in the second starting port 2140. do.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is “time saving hit”, the main CPU 2201 wins the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the game ball wins the first starting port 2120. Determined based on the effect selection random value extracted when (passing).

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit", the main CPU 2201 extracts the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins (passes) the first starting port 2120. It is determined based on the random value for effect selection.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "missing", the main CPU 2201 wins (passes) the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the value of the time saving flag, and the first starting port 2120. ) Is determined based on the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value extracted at the time. It is considered that the game ball rarely wins a prize in the first starting port 2120 because right-handed hitting is a normal game mode in the short-time game state.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU 2201 wins (passes) the variation pattern of the first special symbol to the second starting port 2140. Determined based on the extracted random value for effect selection.

Further, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "big hit", the main CPU 2201 extracts the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball wins (passes) the second starting port 2140. Determined based on the random value for selection.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "a hit for opening the accessory" and the value of the time saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 sets the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to the second start port. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value extracted when the game ball wins in 2140.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "hit for opening the accessory" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 changes the variation pattern of the second special symbol to the variation time. Is determined to be an extremely long fluctuation effect, for example, 600,000 msec. When the value of the time saving flag is "0", the game ball basically does not win (pass) the second starting port 2140, but an unexpected situation occurs and the second starting port 2140 should be used. Even if the game ball wins a prize, it is done in this way in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantager, but it is not always necessary to do so.

The reach determination random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249, and the effect selection random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99. However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 2201 sets a look-ahead flag when the effect selection random number value extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is a specific random number value. The sub CPU 2301 that has received the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 2201 performs a look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

For convenience, it does not appear in the variation pattern table of the special symbol of FIG. 92, but in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 sets the look-ahead flag when the time saving flag is off, and the time saving flag is turned on. If the probability change flag is on, the look-ahead flag is not set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 2301 may determine.

The main CPU 2201 may set the look-ahead flag (so that the look-ahead effect is performed) even when the time saving flag is on or the probability change flag is on. Further, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the look-ahead flag may be set (so that the look-ahead effect is performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol to be determined has a smaller expected value of the number of fluctuations per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is on tends to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined fluctuation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301. The sub CPU 2301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 2032 based on the fluctuation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201.

Further, the time-saving hit system reach A and B shown in the “Remarks” column of FIG. 92 indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a big hit). It is a production. Similarly, the jackpot system reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time saving hit). Further, the common reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit or a big hit.

Further, although the description is omitted in the third pachinko gaming machine, as in the first pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 has a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16) and a normal symbol determination table. (See FIG. 17), a type determination table for a normal symbol (see FIG. 18), and a variation pattern table of a normal symbol (see FIG. 19) are stored. Then, the main CPU 2201 determines the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 87) in the same manner as the first pachinko gaming machine, and controls the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 based on this.

[3-4. Main control process]
In the third pachinko gaming machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 include special symbol control processes performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, the same applies to other processes. Therefore, in the following, the special symbol control process will be described, and the description of other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will be omitted. The process performed in the special symbol control process in the third pachinko gaming machine may be the same as the process performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, the jackpot end process (FIG. 42, 103), etc.). ), Hereinafter, the same processing as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be described again with different step numbers.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the special symbol control process performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 93, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The control status number of the special symbol is a number indicating the status (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S2001, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 2203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S2001 in executing the special symbol control process.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols when executing the special symbol control process. Then, when both the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 2201 performs the demo display command transmission reservation process. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 2300 receives the demo display command, the sub CPU 2301 performs a demo display effect. Since the second pachinko gaming machine is not a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, the concept of the main special symbol as described in the first pachinko gaming machine. There is no.

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in the variable display waiting state.

When it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S2002 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2005.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S2002 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not reserved (when the determination in S2003 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is not reserved (when the determination in S2004 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process. , The process is returned to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S2004 is YES), the main CPU 2201 performs the process, S2005. Move to.

Returning to S2003, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S2003 is YES), the main CPU 2201 performs the process. Move to S2005.

In S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol management process. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94. After executing the process of S2003, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S2001 to S2005) within the interrupt prohibition section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved as the third pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed in a higher priority than the first special symbol. The priority variable machine to be used has been explained, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed in a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 2120. Alternatively, it may be a sequentially variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning the second starting port 2140.

[3-4-2. Special design management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

When the control state number is 0 (when S2002 is YES determination), the second special symbol is the processing target when S2003 is YES determination, and the first when S2004 is YES determination. The special symbol is the processing target. Further, when the control state number is not 0 (when the determination in S2002 is NO), the special symbol being executed is the processing target of the special symbol management process.

Further, the numerical values (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 94 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 2201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S2011).

When it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S2011 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S2011 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2012.

In S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. Then, after executing the process of S2012, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2013. The main CPU 2201 performs the processing after S2013 based on the control state number read out in the processing of S2012.

In S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. The process of S2013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 95. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2014.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. The process of S2014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 96. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2015.

In S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game determination process. The process of S2015 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs a V winning device opening preparation process. The process of S2016 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of the V-winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2017.

In S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs the V winning device opening control process. The process of S2017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 100. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2018.

In S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process. The process of S2018 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of the large winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 101. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a large winning opening opening control process. The process of S2019 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". The details of this large winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot end process. The process of S2020 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". The details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

After completing the processes of S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the process returns to the process in which the special symbol management process is called.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the special symbol variable display start processing executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2013 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display start processing is the processing called in S2013 during the special symbol management processing for the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start processing is the processing called in S2013 during the special symbol management processing for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 95, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

When it is determined in S2021 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "0" (when the determination in S2021 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when the determination in S2021 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs a hit determination process for a special symbol. In this process, the hit determination of the special symbol is performed by referring to the hit determination table of the special symbol (see FIG. 89) and using the random value for the special symbol hit determination. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is a processing target, it is determined whether it is a time saving hit, a big hit, or a loss. Further, if the second special symbol is the processing target, it is determined whether it is a time saving hit, a big hit, or an accessory opening hit. After executing the process of S2023, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2024.

In S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination process (S2023) of the special symbol (for example, a time saving hit, a big hit, a bonus opening hit or a loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 90) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2024, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot type determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the type of hit when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a hit (time saving hit, big hit, hit by opening the accessory). In this process, the hit type is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S2024) with reference to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 91). It should be noted that the type of hit determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, the opening of the accessory is that the game ball passes through the V winning opening 2155 opened based on the opening of the accessory. This is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. Further, in this embodiment, the types of the time saving hit, the big hit, and the accessory opening hit are all set to a plurality of types, but the type of the time saving hit, the big hit, and / and the accessory opening hit may be one. .. Further, instead of or in addition to having a plurality of types of time saving hits, big hits, and / and bonus opening hits, a plurality of types of loss may be provided. After executing the process of S2025, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2026.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs a variation pattern determination process of a special symbol. This process is a process of determining or determining a variation pattern of a special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table of the special symbol (see FIG. 92) is referred to, for example, the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process (S2023) of the special symbol, the value of the time saving flag, the random value for reach determination, or /. And, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random value for effect selection and the like. After executing the process of S2026, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs a variable display time setting process of a special symbol. In this process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process (S2026) of the special symbol is determined as the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 92). After executing the process of S2027, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2028.

In S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting "1" in the control state number of the special symbol. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" in this way, the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 94) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display start process. It will be. After executing the process of S2028, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2029.

In S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state (for example, the number of remaining probable changes, the number of remaining time reductions, etc.) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 are updated. After executing the process of S2029, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2030.

In S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state management process. In this process, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc.) are mainly updated. After executing the process of S2030, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2031.

In S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt disabled section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly, game state management process (S2030), special symbol effect start command transmission reservation process (S2031)) within the interrupt disabled section. It is preferable to do it in.

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the special symbol variable display end processing executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2014 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display end processing is called in S2014 during the special symbol management processing for the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is the process called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for which the second special symbol is the process target, the second special symbol is the process target.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

When it is determined in S2041 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "1" (when the determination in S2041 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when the determination in S2041 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2042.

In S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" in this way, the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 94) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display end process. Will be. After executing the process of S2042, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2043.

In S2043, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2043, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2044.

In S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. As described above in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine, the symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the fixed number of special symbols (the number of executions of the special symbol game). For example, the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state such as the number of remaining probable changes and the number of remaining time reductions may be managed. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

When this special symbol game determination process is the process called in S2015 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the process target, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is the processing target.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

When it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (when the determination in S2051 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 94). See).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when the determination in S2051 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2052.

In S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not it is a big hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a big hit.

In S2052, when it is determined that the special symbol that is not a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is not the stop display mode indicating a big hit (NO in S2052), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2060. On the other hand, in S2052, when it is determined that the special symbol which is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating the big hit (when the determination in S2052 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2053. In addition, when the special symbol is the stop display mode which shows the opening hit of the accessory, and when the special symbol is the stop display mode which shows the loss, NO is determined in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs the start setting process of the jackpot game control process. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal or the like) output to the hall computer 2186 (both see FIG. 88) is generated and updated via the external terminal board 2184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2054.

Further, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control of S2053, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time reduction flag and a time reduction counter.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening 2131 is opened (S2055), a process of setting a big hit signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), and a control state number of the special symbol "5". Processing (S2057), game state specification parameter setting processing (S2058), transmission reservation processing (S2059) of the jackpot start display command, and the like are performed. By performing the process (S2057) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the large winning opening opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process. It will be. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not it is a bonus opening hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a bonus opening hit.

In S2060, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped, that is, it is not a hit of opening the accessory, is a stop display mode indicating a loss (when the determination in S2060 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2061. On the other hand, in S2060, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is the accessory opening hit, that is, the stop display mode indicating the accessory opening hit (when the determination in S2060 is YES), the main CPU 2201 performs the process, S2061. Move to.

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs the start setting process of the game control per opening of the accessory. In this process, a signal (for example, a signal per opening of an accessory) output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88) is generated and updated via the external terminal board 2184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2061, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2062.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting an upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened set in this process is, for example, once. After executing the process of S2062, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2063.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs a signal setting process (S2063) for opening the accessory to the external terminal board 2184, a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), and a game state specification parameter setting process (S2065). ), And the transmission reservation process (S2066) of the start display command for opening the accessory is performed. By performing the process (S2064) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 in FIG. 94) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process. It will be. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end process. This special symbol game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98. When the special symbol game end process is performed, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt prohibition section.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97) will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 performs a time saving management process (S2071). Since the third pachinko gaming machine, which is called the 1st and 2nd type mixer, is not controlled to the high-accuracy gaming state, the time saving management process executed in the third pachinko gaming machine is shown in FIG. 32 in the first pachinko gaming machine. -There are differences from the processing described with reference to FIG. 39. Specifically, in the first pachinko gaming machine, it was explained that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set on when the probability variation flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. The pachinko gaming machine of No. 3 is not controlled to a highly accurate gaming state. Therefore, when the probability variation flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on instead of setting it to on only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. Is different. Further, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the probability change flag state (on) in the time saving transition determination process (see FIG. 37), the time saving transition determination process (see FIG. 37), and the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38). After determining whether it is on or off (see S191, S202, S211), the processing after S192, S203, and S212, respectively, is performed. However, in the third pachinko gaming machine, the accuracy is high as described above. Since it is not controlled by the gaming state, it differs in that the processing after S192, S203, and S212 is performed without confirming the state of the probability change flag. Other processes in the time saving management process are the same as the processes described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process of S2071, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2072.

In S2072, the main CPU 2201 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol. In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game is completed, and the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. Become. After executing the process of S2072, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2073.

In S2073, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process (S2074) of the special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S2074, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 97).

[3-4-7. V prize device opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

When it is determined in S2081 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "3" (when the determination in S2081 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when the determination in S2081 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the maximum opening time, the maximum number of times of opening, and the like as the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operating pattern of the V attacker 2152). In this embodiment, the opening pattern is set to open a maximum of 1800 msec only once, but the opening pattern is not limited to this, and for example, a maximum of 900 msec may be opened twice at a maximum. The first time may be opened, for example, up to 600 msec, and the second time may be opened, for example, up to 1200 msec. Furthermore, a plurality of opening patterns are provided within a range that does not exceed the specified time (for example, 1800 msec) in total for each opening of the accessory, and among these multiple opening patterns, for example, one of them is based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. It may be set to one open pattern. After executing the process of S2082, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2083.

In S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs the V winning device open / close control process. In this process, the opening / closing control data generation process of the V winning opening 2155 is performed. After executing the process of S2083, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2084.

In S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". By performing the process (S2084) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" in this way, after the completion of the V winning device opening preparation process, the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94). Will be done. After executing the process of S2084, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2085.

In S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2085, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the V winning device opening display command. The V-winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-8. V winning device open control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

When it is determined in S2091 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "4" (when the determination in S2091 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when the determination in S2091 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88), which counts the number of winnings of the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150, is the value of the maximum number of winnings. To. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2092, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (NO in S2092), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2093.

On the other hand, in S2092, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (when the determination in S2092 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2094.

In S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the maximum opening time of the opening / closing winning opening 2151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 99) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO in S2093), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and performs the process as a special symbol management process. Return to (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (when the determination in S2093 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2094.

In S2094, the main CPU 2201 closes the V winning device 2150 (that is, the opening / closing winning opening 2151). After executing the process of S2094, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2095.

In S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not there is a V winning detection. In this process, whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 within the specified time (within the valid period in which the V winning opening is valid) (that is, whether or not the detection by the V winning opening switch 2156 has occurred). To judge. The above-mentioned specified time may be any time related to the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 2150. For example, the game ball by the locking member 2159 within the specified time after the operation of the V attacker 2152 starts. The above-mentioned specified time can be set within the specified time after the locking is released.

When it is determined in S2095 that the V winning detection has been made (when the determination in S2095 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs a game control start setting process per V. In this process, a signal (for example, a signal per V) output to the hall computer 2186 (both see FIG. 88) is generated and updated via the external terminal board 2184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V-hit game control is executed, for example, 15 rounds of round games are executed as shown in the hit type determination table (see FIG. 91), so that the player has executed the big hit game control process. As in the case, you can win a large number of prize balls. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V-per game control and the jackpot game control process are distinguished and referred to, but the V-per game control may also be referred to as the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2097.

Further, in the start setting process of the game control per V in S2093, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time reduction flag and a time reduction counter.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this processing, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operation of the V attacker 2152) that is first executed based on the winning of the winning combination is processed as the first round game. That is, the game control per V executed by the determination that the V winning detection has been made (S2095 is determined to be YES) is started from the second round game. After executing the process of S2097, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 has, for example, a process of setting an upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened (that is, the number of times the V attacker 2152 is operated) (S2099), and a process of setting a signal per V to the external terminal board 2184 (S2100). , The process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), the game state specification parameter setting process (S2102), the transmission reservation process of the start display command per V (S2103), and the like. By performing the process (S2101) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the large winning opening opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process. It will be. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2095, when it is determined that there is no V winning detection in this S2095 (when the determination in S2095 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2104.

In S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. After executing the process of S2104, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-9. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the large winning opening opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2018 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of a large winning opening opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

When it is determined in S2111 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "5" (when the determination in S2111 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when the determination in S2111 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2112.

In S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. The count value (round counter value) of the round counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203. After executing the process of S2112, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2113.

In S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit value.

When it is determined in S2113 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value (when the determination in S2113 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2114.

In S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". By performing the process (S2114) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" in this way, the big hit end process (see S2020 in FIG. 94) is performed after the end of the large winning opening opening preparation process. It will be. After executing the process of S2114, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2115.

In S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the jackpot end display command (S2116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S2116, the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2113, when it is determined that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not the upper limit value (when the determination in S2113 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S2117, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2118.

In S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs a selection process of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S2023 in FIG. 95) is a big hit, and the stop display mode indicating the big hit is derived (S2052 in FIG. 97 is determined to be YES). In the case of the big hit game control process, the big winning opening 2131 is selected as the big winning opening to be opened. On the other hand, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory, the stop display mode indicating the opening of the accessory is derived (S2060 in FIG. 97 is determined to be YES), and the V prize is detected (FIG. In the case of the game control per V started by (YES in S2095 of 100), the V winning device 2150 (that is, the opening / closing winning opening 2151) is selected as the opening winning opening. After executing the process of S2118, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2119.

In S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, and the large winning prize. The number of prize balls at the time of winning the mouth 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is set. The number of rounds of opening the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude those in which the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform control for managing the number of rounds and control for managing the number of times of opening and closing of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 as separate processes. After executing the process of S2119, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2120.

The above-mentioned "large winning opening 2131 or V winning device 2150" corresponds to the large winning opening selected in S2118 as the opening large winning opening among the large winning opening 2131 and the V winning device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

In S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a large winning opening opening / closing control process. In this process, the opening / closing control data generation process of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is performed. After executing the process of S2120, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2121.

In S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". By performing the process (S2121) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" in this way, after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process, the large winning opening opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 94). Will be done. After executing the process of S2121, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2122.

In S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2122, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2123.

In S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the display command during the opening of the large winning opening. The large winning opening open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-10. Grand prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the large winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of a large winning opening opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

When it is determined in S2131 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "6" (when the determination in S2131 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (when the determination in S2131 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won in the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number. In this process, the large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88) for counting the number of winning balls in the large winning opening 2131 or the V attacker count switch for counting the number of entering the game ball into the inside of the V winning opening 2150. It is determined whether or not the value counted by 2153 (see FIG. 88) is the value of the maximum number of winnings. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the large winning opening count switch 2132 or the V attacker counting switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2132, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (when the determination in S2132 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2133.

On the other hand, in S2132, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (when the determination in S2132 is YES), the main CPU 2201 processes the process in S2134. Move.

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the large winning opening (see S2119 in FIG. 101) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO in S2133), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening control process and performs the process. , Return to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (when the determination in S2133 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2134.

In S2134, the main CPU 2201 closes the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150. After executing the process of S2134, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2135.

In S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". By performing the process (S2135) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" in this way, after the completion of the large winning opening opening control process, the large winning opening opening preparation process (S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed again. See) will be done. After executing the process of S2135, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2136.

In S2136, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2136, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-11. Big hit end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

When it is determined in S2141 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "7" (when the determination in S2141 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94). , The process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the process returns to the process in which the jackpot end process is called.

When it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (when the determination in S2141 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2142.

In S2142, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various flags (for example, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.) are set, and values of various counters (for example, probability variation counter, time reduction counter, symbol fixed number counter, round counter, large winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Alternatively, a process of resetting, a process of setting a time saving end condition, and the like are performed. After executing the process of S2142, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2143.

In S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. However, in the special symbol game end process of FIG. 98, for convenience of explanation, it is shown that the time saving management process (S2071) is performed, but strictly speaking, the time saving management process (S2071) is a bonus release. If it is a hit (when S2060 in FIG. 97 is determined to be YES), it is executed, but if it is a big hit (when S2052 in FIG. 97 is determined to be YES), it is not executed and the process is skipped. After executing the process of S2143, the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process in which the jackpot end process is called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibition section.

[4. 4th pachinko game machine]
Hereinafter, the fourth pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention will be described. The fourth pachinko gaming machine, like the third pachinko gaming machine, is a pachinko gaming machine called a type 1 type 2 mixing machine. This fourth pachinko gaming machine is a priority variable machine in which the start condition of the second special symbol is prioritized over the start condition of the first special symbol. It is not intended to exclude simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machines capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Hereinafter, in explaining the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the description of the points in common with the third pachinko gaming machine will be omitted as much as possible. Therefore, the points not mentioned in the description of the fourth pachinko gaming machine are the same as those of the third pachinko gaming machine.

The fourth pachinko gaming machine described below is designed to be controlled to the B time reduction gaming state when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value (for example, 1200 times), but the ceiling value is not limited to this. Of course, the specifications may not be controlled by the B time reduction gaming state.

Further, in the following description of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the configuration and processing having the same functions as the third pachinko gaming machine will be described using the same reference numerals as those of the third pachinko gaming machine.

[4-1. Game board unit]
Since the gaming board unit 2010 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine is the same as the third pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. 87, the description of various members arranged in the gaming area 2105 will be omitted.

However, the maximum number of start information of the second special symbol that can be held due to the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 2140 is four in the third pachinko gaming machine, whereas it is the fourth pachinko game. The difference is that there are two machines. That is, when the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 2140 is detected by the second starting port switch 2141 (see FIG. 88), the main CPU 2201 extracts and extracts the starting information of the second special symbol. Up to two start information can be reserved. The reserved start information of the second special symbol is used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out, but the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 2140 is not limited to this. Hereinafter, in the description of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the start information of the second special symbol held may be referred to as "second hold".

The upper limit of the starting information of the first special symbol that can be held due to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 2120 is four as in the third pachinko gaming machine, but this number is four. The number is not limited to, for example, may be three, or may be two, which is the same number as when the game ball is won in the second starting port 2140. Hereinafter, in the description of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the start information of the reserved first special symbol may be referred to as "first reserved".

[4-2. Electrical configuration]
Since various members such as various control circuits and various switches included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine are the same as those of the third pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. 88, the description of these various members will be omitted.

[4-3. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 114, basic specifications different from those of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described. The fourth pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description related to the setting function will be omitted below.

In the fourth pachinko gaming machine described below, the probability variation control is not executed as in the third pachinko gaming machine, and the main CPU 2201 has a variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (this). As a game state (a game state that is not a big hit game state) in which (sometimes referred to as "variable display" in the specification) can be executed, a normal game state in which the time reduction control is not executed and a time reduction from the next game in which the big hit game state is completed As the result of the special symbol game (that is, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol), the A time reduction game state in which the control is executed, the B time reduction game state in which the time reduction control is executed when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the result of the special symbol game. It is possible to control to one of the C time-saving game states in which the time-saving control is executed from the next game from which the display mode indicating the time-saving hit is derived. The normal game mode in the normal game state is left-handed, and the normal game mode in the A time-shortened game state, B time-shortened game state, and C time-shortened game state is right-handed.

Although the details will be described later, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 2201 has one of the A1 time-saving game state, the A2 time-saving game state, the A3 time-saving game state, and the A4 time-saving game state as the A time-saving game state. It is controllable. Although the details will be described later, the time saving end conditions are different for each of the A1 time saving game state, the A2 time saving game state, the A3 time saving game state, and the A4 time saving game state. However, since the operation of the condition device (that is, the start of the big hit game state) is a time-saving end condition common to all the time-saving game states, when the condition device is activated, the time-saving game is performed regardless of the time-saving game state. The state ends.

In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the time saving performance is the same in the A1 time saving game state, the A2 time saving game state, the A3 time saving game state, and the A4 time saving game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the time saving performance may be different between the A1 time saving game state, the A2 time saving game state, the A3 time saving game state, and the A4 time saving game state, or the A1 time saving game state and the A2 time saving game state. The mode is not limited to a specific mode, for example, the three time-saving performances of the A3 time-saving gaming state and the A4 time-saving gaming state are the same, and only the remaining one time-saving performance is different from the three time-saving performances.

Further, it is not essential that the A time-saving game state includes all of the A1 time-saving game state, the A2 time-saving game state, the A3 time-saving game state, and the A4 time-saving game state. For example, an A5 time-saving game state or an A6 time-saving game state may be further provided.

Further, the time-saving gaming state that can be controlled by the main CPU 2201 is not limited to the above. For example, the specification may be such that only one of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state (for example, the A time-saving game state) can be controlled, or a plurality of time-saving games. The specifications may be controllable to the gaming state (for example, A time saving game state and C time saving game state, A time saving game state and B time saving game state, etc.).

Further, in the present embodiment, only one type of C time saving game state is mounted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of C time saving game states (for example, C1 time saving game state, C2 time saving game state) may be mounted. good.

In the description of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when the term "time-saving gaming state" is simply referred to without specifying the type of the time-saving gaming state, all the time-saving gaming states are included.

[4-3-1. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 108 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

When the game ball wins (passes) in the first starting port 2120, the main CPU 2201 executes the first special symbol game using the random value for determining the jackpot of the first special symbol, and the result of the first special symbol game ( That is, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is determined to be "big hit", "small hit", or "missing". Further, when the game ball wins (passes) in the second starting port 2140, the main CPU 2201 executes a game of the second special symbol using the random value for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol game. (That is, the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol) is determined as "big hit", "small hit", "time saving hit" or "loss".

The result of the first special symbol game does not include "time saving hit", but this is not essential. The main CPU 2201 may determine the result of the first special symbol game as "big hit", "small hit", "time saving hit", or "missing".

The above-mentioned "small hit" is referred to as "small hit" in the description of the third pachinko gaming machine, but is referred to as "small hit" in the description of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

Of the "big hits", "small hits", "time saving hits" and "losses" as a result of the special symbol game, the only result that involves the operation of the conditional device is the "big hit". When the result of the special symbol game is "small hit", the display mode indicating that it is "small hit" is derived to the special symbol display unit (1st special symbol display unit 2163, 2nd special symbol display unit 2164). The condition device does not operate just by itself, and the condition device operates based on the detection of V winning. Therefore, if the display mode indicating that it is a "small hit" is derived to the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 2163, second special symbol display unit 2164), but the V prize is not detected, the condition device. Does not work.

When the result of the special symbol game is "big hit", the condition device is activated, and as described in the third pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 2201 is subjected to the big winning opening opening preparation process (S2018 in FIG. 94) and the big winning. The mouth opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 94) and the jackpot end process (S2020 in FIG. 94) are performed. In this fourth pachinko gaming machine, for example, the gaming state from the jackpot opening preparation process (S2018) to the jackpot end process (S2020) is referred to as a jackpot gaming state. In this jackpot game state, the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not executed.

In the big hit game state, the main CPU 2201 activates the special electric shutter 2134 by the special electric solenoid 2135, and performs a round game in which the big winning opening 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. Assuming that the number of games that can be won in the large prize opening 2131 in one round of round games is, for example, 10, and the number of prize balls paid out by winning one game ball in the large winning opening 2131 is, for example, 1. For example, 100 game balls will be paid out as prize balls per round.

Further, when the result of the special symbol game is "small hit", as described in the third pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 2201 performs the V winning device opening preparation process (S2016 in FIG. 94) and the V winning device opening control. Processing (see S2017 in FIG. 94) is performed. In this fourth pachinko gaming machine, for example, a gaming state in which a V winning device opening preparation process (S2016 in FIG. 94) and a V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94) are executed is referred to as a small hit gaming state. Refer to. Then, the game ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 by being controlled to the small hit game state (that is, the V attacker 2152 is activated and the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened) has entered the V winning opening 2155 within the valid period. (When V winning is detected), the condition device is activated, and the main CPU 2201 controls the jackpot gaming state. In this embodiment, as long as the player hits the right in the small hit game state, the V prize is configured with a probability close to 100%. However, if the V prize is not detected even though the result of the special symbol game is "small hit", the main CPU 2201 does not control the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state, and the small hit is achieved. Return to the game state when you won.

In the V winning device opening control process, the main CPU 2201 operates the V attacker 2152 to control the opening / closing winning opening 2151 from the closed state to the small hit game state in which the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened for a predetermined period. In this small hit game state, the number of games that can be won in the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is, for example, one, and the number of winning balls paid out by winning one game ball in the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is, for example, three. In this fourth pachinko gaming machine, if one prize is won in the opening / closing winning opening 2151 in the small hit game state, a V prize is won with a probability close to 100%.

If the V prize is won in the small hit game state, the main CPU 2201 controls the big hit game state in which the round game is executed over a plurality of rounds. In this big hit game state, the V winning device opening control process (that is, the operation of the V attacker 2152) executed in the small hit game state is set as the first round game, and then the round game is executed over a plurality of rounds. It is in a state. In this case, the first round round game is a game in which the V attacker 2152 is operated to shift the V winning device 2150 from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period, and the second and subsequent round games are also the V attacker 2152. Is a game in which the V winning device 2150 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for the second and subsequent round games, the special electric shutter 2134 may be operated to open the large winning opening 2131 for a predetermined period.

Therefore, when comparing the expected value of the number of games paid out to the player as a prize ball in one small hit game state and the expected value of the number of games paid out to the player as a prize ball in one big hit game state, The expected value of the number of games paid out to the player as a prize ball in one big hit game state (for example, 100 pieces per round game x number of rounds) is larger. In addition, the expected value of the number of games to be paid out as a prize ball to the player in one big hit game state performed via the small hit game state, and one big hit game performed without going through the small hit game state. Comparing with the expected value of the number of games paid out to the player as a prize ball in the state, the expected number of games to be paid out to the player as a prize ball in one big hit game state performed without going through the small hit game state. The value is larger.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol game is "big hit", the main CPU 2201 operates the special electric shutter 2134 in the big hit game state, and the big winning opening 2131 is in the open state for a predetermined period from the closed state. A round game that shifts to is performed over multiple rounds. On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol game is "small hit" and the V winning is detected, the main CPU 2201 operates the V attacker 2152 in the big hit gaming state, and the V winning device 2150 is closed for a predetermined period of time. A round game that shifts to the open state is performed over multiple rounds. That is, in this embodiment, the accessory that operates as a round game is the accessory that operates as a round game in the big hit gaming state controlled based on the big hit winning and the big hit gaming state controlled based on the small hit winning and the detection of the V winning. different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a big hit gaming state controlled based on a big hit winning without a special electric accessory unit 2130, and a big hit gaming state controlled based on a small hit winning and V winning detection. A common accessory (for example, V-attacker 2152) may be activated to execute a round game.

When the first special symbol game is played on the fourth pachinko machine, a "small hit" may be won, but this is not essential. For example, when the first special symbol game is played, the "small hit" is not won, and only when the second special symbol game is played, the "small hit" may be won.

As shown in FIG. 108, in the hit determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 2202, the special symbol executed based on the winning of the starting port (first starting port 2120, second starting port 2140) is executed. As the data used in the game (1st special symbol game, 2nd special symbol game), "big hit", "small hit", "time saving hit" or "time reduction hit" according to each of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. The range (width) of the random value for big hit judgment determined as "missing" and the corresponding winning judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data", "small hit judgment value data", "time saving hit judgment value data", " The relationship with the loss judgment value data ”) is stipulated.

In this fourth pachinko gaming machine, the total random value of the jackpot determination random value is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, both the jackpot determination random value of the first special symbol and the jackpot determination random value of the second special symbol are generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 108, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when the first special symbol game is executed by the main CPU 2201, for example, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/309, and 1/9362. There is a chance that you will win a small hit, and the others will be lost. On the other hand, when the second special symbol game is executed by the main CPU 2201, for example, a big hit is won with a probability of about 1/309, a small hit is won with a probability of about 1/2, and about 1/20. There is a probability that you will win in a short time, and the others will be lost.

In this way, the jackpot probability is the case where the first special symbol game is executed and the case where the second special symbol game is executed, regardless of whether it is a normal gaming state or a time-saving gaming state. It is the same. On the other hand, the small hit probability is higher when the second special symbol game is executed than when the first special symbol game is executed.

[4-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 109 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins in the starting port (first starting port 2120, second starting port 2140) and the above-mentioned winning judgment value data. This table is referenced when the "selected symbol command" and "symbol specification command" that determine the stop symbol are selected. The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a special symbol determined according to the result (big hit, small hit, time saving hit, or loss) of the special symbol game. The "symbol specification command" is a command for designating a symbol to be displayed when the variable display of a special symbol is stopped. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99.

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 109, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 selects the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. For example, when the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins the first starting port 2120 is 0, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and "z0" as the symbol designation command. Select "zA1".

Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol game, for example, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 is used as a selection symbol command. Select "z2" and select "zA2" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol game, for example, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 uses the "selection symbol command" as the selection symbol command. Select "z3" and select "zA3" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, a selection symbol command and a symbol designation command as follows. That is, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 selects the symbol designation command "zA5".

Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command "z5" with a probability of 15%, and selects the selected symbol command "z6" by 10. Select with a probability of%, select the selected symbol commands "z7" to "z9" with a probability of 5%, and select the selected symbol command "z10" with a probability of 60%. Also, select "zA5" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol game, for example, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 is used as a selection symbol command. Select "z11" and select "zA6" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol game, for example, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 uses the "selection symbol command" as the selection symbol command. Select "z13" and select "zA7" as the symbol specification command.

Although the description is omitted in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 corresponds to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display unit 2163 or the second special symbol display unit 2164 (see FIG. 88) when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. It is a table that is referred to when making a decision according to a symbol command. In addition, the special symbol display unit (1st special symbol display unit 2163, 2nd special symbol display unit 2164) is a big hit based on the results of the special symbol game (1st special symbol game, 2nd special symbol game). A display mode, a small hit display mode, a time saving display mode (only the second special symbol display unit 2164 in this embodiment), or a loss display mode is derived. The player can determine the type of hit by confirming the display mode derived from the first special symbol display unit 2163 or the second special symbol display unit 2164.

[4-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 110 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The hit type determination table determines the type of jackpot according to the game state (normal game state, time-saving game state) at a predetermined timing and the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol. It will be referred to when.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned "game state at a predetermined timing" is, for example, a variable special symbol when the result of the special symbol game is a big hit (selected symbol commands "z0", "z1", "z4"). This corresponds to the end of display, that is, the time when the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 94) is executed. Further, when the result of the special symbol game is a small hit (selected symbol commands "z2", "z5" to "z10"), the V winning detection after it is derived that the result of the special symbol game is a small hit. The gaming state at the time corresponds to the "gaming state at a predetermined timing".

When the hit type is a big hit or a small hit, for example, the number of rounds of the round game executed in the big hit game state and the end of the big hit game state are determined by referring to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 110). This is the type of the later gaming state (that is, the type of the A time saving flag set at the end of the big hit gaming state). However, since the time reduction end condition and the time reduction end timing are linked to the type of the time reduction flag, when the type of the time reduction flag is determined, the time reduction end condition and the time reduction end timing are also determined accordingly. In the present embodiment, the type of the A time saving flag corresponds to the A1 time saving flag, the A2 time saving flag, the A3 time saving flag, and the A4 time saving flag.

In the description of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the A1 time saving flag, the A2 time saving flag, the A3 time saving flag, and the A4 time saving flag are collectively referred to as "A time saving flag".

Further, when the hit type is a time-saving hit, the C time-saving gaming state is started from the time when the time-saving hit is derived without being controlled by either the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. When there are a plurality of types of time reduction hits (for example, C1 time reduction hits, C2 time reduction hits), the time reduction performance is controlled according to the types of time reduction hits to the C time reduction gaming state.

The A time saving flag and the C time saving flag are flags set separately from the time saving flag indicating that the time saving gaming state is selected as the gaming state, and are flags indicating the type of time saving. The same applies to the B time reduction flag. When any of the A time saving flag, the B time saving flag, and the C time saving flag is set to "1" (flag on), the time saving flag is also set to "1", and the A time saving flag, the B time saving flag, and the C time saving flag are set. When all are set to "0" (flag off), the time saving flag is also set to "0".

As shown in the hit type determination table (see FIG. 110), various time saving flags (A1 time saving flag, A2 time saving flag, A3 time saving flag, A4 time saving flag, C time saving flag) are set according to the selected symbol command, and various types are set. The time saving flag is set when the time saving flag is set. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 2201 sets the A2 time saving flag and the time saving flag. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 2201 controls the A1 time reduction game state when the A1 time reduction flag is set, controls the A2 time reduction game state when the A2 time reduction flag is set, and A3 when the A3 time reduction flag is set. It is controlled to the time saving game state, and when the A4 time saving flag is set, it is controlled to the A4 time saving game state, and when the C time saving flag is set, it is controlled to the C time saving gaming state.

In the present embodiment, there is only one type of C time saving gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of C time saving gaming states such as C1 time saving gaming state and C2 time saving gaming state may be mounted.

The details of the time saving end condition will be described later with reference to FIG. 111, but as shown in FIG. 110, in the present embodiment, the A1 time saving game state (A1 time saving flag = 1, that is, for example, the selected symbol command is "z1". The end condition of the time-saving game state controlled in the case of "" is, for example, only condition C. Therefore, when the condition C is satisfied, the A1 time-saving game state ends. The end conditions of the A2 time saving game state (A2 time saving game state = 1, that is, the time saving game state controlled when the selected symbol command is "z0", for example) are, for example, condition A, condition B, and condition C. The end conditions of the A3 time saving game state (A3 time saving flag = 1, that is, the time saving game state controlled when the selected symbol command is "z4", for example) are, for example, condition J, condition K, and condition L. The A4 time saving game state (A4 time saving flag = 1, that is, the time saving game state controlled when, for example, the selected symbol command is "z2") is, for example, only condition S.

When a plurality of conditions are set, the time saving end condition shown in FIG. 110 does not need to satisfy all of the plurality of conditions, and may satisfy any one of the plurality of conditions. For example, in the case of the A2 time-saving game state, if at least one of the conditions A, B, and C is satisfied, the A2 time-saving game state ends, so that the condition A is not satisfied and the condition B is not satisfied. Even so, if the condition C is satisfied, the A2 time saving game state ends. The same applies to other time-saving gaming states. Further, in the present embodiment, the end condition of the C time reduction game state is the same as that of the A2 time reduction game state, but the present invention is not limited to this.

The time reduction end timing is the timing at which the time reduction flag is set to off when the time reduction end condition is satisfied, and in the present embodiment, it is the time when the change of the special symbol starts or the time when the change of the special symbol ends. The variation start time of the special symbol corresponds to, for example, the start time of the variable display of the special symbol, that is, the execution time of the special symbol variable display start processing (see S2013 in FIG. 94). Further, when the variation of the special symbol ends, for example, when the variable display of the special symbol ends (when the result of the hit determination of the special symbol is derived), that is, when the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 94) is executed. Equivalent to. As shown in FIG. 110, for example, in the A1 time saving game state, the time saving end condition is condition C and the time saving end timing is the time when the fluctuation starts, so that the variable display of the first second special symbol game is started at the timing when the variable display is started. The A1 time saving game state ends.

Further, the time reduction end timings of the A2 time reduction game state, the A3 time reduction game state, the A4 time reduction game state, and the C time reduction game state are at the end of the fluctuation (more specifically, for example, after determining the result of the derived special symbol game). Is. For example, in the time-saving game state, when the result of the special symbol game in this time-saving final fluctuation is the time-saving hit, the time-saving game that has been controlled until now after determining that the result of this special symbol game is the time-saving hit. Since the state is terminated, this time-saving hit is the time-saving hit that was won in the time-saving game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be determined that the result of the special symbol game is a time saving hit after the end processing of the time saving game state that has been controlled so far is performed.

When the hit type is a big hit or the hit type is a small hit and the V prize is detected, the main CPU 2201 sets the determined number of rounds at the start of the big hit gaming state (that is, the big prize opening opening preparation process (that is, the big prize opening opening preparation process). It is set in S2018)) in FIG. 94. Further, the main CPU 2201 sets the determined A time saving flag at the end of the big hit gaming state (that is, the big hit end process (S2020 in FIG. 94)).

For example, when the result of the special symbol game is a big hit (for example, the selected symbol command "z1") and the gaming state at the start of the variable display of the special symbol is the normal gaming state, the main CPU 2201 sets the number of rounds to ". 4 ”is determined, and the A time reduction flag set at the end of the big hit game state is determined to be the A1 time reduction flag. Then, the main CPU 2201 sets the number of rounds to "4" in the big winning opening opening preparation process, and sets the A1 time saving flag in the big hit end process. When the A1 time saving flag is set, the main CPU 2201 controls the A1 time saving gaming state. Then, when the condition C is satisfied in the A1 time saving game state, the main CPU 2201 sets the time saving flag and the A1 time saving flag to off at the start of the change of the special symbol, ends the time saving game state, and controls to the normal gaming state.

Further, for example, when the result of the special symbol game is a small hit (for example, the selected symbol command "z5") and the gaming state at the time of detecting the V prize is the normal gaming state, the main CPU 2201 sets the number of rounds to "10". , And the A time reduction flag set at the end of the big hit game state is determined to be the A3 time reduction flag. Then, the main CPU 2201 sets the number of rounds to "10" in the big winning opening opening preparation process, and sets the A3 time saving flag in the big hit end process. When the A3 time saving flag is set, the main CPU 2201 controls the A3 time saving gaming state. Then, when at least one of the condition J, the condition K, and the condition L is satisfied in the A3 time saving game state, the main CPU 2201 sets the time saving flag and the A3 time saving flag off at the end of the change of the special symbol, and the time saving game The state is terminated and controlled to the normal gaming state.

In this embodiment, as shown in the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 109), the selected symbol commands "z6" to "z10" are selected only in the normal gaming state, and are not selected in the time-saving gaming state. Therefore, in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 110), the number of rounds, the A time saving flag to be set, the time saving end condition, and the time saving end timing are displayed in the time saving game state column where the selected symbol command is "z6" to "z10". Is not set.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the time saving hit is won in the time saving game state, the time saving hit is ignored. Therefore, in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 110), the number of rounds, the C time saving flag to be set, the time saving end condition, and the time saving end timing are set in the time saving game state column where the selected symbol command is "z11". do not have.

In the present embodiment, even if the time saving hit is won in the time saving game state, the time saving hit is ignored, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the earlier (current) time saving gaming state is switched to the later time saving gaming state. Alternatively, the later time-saving gaming state may be overlapped with the earlier time-saving gaming state. Further, for example, if the time-saving game is won in the B time-saving game state, it is ignored, and if the time-saving game is won in the A time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state, the game is switched to the later time-saving game state or operated repeatedly. You may.

Further, the end condition of the B time saving game state may be one of, for example, the condition S, the condition T, the condition U, the condition V, and the condition W described later. The details will be described later, but for example, the main CPU 2201 enables control to the B time saving game state until the special symbol game is executed up to 100 times, and if the time saving hit is won, this is ignored, but the time saving hit. When the number of times is counted and the number of times of derivation per time reduction reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times of derivation per time reduction of the second special symbol is 3 times), or when the number of variable display of a normal symbol becomes a specified number of times (for example, 100 times). In addition, the B time saving game state may be terminated.

[4-3-4. Time saving end condition]
FIG. 111 is a table showing an example of the time saving end condition in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. In FIG. 111, the types of time reduction end conditions are shown in the horizontal direction, and the time reduction end conditions are shown in the vertical direction. In addition, the number described in the column where the type of time reduction end condition and the time reduction end condition intersect is the number of times. The type of the time reduction end condition is, for example, an alphabet represented by any one of a to c, such as the variable display number of the first special symbol (a1) and the derivation number per time reduction of the first special symbol (a3). , For example, those shown in combination with the numbers 1 to 5 correspond. For example, the condition F is a condition that is satisfied when b2 (the number of times the loss of the second special symbol is derived), which is one of the time saving end conditions, is executed once.

It should be noted that the operation of the condition device is not shown in FIG. 111 because it is a time saving end condition common to all the time saving gaming states as described above.

As shown in FIG. 111, the condition A is that the total of the variable display number (a1) of the first special symbol and the variable display number (b1) of the second special symbol is, for example, 10 times. The condition B is that the variable display number (a1) of the first special symbol is, for example, 10 times. The condition C is that the variable display number (b1) of the second special symbol is, for example, one. Here, the reason why a1 is set to the variable display number of the first special symbol instead of the result derivation number of the first special symbol is that the time saving end timing is as shown in the hit type determination table (see FIG. 110). This is because it may occur not only at the end of the fluctuation but also at the start of the fluctuation. For a2 as well, for the same reason, the variable display number of the first special symbol is used instead of the result derivation number of the second special symbol.

The condition D is that the total of the number of times of derivation of loss of the first special symbol (a2) and the number of times of derivation of loss of the second special symbol (b2) is, for example, 10. The condition E is that the number of times (a2) of deriving the loss of the first special symbol is, for example, 10 times. The condition F is that the variable display number (b2) of the second special symbol is, for example, one.

The condition G is that the total of the number of times of derivation per time reduction of the first special symbol (a3) and the number of times of derivation of the second special symbol per time reduction (b3) is, for example, twice. The condition H is that the number of times of derivation (a3) per time reduction of the first special symbol is, for example, twice. Condition I is that the number of times of derivation (b3) per time reduction of the second special symbol is, for example, one. When there are multiple types of time reduction hits (for example, when there are C1 time reduction hits and C2 time reduction hits), the number of times of derivation per time reduction can be calculated as the total of the number of times of derivation per C1 time reduction and the number of times of derivation per C2 time reduction. good.

Condition J is the number of times the first special symbol is derived per time reduction (a2), the number of times the first special symbol is derived per time reduction (a3), the number of times the second special symbol is derived from the loss (b2), and the number of times the second special symbol is derived per time reduction. The total with (b3) is, for example, twice. That is, the condition J is that the number of times that a result that is neither a big hit nor a small hit is derived as a result of the special symbol game is, for example, twice.

The condition K is that the total of the number of times of derivation of loss of the first special symbol (a2) and the number of times of derivation of the first special symbol per time reduction (a3) is, for example, twice. That is, the condition K is that the number of times that a result that is neither a big hit nor a small hit is derived as a result of the first special symbol game is, for example, twice.

The condition L is that the total of the number of times of derivation of loss of the second special symbol (b2) and the number of times of derivation of the second special symbol per time reduction (b3) is, for example, once. That is, the condition L is that the number of times that a result that is neither a big hit nor a small hit is derived as a result of the second special symbol game is, for example, once.

Conditions M to R are conditions when there are a plurality of time reduction hits (for example, C1 time reduction hit, C2 time reduction hit) as the type of time reduction hit. The condition M is that the total of the number of times of derivation per C1 time reduction of the first special symbol (a4) and the number of times of derivation per C1 time reduction of the second special symbol (b4) is, for example, twice. The condition N is that the number of derivations (a4) per C1 time reduction of the first special symbol is, for example, twice. The condition O is that the number of derivations (b4) per C1 time reduction of the second special symbol is, for example, one. The condition P is that the total of the number of times of derivation per C2 time reduction (a5) of the first special symbol and the number of times of derivation per C2 time reduction of the second special symbol (b5) is, for example, twice. The condition Q is that the number of times of derivation (a5) per C2 time reduction of the first special symbol is, for example, twice. The condition R is that the number of derivations (b5) per C2 time reduction of the second special symbol is, for example, one.

The condition S is that the total of the variable display number (a1) of the first special symbol and the variable display number (b1) of the second special symbol is, for example, 100 times. In addition to or in addition to the condition S, the variable display number (a1) of the first special symbol is, for example, 100 times, and the variable display number (b1) of the second special symbol is, for example, 100 times. Conditions may be set.

The condition T is that the total (a3 + b3) of the number of times of derivation per time reduction of the first special symbol (a3) and the number of times of derivation of the second special symbol per time reduction (b3) is, for example, five times. The condition U is that the number of times of derivation (a3) per time reduction of the first special symbol is, for example, five times. The condition V is that the number of times of derivation (b3) per time reduction of the second special symbol is, for example, three times. When there are multiple types of time saving hits (for example, when there are C1 time saving hits and C2 time saving hits), the number of times of time saving per derivation is derived as in condition G, condition H, and condition I. It may be the sum of the number of times and the number of times of derivation per C2 time reduction.

The condition W is that the variable display number (c) of the normal symbol is, for example, 100 times. Here, the time reduction end timing may be the time when the fluctuation of the normal symbol starts or the time when the fluctuation of the normal symbol ends.

In this embodiment, as shown in the hit type determination table (see FIG. 110), the conditions A to C, the conditions J to L, and the condition S are set to the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state. Although it is adopted as the end condition, it is not limited to this, and any of the conditions A to W shown in FIG. 111 may be adopted as the time saving end condition. When the conditions A to W are adopted as the time-saving end conditions, all the conditions of the conditions A to W may be adopted, or a plurality of (excluding all) conditions of the conditions A to W may be adopted. Alternatively, only one of the conditions A to W may be adopted. Further, the conditions A to W shown in FIG. 111 may be adopted not only as the time-saving gaming state of A and the time-saving gaming state of C, but also as the time-saving ending condition of the time-saving gaming state of B.

When all the conditions A to W are adopted as the time saving end condition, the time saving game state may be ended when all the conditions of the condition A to the condition W are satisfied, or a plurality of (all). The time-saving gaming state may be terminated when the condition of) is satisfied, or the time-saving gaming state may be terminated when any one of the conditions is satisfied.

When a plurality of conditions (excluding all) of the conditions A to W are adopted as the time saving end conditions, the time saving gaming state may be terminated when all the adopted conditions are satisfied. , The time-saving gaming state may be terminated when multiple conditions (excluding all of the adopted conditions) are satisfied, or the time-saving gaming state may be terminated when any one of the conditions is satisfied. You may.

When only one of the conditions A to W is adopted, the time-saving gaming state ends when the adopted condition is satisfied.

Further, the time saving end condition is not limited to the condition shown in FIG. 111, and it goes without saying that other conditions not shown in FIG. 111 may be used as the time saving ending condition. Further, it goes without saying that the number of times shown in FIG. 111 is an example, and the time saving end condition is not limited to the number of times shown in FIG. 111.

[4-3-5. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 112 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol referred to in a normal gaming state in a fourth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 113 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol referred to in the A time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 114 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol referred to in the B time saving gaming state in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The columns of "remarks" shown in FIGS. 112 to 114 are shown for convenience for the sake of clarity. Each table shown in FIGS. 112 to 114 is stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first starting port 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball wins in the second starting port 2140. do.

When the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 2201 transmits a command corresponding to the effect pattern to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. .. The sub CPU 2301 included in the sub control circuit 1300 controls the game effect based on the received command.

As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the variation pattern of the special symbol is the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (winning), and the game ball at the first starting port 2120 or the second starting port 2140. It is determined based on the random value for effect selection extracted when winning (passing).

Further, as shown in FIG. 113, in the present embodiment, it is determined depending on whether the A3 time saving flag is "1" or "0" in the A time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol may be different.

More specifically, in the time-saving game state in which the A3 time-saving flag is "0" (A1 time-saving game state, A2 time-saving game state, A4 time-saving game state, C time-saving game state), the result of the second special symbol is any result. Even if there is, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined to be a variation pattern having a variable display time (variation time) of, for example, 20 seconds.

On the other hand, in the A3 time saving game state in which the A3 time saving flag is "1", the variable display time differs depending on the result of the second special symbol. For example, when the result of the second special symbol is "time reduction hit" or "loss", the variation pattern of the second special symbol is the same as the case where the variable display time is, for example, 20 seconds (A3 time reduction flag is "0"). It is determined by the fluctuation pattern of (variable display time). Further, when the result of the second special symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", the variation pattern of the second special symbol has a shorter variable display time than the case of "time saving hit" or "loss", for example, 5 Determined by the variation pattern in seconds. Details will be described later, but in the A3 time-shortening game state, if the result of the second special symbol game is "big hit" or "small hit", a special effect in a 5-second fluctuation pattern ("1G continuous finalized effect" described later). ) Is performed.

As shown in FIG. 114, in the B time saving game state, when the result of the second special symbol game is "big hit" or "small hit", the variation pattern of the second special symbol has a variable display time, for example. The fluctuation pattern is determined to be 95 seconds. The variable display time (for example, 95 seconds) when the result of the second special symbol game in the B time reduction game state is "big hit" or "small hit" is the second special symbol game in the A time reduction game state or the C time reduction game state. This is a longer time than the variable display time (for example, 20 seconds or 5 seconds) when the result of is a "big hit" or a "small hit". Therefore, when the result of the second special symbol game in the B time shortening game state is "big hit" or "small hit", the sub CPU 2301 performs a big hit by performing a reach effect over a relatively long time such as 95 seconds. It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the game state. On the other hand, when the result of the second special symbol game in the A time saving game state or the C time saving gaming state is "big hit" or "small hit", the result of the second special symbol game is notified in a relatively short time. While accelerating the progress of the game, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the big hit game state. In particular, immediately after the jackpot game state ends, the player tends to have expectations for the consecutive villas, so the second special symbol game takes a relatively short time to maintain the expectation for the jackpot game state. It is possible to enhance the interest by notifying the result of.

In this way, by making the variable display time (that is, the effect time) of the second special symbol different between the case of the A time saving game state or the C time saving game state and the case of the B time saving game state, it is preferable. It will be possible to enhance the interest.

[4-4. Game flow, etc.]
Next, the flow of the game and the like will be described. In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, for example, as a game mode that can be grasped from the display contents of the display device 2007 composed of a liquid crystal display, a normal mode, a first chance mode in which a second special symbol game can be executed once, and a second The second chance mode that can execute the special symbol game three times, the premium chance mode that can execute the second special symbol game three times and is more advantageous to the player than the second chance mode, and the jackpot game state are controlled. The first bliss mode in which is almost fixed, the second bliss mode in which it is not confirmed that the game is controlled to the big hit game state, but it is possible to give a feeling of expectation to the big hit game state, and the game is performed during the big hit game. The jackpot mode, which is a production, is installed. The sub CPU 2301 controls the game to proceed in any of these game modes. In addition, in the second chance mode and the premium chance mode, the same effect is performed in appearance, and the difference between the two is that no special effect (for example, "1G continuous final effect") is performed in the second chance mode. On the other hand, the premium chance mode differs in that special effects may be performed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a special effect may be performed even in the second chance mode.

Further, the first chance mode may be similar in appearance to the second chance mode and the premium chance mode. However, in the first chance mode, the number of times the second special symbol game can be executed is different from the second chance mode and the premium chance mode, so that the degree of advantage for the player is lower than in the second chance mode and the premium chance mode. It is preferable to show the effect.

FIG. 115 is a table showing the relationship between each gaming mode and the internal gaming state in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The internal gaming state corresponds to the gaming state controlled by the main CPU 2201. Hereinafter, the flow of the game and the like will be described for each game mode, including the relationship between the game mode and the internal game state.

Hereinafter, the flow of the game in each game mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 122. FIG. 116 is an example of a time chart showing the flow of games in the normal mode in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 117 is an example of a time chart showing the flow of games in the first chance mode in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 118 is an example of a time chart showing the flow of the game in the first rotation of the second chance mode in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 119 is an example of a time chart showing the flow of the game in the second special symbol game of the remaining reserved portion of the second chance mode in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 120 is an example of a time chart showing the flow of a game in the first rotation of the premium chance mode in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 121 is an example of a time chart showing the flow of games in the first bliss mode in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 122 is an example of a time chart showing the flow of games in the second bliss mode in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, in FIGS. 116 to 122, whether the special symbol game is being executed (the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is changing) or stopped, or during a special gaming state (during a big hit gaming state). Or whether it is in the small hit game state), which is the internal game state (whether the time reduction flag is set (on), or if the time reduction flag is set). (Whether the time saving flag of the type is set) and which mode the game mode is.

Regarding the internal game state, if the A1 time reduction flag is set, it is the A1 time reduction game state, if the A2 time reduction flag is set, it is the A2 time reduction game state, and if the A3 time reduction flag is set, the A3 time reduction flag is set. If the A3 time reduction game state is set, the A4 time reduction game state is set if the A4 time reduction flag is set, the B time reduction game state is set if the B time reduction flag is set, and the C time reduction game state is set if the C time reduction flag is set. It is a time-saving game state. Although not shown in FIGS. 116 to 122, the time saving flag is turned on when any of the A1 time saving flag, the A2 time saving flag, the A3 time saving flag, the A4 time saving flag, the B time saving flag, and the C time saving flag is set. Is set to.

Further, in FIGS. 116 to 122, (z + number) shown in parentheses after the big hit, the small hit, and the time saving hit indicate the selected symbol command. For example, the jackpot (z1) indicates that it is the jackpot of the selected symbol command "z1".

[4-4-1. Game flow in normal mode]
As shown in FIG. 116, the normal mode is internally a normal gaming state in which the time saving flag is off. Although there is a possibility that the second special symbol game is executed even in the normal gaming state, for convenience of explanation, the description of the normal mode will be described on the premise that the first special symbol game is executed.

(Start of the first special design game)
When the player strikes left and the start condition of the first special symbol game is satisfied, the main CPU 2201 starts the first special symbol game, and the first special symbol display unit 2163 displays the first special symbol in a variable manner. .. When the first special symbol game is completed, the result of the first special symbol game is derived to the first special symbol display unit 2163.

Although not shown in FIG. 116, when the start condition of the first special symbol game is satisfied, the sub CPU 2301 performs variable display of the decorative symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol by the main CPU 2201. ..

(When the result of the first special symbol game is "big hit (z0)")
When the "big hit (z0)" is derived as a result of the first special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 can give a large amount of prize balls or prize ball data to the player as a result of the first special symbol game. It is controlled to a state (for example, a jackpot game state in which a round game of 10 rounds is executed). The sub CPU 2301 terminates the normal mode and shifts to the jackpot mode as the processing of the game mode performed in the display area of the display device 2007.

When the big hit game state ends, the main CPU 2201 controls the A2 time saving game state, and the sub CPU 2301 ends the big hit mode and shifts to the second chance mode.

(When the result of the first special symbol game is "big hit (z1)")
When the "big hit (z1)" is derived as a result of the first special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 is given as a result of the first special symbol game as compared with the jackpot game state in which the round game of 10 rounds is executed. It is controlled to a jackpot game state in which there is little prize ball or prize ball data (for example, a jackpot game state in which a four-round round game is executed). The sub CPU 2301 terminates the normal mode and shifts to the jackpot mode as the processing of the game mode performed in the display area of the display device 2007.

When the big hit game state ends, the main CPU 2201 controls the A1 time saving game state, and the sub CPU 2301 ends the big hit mode and shifts to the first chance mode.

(When the result of the first special symbol game is "small hit (z2)")
When the "small hit (z2)" is derived as a result of the first special symbol game, the small hit game state is controlled. When the V winning is detected in this small hit game state, the main CPU 2201 controls to the big hit game state in which, for example, 10 rounds of round games are executed, and the sub CPU 2301 ends the normal mode and shifts to the big hit mode.

When the jackpot gaming state ends, the main CPU 2201 controls the A4 time saving gaming state (see FIG. 110), and the sub CPU 2301 ends the jackpot mode and shifts to the first bliss mode.

If the V winning is not detected in the small hit game state, the main CPU 2201 does not control the big hit game state and continues the normal game state, and the sub CPU 2301 continues the normal mode without shifting to the big hit mode. That is, as a result of the special symbol game, the game value is not given to the player at all, which is the same as the loss.

By the way, in the first special symbol game, the winning probability of the small hit (z2) is extremely lower than the winning probability of the big hit (see FIG. 108). The game state after the end of the big hit game state is controlled to a game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the A4 time reduction game state in which the time reduction end condition is the condition S), as compared with the case where the game is won and controlled to the big hit game state. At the same time, it shifts to the first bliss mode. By doing so, the small hit (z2) can be positioned as a premier hit in the normal mode, and it becomes possible to enhance the interest.

(When the result of the 1st special symbol game is "missing")
When the "loss" is derived as a result of the first special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 maintains the normal gaming state without changing the internal gaming state, and the sub CPU 2301 maintains the normal mode. After that, when the start condition of the first special symbol game is satisfied, the first special symbol game is executed, and when the start condition of the second special symbol game is satisfied, the second special symbol game is executed.

[4-4-2. Game flow in the first chance mode]
As shown in FIG. 117, immediately after the transition to the first chance mode, the A1 time saving game state is internally. Since the normal game mode in the A1 time-saving game state is right-handed, the second special symbol game is mainly executed, but there is a possibility that the first special symbol game is executed even in the A1 time-saving game state. .. However, here, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the second special symbol game is executed. Further, since the second special symbol game that can be executed in the first chance mode is, in principle, once, in the following description, the number of times of the second special symbol game executed in the first chance mode is one. Will be explained on the premise of.

(Start of the second special symbol game of the first rotation)
When the player strikes right and the start condition of the second special symbol game is satisfied, the main CPU 2201 starts the second special symbol game, and the second special symbol display unit 2164 displays the second special symbol in a variable manner. .. When the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, the result of the second special symbol game is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164.

As shown in FIG. 110, the time saving end condition of the A1 time saving game state is condition C, and the time saving ending timing of the A1 time saving game state is the fluctuation start time. Therefore, the main CPU 2201 starts the second special symbol game. Occasionally, the A1 short game state is terminated and the game state is changed to the normal game state. That is, in the first chance mode, the time saving function is activated from the end of the big hit game state to the start of the second special symbol game of the first rotation, and the second special symbol game of the first rotation is started. The time saving function does not work during execution. By doing so, in the first chance mode, although the second special symbol game is executed at least once, it is difficult to execute the second special symbol game a plurality of times.

In the first chance mode, a plurality of game balls may accidentally win the second starting port 2140 before the second special symbol game of the first rotation is started, but the ordinary electric accessory 2146 By configuring the game balls that have entered the inside of (see FIG. 87) to immediately win the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 87), as much as possible, a plurality of game balls do not win the second starting port 2140. Can be done.

In the A1 time-saving game state, the wait time from the result of the normal symbol game to the start of the second normal symbol game is made longer than the variable display time of the second special symbol. The number of times of the second special symbol game that can be executed in one chance mode may be only one.

Although not shown in FIG. 117, when the start condition of the second special symbol game is satisfied, the sub CPU 2301 performs variable display of the decorative symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol by the main CPU 2201. The sub CPU 2301 has the same display mode (either) when the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol and when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display. It may be performed in a mode in which it is difficult to distinguish whether the variable display is performed, or in a mode in which it is possible to distinguish which variable display is performed.

Internally, even if the A1 short game state ends at the start of the second special symbol game, the sub CPU 2301 continues the first chance mode until the second special symbol game of the first rotation ends.

(When the result of the second special symbol game is "big hit (z4)")
When the "big hit (z4)" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 controls the player to be in a big hit gaming state in which a large amount of prize balls or prize ball data can be given. The sub CPU 2301 ends the first chance mode and shifts to the jackpot mode as the processing of the game mode performed in the display area of the display device 2007.

When the big hit game state ends, the main CPU 2201 controls the A3 time reduction game state, and the sub CPU 2301 ends the big hit mode and shifts to the premium chance mode.

(When the result of the second special symbol game is "small hit (z5)")
When the "small hit (z5)" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 controls the small hit gaming state. When the V winning is detected in this small hit game state, the main CPU 2201 controls the big hit game state, and the sub CPU 2301 ends the first chance mode and shifts to the big hit mode. In this case, the internal gaming state at the time of detecting the V prize is the normal gaming state.

In the case of a small hit of the selected symbol command "z5", the main CPU 2201 is A3 time shortened after the end of the big hit game state regardless of whether the internal game state at the time of detecting the V prize is the normal game state or the time saving game state. It is controlled to the gaming state (see FIG. 110). When the big hit game state ends, the sub CPU 2301 ends the big hit mode and shifts to the premium chance mode.

Since the first chance mode is a game mode in which the second special symbol game is executed only once in principle, the result of the second special symbol game is a small hit of the selected symbol command "z5", and this small hit. When the V winning is not detected in the small hit game state based on the hit, the main CPU 2201 does not control the big hit game state and continues the normal game state, and the sub CPU 2301 ends the first chance mode and shifts to the normal mode.

(When the result of the second special symbol game is "small hit (z6 to z10)")
When the "small hit (z6 to z10)" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the small hit game state is controlled. When the V winning is detected in this small hit game state, the main CPU 2201 controls the big hit game state, and the sub CPU 2301 ends the first chance mode and shifts to the big hit mode. In this case, the internal gaming state at the time of detecting the V prize is the normal gaming state.

When the internal gaming state at the time of V winning detection is the normal gaming state and the selection symbol commands "z6" to "z10" are small hits, the main CPU 2201 controls to the A2 time saving gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state. (See FIG. 110). When the big hit game state ends, the sub CPU 2301 ends the big hit mode and shifts to the second chance mode.

If the V prize is not detected in the small hit game state based on any of the selected symbol commands "z6" to "z10", the main CPU 2201 does not control the big hit game state and continues the normal game state, and the sub CPU 2301 Exit the first chance mode and shift to the normal mode.

(When the result of the second special symbol game is "time saving hit (z11)")
When the "time reduction hit (z11)" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 ends the normal game state and controls the C time reduction game state. The sub CPU 2301 ends the first chance mode and shifts to the second chance mode. In this case, it is possible to perform an effect indicating that the chance mode is performed again.

(When the result of the 2nd special symbol game is "missing")
When the "loss" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 maintains the internal gaming state in the normal gaming state, and the sub CPU 2301 ends the first chance mode and shifts to the normal mode.

The flow of the game in the first chance mode described above has been described on the premise that the number of times of the second special symbol game executed in the first chance mode is one. It is possible that a plurality of game balls accidentally win a prize in the second starting port 2140 before the special symbol game is started. In such a case, the first chance mode may be continued until the second special symbol game for the number (remaining hold) held as the second hold is completed. In addition, when the result of the second special symbol game in the remaining hold is "big hit", a surprise effect is performed, and when the result of the second special symbol game in the remaining hold is not "big hit", the second special of the remaining hold is performed. It may not be possible to grasp that the design game was being executed, or it may be difficult to perform an effect. As an effect that it is difficult or impossible to grasp that the second special symbol game for the remaining hold has been executed, for example, the effect of displaying the number of the second hold is hidden and synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol. This corresponds to an effect of instructing a left-handed strike without executing the variable display of the decorative pattern to be performed. In this case, even if the result of the second special symbol game is, for example, a "small hit", it is difficult to detect the V prize. Therefore, the second special executed in the first chance mode is substantially performed. The number of symbol games is the same as one.

[4-4-3. Flow of the game in the first rotation of the second chance mode]
As shown in FIG. 118, immediately after the transition to the second chance mode, the A2 time saving game state is internally. However, as will be described later, when the result of the second special symbol game (for example, the second special symbol game of the second rotation or the third rotation) of the remaining hold in the second chance mode is a time saving hit, or a premium chance. If the result of the second special symbol game with the remaining hold in the mode is a time saving hit, the second chance mode is restarted and started from the second special symbol game of the first rotation. At the start of the second chance mode restarted in this way, the C time shortening game state is internally. Further, in the time chart in the second chance mode restarted in this way, the "A2 time saving flag" is only changed to the "C time saving flag" in the internal gaming state shown in FIG. 118, and the others are shown in FIG. 118. Is the same as.

Further, the first special symbol game may be executed even in the A2 time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state, but for convenience of explanation, the normal game mode in the A2 time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state is Since it is right-handed, the second special symbol game is mainly executed, but there is a possibility that the first special symbol game is executed even in the A2 time saving game state or the C time saving game state. However, here, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the second special symbol game is executed.

(Start of the second special symbol game of the first rotation)
When the player strikes right and the start condition of the second special symbol game is satisfied, the main CPU 2201 starts the second special symbol game, and the second special symbol display unit 2164 displays the second special symbol in a variable manner. .. When the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, the result of the second special symbol game is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164.

As shown in FIG. 110, the time reduction end condition of the A2 time reduction game state and the time reduction game state is condition A, condition B, or condition C, and the time reduction end timing of the A2 time reduction game state and the time reduction game state C varies. Since it is the end time, the main CPU 2201 ends the A2 time reduction game state or the C time reduction game state at the end of the second special symbol game (when the variable display is stopped), and shifts to the normal game state. That is, in the second chance mode, the time saving function is activated from the end of the jackpot game state to the end of the second special symbol game of the first rotation, and the execution of the second special symbol game of the first rotation. Medium and short time functions are activated. Therefore, in the second chance mode, it is possible to win a prize in the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 87) during the execution of the first special symbol game of the first rotation. Since the upper limit of the second hold is, for example, two, it is possible to execute the second special symbol game up to three times in the second chance mode.

As described above, when the start condition of the second special symbol game is satisfied, the sub CPU 2301 performs the variable display of the decorative symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol by the main CPU 2201.

Internally, even if the A2 time saving game state or the C time saving game state ends at the end of the second special symbol game of the first rotation, the sub CPU 2301 keeps the remaining reserved portion until the second special symbol game ends. (For example, until the end of the second special symbol game of the third rotation), the second chance mode is continued.

(When the result of the second special symbol game is "big hit (z4)")
When the "big hit (z4)" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 controls the player to be in a big hit gaming state in which a large amount of prize balls or prize ball data can be given. The sub CPU 2301 ends the second chance mode and shifts to the jackpot mode as the processing of the game mode performed in the display area of the display device 2007.

When the big hit game state ends, the main CPU 2201 controls the A3 time reduction game state, and the sub CPU 2301 ends the big hit mode and shifts to the premium chance mode.

(When the result of the second special symbol game is "small hit (z5)")
When the "small hit (z5)" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 controls the small hit gaming state. When the V winning is detected in this small hit game state, the main CPU 2201 controls the big hit game state, and the sub CPU 2301 ends the second chance mode and shifts to the big hit mode. In this case, the internal gaming state at the time of detecting the V prize is the normal gaming state.

In the case of a small hit of the selected symbol command "z5", the main CPU 2201 is A3 time shortened after the end of the big hit game state regardless of whether the internal game state at the time of detecting the V prize is the normal game state or the time saving game state. It is controlled to the gaming state (see FIG. 110). When the big hit game state ends, the sub CPU 2301 ends the big hit mode and shifts to the premium chance mode.

If the V winning is not detected in the small hit game state based on the selected symbol command "z5", the main CPU 2201 does not control the big hit game state but controls it to the normal game state, and the sub CPU 2301 continues the second chance mode. ..

(When the result of the second special symbol game is "small hit (z6 to z10)")
When the "small hit (z6 to z10)" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the small hit game state is controlled. When the V winning is detected in this small hit game state, the main CPU 2201 controls the big hit game state, and the sub CPU 2301 ends the second chance mode and shifts to the big hit mode. In this case, the internal gaming state at the time of detecting the V prize is the normal gaming state.

When the internal gaming state at the time of V winning detection is the normal gaming state and the selection symbol commands "z6" to "z10" are small hits, the main CPU 2201 controls to the A2 time saving gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state. (See FIG. 110). When the big hit game state ends, the sub CPU 2301 ends the big hit mode and shifts to the second chance mode.

If the V prize is not detected in the small hit game state based on any of the selected symbol commands "z6" to "z10", the main CPU 2201 does not control the big hit game state and continues the normal game state, and the sub CPU 2301 Continue the second chance mode.

(When the result of the second special symbol game is "time saving hit (z11)")
In this fourth pachinko gaming machine, when a time-saving hit is won in the last special symbol game in the time-saving game state, the main CPU 2201 performs a hit determination process in the special symbol game and then performs an end process in the time-saving game state. I am doing it. Therefore, when the "time reduction hit (z11)" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the internal gaming state when the "time reduction hit (z11)" is derived is the A2 time reduction game state or the C time reduction game. It is a state. Further, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 2201 ignores even if the time-saving game is won in the time-saving gaming state. Therefore, when the result of the second special symbol game of the first rotation in the second chance mode is a time reduction hit, the main CPU 2201 ends the A2 time reduction game state or the C time reduction game state, and controls to the normal game state. The sub CPU 2301 continues the second chance mode even if it internally shifts from the A2 time saving game state or the C time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

(When the result of the 2nd special symbol game is "missing")
When the "loss" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 ends the A2 time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state as the internal game state, and controls the game state to the normal game state. The sub CPU 2301 continues the second chance mode even if it internally shifts from the A2 time saving game state or the C time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

[4-4-4. Flow of the game in the second special symbol game of the remaining hold in the second chance mode]
As shown in FIG. 119, the second special symbol game (for example, the second special symbol game of the second rotation and the third rotation) of the remaining hold in the second chance mode is internally in a normal gaming state. be. As described above, this fourth pachinko gaming machine is a priority variable machine in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is prioritized over the starting condition of the first special symbol. 2 A special symbol game is executed. However, if the second start port 2140 (see FIG. 87) is not won before the end of the second special symbol game of the first rotation in the second chance mode, the second rotation of the second rotation or the third rotation It may happen that the special symbol game is not executed. However, here, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the second special symbol game of the second rotation and the third rotation is executed as the second special symbol game of the remaining hold of the second chance mode.

(Start of the 2nd special symbol game of the 2nd and 3rd rotations)
When the start condition of the second special symbol game of the second rotation or the third rotation, which is the remaining reserved portion, is satisfied, the main CPU 2201 starts the second special symbol game, and the second special symbol display unit 2164 displays the second special symbol. Variable display is performed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, the result of the second special symbol game is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164.

As described above, when the start condition of the second special symbol game is satisfied, the sub CPU 2301 performs the variable display of the decorative symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol by the main CPU 2201.

As described above, even if the A2 time saving game state or the C time saving game state ends internally at the end of the second special symbol game of the first rotation, the sub CPU 2301 is the second special symbol game of the third rotation. Continues the second chance mode until the end of.

(When the result of the second special symbol game is "big hit (z4)")
When the "big hit (z4)" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 controls the player to be in a big hit gaming state in which a large amount of prize balls or prize ball data can be given. The sub CPU 2301 ends the second chance mode and shifts to the jackpot mode as the processing of the game mode performed in the display area of the display device 2007.

When the big hit game state ends, the main CPU 2201 controls the A3 time reduction game state, and the sub CPU 2301 ends the big hit mode and shifts to the premium chance mode.

(When the result of the second special symbol game is "small hit (z5)")
When the "small hit (z5)" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 controls the small hit gaming state. When the V winning is detected in this small hit game state, the main CPU 2201 controls the big hit game state, and the sub CPU 2301 ends the second chance mode and shifts to the big hit mode. In this case, the internal gaming state at the time of detecting the V prize is the normal gaming state.

In the case of a small hit of the selected symbol command "z5", the main CPU 2201 is A3 time shortened after the end of the big hit game state regardless of whether the internal game state at the time of detecting the V prize is the normal game state or the time saving game state. It is controlled to the gaming state (see FIG. 110). When the big hit game state ends, the sub CPU 2301 ends the big hit mode and shifts to the premium chance mode.

If the V winning is not detected in the small hit game state based on the selected symbol command "z5", the main CPU 2201 does not control the big hit game state but controls it to the normal game state. On the other hand, the sub CPU 2301 continues the second chance mode in the case of the second special symbol game of the second rotation, ends the second chance mode in the case of the second special symbol game of the third rotation, and shifts to the normal mode. Let me.

(When the result of the second special symbol game is "small hit (z6 to z10)")
When the "small hit (z6 to z10)" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the small hit game state is controlled. When the V winning is detected in this small hit game state, the main CPU 2201 controls the big hit game state, and the sub CPU 2301 ends the second chance mode and shifts to the big hit mode. In this case, the internal gaming state at the time of detecting the V prize is the normal gaming state.

When the internal gaming state at the time of V winning detection is the normal gaming state and the selection symbol commands "z6" to "z10" are small hits, the main CPU 2201 controls to the A2 time saving gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state. (See FIG. 110). When the big hit game state ends, the sub CPU 2301 ends the big hit mode and newly shifts to the second chance mode.

If the V winning is not detected in the small hit game state based on any of the selected symbol commands "z6" to "z10", the main CPU 2201 does not control the big hit game state and continues the normal game state. On the other hand, the sub CPU 2301 continues the second chance mode until the second special symbol game for the remaining hold ends, and when the second special symbol game for the remaining hold ends, ends the second chance mode and the normal mode. To migrate to.

(When the result of the second special symbol game is "time saving hit (z11)")
When the "time reduction hit (z11)" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the internal gaming state when the "time reduction hit (z11)" is derived is the normal gaming state. Therefore, the main CPU 2201 ends the normal gaming state and controls the C time shortening gaming state. The sub CPU 2301 performs a déjà vu effect indicating that the second chance mode is performed again from the beginning, and continues the second chance mode.

(When the result of the 2nd special symbol game is "missing")
When the "loss" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 continues the normal game state as the internal game state. The sub CPU 2301 continues the second chance mode in the case of the second special symbol game of the second rotation, ends the second chance mode in the case of the second special symbol game of the third rotation, and shifts to the normal mode.

[4-4-5. Flow of the game in the first rotation of the premium chance mode]
As shown in FIG. 120, immediately after the transition to the premium chance mode, the game is internally in the A3 time saving game state. Since the normal game mode in the A3 time-saving game state is right-handed, the second special symbol game is mainly executed, but even in the A3 time-saving game state, the first special symbol game may be executed. .. However, here, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the second special symbol game is executed.

(Start of the second special symbol game of the first rotation)
When the player strikes right and the start condition of the second special symbol game is satisfied, the main CPU 2201 starts the second special symbol game, and the second special symbol display unit 2164 displays the second special symbol in a variable manner. .. When the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, the result of the second special symbol game is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164.

As shown in FIG. 110, the time reduction end condition of the A3 time reduction game state is condition J, condition K, or condition L, and the time reduction end timing of the A3 time reduction game state is the variable end time. When the "time saving hit" or "loss" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the A3 time saving gaming state is terminated and the game is shifted to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, when the "small hit" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 does not end the A3 time reduction game state, but continues the A3 time reduction game state. In the premium chance mode, the second special symbol game can be executed up to three times in principle.

As described above, when the start condition of the second special symbol game is satisfied, the sub CPU 2301 performs the variable display of the decorative symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol by the main CPU 2201.

Internally, even if the A3 short game state ends at the end of the second special symbol game, the sub CPU 2301 keeps the sub CPU 2301 until the second special symbol game of the third rotation ends (the second special regarding the second hold). Continue the premium chance mode (until all the design games are over).

(When the result of the second special symbol game is "big hit (z4)")
When the "big hit (z4)" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 controls the player to be in a big hit gaming state in which a large amount of prize balls or prize ball data can be given. The sub CPU 2301 terminates the premium chance mode and shifts to the jackpot mode as the processing of the game mode performed in the display area of the display device 2007.

When the big hit game state ends, the main CPU 2201 controls the A3 time reduction game state, and the sub CPU 2301 ends the big hit mode and shifts to the premium chance mode.

(When the result of the second special symbol game is "small hit (z5 to z10)")
When the "small hit (z5 to z10)" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 controls the small hit gaming state. When the V winning is detected in this small hit game state, the main CPU 2201 controls the big hit game state, and the sub CPU 2301 ends the premium chance mode and shifts to the big hit mode.

By the way, when the result of the second special symbol game of the first rotation in the premium chance mode is a small hit, the internal gaming state at the time of detecting the V winning is the A3 time saving gaming state, and in this respect, at the time of detecting the V winning. The internal gaming state is different from the second chance mode, which is the normal gaming state. Therefore, regardless of which of the small hits of the selected symbol commands "z5" to "z10" is derived, the main CPU 2201 controls to the A3 time saving game state after the end of the big hit game state (see FIG. 110). .. When the big hit game state ends, the sub CPU 2301 ends the big hit mode and shifts to the premium chance mode.

If the V prize is not detected in the small hit game state based on any of the selected symbol commands "z5" to "z10", the main CPU 2201 does not control the big hit game state and continues the A3 time reduction game state, and the sub CPU 2301 Continues in premium chance mode. In this case, the second special symbol game of the second rotation is also internally in the A3 time saving game state. Further, since it is possible to win a prize in the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 87) during the execution of the second special symbol game of the second rotation, in this case, the second special symbol game is played more than three times. It will be possible to execute.

When "small hit (z5 to z10)" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game of the first rotation in the premium chance mode, "small hit (z5 to z10)" is started after the second special symbol game is started. As a special effect by the sub CPU 2301, for example, it is preferable to perform, for example, a "1G continuous final effect" until the above is derived. This "1G continuous confirmation effect" is an effect of notifying that the big hit game state is a so-called continuous villa in the second special symbol game of the first rotation after the end of the big hit game state.

Even when the "big hit (z4)" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game of the first rotation in the premium chance mode, it is preferable to perform the above-mentioned special effect.

The above-mentioned special effect is as shown in FIG. 113 (in particular, refer to the case where the A3 time saving flag of the second special symbol is "1"), for example, the reach effect of the big hit system reach F or the small hit system reach F. Is equivalent. The above-mentioned special effect may be, for example, an effect in which a specific character that does not normally appear appears in place of or in addition to the variable display effect of the decorative pattern. By doing so, it is possible to produce an effect that can give the player a sense of expectation at a good tempo with a relatively short fluctuation time such as 5 seconds (for example, 20 seconds in the big hit system reach E or the small hit system reach E). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest. In particular, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 108, the small hit probability is, for example, one half, so that the player can be given a high expectation in the premium chance mode, which enhances the interest. Can be done.

In the first chance mode and the second chance mode, as described above, even if the result of the second special symbol game of the first rotation is "big hit" or "small hit", the fluctuation time is, for example, 20 seconds. Only the reach effect of the big hit system reach E or the small hit system reach E is performed by using the above-mentioned, and the special effect such as the above-mentioned "1G continuous finalized effect" is not performed. However, as shown in the normal game state column of FIG. 110, the selected symbol commands "z5" and "z6" are both controlled to the jackpot game state in which the number of rounds is the same, so that no special effect is performed. Even in this case, since the jackpot may be derived without the loss being confirmed, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state can be maintained.

(When the result of the second special symbol game is "time saving hit (z11)")
In this fourth pachinko gaming machine, as described above, when the result of the special symbol game in the final variation of the time reduction is a time reduction hit, the control so far is performed after determining that the result of this special symbol game is a time reduction hit. The end processing of the time-saving game state that has been done is performed. Therefore, when the "time reduction hit (z11)" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the internal gaming state when the "time reduction hit (z11)" is derived is the A3 time reduction gaming state. Further, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 2201 ignores even if the time-saving game is won in the time-saving gaming state. Therefore, when the result of the second special symbol game of the first rotation in the premium chance mode is a time reduction hit, the main CPU 2201 ends the A3 time reduction game state and controls it to the normal game state. Even if the sub CPU 2301 internally shifts from the A3 short-time game state to the normal game state, the sub CPU 2301 continues the premium chance mode until the remaining reserved second special symbol game ends, and the remaining reserved second special symbol When the game is over, the premium chance mode is terminated and the normal mode is entered.

(When the result of the 2nd special symbol game is "missing")
When the "loss" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 ends the A3 time saving game state as an internal game state and controls it to the normal game state. The sub CPU 2301 continues the premium chance mode even if it internally shifts from the A3 short game state to the normal game state.

[4-4-6. Flow of the game in the second special symbol game of the remaining hold in the premium chance mode]
As described above, in the second special symbol game (for example, the second special symbol game of the second rotation and the third rotation) of the remaining hold in the premium chance mode, the result of the second special symbol game of the first rotation is in principle. Since it is a game played when it is "missing", it is in a normal gaming state internally. However, if the result of the second special symbol game of the first rotation is "small hit (z5 to z10)" and the V prize is not detected in the small hit gaming state, the second special symbol game of the second rotation is. Internally, it will be in the A3 short game state. Further, when the second special symbol game of the second rotation is internally in the A3 time saving game state, the result of the second special symbol game of the second rotation is "small hit (z5 to z10)", which is small. If the V prize is not detected in the winning game state, the second special symbol game in the third rotation is also internally in the A3 time saving game state. In such a case, the second special symbol game in the premium chance mode can be executed more than three times. However, in order to prevent the second special symbol game from being executed more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times or 5 times, etc.) in the premium chance mode, for example, the number of small hit derivations of the 2nd special symbol is set to the predetermined number of times. This may be added to the end condition of the A3 short game state.

The flow of the game when the second special symbol game (for example, the second special symbol game of the second rotation or the third rotation) of the remaining reserved portion in the premium chance mode is internally in the normal gaming state is shown in the figure. In the game mode shown in 119, the premium chance mode is used instead of the second chance mode, and other processes are the same as the flow of the game in the second and third rotations of the second chance mode.

In addition, the flow of the game when the execution time of the second special symbol game (for example, the second special symbol game of the second rotation or the third rotation) of the remaining reserved portion in the premium chance mode is internally in the A3 time reduction game state. , The flow of the game in the first rotation of the premium chance mode shown in FIG. 120 is the same.

[4-4-7. Flow of games in the first bliss mode]
The flow of the game in the first bliss mode will be described with reference to FIG. 121. The first bliss mode is a mode configured so that the second special symbol game can be executed, for example, 100 times. That is, it can be said that the first bliss mode is a mode in which it is confirmed that the game is controlled to the big hit game state.

In the first bliss mode, as described above, when the result of the first special symbol game is "small hit" and the V prize is detected in the small hit game state, the big hit is controlled to the big hit game state. This is an effect mode that is performed based on the end of the game state, and is internally an A4 time saving game state. Since the normal game mode in the A4 short-time game state is right-handed, the second special symbol game is mainly executed, but even in the A4 short-time game state, the first special symbol game may be executed. .. However, here, the description will be made on the premise that the second special symbol game is executed.

(2nd special design game)
When the player strikes right and the start condition of the second special symbol game is satisfied, the main CPU 2201 starts the second special symbol game, and the second special symbol display unit 2164 displays the second special symbol in a variable manner. .. When the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, the result of the second special symbol game is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164.

As shown in FIG. 110, the time saving end condition of the A4 time saving game state is the condition S, and the time saving ending timing of the A4 time saving game state is the variable end time. Therefore, the main CPU 2201 has a variable display of the first special symbol. Based on the end of the 100th special symbol game in which the total of the number of times and the variable display number of the second special symbol is 100, the A4 time reduction game state is ended and the game is shifted to the normal game state.

As described above, when the start condition of the second special symbol game is satisfied, the sub CPU 2301 performs the variable display of the decorative symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol by the main CPU 2201.

In addition, the sub CPU 2301 continues the first bliss mode until the A3 time saving game state ends internally and the second special symbol game for the remaining hold ends. In this fourth pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to execute the second special symbol game up to 100 times in the first bliss mode.

(When the result of the second special symbol game is "big hit (z4)")
When the "big hit (z4)" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 controls the player to be in a big hit gaming state in which a large amount of prize balls or prize ball data can be given. The sub CPU 2301 ends the first bliss mode and shifts to the jackpot mode as the processing of the game mode performed in the display area of the display device 2007.

When the big hit game state ends, the main CPU 2201 controls the A3 time reduction game state, and the sub CPU 2301 ends the big hit mode and shifts to the premium chance mode.

(When the result of the second special symbol game is "small hit (z5 to z10)")
When the "small hit (z5 to z10)" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 controls the small hit gaming state. When the V winning is detected in this small hit game state, the main CPU 2201 controls the big hit game state, and the sub CPU 2301 ends the premium chance mode and shifts to the big hit mode.

By the way, when the result of the second special symbol game in the first bliss mode is a small hit, the internal game state at the time of detecting the V prize is A4 time reduction unless this small hit is the result of the special symbol game in the final variation of the time reduction. It is in a game state. Therefore, regardless of which of the small hits of the selected symbol commands "z5" to "z10" is derived, the main CPU 2201 controls to the A3 time saving game state after the end of the big hit game state (see FIG. 110). .. When the big hit game state ends, the sub CPU 2301 ends the big hit mode and shifts to the premium chance mode. If the V prize is not detected in the small hit game state based on any of the selected symbol commands "z5" to "z10", the main CPU 2201 does not control the big hit game state and continues the A4 time reduction game state, and the sub CPU 2301 Continues the first bliss mode.

Further, in this fourth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the special symbol game in the time saving final fluctuation is a small hit, after determining that the result of this special symbol game is a small hit, the small hit game state is changed. Before the start, the end processing of the time-saving game state that has been controlled so far is performed. Therefore, in the time saving final fluctuation of the A4 time saving game state (for example, the 100th special symbol game in which the total of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol is 100), the second special symbol When a "small hit (z5 to z10)" is derived as a result of the game, the internal gaming state at the time of detecting the V prize is the normal gaming state. Therefore, when the small hit derived in the time reduction final variation of the A4 time reduction game state is "small hit (z5)", the main CPU 2201 controls to the A3 time reduction game state after the end of the big hit game state based on the V prize detection. (See FIG. 110). When the big hit game state ends, the sub CPU 2301 ends the big hit mode and shifts to the premium chance mode. On the other hand, when the small hit derived in the time reduction final variation of the A4 time reduction game state is "small hit (any of z6 to z10)", the main CPU 2201 is A2 after the end of the big hit game state based on the V prize detection. It is controlled to a time-saving game state (see FIG. 110). When the big hit game state ends, the sub CPU 2301 ends the big hit mode and shifts to the second chance mode.

However, after determining that the result of the special symbol game is a small hit, before the small hit game state is started, instead of performing the end processing of the time-saving game state that has been controlled so far, the small hit is performed. After the game state is finished, the time-saving game state that has been controlled so far may be terminated. That is, in this case, since the internal gaming state at the time of detecting the V prize is the A4 time-saving gaming state, the small hit derived in the time-saving final variation of the A4 time-saving gaming state is any type (z5 to z10) of small hits. Even if there is, the main CPU 2201 controls to the A3 time saving game state after the end of the big hit game state based on the V winning detection (see FIG. 110). In this case, when the big hit game state ends, the sub CPU 2301 ends the big hit mode and shifts to the premium chance mode.

(When the result of the second special symbol game is "time saving hit (z11)")
In this fourth pachinko gaming machine, even if a time saving hit is derived in the time saving gaming state, the main CPU 2201 ignores it. Therefore, even if the "time saving hit (z11)" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 continues the time saving gaming state, and the sub CPU 2301 also continues the first bliss mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the result of the second special symbol game is "time reduction hit" in the first bliss mode, the main CPU 2201 may switch from the A4 time reduction game state to the C time reduction game state, or A4. The time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state may be operated in an overlapping manner.

Further, in this fourth pachinko gaming machine, as described above, when the result of the special symbol game in the time saving final fluctuation is a time saving hit, after determining that the result of this special symbol game is a time saving hit, this The end processing of the time-saving game state that has been controlled up to is performed. Therefore, in the time saving final fluctuation of the A4 time saving game state (for example, the 100th special symbol game in which the total of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol is 100), the second special symbol When the "time reduction hit (z11)" is derived as a result of the game, the internal gaming state when the "time reduction hit (z11)" is derived is the A4 time reduction gaming state. Therefore, when the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game in the time saving final variation of the first bliss mode is a time saving hit, the main CPU 2201 ends the A4 time saving gaming state and controls to the normal gaming state. Even if the sub CPU 2301 internally shifts from the A4 short-time game state to the normal game state, the sub CPU 2301 continues the first bliss mode until the second special symbol game for the remaining hold is completed, and the second special for the remaining hold. When the design game ends, the first bliss mode is terminated and the normal mode is entered.

(When the result of the 2nd special symbol game is "missing")
When a "loss" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 continues the A4 time-saving game state as an internal game state unless the condition S, which is the time-saving end condition of the A4 time-saving game state, is satisfied. do. On the other hand, in the time saving final fluctuation of the A4 time saving game state (for example, the 100th special symbol game in which the total of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol is 100), the second special symbol When the "loss" is derived as a result of the game, the main CPU 2201 ends the A4 time-shortening gaming state and controls it to the normal gaming state. Even if the sub CPU 2301 internally shifts from the A3 short-time game state to the normal game state, the sub CPU 2301 continues the first bliss mode until the second special symbol game for the remaining hold is completed, and the second special for the remaining hold. When the design game ends, the first bliss mode is terminated and the normal mode is entered.

Since the second special symbol game for the remaining hold in the first bliss mode is internally in the normal game state, it is the same as the flow of the game in the second and third rotations of the second chance mode. ..

[4-4-8. Flow of games in the second bliss mode]
The flow of the game in the first bliss mode will be described with reference to FIG. 122. The second bliss mode is a mode configured so that the second special symbol game can be executed a predetermined number of times when the ceiling counter value reaches the ceiling value (for example, the number of times the special symbol game is executed 1200 times). That is, in the second bliss mode, it is internally controlled to the B time saving game state. Even if the main CPU 2201 wins the time saving game state in the B time saving game state, the time saving hit is ignored, and the B time saving game state is continued without being controlled to the C time saving game state.

The second bliss mode is internally in the B time saving game state, and since the normal game mode is right-handed, the second special symbol game is mainly executed, but even if it is in the B time saving game state, the second is 1 There is a possibility that a special symbol game will be executed. However, here, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the second special symbol game is executed.

(2nd special design game)
When the player strikes right and the start condition of the second special symbol game is satisfied, the main CPU 2201 starts the second special symbol game, and the second special symbol display unit 2164 displays the second special symbol in a variable manner. .. When the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, the result of the second special symbol game is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164.

Further, when the start condition of the second special symbol game is satisfied, the sub CPU 2301 performs the variable display of the decorative symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol by the main CPU 2201.

In this fourth pachinko gaming machine, for example, the condition S, the condition T, the condition U, the condition V, and the condition W are set as the end conditions of the B time-saving gaming state. That is, when any one of the conditions S, T, U, V, and W is satisfied, the B time saving game state ends.

When the B time saving game state ends by satisfying the condition S, the sub CPU 2301 may control the second bliss mode until the special symbol game is executed at least 100 times (102 times if there is a remaining hold). can. However, as described above, the main CPU 2201 counts the number of times the time-saving game is won in the B time-saving game state, and when the number of times the time-saving game is won in the B time-saving game state is, for example, 3 times (condition V is satisfied). And), B time reduction game state ends. Therefore, it cannot be said that the second bliss mode is a mode in which it is confirmed to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state like the first bliss mode. In this way, in the second bliss mode (B time saving game state), the condition S related to the variable display number of special symbols, the condition (condition T, condition U, or condition V) related to the number of times of derivation per time saving, and the normal symbol It is possible to create an effect that can give the player expectation and thrill, such as the condition W related to the variable display number of the above and which condition is satisfied first, which can enhance the interest.

Even if the B time reduction game state is internally terminated by satisfying the end condition of the B time reduction game state, the sub CPU 2301 continues the second bliss mode until the second special symbol game for the remaining hold is completed. do.

(When the result of the second special symbol game is "big hit (z4)")
When the "big hit (z4)" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 controls the player to be in a big hit gaming state in which a large amount of prize balls or prize ball data can be given. The sub CPU 2301 ends the second bliss mode and shifts to the jackpot mode as the processing of the game mode performed in the display area of the display device 2007.

When the big hit game state ends, the main CPU 2201 controls the A3 time reduction game state, and the sub CPU 2301 ends the big hit mode and shifts to the premium chance mode.

(When the result of the second special symbol game is "small hit (z5 to z10)")
When the "small hit (z5 to z10)" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 controls the small hit gaming state. When the V winning is detected in this small hit game state, the main CPU 2201 controls the big hit game state, and the sub CPU 2301 ends the second bliss mode and shifts to the big hit mode.

By the way, when the result of the second special symbol game in the second bliss mode is a small hit, unless this small hit is the result of the special symbol game in the final variation of the time reduction, the internal game state at the time of detecting the V prize is the B time reduction. It is in a game state. Therefore, regardless of which of the small hits of the selected symbol commands "z5" to "z10" is derived, the main CPU 2201 controls to the A3 time saving game state after the end of the big hit game state (see FIG. 110). .. When the big hit game state ends, the sub CPU 2301 ends the big hit mode and shifts to the premium chance mode. If the V prize is not detected in the small hit game state based on any of the selected symbol commands "z5" to "z10", the main CPU 2201 does not control the big hit game state, and the end condition of the B time reduction game state is set. Unless it is established, the B time reduction game state is continued, and the sub CPU 2301 continues the second bliss mode.

Further, in this fourth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the special symbol game in the time saving final fluctuation is a small hit, after determining that the result of this special symbol game is a small hit, the small hit game state is changed. Before the start, the end processing of the time-saving game state that has been controlled so far is performed. Therefore, in the time saving final fluctuation of the B time saving game state (for example, the 100th special symbol game in which the total of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol is 100), the second special symbol When a "small hit (z5 to z10)" is derived as a result of the game, the internal gaming state at the time of detecting the V prize is the normal gaming state. Therefore, when the small hit derived in the time reduction final variation of the B time reduction game state is "small hit (z5)", the main CPU 2201 controls to the A3 time reduction game state after the end of the big hit game state based on the V prize detection. (See FIG. 110). When the big hit game state ends, the sub CPU 2301 ends the big hit mode and shifts to the premium chance mode. On the other hand, when the small hit derived in the time reduction final variation of the A4 time reduction game state is "small hit (any of z6 to z10)", the main CPU 2201 is A2 after the end of the big hit game state based on the V prize detection. It is controlled to a time-saving game state (see FIG. 110). When the big hit game state ends, the sub CPU 2301 ends the big hit mode and shifts to the second chance mode.

However, after determining that the result of the special symbol game is a small hit, before the small hit game state is started, instead of performing the end processing of the time-saving game state that has been controlled so far, the small hit is performed. After the game state is finished, the time-saving game state that has been controlled so far may be terminated. That is, in this case, since the internal gaming state at the time of detecting the V prize is the B time-saving gaming state, the small hit derived in the time-saving final fluctuation of the B time-saving gaming state is any type (z5 to z10) of small hits. Even if there is, the main CPU 2201 controls to the A3 time saving game state after the end of the big hit game state based on the V winning detection (see FIG. 110). In this case, when the big hit game state ends, the sub CPU 2301 ends the big hit mode and shifts to the premium chance mode.

(When the result of the second special symbol game is "time saving hit (z11)")
In this fourth pachinko gaming machine, as described above, if any one of the conditions S, the condition T, the condition U, the condition V, and the condition W is satisfied, the end condition of the B time saving gaming state is satisfied. Here, the condition T, the condition U, and the condition V are conditions related to the number of times of derivation per time reduction of the special symbol. In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, since the "time saving hit" is not derived as a result of the first special symbol game (see FIG. 109), the B time saving game state ends based on the number of times the time saving is derived. The condition to be satisfied is substantially only the condition V. Therefore, the main CPU 2201 has a counting means for counting the number of times that the "time reduction hit (z11)" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game in the B time reduction game state, and the "time reduction" derived in the B time reduction game state. Until the number of "hits (z11)" is the first and the second, even if the "time reduction hit (z11)" is derived, this is ignored and the B time reduction game state is continued. In this case, the sub CPU 2301 also continues the second bliss mode.

Then, when the number of "time reduction hits (z11)" derived as a result of the second special symbol game is three, the main CPU 2201 has derived the third "time reduction hit (z11)". Based on this, the B time saving game state is ended. In this fourth pachinko gaming machine, after determining that the result of the special symbol game is a time saving hit, the end processing of the time saving gaming state that has been controlled so far is performed. Therefore, when the third "time saving hit (z11)" is derived in the B time saving gaming state, the internal gaming state when the "time saving hit (z11)" is derived is the B time saving gaming state. Therefore, when the third "time reduction hit (z11)" is derived in the B time reduction game state, the main CPU 2201 does not control to the C time reduction game state but controls to the normal game state after the end of the B time reduction game state. do. In this case, the sub CPU 2301 ends the second bliss mode and shifts to the normal mode.

In this way, when the time saving hit is derived as a result of the special symbol game, it is originally controlled to the C time saving gaming state, but in this fourth pachinko gaming machine, the time saving hit is derived as a result of the special symbol game. This is one of the conditions for ending the B time saving game state. The derivation of the time reduction is not limited to the end condition of the B time reduction game state, but may be the end condition of the A time reduction game state or the C time reduction game state. In the normal gaming state, the time saving hit that can be a trigger for the transition to the C time saving gaming state can be set, and in the time saving gaming state, it can be set as the end condition of the time saving gaming state, that is, the transition condition to the normal gaming state. , It is not necessary to separately provide a symbol for ending the time-saving game state, and it is possible to simplify the control process. In addition, the range of playability can be expanded, and it is possible to enhance the interest by providing unprecedented playability.

In the above description, the condition V is included in the end condition of the B time saving game state. That is, when the number of "time reduction hits (z11)" derived as a result of the second special symbol game reaches three, the B time reduction game state ends. However, it goes without saying that the number of times of deriving the "time reduction hit (z11)" as the end condition of the B time reduction game state is not limited to three times. Further, the end condition of the B time saving game state may be set to condition I instead of condition V. In this case, if the time reduction hit is derived once as a result of, for example, the second special symbol game in the B time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state ends.

Further, the end condition of the B time saving game state is related to the condition S related to the variable display number of the special symbol, the condition related to the derivation number per time saving (condition T, condition U, or condition V), and the variable display number of the normal symbol. Some of the conditions W may not be included. For example, the condition W is not included in the end condition of the B time saving game state, and the second bliss mode (B time saving game state) is set to the condition S related to the variable display number of special symbols and the condition related to the number of times of derivation per time saving. (Condition T, Condition U, or Condition V) can be used as a game property such as which condition is satisfied first.

(When the result of the 2nd special symbol game is "missing")
When the "loss" is derived as a result of the second special symbol game, the time saving end condition (for example, one of the condition S, the condition T, the condition U, the condition V, and the condition W) of the B time saving gaming state is satisfied. Unless otherwise, the main CPU 2201 continues the B time saving gaming state as an internal gaming state. However, for example, in the time saving final fluctuation of the B time saving game state (for example, the 100th special symbol game in which the total of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol is 100), the second special When the "loss" is derived as a result of the symbol game, the condition S is satisfied, so that the main CPU 2201 ends the B time saving game state and controls it to the normal game state. Further, even if the condition S is not satisfied, for example, the condition W is satisfied when the variable display number of the normal symbol becomes 100 times, so that the main CPU 2201 ends the B time saving gaming state and controls it to the normal gaming state. Even if the sub CPU 2301 internally shifts from the B time reduction game state to the normal game state, the sub CPU 2301 continues the second bliss mode until the second special symbol game for the remaining hold is completed, and the second special for the remaining hold. When the design game ends, the second bliss mode is terminated and the normal mode is entered.

Since the second special symbol game for the remaining hold in the second bliss mode is internally in the normal game state, it is the same as the flow of the game in the second and third rotations of the second chance mode. ..

[4-4-9. Expansion example of the fourth pachinko machine]
The normal mode is internally a normal game state, but as described above, the second special symbol game may be executed even if the normal mode is in progress. For example, when the player makes a right-handed strike contrary to the regular game mode. Further, even if the player is hitting to the left, the fired game ball may rarely flow down the right side region 2107. Further, as a result of the execution of the normal symbol game, the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 87) may be opened, and the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 87) may be won in a timely manner. Therefore, even if the result of the second special symbol is, for example, "time saving hit", it is preferable to prevent the player from enjoying the benefit of the time saving gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, in view of the fact that the second special symbol game can be executed three times in the second chance mode and the premium chance mode, whether the special symbol game for at least three times was the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game. Is stored in the main CPU 2201, and when the past three special symbol games are all the first special symbol games, the above-mentioned predetermined conditions are satisfied so that the player cannot enjoy the profit as a time-saving gaming state. May be good. As a mode in which the player cannot enjoy the benefit of the time saving gaming state, for example, the time saving function may not be activated, or even if the time saving function is activated, the normal electric accessory 2146 is compared with the normal gaming state. (See FIG. 87) may be configured such that the opening time is only slightly longer and the winning of the second starting port 2140 is not substantially facilitated.

In the premium chance mode, when the second special symbol game after the second rotation is executed internally in the A3 time reduction game state, the result of the second special symbol game after the second rotation is "small hit". In that case, the above-mentioned special effect may be performed. However, in this case, since it is not a consecutive villa in the first game, it is not a "1G consecutive fixed production", but a "renso" that notifies that a big hit has been confirmed within a short game period (for example, a period of a premium chance game). It may be a "fixed production".

In addition, it is not essential that the above-mentioned special effect is an effect indicating that the consecutive villas have been confirmed, and may be an effect performed when the expected value of the consecutive villas is high (for example, 80% or the like). Even in such a case, it is possible to give a great expectation to the player when a special production is performed.

In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, an example of the end condition of the time-saving gaming state controlled according to the hit type (selected symbol command) is shown in FIG. 110, but the time-saving gaming state controlled according to the hit type is shown in FIG. The end condition of is not limited to the condition shown in FIG. 110, and for example, any of the time reduction end conditions shown in FIG. 111 may be adopted, or the time reduction end condition not shown in FIG. 111 may be adopted. good. As an example, for example, when the result of the special symbol game in the normal gaming state is a small hit, the end condition of the A2 time saving gaming state controlled according to the selection symbol commands being "z6" to "z10" is set. , Condition A, condition B, or condition C shown in FIG. 111 may be replaced or added to, for example, condition G, condition H, or condition I. Further, the end condition of the A3 time-saving gaming state controlled according to the selection symbol command being "z5" is replaced with or added to the condition J, the condition K, or the condition L shown in FIG. 111, for example, a condition. It may be G, condition H, or condition I.

Further, for example, when the type of the time saving end condition in the A2 time saving game state and the type of the time saving end condition in the A3 time saving game state are the same, the number of times the end condition of the A2 time saving gaming state is satisfied and the A3 time saving gaming state It is preferable to make the number of times that the end condition of is different from that of. For example, when the number of times of derivation per time reduction (b3) of the second special symbol is set as the time reduction end condition for both the A2 time reduction game state and the A3 time reduction game state, the A3 time reduction game state is more than the end condition of the A2 time reduction game state. It is preferable that the end condition of is less likely to be satisfied. Explaining with specific numbers, as the number of times of derivation per time reduction (b3) of the second special symbol, for example, once is the end condition of the A2 time reduction game state, and for example, three times is the end condition of the A3 time reduction game state. Is preferable. By doing so, the premium chance mode can be a more advantageous game mode for the player than the second chance mode.

Further, for example, when the end condition of the B time saving game state includes a condition related to the number of times of derivation per time saving (condition T, condition U, or condition V), the condition related to the number of times of derivation per time saving is the time saving hit of the first special symbol. It is not essential to include the number of derivations (a3) and the total number of times (a3 + b3) of the number of times of derivation per time reduction of the first special symbol (a3) and the number of times of derivation per time reduction of the second special symbol (b3), for example, the first. 2 Only the number of times of derivation per time reduction (b3) of the special symbol may be used.

Further, when there are a plurality of types of time reduction hits such as C1 time reduction hit and C2 time reduction hit, the number of times of derivation of a specific time reduction hit (for example, C2 time reduction hit) among these multiple types of time reduction hits is set to B time reduction. It may be a condition for ending the game state. For example, the number of times of derivation per C2 time reduction (a5) of the first special symbol becomes a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) (for example, condition X), and the number of times of derivation per C2 time reduction of the second special symbol (b5) is a predetermined number of times. (For example, 3 times) (for example, condition Y), the total number of times (a5 + b5) of the number of times of derivation per C2 time reduction of the first special symbol (a5) and the number of times of derivation per C2 time reduction of the second special symbol (b5) May be set to a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) (for example, condition Z) as an end condition of the B time saving game state.

Further, it is not essential that all of the above conditions S, T, U, V, W, X, Y, and Z are included in the end condition of the B time saving gaming state, and these conditions Of these, some conditions may be included.

Further, the above-mentioned condition S, condition T, condition U, condition V, condition W, condition X, condition Y, and condition Z are not limited to being used as the end condition of the B time-saving gaming state, and the A time-saving gaming state is not limited to being used. It goes without saying that it may be used as an end condition of the C time saving game state.

Further, as described above, it is not essential to mount the B time saving game state. In this case, a plurality of types of time reduction hits are provided, and the end condition of the C time reduction game state controlled when one of the plurality of time reduction hits is won is set as the end condition of the B time reduction game state described above. It may be a condition. For example, the above-mentioned time reduction hit (z11) is defined as a C1 time reduction hit, a different type of C2 time reduction hit from the C1 time reduction hit, and when the result of the special symbol game is a C1 time reduction hit, it is controlled to a C1 time reduction game state and special. When the result of the symbol game is C2 time reduction, when the control is made to the C2 time reduction game state, the condition S, the condition T, the condition U, the condition V, the condition W, the condition X, the condition Y, and the condition Z All or part of it may be included in the end condition of the C2 time saving game state. Even when the B time saving game state is installed, all or part of the condition S, the condition T, the condition U, the condition V, the condition W, the condition X, the condition Y, and the condition Z are terminated in the C2 time saving game state. It may be included in the condition.

When all or some of the above conditions S, T, U, V, W, X, Y, and Z are used as the end conditions of the time-saving gaming state. It is not essential to ignore the time-saving hit even if the time-saving hit is won in the time-saving game state, and if the time-saving hit is won in the time-saving game state, the previous time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state are operated in an overlapping manner. You may do so. For example, if the previous time-saving game state is the B time-saving game state, the time-saving number of times in the B time-saving game state is, for example, 200 times, and the time-saving number of times in the C time-saving game state is, for example, 1 time, the time-saving hit in the B time-saving game state. Even if the player wins, there are few cases where the time saving function in the B time saving game state is continued and the time saving function in the C time saving game state is executed. Therefore, when the B time-saving game state is won in the time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state are operated in an overlapping manner, the number of times the time-saving game is won is, for example, 3 times (condition V). If the condition is satisfied), the B time-saving gaming state may be terminated, the C time-saving gaming state may be executed only once, and then the time-saving gaming state may be terminated.

[5. Fifth pachinko game machine]
Hereinafter, the fifth pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention will be described. As an example of the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment will be described. In this specification, the term "fifth pachinko gaming machine" includes all of the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment. Further, in the following description of the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment means the first embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine, and the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment refers to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment. The second embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine is meant, and the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment means the third embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The fifth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine referred to as a one-kind two-kind mixing machine, similar to the third pachinko gaming machine and the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Like the fourth pachinko gaming machine, this fifth pachinko gaming machine is a priority variable machine in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is prioritized over the starting condition of the first special symbol, but it is started in the order of winning. It is not intended to exclude sequentially variable machines that satisfy the conditions and simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machines that can simultaneously change the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Hereinafter, in explaining the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the description of common points with the third pachinko gaming machine will be omitted as much as possible. Therefore, the points not mentioned in the description of the fifth pachinko gaming machine are the same as those of the third pachinko gaming machine.

In the following description of the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the configuration and processing having the same functions as the third pachinko gaming machine will be described using the same reference numerals as those of the third pachinko gaming machine.

[5-1. First Example]
[5-1-1. Game board unit]
In the first embodiment, since the gaming board unit 2010 included in the pachinko gaming machine is the same as the third pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. 87, the description of various members arranged in the gaming area 2105 will be omitted.

[5-1-2. Electrical configuration]
In the first embodiment, various members such as various control circuits and various switches included in the pachinko gaming machine are the same as those of the third pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. 88, and therefore the description of these various members will be omitted.

[5-1-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications different from those of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description related to the setting function will be omitted below.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment described below, probability variation control is not executed as in the third pachinko gaming machine, and the main CPU 2201 variably displays special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a game state (a game state that is not a big hit game state) in which (sometimes referred to as "variable display" in this specification) can be executed, a normal game state in which the time reduction control is not executed, or a next time the big hit game state is completed. It is possible to control the A time saving game state in which the time saving control is executed from the game. The normal game mode in the normal game state is left-handed, and the normal game mode in the A time-saving game state is right-handed.

The pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment is not equipped with the B time saving gaming state in which the time saving control is executed when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, but the pachinko gaming machine equipped with the B time saving gaming state is provided. It is not intended to be excluded. Similarly, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the C time saving game state in which the time saving control is executed when the display mode indicating the time saving hit is derived as a result of the special symbol game is not installed, but the C time saving game state is not installed. It is not intended to exclude pachinko gaming machines equipped with gaming states.

[5-1-3-1. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 123 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment.

When the game ball wins (passes) in the first starting port 2120, the main CPU 2201 executes the first special symbol game using the random value for determining the jackpot of the first special symbol, and obtains the result of the first special symbol game. , "Big hit" or "Loss" is decided. Further, when the game ball wins (passes) in the second starting port 2140, the main CPU 2201 executes a game of the second special symbol using the random value for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol game. The result of is determined as "big hit", "V small hit", "specific small hit" or "missing". The main CPU 2201 derives a display mode corresponding to the result of the determined special symbol game to the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 2163, second special symbol display unit 2164).

Although the result of the first special symbol game does not include "V small hit", "V small hit" may be included. Similarly, the result of the first special symbol game does not include "specific small hit", but this is not essential either. The difference between "V small hit" and "specific small hit" will be described later.

The above-mentioned "V small hit" is referred to as "a hit with an open accessory" in the description of the third pachinko gaming machine, but is referred to as a "V small hit" in the description of the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

Of the "big hit", "V small hit", "specific small hit" and "loss" as a result of the special symbol game, the result with the operation of the conditional device is (the condition device operates only by being derived). ) Only "big hit".

When the result of the special symbol game is "big hit", the condition device is activated, and as described in the third pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 2201 is subjected to the big winning opening opening preparation process (S2018 in FIG. 94) and the big winning. The mouth opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 94) and the jackpot end process (S2020 in FIG. 94) are performed. In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, for example, the gaming state from the jackpot opening preparation process (S2018) to the jackpot end process (S2020) is referred to as a jackpot gaming state. In this jackpot game state, the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not executed.

In the big hit game state, the main CPU 2201 activates the special electric shutter 2134 by the special electric solenoid 2135, and performs a round game in which the big winning opening 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. Assuming that the number of games that can be won in the large prize opening 2131 in one round of round games is, for example, 10, and the number of prize balls paid out by winning one game ball in the large winning opening 2131 is, for example, 1. For example, 100 game balls will be paid out as prize balls per round.

When the result of the special symbol game is "V small hit", as described in the third pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 2201 performs the V winning device opening preparation process (S2016 in FIG. 94) and the V winning device opening control process. (See S2017 in FIG. 94). In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, for example, a small hit game in which a V winning device opening preparation process (S2016 in FIG. 94) and a V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94) are executed. Called a state. Then, the game ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 by being controlled to the small hit game state (that is, the V attacker 2152 is activated and the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened) passes through the V winning opening 2155. When the V winning is detected, the condition device is activated and the main CPU 2201 controls the jackpot game state. In this fifth pachinko gaming machine, as long as the player hits right in the small hit game state based on the result of the special symbol game being "V small hit", there is a 100% probability or a probability close to 100% V. The V shutter 2158 is operated in the mode in which the winning is detected, and the V winning opening 2155 is opened. However, for example, when the game ball is not fired even though it is controlled to the small hit game state, the V prize is not detected even though the result of the special symbol game is "V small hit". In this case, after the end of the small hit game state, the main CPU 2201 does not control the big hit game state, nor does it control the time-saving game state, and shifts to the normal game state.

In the V winning device opening control process, the main CPU 2201 operates the V attacker 2152 to control the opening / closing winning opening 2151 from the closed state to the small hit game state in which the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened for a predetermined period. In this small hit game state, the number of games that can be won in the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is, for example, one, and the number of winning balls paid out by winning one game ball in the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is, for example, three.

When the V winning is detected in the small hit game state, the main CPU 2201 controls the big hit game state in which the round game is executed over a plurality of rounds. In this big hit game state, the V winning device opening control process (that is, the operation of the V attacker 2152) executed in the small hit game state is set as the first round game, and then the round game is executed over a plurality of rounds. It is in a state. In this case, the first round round game is a game in which the V attacker 2152 is operated to shift the V winning device 2150 from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period, and the second and subsequent round games are also the V attacker 2152. Is a game in which the V winning device 2150 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for the second and subsequent round games, the special electric shutter 2134 may be operated to open the large winning opening 2131 for a predetermined period.

Therefore, when comparing the expected value of the number of games paid out to the player as a prize ball in one small hit game state and the expected value of the number of games paid out to the player as a prize ball in one big hit game state, The expected value of the number of games paid out to the player as a prize ball in one big hit game state (for example, 100 pieces per round game x number of rounds) is larger. In addition, the expected value of the number of games to be paid out as a prize ball to the player in one big hit game state performed via the small hit game state, and one big hit game performed without going through the small hit game state. Comparing with the expected value of the number of games paid out to the player as a prize ball in the state, the expected number of games to be paid out to the player as a prize ball in one big hit game state performed without going through the small hit game state. The value is larger.

In this fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the special symbol game is "big hit", the main CPU 2201 operates the special electric shutter 2134 in the big hit game state, and the big winning opening 2131 is predetermined from the closed state. A round game that shifts to the open state over a period is performed over multiple rounds. On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol game is "V small hit" and the V winning is detected, the main CPU 2201 operates the V attacker 2152 in the big hit gaming state, and the V winning device 2150 is closed for a predetermined period. A round game that shifts to the open state is performed over multiple rounds. That is, in this fifth pachinko gaming machine, the big hit gaming state controlled based on the big hit winning and the big hit gaming state controlled based on the small hit winning and V winning detection are operated as a round game. The role to play is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a big hit game state controlled based on a big hit winning without a special electric accessory unit 2130, and a big hit game controlled based on a V small hit winning and a V winning detection. A common accessory (for example, V-attacker 2152) may be activated depending on the state to execute a round game.

When the result of the special symbol game is "specific small hit", the main CPU 2201 is the V winning device opening preparation process (S2016 in FIG. 94) and the same as in the case where the result of the special symbol game is "V small hit". It is controlled to the small hit game state in which the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94) is performed. However, when the result of the special symbol game is "specific small hit", the V shutter 2158 is operated in a mode in which the V winning is not detected or in a mode in which it is difficult to detect the V winning, and the V winning opening 2155 is opened. Therefore, even if the player hits right and the game ball wins at the opening / closing winning opening 2151 in the small hit game state based on the result of the special symbol game being "specific small hit", the game ball wins V. You can't expect to be detected.

It is not essential to open the V-attacker 2152 when it is a "specific small hit", and it is configured to open the special electric shutter 2134 when it is a "specific small hit". If this is the case, the V-attacker 2152 may be configured to open.

In this way, when the result of the special symbol game is "V small hit", it is controlled to be almost a big hit game state, whereas when the result of the special symbol game is "specific small hit", it is almost a big hit. The two are very different in that they are not controlled by the gaming state.

Although the details will be described later, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, unlike the conventional pachinko gaming machine in which the time-saving gaming state ends when the special symbol game is played a predetermined number of times, the number of times of deriving the "specific small hit" is shortened. It is one of the termination conditions. Further, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, it is also a condition for shortening the time that a "big hit" is derived and a "V small hit" is derived as a result of the special symbol game. Therefore, when the V winning is not detected even though the "V small hit" is derived as a result of the special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 satisfies the end condition of the A time saving gaming state in the number of times the specific small hit is derived. Even if it does not exist, the A time saving game state is ended and the game state is controlled to the normal game state.

However, if the V prize is not detected even though the "V small hit" is derived as a result of the special symbol game, the game state may be controlled when the "V small hit" is derived. .. In this case, for example, if the V prize is not detected even though the "V small hit" is derived in the A time reduction game state, the control is performed to the A time reduction game state even after the small hit game state ends.

In addition, the derivation of the "specific small hit" can also be an opportunity to change the fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol. That is, when a "specific small hit" is derived in the time-saving gaming state ("A time-saving gaming state" in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment), the derivation of this "specific small hit" executes a special symbol game. It may be a trigger to change the variation pattern table of the special symbol referred to at the time, or a trigger to end the time-saving gaming state. This point is also different from the "V small hit" which does not trigger the change of the fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol or the end of the time-saving gaming state. Further, although the details will be described later, the variation pattern table of the special symbol includes the variation pattern table referred to in the normal gaming state (see FIG. 127 described later) and the variation pattern tables A to referred to in the A time saving gaming state. D (see FIGS. 128 to 131 described later) is included. In these fluctuation pattern tables, for example, the average time of the fluctuation time of the special symbol differs depending on the fluctuation pattern table. In the following, the change of the fluctuation pattern table may be referred to as switching of the fluctuation pattern table.

When there are multiple types of "specific small hits", it is not essential that all "specific small hits" trigger the change of the variation pattern table of the special symbol or the end of the time-saving gaming state, for example, multiple. It is possible that some of the "specific small hits" of the types of "specific small hits" do not trigger the change of the variation pattern table of the special symbol and / or the end of the time-saving gaming state.

Also, when there are multiple types of "V small hits", some "V small hits" should not be used as the end trigger of the time-saving gaming state, and the remaining "V small hits" should not be used as the end trigger of the time-saving gaming state. You may. In addition, when there are multiple types of "V small hits", some "V small hits" are used as triggers for changing the special symbol variation pattern table, and the remaining "V small hits" are used as the special symbol variation pattern table. It may not be a trigger for change.

As shown in FIG. 123, in the hit determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 2202, as data used for the first special symbol game executed based on the winning of the first starting port 2120, " The relationship between the range (width) of the random value for big hit judgment determined as "big hit" or "miss" and the corresponding winning judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data", "missing judgment value data") is defined. ing. Similarly, the data used in the second special symbol game executed based on the winning of the second starting port 2140 is determined to be "big hit", "V small hit", "specific small hit" or "missing". The range (width) of the random value for big hit judgment and the corresponding winning judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data", "V small hit judgment value data", "specific small hit judgment value data", "loss judgment value" The relationship with "data") is stipulated.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the total random value of the jackpot determination random value is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, both the jackpot determination random value of the first special symbol and the jackpot determination random value of the second special symbol are generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 123, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the first special symbol game is executed by the main CPU 2201, for example, a jackpot is won with a probability of approximately 1/319, and the others are lost. Will be decided. On the other hand, when the second special symbol game is executed by the main CPU 2201, for example, a big hit is won with a probability of about 1/319, a V small hit is won with a probability of about 1/50, and about 8 minutes. There is a 1 chance that you will win a specific small hit, and the others will be lost.

In this way, the jackpot probability is the case where the first special symbol game is executed and the case where the second special symbol game is executed, regardless of whether it is a normal gaming state or a time-saving gaming state. It is the same. On the other hand, the V small hit probability is higher when the second special symbol game is executed than when the first special symbol game is executed. Therefore, the A time-saving game state in which the regular game mode is right-handed is more likely to be controlled by the small hit game state and thus the big hit game state as compared with the normal game state in which the regular game mode is left-handed. It is a favorable gaming state.

[5-1-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 124 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment.

The special symbol determination table is based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins in the starting port (first starting port 2120, second starting port 2140) and the above-mentioned winning judgment value data. This table is referenced when the "selected symbol command" and "symbol specification command" that determine the stop symbol are selected. The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a special symbol determined according to the result of the special symbol game (big hit, V small hit, specific small hit, or loss). The "symbol specification command" is a command for designating a symbol to be displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99.

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 124, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command "z0" with a probability of 50%. Then, select the selected symbol command "z1" with a probability of 15%, select the selected symbol command "z2" with a probability of 5%, select the selected symbol command "z3" with a probability of 15%, and select the selected symbol command. Select "z4" with a probability of 15%, and select "zA1" as the symbol specification command. When the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command "z5" and the symbol designation command "zA2".

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command "z6" with a 100% probability, and selects the symbol designation command "zA3". .. When the V small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command "z7" with a probability of 15%, and the selected symbol command "z8" is 25%. Select with the probability of, select the selected symbol command "z9" with a probability of 15%, select the selected symbol command "z10" with a probability of 25%, and select the selected symbol command "z11" with a probability of 20%. .. Also, select "zA4" as the symbol specification command. When the specific small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command "z12" and the symbol designation command "zA5". When the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command "z13" and the symbol designation command "zA6".

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, as described above, it is determined whether the result of the second special symbol game is "V small hit" or "specific small hit". (See FIG. 123), the determination is made according to the random value for jackpot determination of the extracted second special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the result of the determination made with reference to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 123) is "V small hit", the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 124) is referred to and extracted. Depending on the symbol random value of the second special symbol, it may be determined whether to use "V small hit" or "specific small hit".

Further, although the description is omitted in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 has a special symbol stop mode determination table described in the first pachinko gaming machine (see FIG. 12A). A special symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display unit 2163 or the second special symbol display unit 2164 (see FIG. 88) when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. It is a table that is referred to when making a decision according to a symbol command. In addition, the special symbol display unit (1st special symbol display unit 2163, 2nd special symbol display unit 2164) is a big hit based on the results of the special symbol game (1st special symbol game, 2nd special symbol game). Display mode, V small hit display mode (only the second special symbol display unit 2164 in this embodiment), specific small hit display mode (only the second special symbol display unit 2164 in this embodiment), or loss display mode. Is derived. The player can determine the type of hit by confirming the display mode derived from the first special symbol display unit 2163 or the second special symbol display unit 2164.

[5-1-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 125 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. In the hit type determination table, when the result of the special symbol game is "big hit" or "V small hit" and V prize is detected, the number of rounds, the time saving type mode, and the derivation of the specific small hit are derived. It is referred to when determining the time saving end condition related to. As shown in FIG. 125, the number of rounds, the time saving type mode, and the time saving end condition related to the derivation of the specific small hit are determined corresponding to the selected symbol command, that is, the symbol random value of the special symbol.

The time reduction type mode and the time reduction end condition are set by the main CPU 2201 at the end of the big hit game state, that is, in the special symbol game end setting process (see S2142 in FIG. 103).

The number of rounds shown in FIG. 125 is the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game state. The time-saving type mode indicates the type of the A time-saving gaming state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Since the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state is determined according to the selected symbol command as shown in FIG. 125, even if the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state is the same, the special symbol display unit The stop mode of the symbol derived to (1st special symbol display unit 2163, 2nd special symbol display unit 2164) may be different. Further, although the details will be described later, the variation pattern table of the special symbol referred to in the A time saving game state controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state may be different depending on the time saving type mode. The time saving end condition is set as one of the conditions for ending the A time saving gaming state controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state, and the number of times of deriving the "specific small hit" is set according to the selected symbol command. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the A time saving game state controlled after the end of the big hit game state ends when the specific small hit is derived 10 times. After the A time saving game state ends, it is controlled to the normal game state.

As described above, after the end of the big hit game state, the main CPU 2201 controls to one of the A time-saving game states among the plurality of A time-saving game states in which the time-saving end conditions may differ according to the selected symbol command. In particular, by setting the number of times the "specific small hit" is derived as the end condition of the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state ends unlike the conventional pachinko gaming machine, which ends the time-saving game state when the special symbol game is played a specified number of times. The timing can be different each time.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the "big hit" is derived, the "V small hit" is derived, and the number of times the specific small hit is derived is set as the end condition of the A time saving gaming state. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the above conditions, a condition that cannot be realistically satisfied (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 10,000 times, etc.) may be included in the end condition of the A time saving game state.

Further, in this first embodiment, the time saving performance of the A time saving game state controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state is the same regardless of the result of the special symbol game, that is, the selected symbol command.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, all the big hits and V small hits are controlled to the A time saving gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, some big hits or some of them. The V small hit may be controlled to the normal gaming state without being controlled to the A time saving gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state.

[5-1-3-4. Fluctuation pattern table change condition table]
FIG. 126 is an example of a variation pattern table change condition table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. The variation pattern table change condition table is referred to when setting the change condition of the variation pattern table to be referred to when the jackpot gaming state ends or the variation pattern table is changed. In this specification, for convenience, the variation pattern table of the special symbol may be simply referred to as "variation PTTB". Similarly, in the drawings, the variation pattern table of the special symbol may be referred to as "variation PTTB". However, the variable pattern tables A to D are not referred to as variable PTTBA to PTTBD, but are referred to as variable pattern tables A to D.

As shown in FIG. 126, the change condition of the variable PTTB referred to in the A time saving game state is determined according to the time saving type mode. The "Remarks" column shown in FIG. 126 shows the selected symbol command for convenience for the sake of clarity. As shown in the hit type determination table (see FIG. 125), since the time saving type mode corresponds to the result of the selected symbol command, that is, the special symbol, the change condition of the variable PTTB referred to in the A time saving gaming state is , It will be determined according to the symbol random value of the extracted special symbol (more specifically, the second special symbol).

The time reduction start time variation PTTB shown in FIG. 126 is the variation PTTB that is initially set when controlled to the A time reduction game state. The variable PTTB change count N indicates the number of times that the variable PTTB referred to in the A time-saving gaming state is changed. A Change from any of the variation pattern tables A to D referenced in the time-saving gaming state to the variation PTTB referenced in the normal gaming state is not included in the variation PTTB change count N. The variable PTTB change condition is a condition for transitioning the referenced variable PTTB from the current variable PTTB to another variable PTTB, and is set for each change number of the variable PTTB. The number of conditions shown in the variable PTTB change condition column is the number of times the specific small hit is derived in the section, and is different from the number of times the specific small hit is derived in the A time-saving gaming state. The change table is a variable PTTB referenced after the change.

For example, when the time saving type mode is "3", the variable PTTB set at the start of the A time saving game state is the variable pattern table A, and the variable PTTB is changed twice. In this time saving type mode "3", the variable PTTB is changed twice, but as the first variable PTTB change condition, the specific small hit is derived once in the section in which the initially set variation pattern table A is referred to. Therefore, the variable PTTB referred to after the change is the variable pattern table C. Further, the second variable PTTB change condition is that the specific small hit is derived 98 times in the variable pattern table C, and the variable PTTB referred to after the change is the variable pattern table A. When the time saving type mode is "3", 100 times of derivation of the specific small hit is one of the time saving end conditions (see FIG. 125), so that the number of times of derivation of the specific small hit in the A time saving gaming state is 100 times. When it becomes, the A short-time game state ends. When the A time-saving gaming state ends, the referenced variable PTTB returns from the variable pattern table A to the variable pattern table of the special symbol referred to in the normal gaming state (hereinafter, simply referred to as “normal table”).

[5-1-3-5. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 127 is an example of a normal table. 128 to 131 are examples of variation pattern tables A to D of special symbols that can be referred to in the A time saving game state, respectively. The “Remarks” column shown in FIGS. 127 to 131 shows the content of the effect displayed on the display device 2007 for the sake of convenience. Each table shown in FIGS. 127 to 131 is stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment.

The main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first starting port 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball wins in the second starting port 2140. do.

When the main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 2201 transmits a command corresponding to the effect pattern to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. .. The sub CPU 2301 included in the sub control circuit 1300 controls the game effect based on the received command.

As shown in FIGS. 127 to 131, the variation pattern of the special symbol is the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (winning), and the game ball at the first starting port 2120 or the second starting port 2140. It is determined based on the reach determination random value, the number of holds, and / and the effect selection random value extracted at the time of winning (passing).

The number of holds shown in FIGS. 127 to 131 indicates the number of holds before the shift process of the start information of the special symbol (see S2022 in FIG. 95) is executed. As shown in FIGS. 127 to 131, when the number of holdings is 1, the variable display time (variable time) of the special symbol is almost doubled as compared with the case where the number of holdings is 2 to 4. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the special symbol from being interrupted, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. In FIGS. 127 to 131, when the number of holdings is 1, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is almost doubled as compared with the case where the number of holdings is 2 to 4, but it is not essential that the number of holdings is almost doubled. , The smaller the number of reservations, the longer the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Further, in the case of the number of hold numbers 2 to 4, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is common, but the variation time is not limited to this. May be shortened. Further, for example, when a game is started in a pachinko gaming machine that has not been played for a long time, a variation pattern corresponding to hold 0 is provided as a variation pattern in the first variable display of the special symbol. You may. The fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the hold 0 may be substantially the same as the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the hold 1, or is longer than the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the hold 1. It may be a time shorter than the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the hold 1 (however, it is preferable that the time is longer than the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the hold 2 to 4). The matters described in this paragraph are the same in the second embodiment and the third embodiment described later.

In the normal table, the average time of the fluctuation time of the special symbol is the longest among the plurality of fluctuation PTTBs. In all of the special symbol variation pattern tables A to D referred to in the A time saving game state, the average time of the special symbol variation time is shorter than that of the normal table. Further, the average time of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the A time saving game state is the fluctuation pattern table C <variation pattern table B <variation pattern table D <variation pattern table A. However, any or all of the fluctuation pattern tables A to D may include a fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern included in the normal table. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the fluctuation patterns of the special 1 normal fluctuation 1 and the special 2 normal fluctuation 2 included in the normal table in all of the fluctuation pattern tables A to D (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol game). A variation pattern (eg, FAH) of a special variation having a longer variation time than 06H which can be selected when the result is lost and 07H which can be selected when the result of the second special symbol game is lost is included. Similarly, the variable PTTB included in the variable PTTB (for example, the variable pattern table C) having a relatively short average time of the special symbol and the variable PTTB (for example, the variable pattern table A) having a relatively long average time of the special symbol. It may contain a variation pattern with a longer variation time than.

In the normal table shown in FIG. 128, the variable time differs depending on the number of reservations for both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. However, since the normal game mode is left-handed in the normal game state in which the normal table is selected, it is not essential to make the variable time different according to the number of holdings for the variable display of the second special symbol.

As shown in the fluctuation pattern tables A to D, when the result of the second special symbol game is "specific small hit", for example, a big hit is expected according to the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value. Reach effect that can be achieved (for example, effect corresponding to 82H13H shown in variable pattern table A), reach effect that can expect V small hit (for example, effect corresponding to 82H14H shown in variable pattern table A). ) Or, a variation effect (for example, an effect corresponding to 82H15H shown in the variation pattern table A) that can be grasped as a specific small hit is performed.

Further, when the result of the second special symbol game is "missing" and the reach effect is performed (for example, when the reach determination random number is any of 0 to 25), for example, depending on the effect selection random number value. , A reach effect that can expect a big hit (for example, an effect corresponding to 82H16H shown in the variable pattern table A), or a reach effect that can expect a V small hit (for example, the variable pattern table A). The production corresponding to the indicated 82H17H) is performed.

Further, when the result of the second special symbol game is "missing" and the reach effect is not performed (for example, when the reach determination random number is any of 26 to 255), for example, the number of holds and the effect selection disorder Depending on the numerical value, neither the big hit nor the V small hit can be expected. (For example, the effect corresponding to 82H18H shown in the variation pattern table A, the effect corresponding to 82H19H, the effect corresponding to 82HFAH, and the effect corresponding to 82H1AH. (Direction) is performed.

Regarding the effect executed by the sub CPU 2301, it is difficult to distinguish between the case where the result of the second special symbol is "specific small hit" and the case where the result is "missing" by a common effect or appearance. By executing a similar effect, it may be difficult or impossible for the player to grasp whether the result of the second special symbol is "specific small hit" or "missing". For example, it can be realized by making the effect corresponding to 82H15H shown in the variable pattern table A the same effect as the effect corresponding to 82H18H shown in the variable pattern table A or an effect that is difficult to distinguish in appearance. In this case, it is more preferable that the sub CPU 2301 displays the same display mode as the loss without displaying the display mode indicating the "specific small hit" when the decorative symbol is stopped. When the result of the second special symbol is "missing", the V attacker 2152 does not operate, while when the result of the second special symbol is "specific small hit", the V attacker 2152 operates, but the V attacker 2152 operates. By shortening the operation time or attracting the player's gaze to the display device 2007, the operation of the V-attacker 2152 can be made invisible to the player.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is executed when the result of the second special symbol game is "specific small hit" in any of the fluctuation pattern tables A to D that can be referred to in the A time saving gaming state. A variation pattern of possible specific variation (eg, F1H) is included. The variation pattern of this specific variation is the variation PTTB referred to when the result of the second special symbol game (that is, the result of the special symbol game is derived) in which the variation PTTB of the referenced special symbol is changed in the A time saving game state. Is a fluctuation pattern selected in the second special symbol game) in which is changed, and the fluctuation time is set to a fixed time of, for example, 2500 (ms). Then, when the special symbol game is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the specific fluctuation, the sub CPU 2301 performs a notification effect to notify the player that the reference fluctuation PTTB may be changed. By doing so, the capacity of the image data stored in the image data ROM included in the display control circuit 2304 and the capacity of the audio data stored in the audio data ROM included in the audio control circuit 2305 are increased unnecessarily. There is no need. Therefore, it is possible to perform a notification effect for notifying the player of the change of the referenced variable PTTB without unnecessarily increasing the control load. The above-mentioned notification effect may be a notification effect performed on the display device 2007, or may be a notification effect based on the light emitting mode of the LED group 2046 (see FIG. 88).

The fluctuation pattern of the specific variation (for example, F1H) is selected only for the special symbol game in which the variation PTTB of the referenced special symbol is changed, and in other normal special symbol games, FIGS. 127 to 127 to It is not selected as shown in FIG. 131. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even in a normal special symbol game (for example, a special symbol game in which a loss is derived) other than the special symbol game in which the fluctuation PTTB of the referenced special symbol is changed, for example, the effect selection By making the selection according to the random value for the game, a so-called ghost notification effect may be performed.

Next, an example of the above-mentioned notification effect will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a diagram showing an example of a notification effect executed by the sub CPU 2301 in the display area of the display device 2007 (see FIG. 87).

FIG. 132 suggests whether the variation PTTB of the referenced special symbol is continued or modified depending on the results of the horse and bird sprints. For example, the player himself selects the recommended character (horse or bird in FIG. 132) by operating the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1). In FIG. 132, it is assumed that the bird is selected as the pushing character. That is, if the horse and the bird compete and the bird, which is the character of the push, wins, the result is favorable to the player (that is, the variation PTTB of the referenced special symbol continues).

Further, as shown in FIG. 132, for example, three rows of decorative symbols are displayed in the lower left of the display area of the display device 2007 (see FIG. 87). The three rows of decorative symbols are mainly controlled by the sub CPU 2310 in synchronization with the special symbols that are variably displayed (for example, the first special symbol in the normal gaming state and the second special symbol in the time-saving gaming state). Variable display is performed.

FIG. 132 (a) shows a mode in which a horse and a bird are standing at a starting point and preparing to enter a competition. FIG. 132 (b) shows that the competition between horses and birds has started, and the offensive and defensive movements are being carried out. In FIGS. 132 (a) and 132 (b), all of the three rows of decorative patterns are indicated by downward arrows. In addition, in FIG. 132, the downward arrow indicates that the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

FIG. 132 (c) shows that the bird has defeated the horse. In addition, the decorative symbol is a display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol game is lost as a result of the three rows of decorative symbols that have been variablely displayed stopped in order (at this point, a temporary stop before the final display). (For example, the left symbol is "2", the right symbol is "0", and the middle symbol is "1").

After FIG. 132 (c) is displayed, FIG. 132 (d) is displayed. As described above, since the recommended character is a bird here, as shown in FIG. 132 (d), a definite effect indicating that the variable PTTB of the referenced special symbol continues is performed. Further, as the decorative symbol, a display mode (for example, the left symbol is "2", the right symbol is "0", and the middle symbol is "1") indicating that the result of the special symbol game is lost is confirmed.

On the other hand, FIG. 132 (e) shows that the bird, which is the recommended character, was defeated. When the defeat of the bird, which is the recommended character, is confirmed, the result is not favorable to the player, and a change (transition) of the variable PTTB of the referenced special symbol is suggested. However, at the stage of FIG. 132 (e), the defeat of the bird, which is the recommended character, has not yet been confirmed, and the bird may revive and win. In addition, the decorative symbol indicates that the result of the special symbol game is a specific small hit as a result of the three rows of decorative symbols that have been variablely displayed stopped in order (at this point, a temporary stop before the final display). The display mode (for example, the left symbol is "2", the right symbol is "transition", and the middle symbol is "2") is displayed.

After FIG. 132 (e) is displayed, for example, when FIG. 132 (f) is displayed, the defeat of the bird is confirmed. In addition, the decorative symbol has a display mode (for example, the left symbol is "2", the right symbol is "transition", and the middle symbol is "2") indicating that the result of the special symbol game is a specific small hit. To.

On the other hand, after the display of FIG. 132 (e), when the defeated bird awakens, for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (g), the bird wins in reverse. Although not shown in FIG. 132 (g), for example, when a defeated bird kicks a winning horse and an effect image appealing that he / she is the winner is displayed, the bird wins in reverse. It's easy to understand. In addition, the decorative design starts to change and display again from the temporarily stopped state. Then, when the bird wins in reverse, the process proceeds from FIG. 132 (g) to FIG. 132 (d), and a definite effect indicating that the variable PTTB of the referenced special symbol continues is performed. Further, as the decorative symbol, a display mode (for example, the left symbol is "2", the right symbol is "0", and the middle symbol is "1") indicating that the result of the special symbol game is lost is confirmed.

In this way, regardless of whether the variation PTTB of the referenced special symbol is continued or changed, the effects (character effect, decorative pattern) common to FIGS. 132 (a) and 132 (b) are used. Production by variable display of.) Is performed. When this common effect is performed, the player can be made to pay close attention to the continuation of the variable PTTB of the referenced special symbol, and the game interest can be enhanced.

Further, from FIG. 132 (b), there is a branch of whether to proceed to FIG. 132 (c) or FIG. 132 (e), and this branch is changed whether the variation PTTB of the referenced special symbol is continued or changed. It will be the first barrier. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the continuation of the variable PTTB of the referenced special symbol, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

When the first barrier is breached and the process proceeds to FIG. 132 (c), a display effect is performed indicating that the fluctuation PTTB of the referenced special symbol is continued (see FIG. 132 (d)), and the decorative symbol is also displayed. It is confirmed and displayed in a display mode indicating a loss. On the other hand, when proceeding to FIG. 132 (e), there is a branch from FIG. 132 (e) to proceed to the 132nd (f) or to FIG. 132 (g), and this branch is a special symbol to be referred to. Fluctuation of PTTB is the second barrier to continuation or change. Therefore, even if the effect of defeating the recommended character (see FIG. 132 (e)) is performed, the player is not immediately discouraged, but expects the continuation of the fluctuation PTTB of the referenced special symbol. You can continue to give it, and you can enhance your interest.

Proceeding from FIG. 132 (e) to FIG. 132 (f), a display effect indicating that the variable PTTB of the referenced special symbol is transferred is performed, which is a disappointing result for the player. The decorative design is also confirmed and displayed in a display mode indicating a specific small hit. On the other hand, when the process proceeds from FIG. 132 (e) to FIG. 132 (g), a display effect indicating that the fluctuation PTTB of the referenced special symbol is continued (see FIG. 132 (d)) is performed, and the specific small size is specified. The variable display of the decorative pattern, which was temporarily stopped in the display mode indicating a hit, is also resumed.

Note that FIG. 132 is configured so that the player can select the recommended character, but this is not essential, and if a predetermined specific character wins, the fluctuation PTTB of the referenced special symbol continues. However, when a predetermined specific character is defeated, the variable PTTB of the referenced special symbol may be changed.

Further, in FIG. 132, whether or not the referenced variable PTTB is changed is suggested by both the character effect (in FIG. 132, the result of a battle between characters (for example, sprinting)) and the variable effect of the decorative symbol. However, this is not mandatory. For example, whether or not the referenced variable PTTB is changed may not be suggested by the character effect, but may be suggested by the variable display of the decorative pattern. Even in such a case, until the last decorative symbol among the three decorative symbols is stopped (for example, until the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped as shown in FIGS. 132 (c) or (e)). ) Can produce a common effect depending on whether the variable PTTB of the referenced special symbol is continued or changed, and can enhance the interest.

Further, in FIG. 132, when the result of the special symbol game is lost, a definite effect (see FIG. 132 (d)) indicating that the fluctuation PTTB of the referenced special symbol continues is performed, but this is not essential. At least, when the variation PTTB of the referenced special symbol is changed, the player can be made aware that the variation PTTB of the referenced special symbol is changed (for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (f)). It is good if the production) is performed.

[5-1-4. Main control process]
Next, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the various processes executed by the main CPU 2201 are the special symbol variation pattern determination process performed in S2026 of the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 95), and the end of the special symbol game. Although the time saving management process performed in S2071 of the process (see FIG. 98) is different from that of the third pachinko gaming machine, the other processes are the same. Therefore, in the following, the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol and the time saving management process will be described, and the description of other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will be omitted.

[5-1-4-1. Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process]
FIG. 133 is an example of a special symbol variable display start process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment instead of the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 95) executed in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows. In the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S2026A) shown in FIG. 133, a specific variation pattern determination process described later is executed in addition to the existing process executed in the special symbol variation pattern determination process shown in FIG. 95. To.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of the specific variation pattern determination process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. This specific variation pattern determination process is a process called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S2026A), and is an existing process executed in the special symbol variation pattern determination process shown in FIG. 95. If the predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, if S2201, S2202, and S2204 described later are all YES determinations), the pattern of the special symbol is changed to the fluctuation pattern of the above-mentioned specific variation (for example,). This is a process of redetermining to F1H).

As shown in FIG. 134, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not a specific small hit has been won in the specific fluctuation pattern determination process (S2201). When it is determined that the specific small hit has been won (when the determination in S2201 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2202. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific small hit has not been won (NO determination in S2201), the main CPU 2201 ends the specific variation pattern determination process.

In S2202, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the variable PTTB change count N is greater than 0. When it is determined that the variable PTTB change count N is larger than 0 (YES in S2202), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2203. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable PTTB change count N is not greater than 0 (NO determination in S2202), that is, when the variable PTTB change count N is 0, the main CPU 2201 ends the specific variation pattern determination process. ..

In S2203, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the number of specific small hit sections. That is, the process of S2203 is a process of counting the number of specific small hit sections. The number of specific small hit sections is the number of times a specific small hit is won in the section. For example, in the A time saving game state, when the fluctuation PTTB set at the start of the A time saving game state is the fluctuation pattern table A, the number of times the specific small hit is won while the fluctuation pattern table A is referred to is the specific small. It corresponds to the number of hit sections. Further, when the referenced variable PTTB is changed to, for example, the variable pattern table C in the A time saving game state, the number of times the specific small hit is won while the changed variable pattern table C is referenced is also the specific small hit. Corresponds to the number of sections. After executing the process of S2203, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2204.

In S2204, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of conditions and the number of specific small hit sections are the same. When it is determined that the number of conditions and the number of specific small hit sections are the same (YES in S2204), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2205. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of conditions and the number of specific small hit sections are not the same (when S2204 is NO determination), that is, when the number of specific small hit sections is smaller than the number of conditions, the main CPU 2201 is specified. The fluctuation pattern determination process is terminated.

In S2205, the main CPU 2201 selects and determines the variation pattern of the special symbol as the variation pattern of the specific variation (for example, F1H). As described above, the fluctuation pattern of the specific fluctuation (for example, F1H) is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time executed when the result of the second special symbol game is a specific small hit is a fixed time (for example, 5000 (ms)). Is. In this way, when the predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, when S2201, S2202, and S2204 described later are all YES determinations), the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected as the variation pattern of the specific variation (for example, F1H). By making it determined, even if any of the variable PTTBs of the plurality of variable pattern tables A to D is referred to, the variable PTTB is changed as a common effect by the sub CPU 2301. It is possible to execute an effect of notifying. After executing the process of S2205, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2206. However, it is not essential that the effect of notifying that the variable PTTB is changed is an effect common to a plurality of variable pattern tables A to D.

In S2206, the main CPU 2201 turns on the variable PTTB change flag. When the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S2206, the specific variation pattern determination process ends.

[5-1-4-2. Time saving management process]
FIG. 135 is an example of the time saving management process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment instead of the time saving management process performed in S2071 of the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 98) in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows.

As shown in FIG. 135, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is off in the time saving management process (S2211). It is determined that the time reduction flag is off when the jackpot gaming state ends and in the normal gaming state. When it is determined that the time saving flag is off (when the determination in S2211 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2212. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag is not off (when the determination in S2211 is NO), that is, when the time saving flag is on, the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2216.

In S2212, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the time saving type mode is larger than "0". Since the time saving type mode is set when the jackpot gaming state ends, S2212 is determined to be YES when the jackpot gaming state ends, and S2212 is determined to be NO when the jackpot gaming state ends. When it is determined that the time saving type mode is larger than "0" (YES in S2212), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2213. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving type mode is not larger than "0" (NO determination in S2212), that is, when the time saving type mode is "0", the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving management process.

In S2213, the main CPU 2201 turns on the time saving flag. After executing the process of S2213, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2215.

In S2215, the main CPU 2201 performs a variable PTTB change condition setting process. The details of the variable PTTB change condition setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 136. When the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S2215, the time saving management process ends.

In S2216, the main CPU 2201 performs a time saving continuation determination process. This time reduction continuation determination process is a process performed in the A time reduction game state. The details of the time reduction continuation determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 137. After executing the process of S2216, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2217.

In S2217, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the time saving end flag is on. The time reduction end flag is a flag that can be set in the time reduction continuation determination process (see FIG. 137) described later. When the time saving end flag is on (when the determination in S2217 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2218. On the other hand, when the time saving end flag is not on (when the determination in S2217 is NO), that is, when the time saving end flag is off, the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2220.

In S2218, the main CPU 2201 turns off the time saving flag. After executing the process of S2218, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2219.

In S2219, the main CPU 2201 initializes the selection table. This process is a process of returning the variable PTTB of the referenced special symbol to the normal table. When the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S2219, the specific variation pattern determination process ends.

In S2220, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the specific small hit winning flag is on. The specific small hit winning flag is a flag that can be set in the time saving continuation determination process (see FIG. 137) described later. When the specific small hit winning flag is on (when the determination in S2220 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2221. On the other hand, when the specific small hit winning flag is not on (when the determination in S2220 is NO), that is, when the specific small hit winning flag is off, the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving management process.

In S2221, the main CPU 2201 performs the variable PTTB change condition management process. The details of the variable PTTB change condition management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 138. When the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S2221, the time saving management process ends.

[5-1-4-3. Variable PTTB change condition setting process]
FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable PTTB change condition setting process. As described above, the variable PTTB change condition setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the time saving management process (see FIG. 135), and various settings are made with reference to the variable PTTB change condition table (see FIG. 126). Is.

As shown in FIG. 136, in the variable PTTB change condition setting process, the main CPU 2201 first sets the variable PTTB at the start of the variable PTTB in S2231 according to the time reduction type mode. After executing the process of S2231, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2232.

In S2322, the main CPU 2201 sets the variable PTTB change number N according to the time saving type mode. After executing the process of S2232, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2233.

In S2233, the main CPU 2201 sets a variable PTTB change condition according to the time saving type mode. As described with reference to the variable PTTB change condition table (see FIG. 126), the variable PTTB change condition is a condition for transitioning the referenced variable PTTB from the current variable PTTB to another variable PTTB. In this S2233, the initial value of the variable PTTB change count N, that is, the condition corresponding to the variable PTTB change count N set in S2232 is set. For example, in the time saving type mode "3", the variable PTTB change condition corresponding to N = 2 is set. When the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S2233, the variable PTTB change condition setting process ends.

[5-1-4-4. Time saving continuation judgment processing]
FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the time reduction continuation determination process. As described above, the time saving continuation determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the time saving management process (see FIG. 135). This time saving continuation determination process is a process of determining whether or not to continue the A time saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 137, in the time saving continuation determination process, the main CPU 2201 first determines in S2245 whether or not a specific small hit has been derived. When it is determined that the specific small hit has been derived (YES in S2241), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2242. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific small hit has not been derived (NO determination in S2241), that is, when the large hit, V small hit or loss is derived, the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving continuation determination process.

In S2242, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the total number of specific small hits. That is, the process of S2242 is a process of counting the total number of specific small hits. The total number of specific small hits is different from the number of specific small hit sections, and corresponds to the number of specific small hits derived from the time when the A time reduction game state is controlled until the end of the A time reduction game state. After executing the process of S2242, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2243.

In S2243, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the time saving end condition set in the special symbol game end setting process (see S2142 in FIG. 103) and the total number of specific small hits are the same. When it is determined that the set time saving end condition and the total number of specified small hits are the same (when the determination in S2243 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2244. On the other hand, when it is determined that the set time reduction end condition and the total number of specific small hits are not the same (when S2243 is NO determination), that is, when the total number of specific small hits does not satisfy the time reduction end condition, the main CPU 2201 Moves the process to S2245.

In S2244, the main CPU 2201 turns on the time saving end flag. After executing the process of S2244, the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving continuation determination process.

In S2245, the main CPU 2201 turns on the specific small hit winning flag. After executing the process of S2245, the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving continuation determination process.

[5-1-4-5. Variable PTTB change condition management process]
FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable PTTB change condition management process. As described above, the variable PTTB change condition management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the time saving management process (see FIG. 135). This variable PTTB change condition management process is a process of changing the variable PTTB of the special symbol to be referred to when the variable PTTB change condition is satisfied in the A time saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 138, in the variable PTTB change condition management process, the main CPU 2201 first determines in S2251 whether or not the variable PTTB change flag is on. When it is determined that the variable PTTB change flag is ON (YES in S2251), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2252. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable PTTB change flag is not on (when S2251 is NO determination), that is, when the variable PTTB change flag is off, the main CPU 2201 ends the variable PTTB change condition management process.

In S2252, the main CPU 2201 modifies the referenced variable PTTB. The change of the variable PTTB is performed based on the set variable PTTB change condition. After executing the process of S2252, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2253.

In S2253, the main CPU 2201 resets the number of specific small hit sections. This is to count the number of specific small hit sections again after the referenced variable PTTB is changed. After executing the process of S2253, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2254.

In S2254, the main CPU 2201 subtracts 1 from the variable PTTB change count N. After executing the process of S2254, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2255.

In S2255, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the variable PTTB change count N is greater than 0. When it is determined that the variable PTTB change count N is larger than 0 (YES in S2255), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2256. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable PTTB change count N is not greater than 0 (NO determination in S2255), that is, when the variable PTTB change count N is 0, the main CPU 2201 ends the variable PTTB change condition management process. do.

In S2256, the main CPU 2201 sets a variable PTTB change condition. As the variable PTTB change condition set here, a condition corresponding to the variable PTTB change count N after subtracting 1 in S2254 is set. When the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S2233, the variable PTTB change condition setting process ends.

[5-1-5. Transition of referenced variable PTTB]
Next, the transition of the variable PTTB referred to in the A time saving gaming state will be described. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example of the transition of the variable PTTB referred to in the A time saving game state for each time saving type mode. In FIG. 139, the fluctuation pattern tables A to D are simply referred to as tables A to D, respectively, for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the time saving type mode is “1”, the variable PTTB set at the start of the A time saving gaming state is, for example, the variation pattern table A. In the time saving type mode "1", the referenced variable PTTB does not transition, and when the specific small hit is derived once, the time saving game state A ends. When the A time saving game state ends, the main CPU 2201 returns the referenced variable PTTB from the variable pattern table A to the normal table. That is, in the A time saving game state, the game progresses in the fluctuation pattern table A in which the game progress speed is relatively slow among the fluctuation pattern tables A to D, and when the specific small hit is derived, for example, once, the A time saving game The state ends and returns to the normal gaming state, and the referenced variable PTTB also becomes a normal table.

When the time saving type mode is "2", the variation PTTB set at the start of the time saving game state A is, for example, the variation pattern table B. When the specific small hit is derived eight times in the section in which the variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table B, the main CPU 2201 transfers the referenced variation PTTB from the variation pattern table B to, for example, the variation pattern table A. change. Then, when the time saving end condition related to the number of times of derivation of the specific small hit is satisfied (that is, when the specific small hit is derived 10 times in the A time saving game state), the main CPU 2201 ends the A time saving gaming state and is referred to. The variable PTTB is returned from the variable pattern table A to the normal table. That is, at the start of the A time-saving game state, the game progresses in the fluctuation pattern table B in which the progress speed of the game is relatively medium among the fluctuation pattern tables A to D, and the section in which the fluctuation pattern table B is referred to. When the specific small hit is derived, for example, eight times, the game progresses in the variable PTTB (for example, the variable pattern table A) in which the game progress speed is relatively slow among the variable pattern tables A to D. After that, when the time saving end condition related to the number of times of derivation of the specific small hit is satisfied, the time saving gaming state A ends and returns to the normal gaming state, and the referenced variable PTTB also becomes a normal table.

When the time saving type mode is "3", the variable PTTB set at the start of the A time saving game state is, for example, the variable pattern table A. When the specific small hit is derived once in the section in which the fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table A, the main CPU 2201 transfers the referenced fluctuation PTTB from the fluctuation pattern table A to, for example, the fluctuation pattern table C. change. When the specific small hit is derived 98 times in the section in which the variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table C, the main CPU 2201 transfers the referenced variation PTTB from the variation pattern table C to, for example, the variation pattern table A. change. Then, when the time saving end condition related to the number of times of derivation of the specific small hit is satisfied (that is, when the specific small hit is derived 100 times in the A time saving game state), the main CPU 2201 ends the A time saving gaming state and is referred to. The variable PTTB is returned from the variable pattern table A to the normal table. That is, at the start of the A time-saving game state, the game progresses in the fluctuation pattern table A in which the progress speed of the game is relatively slow among the fluctuation pattern tables A to D, and the specific small in the section in which the fluctuation pattern table A is referred to. When the hit is derived, for example, once, the game progresses in the variable PTTB (for example, the variable pattern table C) in which the game progress speed is relatively fast among the variable pattern tables A to D. Then, when the specific small hit is derived, for example, 98 times in the section where the fluctuation pattern table C is referred to, the fluctuation PTTB (for example, the fluctuation pattern table) in which the game progress speed is relatively slow among the fluctuation pattern tables A to D is obtained. The game will proceed in A). After that, when the end condition of the A time saving game state is satisfied, the A time saving game state ends and returns to the normal gaming state, and the referenced variable PTTB also becomes a normal table. Since it is not realistic to derive a specific small hit 100 times without being controlled by the big hit gaming state in the A time saving game state, the time saving type mode "3" is substantially controlled to the big hit gaming state. Is assured.

When the time saving type mode is "4", the variable PTTB set at the start of the A time saving game state is, for example, the variable pattern table A. When the specific small hit is derived seven times in the section in which the variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table A, the main CPU 2201 transfers the referenced variation PTTB from the variation pattern table A to, for example, the variation pattern table C. change. When the specific small hit is derived twice in the section in which the variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table C, the main CPU 2201 transfers the referenced variation PTTB from the variation pattern table C to, for example, the variation pattern table A. change. Then, when the time saving end condition related to the number of times of derivation of the specific small hit is satisfied (that is, when the specific small hit is derived 10 times in the A time saving game state), the main CPU 2201 ends the A time saving gaming state and is referred to. The variable PTTB is returned from the variable pattern table A to the normal table. That is, at the start of the A time-saving game state, the game progresses in the fluctuation pattern table A in which the progress speed of the game is relatively slow among the fluctuation pattern tables A to D, and the specific small in the section in which the fluctuation pattern table A is referred to. When the hit is derived, for example, seven times, the game progresses in the variable PTTB (for example, the variable pattern table C) in which the game progresses at a relatively high speed among the variable pattern tables A to D. Then, when the specific small hit is derived, for example, twice in the section where the fluctuation pattern table C is referred to, the fluctuation PTTB (for example, the fluctuation pattern table) in which the game progress speed is relatively slow among the fluctuation pattern tables A to D is obtained. The game will proceed in A). After that, when the end condition of the A time saving game state is satisfied, the A time saving game state ends and returns to the normal gaming state, and the referenced variable PTTB also becomes a normal table.

When the time saving type mode is "5", the variation PTTB set at the start of the time saving game state A is, for example, the variation pattern table D. When the specific small hit is derived once in the section in which the variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table D, the main CPU 2201 transfers the referenced variation PTTB from the variation pattern table D to, for example, the variation pattern table C. change. When the specific small hit is derived eight times in the section in which the variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table C, the main CPU 2201 transfers the referenced variation PTTB from the variation pattern table C to, for example, the variation pattern table A. change. Then, when the time saving end condition related to the number of times of derivation of the specific small hit is satisfied (that is, when the specific small hit is derived 10 times in the A time saving game state), the main CPU 2201 ends the A time saving gaming state and is referred to. The variable PTTB is returned from the variable pattern table A to the normal table. That is, at the start of the A time-saving game state, the game progresses in the variable PTTB (for example, the variable pattern table D) in which the progress speed of the game is relatively in the middle of the variable pattern tables A to D, and this variable pattern If the specific small hit is derived, for example, once in the section in which the table D is referred to, the game progresses in the variable PTTB (for example, the variable pattern table C) in which the progress speed of the game is relatively fast. Then, when the specific small hit is derived, for example, eight times in the section where the fluctuation pattern table C is referred to, the fluctuation PTTB (for example, the fluctuation pattern table) in which the game progress speed is relatively slow among the fluctuation pattern tables A to D is obtained. The game will proceed in A). After that, when the end condition of the A time saving game state is satisfied, the A time saving game state ends and returns to the normal gaming state, and the referenced variable PTTB also becomes a normal table.

When the time saving type mode is "6", the variable PTTB set at the start of the A time saving game state is, for example, the variable pattern table C. When the specific small hit is derived 99 times in the section in which the variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table C, the main CPU 2201 transfers the referenced variation PTTB from the variation pattern table C to, for example, the variation pattern table A. change. Then, when the time saving end condition related to the number of times of derivation of the specific small hit is satisfied (that is, when the specific small hit is derived 100 times in the A time saving game state), the main CPU 2201 ends the A time saving gaming state and is referred to. The variable PTTB is returned from the variable pattern table A to the normal table. That is, at the start of the A time-saving game state, the game progresses in the variable PTTB (for example, the variable pattern table C) in which the game progress speed is relatively fast among the variable pattern tables A to D, and this variable pattern table C is referred to. When a specific small hit is derived, for example, 99 times in the section to be played, the game progresses in the variable PTTB (for example, the variable pattern table A) in which the game progress speed is relatively slow among the variable pattern tables A to D. Become. After that, when the end condition of the A time saving game state is satisfied, the A time saving game state ends and returns to the normal gaming state, and the referenced variable PTTB also becomes a normal table. Since it is not realistic to derive a specific small hit 100 times without being controlled by the big hit gaming state in the A time saving game state, the time saving type mode "3" is substantially controlled to the big hit gaming state. Is assured.

[5-1-6. Action effect of the fifth pachinko machine, expansion example, etc.]
According to the above-mentioned fifth pachinko gaming machine, the fluctuation pattern table is switched by the number of times of derivation of a specific small hit as a trigger, so that the player can pay attention to the switching of the fluctuation pattern table and play the game. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Moreover, since the variable PTTB change condition differs depending on the type of the time-saving gaming state, the player will play the game while predicting which time-saving gaming state the current time-saving gaming state is, which enhances the interest. Is possible. In particular, since the time saving performance is the same regardless of the type of the time saving gaming state, it is difficult or difficult for the player to determine which time saving gaming state is in the appearance, which is even more interesting. Can be increased. The same applies to the second embodiment and the third embodiment described later.

It is not essential that the time saving performance is the same regardless of the type of the time saving gaming state, and the time saving performance may be different depending on the type of the time saving gaming state as long as it cannot be grasped from the appearance (for example). The ratio of the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 87) is different). Further, in order to make it difficult or impossible to grasp which time-saving game state is from the appearance, it is difficult or impossible to grasp the type of the time-saving game state in the effect executed by the sub CPU 2301. In addition, it is preferable to have the same effect or almost the same effect. The same applies to the second embodiment and the third embodiment described later.

Further, by allowing the variation pattern table A to be selected when the end timing of the time-saving game state is approaching, the progress of the game can be slowed down, and the staying time of the time-saving game state can be lengthened as much as possible. It will be possible to enhance the interest. The same applies to the second embodiment and the third embodiment described later.

Further, in the time-saving game state in which the number of times of derivation of the specific small hit that can be the trigger for ending the time-saving game state is relatively large (for example, the A time-saving game state corresponding to the time-saving type mode "3" or "6"), the fluctuation pattern Since the fluctuation pattern table C, which has a relatively short average fluctuation time, is selected from the tables A to D, the progress of the game can be accelerated, and by extension, the jackpot game state may be controlled at an early stage. Will be higher, and it will be possible to enhance the interest. The same applies to the second embodiment and the third embodiment described later.

In addition, by allowing the number of times of derivation of a specific small hit that can trigger the end of the time-saving game state to differ depending on the type of the time-saving game state, the game is performed for the derivation of the specific small hit related to the end of the time-saving game state. It is possible to make people watch and enhance their interest. In particular, the derivation of a specific small hit involves not only the end of the time-saving game state but also the switching of the fluctuation pattern, so that it is possible to further enhance the interest. The same applies to the second embodiment and the third embodiment described later.

In addition, by switching the fluctuation pattern according to the number of times the specific small hit is derived, it is possible to have various variations in the switching of the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern is switched triggered by an unpredictable result such as the derivation of the specific small hit. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game. The same applies to the second embodiment and the third embodiment described later.

In addition, at least one of the A time-saving game states corresponding to the time-saving type mode "3" and the A time-saving game state corresponding to the time-saving type mode "6", in which the next big hit game state is substantially guaranteed, is the A time-saving game. In the state, the game always progresses in the variable PTTB (for example, the variable pattern table C) in which the game progress speed is relatively fast among the variable pattern tables A to D, regardless of the number of times the specific small hit is derived. May be good. By doing so, the progress of the game is faster than that of the A time-saving game state corresponding to the time-saving type mode "1" and the A time-saving game state corresponding to the time-saving type mode "2", which is special for the player. It is possible to give a feeling, and by extension, it becomes possible for the player to understand that the A time saving game state corresponding to the time saving type mode "3" in which the next big hit game state is substantially guaranteed is controlled. , Can enhance the interest.

In addition, at least one of the A time-saving game states corresponding to the time-saving type mode "3" and the A time-saving game state corresponding to the time-saving type mode "6", in which the next big hit game state is substantially guaranteed, is the A time-saving game. In the state, the game may always proceed in the variable PTTB (for example, the variable pattern table C) in which the game progress speed is relatively fast among the variable pattern tables A to D. In this case, the variable PTTB set at the start of the A time-saving game state is, for example, the variation pattern table C, and the time-saving end condition (for example, the specific small hit) related to the number of derivations of the specific small hit that is practically unlikely to be established. Even if the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is selected with reference to the fluctuation pattern table C until the jackpot game state is controlled by the establishment of 99 times derivation) or the derivation of the jackpot or V small hit. good.

Further, during the execution of the special symbol game in which the variable PTTB change condition is satisfied when the result of the special symbol game is derived, the sub CPU 2301 notifies that the referenced variable PTTB is changed. Execute the notification effect. For example, when the time saving type mode is "5", the special symbol game when the first specific small hit is derived in the section where the fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table D, and the fluctuation. In the special symbol game when the eighth specific small hit is derived in the section where the fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the pattern table C, the above notification effect is executed. Similarly, in the second embodiment and the third embodiment described later, it is preferable to execute the variable PTTB change notification effect.

It is not essential to perform the above notification effect in all the special symbol games in which the variable pattern table PT change condition is satisfied. For example, when the final variable pattern table PT change condition is satisfied, a specific timing is used. You may do it only at. For example, when the variation pattern table A is changed to the variation pattern table C, or when the variation pattern table C is changed to the variation pattern table A in the A time saving game state corresponding to the time reduction type mode "3". It is not essential to perform the notification effect on both, for example, when the variation pattern table A is changed to the variation pattern table C, the notification effect is not performed and the variation pattern table C is changed to the variation pattern table A. May be provided with a notification effect. The same applies to the second embodiment and the third embodiment described later.

In the above notification effect, a specific variation pattern (for example, F1H) is selected by the main CPU 2201 in the second special symbol game in which the variation PTTB of the referenced special symbol is changed, and the effect corresponds to this specific variation pattern. It is designed to be executed, but it is not essential to be executed as an effect corresponding to a specific fluctuation pattern. For example, even if the main CPU 2201 is a second special symbol game in which the variation PTTB of the referenced special symbol is changed without providing a specific variation pattern, the main CPU 2201 responds to the result of the hit determination process or the like as in the conventional case. A variation pattern may be selected, and the sub CPU 2301 may execute a notification effect common to the variation pattern tables A to D, for example, as an additional effect, in addition to the effect corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Even in such a case, since the common notification effect is executed regardless of the reference variation pattern table, the capacity of the image data stored in the image data ROM included in the display control circuit 2304 and the capacity of the image data and It is not necessary to unnecessarily increase the capacity of the voice data stored in the voice data ROM included in the voice control circuit 2305. As described above, as a specific example of the case where the notification effect common to the variation pattern tables A to D is executed separately from the effect corresponding to the selected variation pattern, for example, in the display device 2007, the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is performed. Apart from this, a mode in which the notification effect is performed by the light emitting mode of the LED group 2046 (see FIG. 88) corresponds to this. However, it goes without saying that the mode of the notification effect is not limited to this. The same applies to the second embodiment and the third embodiment described later.

The above notification effect is executed in the second special symbol game in which the variation PTTB of the referenced special symbol is changed, but different notification effects may be executed according to the changed variation PTTB. For example, when the changed variable PTTB is the variable pattern table C, the sub CPU 2301 executes a notification effect that can give a feeling of expectation to the player as compared with the case where the changed variable PTTB is the variable pattern table A. This is the case. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the changed variable PTTB, and it is possible to enhance the interest. Further, even if the changed variable PTTB is the variable pattern table A, the effect is as if the changed variable PTTB is the variable pattern table C, and the changed variable PTTB is the variable pattern table C. However, the effect as if the changed variable PTTB is the variable pattern table A may be performed. The same applies to the second and third embodiments described later.

Further, during the execution of the special symbol game in which the time reduction end condition is satisfied when the result of the special symbol game is derived, the sub CPU 2301 executes the time reduction end notification effect indicating that the time reduction game state ends. You may do it. Also in the second embodiment and the third embodiment described later, the time saving end notification effect may be executed.

In addition, after the end of the big hit game state based on the result of the special symbol game being "V small hit", the A time reduction game state ends only once the specific small hit is derived, that is, the A time reduction game state. Only when the time saving type mode set in the variation pattern table A at the start is "1". Therefore, when the variable PTTB set in the A time saving game state is other than the fluctuation pattern table A (when the time saving type mode is "2" or "5"), the player is derived once for the specific small hit. It can be grasped that the A time-saving game state does not end only by itself, but the A time-saving game state continues until the specific small hit is derived 10 times.

Further, if the reference variable PTTB is changed to the variable pattern table A after the notification effect is performed and the specific small hit is derived, the player can grasp that the end of the A time saving game state is near. can. Therefore, in the special symbol game after the referenced variable PTTB is changed to the variable pattern table A, the player hopes that the big hit or the V small hit is derived before the A time saving game state ends. You will be able to play the game and enhance your interest. Further, when the A time saving game state approaches the end, by changing the referenced variable PTTB to the fluctuation pattern table A, the average time of the fluctuation time of the special symbol becomes longer, so that the end of the A time saving game state is terminated. It can be delayed and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

By the way, when the result of the second special symbol game is a big hit, the player is controlled to the big hit gaming state without going through the V winning detection, so that the player can grasp the end condition of the A time saving gaming state. Moreover, in this case, since the end condition of the A time-saving game state is that the specific small hit is derived 100 times, it is almost guaranteed that the big hit game state will be substantially controlled before the A time-saving game state ends. ing. Therefore, by setting the variation PTTB set at the start of the A time-shortening game state to the variation pattern table C in which the average time of the variation time of the special symbol is relatively short, the progress speed of the game can be accelerated and the jackpot game state can be achieved at an early stage. It is controlled by the user so that the interest can be enhanced.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the end time of the A time saving game state can be different each time, and by changing the referenced variable PTTB, the end time of the A time saving game state can be changed. It is possible to make people predict, and it is possible to enhance the interest in pachinko. In particular, as in the past, when the end time of the time-saving game state is predetermined, the special symbol game is not executed with reference to the predetermined variable PTTB, but the end time of the time-saving game state. It is possible to perform a game in a thrilling time-saving game state, such as predicting the end timing of the A time-saving game state by transitioning the referenced variable PTTB while the above has not been determined.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the time saving type mode "1" in which the A time saving gaming state ends at a relatively early stage, and the A time saving gaming state are set until the game is substantially controlled to the big hit gaming state. In any of the controlled time reduction type modes "3", the variation PTTB set at the start of the A time reduction gaming state is the variation pattern table A. Therefore, at the start of the A time saving game state, it is impossible or difficult to determine the time saving type mode from the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. Therefore, even if the player is controlled to the A time-saving game state based on the time-saving type mode "1" after the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Although the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment does not have the C time saving gaming state as described above, for example, a plurality of C time saving hits may be provided. In this case, when any of a plurality of C time reduction hits is won, for example, the time reduction type mode and the time reduction end condition related to the derivation of the C time reduction hit may be determined according to the selected symbol command. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, for example, in the A time saving game state, the selected variable PTTB is changed according to the number of times of derivation of a specific small hit, but the time saving is not limited to this. In the gaming state, the selected variable PTTB may be changed according to the number of derivations per C time reduction. The same applies to the second embodiment and the third embodiment described later.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the selected variable PTTB is transitioned in the A time-saving gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variable PTTB is transitioned in the B time-saving gaming state. Alternatively, the variable PTTB to be fiberized may be transitioned in the C time-shortening gaming state. The same applies to the second embodiment and the third embodiment described later.

In the first embodiment, the variable PTTB referred to last in the A time saving game state is the variable pattern table A regardless of the time saving type mode, but is not limited to this, and other variable PTTBs. There may be. For example, a variation PTTB may be referenced in which the average time of variation time is the same as or approximately the same as variation pattern table A. In this case, it is not necessary to limit the average time to the variable PTTB, which is relatively long, but from the viewpoint of delaying the end of the A time-saving gaming state, the average time of the variable time is relative among the plurality of variable PTTBs. It is preferable to refer to a long fluctuation PTTB. The same applies to the second embodiment and the third embodiment described later.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, any of the fluctuation pattern tables A to D having different average time of the fluctuation time is referred to as the fluctuation PTTB referred to in the A time saving gaming state. The number of PTTBs is not limited to this. For example, if variable PTTBs having different average fluctuation times are further provided, the mode in which the variable PTTBs are transitioned can be further varied. The same applies to the second embodiment and the third embodiment described later.

Further, a plurality of variable PTTBs having the same or substantially the same average variable time may be provided. For example, a variable PTTB may be provided in which the average time of the variable time is the same as or substantially the same as the variable pattern table A, but the selected variable pattern is different. The same applies to the second embodiment and the third embodiment described later.

Further, in the first embodiment, since the transition of the variable PTTB is described using the variation pattern tables A to D, the variable PTTB selected in one time saving type mode and the variable PTTB selected in the other time saving type mode are used. May be the same variable PTTB, but is not limited to this. To explain by way of example, for example, in the time saving type mode "3", when the specific small hit is derived once in the section where the fluctuation pattern table A is referred to, the fluctuation pattern table C is referred to. On the other hand, in the time saving type mode "6", the variation pattern table C is referred to even at the start of the time saving gaming state. However, the variation pattern table C referred to in the time saving type mode “3” and the variation pattern table C referred to in the time saving type mode “6” do not have to be the same variation PTTB, and the time saving type mode “3”. Alternatively, in "6", the fluctuation PTTB having the same or almost the same fluctuation time as the fluctuation pattern table C may be referred to. The same applies to the second embodiment and the third embodiment described later.

[5-2. Second Example]
In the second embodiment, the limiter function is mounted on the number of times controlled in the A time-saving game state, and the number of times of derivation of the specified small hit is set as the specified number of times for the end condition of the A time-saving game state, and the limiter remaining number and the specified small number. The reference variable PTTB is changed based on the number of derivations per hit. In this second embodiment, the number of limiters is, for example, 10. The limiter function counts the number of times controlled in the big hit game state (for example, 1 count up or 1 countdown at the end of the big hit game state), and when the number of times controlled in the big hit game state reaches the specified number of times, the big hit game After the end of the state, the function capable of shifting to the normal game state instead of the A time reduction game state corresponds to.

In this second embodiment, only the points different from the first embodiment will be described, and the description of the points common to the first embodiment will be omitted.

FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of the transition of the variable PTTB referred to in the A time saving gaming state according to the number of remaining limiters. In FIG. 140, for convenience, the fluctuation pattern tables A to D are simply referred to as tables A to D, respectively. The normal table and the variation pattern tables A to D are the same as the variation pattern tables A to D described in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 140, when the number of remaining limiters is, for example, 6 to 10 times, the variable PTTB set at the start of the A time saving game state is, for example, the relative speed of the game in the variable pattern tables A to D. It is a fast fluctuation pattern table C. When the specific small hit is derived eight times in the section in which the variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table C, the main CPU 2201 transfers the referenced variation PTTB from the variation pattern table C to, for example, the variation pattern table B. change. When the specific small hit is derived once in the section in which the variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table B, the main CPU 2201 transfers the referenced variation PTTB from the variation pattern table B to, for example, the variation pattern table A. change. Then, when the time saving end condition related to the number of times of derivation of the specific small hit is satisfied (that is, when the specific small hit is derived 10 times in the A time saving game state), the main CPU 2201 ends the A time saving gaming state and is referred to. The variable PTTB is returned from the variable pattern table A to the normal table.

When the number of remaining limiters is 2 to 5, the variable PTTB set at the start of the A time-shortening gaming state is, for example, the variable pattern table B. When the number of remaining limiters is 2 to 5 times, the reference variable PTTB does not transition, and when the time saving end condition related to the number of times of deriving the specific small hit is satisfied (that is, the specific small hit is derived 10 times in the A time saving game state). Then, the main CPU 2201 ends the A time saving game state, and returns the referenced variable PTTB from the variable pattern table B to the normal table. That is, in the A time-saving game state, when the game progresses in the fluctuation pattern table B in which the progress speed of the game is relatively medium among the fluctuation pattern tables A to D, and the specific small hit is derived, for example, 10 times, A. The time-saving gaming state ends and returns to the normal gaming state, and the referenced variable PTTB also becomes a normal table.

When the number of remaining limiters is, for example, one, the variable PTTB set at the start of the A time saving game state is, for example, the variable pattern table A. When the number of remaining limiters is 1, the reference variable PTTB does not transition, and when the time saving end condition related to the number of times of deriving the specific small hit is satisfied (that is, when the specific small hit is derived 10 times in the A time saving game state). ), The main CPU 2201 ends the A time saving game state, and returns the referenced variable PTTB from the variable pattern table A to the normal table. That is, in the A time-saving game state, the game progresses in the variable PTTB (for example, the variable pattern table A) in which the game progress speed is relatively slow among the variable pattern tables A to D, and the specific small hit is derived, for example, 10 times. Then, the A time saving game state ends and returns to the normal game state, and the referenced variable PTTB also becomes a normal table.

In this way, when the number of remaining limiters is relatively large, for example, 6 to 10 times, the progress speed of the game can be increased, and when the number of remaining limiters is, for example, 2 to 5 times, which is relatively medium. The progress speed of the game can also be set to a medium speed, and when the number of remaining limiters is relatively small, for example, one, the progress speed of the game can be slowed down. By doing so, when the number of remaining limiters is large, the progress of the game can be accelerated to control the jackpot game state at an early stage, and when the number of remaining limiters is small, the progress of the game is delayed to shorten the A time game. It is possible to delay the end of the state.

When the number of remaining limiters is, for example, 0, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the variable PTTB set after the end of the jackpot gaming state is controlled because it is controlled to the normal gaming state without being controlled by the A time saving gaming state. For example, a normal table.

In the second embodiment described above, the game progresses with reference to the fluctuation PTTB in which the progress speed of the game is relatively fast when the number of remaining limiters is large, and the progress speed of the game is relative when the number of remaining limiters is small. The game is made to proceed by referring to the slow fluctuation pattern table PTTB, but the game is not limited to this. For example, when the number of remaining limiters is large, the game progresses relatively slowly. The game progresses with reference to the variable PTTB (for example, the variable pattern table A), and when the number of remaining limiters is small, the game progresses. The game may proceed with reference to the fluctuation pattern table PTTB (for example, the fluctuation pattern table C) in which the speed is relatively fast. In this case, since the average time of the fluctuation time of the special symbol can be shortened as the number of consecutive villas in the big hit game state increases, the extension of the game that can occur based on the consecutive villas in the big hit game state is reduced. It becomes possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

When the number of remaining limiters is, for example, 6 to 10 times, the first embodiment replaces the transition of the referenced variable PTTB in a predetermined manner as shown in FIG. 140, for example. The transition may be made in the manner described in the above. By doing so, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of performing both the game described in the first embodiment and the game described in the second embodiment. The control executed by the main CPU 2201 in this case will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142.

FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end process, which is a process performed in place of the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 103. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 141, the special symbol game end setting process (S2142A) is performed instead of the special symbol game end setting process (S2142) performed in the jackpot process shown in FIG. 103. Although detailed description of the special symbol game end setting process (S2142A) is omitted, in this special symbol game end setting process (S2142A), the main CPU 2201 is executed by the existing special symbol game end setting process (S2142). In addition to the processing, the number of times controlled to the jackpot gaming state is counted. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of times controlled in the big hit game state has reached the limiter number, and when it is determined that the number of times controlled in the big hit game state has reached the limiter number, the main CPU 2201 is the existing special symbol game. Performs the process of invalidating the time saving flag set in the end setting process.

FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving management process executed in the second embodiment instead of the time saving management process (see FIG. 135) executed in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 142, the main CPU 2201 first determines in S2661 whether or not the time saving flag is off. When it is determined that the time saving flag is off (when the determination in S2661 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2622. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag is not off (when the determination in S2661 is NO), that is, when the time saving flag is on, the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2266.

In S2262, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the time saving type mode described in the first embodiment is larger than "0". When it is determined that the time saving type mode is larger than "0" (YES in S2262), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2623. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving type mode is not larger than "0" (NO determination in S2262), that is, when the time saving type mode is "0", the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving management process. When the number of remaining limiters is 0, it is preferable to set the time saving type mode to, for example, "0" so that NO is forcibly determined in S2262.

In S2263, the main CPU 2201 turns on the time saving flag. After executing the process of S2263, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2265.

In S2265, the main CPU 2201 performs a variable PTTB change condition setting process. This variable PTTB change condition setting process is as described with reference to FIG. 136 in the first embodiment. When the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S2265, the time saving management process ends.

In S2266, the main CPU 2201 performs a time saving continuation determination process. This time reduction continuation determination process is as described with reference to FIG. 137 in the first embodiment. After executing the process of S2266, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2267.

In S2267, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the time saving end flag is on. The time saving end flag can be set in the time saving continuation determination process (see FIG. 137) described above. When the time saving end flag is on (when the determination in S2267 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2268. On the other hand, when the time saving end flag is not on (when the determination in S2267 is NO), that is, when the time saving end flag is off, the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2270.

In S2268, the main CPU 2201 turns off the time saving flag. After executing the process of S2268, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2269.

In S2269, the main CPU 2201 initializes the selection table. As described in S2219 of the first embodiment, this process is a process of returning the variable PTTB of the referenced special symbol to the normal table. When the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S2269, the time saving management ends.

In S2270, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of remaining limiters is, for example, 5 or less. When it is determined that the number of remaining limiters is, for example, 5 or less (when the determination in S2270 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2271. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of remaining limiters is not, for example, 5 (when S2270 is NO), that is, when the number of remaining limiters is, for example, greater than 5, (that is, 6 or more), the main CPU 2201 performs processing. Move to.

In S2271, the main CPU 2201 sets a variable PTTB according to the number of remaining limiters. For example, as shown in FIG. 140, when the number of remaining limiters is 2 to 5, the variable PTTB to be referred to is set in the variable pattern table B, and when the number of remaining limiters is 1, the variable PTTB to be referenced is set. Is set in the fluctuation pattern table A. When the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S2271, the time saving management process ends.

In S2272, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the specific small hit winning flag is on. The specific small hit winning flag can be set in the above-mentioned time saving continuation determination process (see FIG. 137). When the specific small hit winning flag is on (when the determination in S2272 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2273. On the other hand, when the specific small hit winning flag is not on (when the determination in S2272 is NO), that is, when the specific small hit winning flag is off, the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving management process.

In S2273, the main CPU 2201 performs the variable PTTB change condition management process. This variable PTTB change condition management process is as described with reference to FIG. 138 in the first embodiment. When the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S2273, the time saving management process ends.

By doing so, when the number of remaining limiters is, for example, 6 to 10 times, the reference variable PTTB is changed while the end time of the A time saving game state is not determined. Not only is it possible to perform a game in a thrilling time-saving game state, such as predicting the end timing of the time-saving game state, but it is also possible to enhance the interest by speeding up the progress speed of the game. Then, by gradually slowing down the progress speed of the game as the number of remaining limiters decreases, it is possible to delay the timing at which the A time-saving game state ends and returns to the normal game state.

[5-3. Third Example]
In the third embodiment, a plurality of types of specific small hits are provided as specific small hits, and the A time saving game state is terminated or the referenced variable PTTB is changed based on the number of times these multiple types of specific small hits are derived. I tried to do it. In this third example, a specific small hit A and a specific small hit B are provided as a plurality of types of specific small hits. In this third embodiment, only the points different from the first embodiment will be described, and the description of the points common to the first embodiment will be omitted.

[5-3-1. basic specifications]
First, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment will be described.

[5-3-3-1. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 143 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 143, the result of the second special symbol game includes "specific small hit A" and "specific small hit B". In this third embodiment, there are only two types of specific small hits, specific small hit A and specific small hit B, but the types of specific small hits are not limited to two types, and may be three or more types.

In both cases where the result of the special symbol game is "specific small hit A" and the result of the special symbol game is "specific small hit B", the result of the special symbol game is "V small hit". As in certain cases, the main CPU 2201 controls the small hit game state in which the V winning device opening preparation process (S2016 in FIG. 94) and the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94) are performed. However, if the result of the special symbol game is not "V small hit" (that is, "specific small hit A" or "specific small hit B"), it is difficult to detect the V prize or the V prize. The V shutter 2158 is operated in the above manner, and the V winning opening 2155 is opened. Therefore, if the result of the special symbol game is not "V small hit", even if the player hits right in the small hit game state and the game ball wins in the opening / closing winning opening 2151, the game ball detects the V winning. I can't expect to be done.

Although the details will be described later, when either "specific small hit A" or "specific small hit B" is derived in the time-saving gaming state ("A time-saving gaming state" in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment). Even if there is, it may be a trigger for changing the fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol referred to when executing the special symbol game, or a trigger for ending the time-saving gaming state. Further, although the details will be described later, the variation pattern table of the special symbol is referred to in the normal table 1 (see FIG. 147 described later), which is a variation pattern table referred to in the normal gaming state, and in the A time saving gaming state. Fluctuation pattern tables A1 to C1 (see FIGS. 148 to 150 described later) are included. The normal table 1 corresponds to the normal table of the first embodiment, and the fluctuation pattern tables A1 to C1 correspond to the fluctuation pattern tables A to C of the first embodiment, respectively. That is, in the normal table 1, among the plurality of variable PTTBs, the average time of the variable time of the special symbol is the longest. In all of the special symbol variation pattern tables A1 to C1 referred to in the A time saving game state, the average time of the special symbol variation time is shorter than that of the normal table 1. Further, the average time of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the A time saving game state is the fluctuation pattern table C1 <variation pattern table B1 <variation pattern table A1. Although the variation pattern table corresponding to the variation pattern table D of the first embodiment is not provided in the third embodiment, the variation pattern table corresponding to the variation pattern table D of the first embodiment may be provided. Needless to say, it's good.

If there is another type of specific small hit in addition to "specific small hit A" and "specific small hit B", all "specific small hits" will trigger a change in the variation pattern table of the special symbol or shorten the time. It is not essential to trigger the end of the gaming state, and if at least two types of "specific small hits" are the triggers for changing the variation pattern table of the special symbol or the trigger for ending the time-saving gaming state, the pachinko game of the third embodiment. It is possible to realize the same game characteristics as a machine.

As shown in FIG. 143, in the hit determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 2202, as data used for the second special symbol game executed based on the winning of the second starting port 2140, " The range (width) of the random value for big hit judgment determined as "big hit", "V small hit", "specific small hit A", "specific small hit B" or "loss", and the corresponding winning judgment value data ( The relationship with "big hit judgment value data", "V small hit judgment value data", "specific small hit A judgment value data", "specific small hit judgment value data B", "missing judgment value data") is defined. There is.

As shown in FIG. 143, in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, when the second special symbol game is executed by the main CPU 2201, for example, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/319, and about 50 minutes. Win a V small hit with a probability of 1 in, win a specific small hit A with a probability of about 1/24, win a specific small hit B with a probability of about 1/12, and the others are decided to be lost. To. It should be noted that the specific small hit A and the specific small hit B do not have to have different probabilities and may have the same probability.

[5-3-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 144 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment.

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 144, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selection symbol command "z20" with a probability of 50%. Then, select the selected symbol command "z21" with a 15% probability, select the selected symbol command "z22" with a 5% probability, select the selected symbol command "z23" with a 15% probability, and select the selected symbol command. Select "z24" with a 15% probability, and select "zA1" as the symbol specification command. When the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command "z25" and the symbol designation command "zA2".

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command "z26" with a 100% probability, and selects the symbol designation command "zA13". .. When the V small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command "z27" with a probability of 15%, and the selected symbol command "z28" is 25%. Select with the probability of, select the selected symbol command "z29" with a probability of 15%, select the selected symbol command "z30" with a probability of 25%, and select the selected symbol command "z31" with a probability of 20%. .. Also, select "zA14" as the symbol specification command. When the specific small hit A determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command "z32" and the symbol designation command "zA15". When the specific small hit B determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command "z33" and the symbol designation command "zA16". When the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command "z34" and the symbol designation command "zA17".

In the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, whether the result of the second special symbol game is "V small hit", "specific small hit A", or "specific small hit B" is described above. As described above, the hit determination table of the special symbol (see FIG. 143) is referred to, and the determination is made according to the extracted random value for jackpot determination of the second special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the result of the determination made by referring to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 143) is "small hit", the second is extracted by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 144). 2 Depending on the symbol random value of the special symbol, it may be determined whether to use "V small hit", "specific small hit A", or "specific small hit B".

[5-3-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 145 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment. The description in the remarks column of FIG. 145 is for convenience and easy to understand.

The time-saving end conditions related to the derivation of the specific small hit shown in FIG. 145 are that "specific small hit A" is derived the first specified number of times (first condition) and "specific small hit B" is derived the second specified number of times. Either that was done (second condition) or that "special symbol A" was derived the third specified number of times and "specific small hit B" was derived the fourth specified number of times (third condition). Is. In the first condition, the number of times of derivation of "specific small hit B" is not set, and in the second condition, the number of times of derivation of "specific small hit A" is not set. In the third condition, the number of derivations is set for both "specific small hit A" and "specific small hit B", the specific small hit A is derived the third specified number of times, and the specific small hit B is the fourth specified number of times. It is established when it is derived, and it is not established if only one of "specific small hit A" and "specific small hit B" satisfies the condition. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z22", "specific small hit A" is derived 5 times and "specific small hit B" is derived 10 times in the A time saving game state controlled after the end of the big hit game state. In this case, the time saving end condition (the third condition above) is satisfied, and "specific small hit A" is derived 5 times but "specific small hit B" is not derived 10 times, and "specific small hit B" is derived. If the "hit B" is derived 10 times but the "specific small hit A" is not derived 5 times, the time saving end condition (the above third condition) is not satisfied. After the A time saving game state ends, it is controlled to the normal game state. The above-mentioned 1st specified number of times, 2nd specified number of times, 3rd specified number of times, and 4th specified number of times may be the same number of times, or may be different times. The parts may be the same number of times.

Although it is not a time-saving end condition related to the derivation of a specific small hit, in the explanation of the change condition of the variable PTTB described later, the first condition is that "specific small hit A" is derived the first specified number of times. The second condition is that "specific small hit B" is derived the second specified number of times, and the third condition is that "special symbol A" is derived the third specified number of times and "specific small hit B" is the fourth specified. It will be derived the number of times.

Further, in the third embodiment, the fourth condition is that "special symbol A" is derived a fifth specified number of times or "specific small hit B" is derived a sixth specified number of times (fifth specified number of times and). The 6th specified number of times may be the same as all or any of the 1st specified number of times to the 4th specified number of times), the time saving end condition or the variable PTTB change condition is replaced with or added to the 3rd condition, and the 4th condition. May be.

In this way, by setting the number of times of derivation of both "specific small hit A" and "specific small hit B" as the end condition of the time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state ends when the special symbol game is played a predetermined number of times. Unlike the pachinko gaming machines of, for example, the development of the game may exceed expectations, such as being biased toward the derivation of one of the specific small hits, and it is possible to play a game in a thrilling time-saving gaming state. It becomes.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, the "big hit" was derived, the "V small hit" was derived, and the number of times the specific small hit was derived (the first to third conditions described above). Is set as the end condition of the A short-time game state, but is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the above conditions, a condition that cannot be realistically satisfied (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 10,000 times, etc.) may be included in the end condition of the A time saving game state.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, all the big hits and V small hits are controlled to the A time saving gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, some big hits or some of them. The V small hit may be controlled to the normal gaming state without being controlled to the A time saving gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state.

[5-3-3-4. Fluctuation pattern table change condition table]
FIG. 146 is an example of a variation pattern table change condition table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 146, the change condition of the variable PTTB referred to in the A time saving game state is determined according to the time saving type mode. The "Remarks" column shown in FIG. 146 shows the selected symbol command for convenience for the sake of clarity. As shown in the hit type determination table (see FIG. 145), since the time saving type mode corresponds to the result of the selected symbol command, that is, the special symbol, the change condition of the variable PTTB referred to in the A time saving gaming state is , It will be determined according to the symbol random value of the extracted special symbol (more specifically, the second special symbol).

The change type shown in the column of the variable PTTB change condition in FIG. 146 is whether the variable PTTB change condition referred to in the A time saving gaming state is the first condition, the second condition, or the third condition. It is a type for determining whether or not. In the third embodiment, the change types 1 to 3 mean that the change conditions of the variable PTTB referred to in the A time saving gaming state are the conditions that are satisfied by the first condition to the third condition, respectively.

Further, the condition number A shown in the column of the variable PTTB change condition in FIG. 146 is a condition for transitioning the referenced variable PTTB from the current variable PTTB to another variable PTTB, and is a specific small value in the section. It is the number of times of derivation of hit A. Similarly, the condition number B shown in the variable PTTB change condition column of FIG. 146 is a condition for transitioning the referenced variable PTTB from the current variable PTTB to another variable PTTB, and is specified in the section. This is the number of times the small hit B is derived.

For example, when the time saving type mode is "9", the variable PTTB set at the start of the A time saving game state is the variable pattern table C1, and the variable PTTB is changed twice. In this time saving type mode "9", the variable PTTB is changed twice, but the first variable PTTB change condition is that the specific small hit A is derived twice in the section in which the initially set variation pattern table C1 is referred to. And the specific small hit B is derived four times, and the variable PTTB referred to after the change is the variable pattern table B1. Further, the second variation PTTB change condition is that the specific small hit A is derived twice and the specific small hit B is derived four times in the variation pattern table B1, and the variation PTTB referred to after the change is the variation pattern. Table A1. When the time saving type mode is "9", the time saving end condition is that the number of times the specific small hit A is derived 5 times or more and the number of times the specific small hit B is derived 10 times or more (see FIG. 145). Then, the A short-time game state ends. When the A time-saving gaming state ends, the referenced variable PTTB returns from the variable pattern table A1 to the variable pattern table of the special symbol referred to in the normal gaming state (hereinafter, simply referred to as "normal table 1").

[5-3-3-5. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 147 is an example of a normal table 1. FIGS. 148 to 150 are examples of variation pattern tables A1 to C1 of special symbols that can be referred to in the A time saving game state, respectively. The column of "remarks" shown in FIGS. 147 to 150 shows the content of the effect displayed on the display device 2007 for the sake of convenience. Each table shown in FIGS. 147 to 150 is stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 147 to 150, the variation pattern of the special symbol is the same as that of the first embodiment, the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (winning), the first starting port 2120 or the first. 2 Determined based on the reach determination random value, the number of holdings, and / and the effect selection random value extracted when the game ball wins (passes) in the starting port 2140.

The relationship between the fluctuation time of the special symbol for the normal table 1 and the fluctuation pattern tables A1 to C1 is as described above, but as in the first embodiment, any or all of the fluctuation pattern tables A1 to C1 are usually used. A fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern included in Table 1 may be included. Similarly, the variable PTTB included in the variable PTTB (for example, the variable pattern table C1) having a relatively short average time of the special symbol and the variable PTTB (for example, the variable pattern table A1) having a relatively long average time of the special symbol. It may contain a variation pattern with a longer variation time than.

As shown in the fluctuation pattern tables A1 to C1, when the result of the second special symbol game is "specific small hit A", for example, a big hit is expected according to the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value. It corresponds to a reach effect that can be made (for example, an effect corresponding to 82H13H shown in the variable pattern table A1) and a reach effect that can be expected to have a small V hit (for example, an effect corresponding to 82H14H shown in the variable pattern table A1). The effect) or the variation effect (for example, the effect corresponding to 82H15H shown in the variation pattern table A1) that can be grasped as the specific small hit A is performed.

When the result of the second special symbol game is "specific small hit B", for example, the random value for reach determination and the effect selection are the same as when the result of the second special symbol game is "specific small hit A". A reach effect that can expect a big hit (for example, an effect corresponding to 82H16H shown in the fluctuation pattern table A1) and a reach effect that can expect a V small hit (for example, a fluctuation pattern) according to a random number value. An effect corresponding to 82H17H shown in the table A1) or a variation effect (for example, an effect corresponding to 82H18H shown in the variation pattern table A1) that can be grasped as a specific small hit B is performed.

Regarding the effect executed by the sub CPU 2301, the case where the result of the second special symbol game is "specific small hit A" and the case where the result is "specific small hit B" should be distinguished by a common effect or appearance. Is it impossible for the player to grasp whether the result of the second special symbol is "specific small hit A" or "specific small hit B" by performing an effect similar to the degree of difficulty? It may be difficult. For example, it can be realized by making the effect corresponding to 82H18H shown in the variation pattern table A1 the same effect as the effect corresponding to 82H15H shown in the variation pattern table A1 or an effect that is difficult to distinguish in appearance. In this case, the sub CPU 2301 does not display a display mode capable of distinguishing whether the result of the second special symbol game is "specific small hit A" or "specific small hit B" when the decorative symbol is stopped. In addition, it is preferable to display a display mode indicating that the game is simply a "specific small hit". Furthermore, not only whether the result of the second special symbol game is "specific small hit A" or "specific small hit B", but also including "missing", the player can obtain the result of the second special symbol game. You may try to perform an effect that is difficult or difficult to grasp.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, the result of the second special symbol game is "specific small hit A" or "specific small" in any of the fluctuation pattern tables A1 to C1 that can be referred to in the A time saving gaming state. A variation pattern (eg, F2H, F3H) of a specific variation that can be executed when "hit B" is included. As for the variation pattern of this specific variation, the result of the second special symbol game (that is, the result of the special symbol game) in which the variation PTTB of the referenced special symbol is changed in the A time saving game state is derived as in the first embodiment. Then, it is a variation pattern selected in the second special symbol game) in which the reference variation PTTB is changed, and the variation time is set to a fixed time of, for example, 2500 (ms). As described above, in the second special symbol game in which the variation PTTB of the referenced special symbol is changed by including the variation pattern having the same variation time in any of the variation pattern tables A1 to C1, it is common to the sub CPU 2301. It becomes possible to execute the production of. This common effect corresponds to, for example, an effect of notifying the player of the change of the referenced variable PTTB, and may be an effect performed on the display device 2007, or the LED group 2046 (see FIG. 88). It may be a notification effect according to the light emitting mode of.

As in the first embodiment, the fluctuation pattern of the specific fluctuation (for example, HF2H, HF3H) is selected only for the special symbol game in which the variation PTTB of the referenced special symbol is changed, and other than that. In a normal special symbol game, it is not selected as shown in FIGS. 147 to 150. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even in a normal special symbol game other than the special symbol game in which the fluctuation PTTB of the referenced special symbol is changed, for example, it is selected according to the random value for effect selection. May be good.

[5-3-4. Main control process]
In the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 are special symbol variation patterns performed in S2026 of the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 95). Although the time saving management process performed in S2071 of the determination process and the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 98) is different from that of the third pachinko gaming machine and the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the other processes are the same. Is. Therefore, in the following, the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol and the time saving management process will be described, and the description of other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will be omitted.

[5-3-4-1. Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process]
FIG. 151 is an example of a special symbol variable display start process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment instead of the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 95) executed in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows. In the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S2026B) shown in FIG. 151, a specific variation pattern determination process described later is executed in addition to the existing process executed in the special symbol variation pattern determination process shown in FIG. 95. To.

FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing an example of a specific variation pattern determination process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment. This specific variation pattern determination process is a process called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S2026B), and is an existing process executed in the special symbol variation pattern determination process shown in FIG. 95. If the predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, if S2301 and S2302 described later are both YES determinations and S2306, S2311 or S2313 are YES determinations), the special symbol variation PTTB Is a process of redetermining the above-mentioned fluctuation PTTB of the specific fluctuation (for example, F2H or F3H).

As shown in FIG. 152, in the specific fluctuation pattern determination process, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the specific small hit A or the specific small hit B has been won (S2301). When it is determined that the specific small hit A or the specific small hit B has been won (when the determination in S2301 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2302. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific small hit has not been won (NO determination in S2301), the main CPU 2201 ends the specific variation pattern determination process.

In S2302, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the variable PTTB change count N is greater than 0. When it is determined that the variable PTTB change count N is larger than 0 (YES in S2302), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2303. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable PTTB change count N is not greater than 0 (NO determination in S2302), that is, when the variable PTTB change count N is 0, the main CPU 2201 ends the specific variation pattern determination process. ..

In S2203, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the specific small hit A has been won. When it is determined that the specific small hit A has been won (when the determination in S2303 is YES), the main CPU 2201 is processed and transferred to S2304. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific small hit A has not been won (when the determination in S2303 is NO), that is, when the specific small hit B has been won, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2309.

In S2304, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the number of specific small hit A sections. That is, the process of S2304 is a process of counting the number of specific small hit A sections. For example, in the A time saving game state, when the fluctuation PTTB set at the start of the A time saving gaming state is the fluctuation pattern table B1, the number of times the specific small hit A is won in the section to which the fluctuation pattern table B1 is referred to is specified. It corresponds to the number of small hit A sections. After executing the process of S2304, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2305.

In S2309, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the number of specific small hit B sections. That is, the process of S2309 is a process of counting the number of specific small hit B sections. For example, in the A time saving game state, when the fluctuation PTTB set at the start of the A time saving gaming state is the fluctuation pattern table B1, the number of times the specific small hit B is won in the section to which the fluctuation pattern table B1 is referred to is specified. It corresponds to the number of small hit B sections. After executing the process of S2309, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2305.

In S2305, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the change type is 1. When it is determined that the change type is 1 (YES in S2305), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2306. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change type is not 1 (when the determination in S2305 is NO), that is, when the change type is 2 or 3, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2310.

In S2306, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of conditions A and the number of specific small hit A sections are the same. When it is determined that the number of conditions A and the number of specific small hit A sections are the same (YES in S2306), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2307. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of conditions A and the number of specific small hit A sections are not the same (when S2306 is NO determination), that is, when the number of specific small hit A sections is smaller than the number of conditions A, the main The CPU 2201 ends the specific variation pattern determination process. That is, the number of specific small hit A sections is used to determine whether or not the variable PTTB change condition is satisfied.

In S2307, the main CPU 2201 selects and determines the variation pattern of the special symbol as the variation pattern of the specific variation (for example, F2H). As described above, the fluctuation pattern of the specific fluctuation (for example, F2H) can be executed when the result of the second special symbol game is the specific small hit A, and the fluctuation time is a fixed time (for example, 5000 (ms)). It is a fluctuation pattern of. As described above, when the predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, S2301 and S2302 described later are both YES determinations, S2305 is YES determination and S2306 is YES determination, S2310 is YES determination and S2311 is YES determination. , Or when S2312 determines YES and S2313 determines YES), a plurality of variation patterns are selected and determined as the variation pattern of the specific variation (for example, F2H). Regardless of which of the tables A1 to C1 the variable PTTB is referred to, the sub CPU 2301 can execute an effect of notifying that the variable PTTB is changed as a common effect. After executing the process of S2307, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2308. However, it is not essential that the effect of notifying that the variable PTTB is changed is an effect common to a plurality of variable pattern tables A1 to C1.

In S2308, the main CPU 2201 turns on the variable PTTB change flag. When the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S2208, the specific variation pattern determination process ends.

In S2210, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the change type is 2. When it is determined that the change type is 2 (YES in S2310), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2311. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change type is not 2 (when the determination in S2310 is NO), that is, when the change type is 3, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2312.

In S2311, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of conditions B and the number of specific small hit B sections are the same. When it is determined that the number of conditions B and the number of specific small hit B sections are the same (YES in S2311), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2307. In this case, in S2307, the main CPU 2201 selects and determines a variation pattern of the special symbol as a variation pattern (for example, F3H) of a specific variation with a variation time of a fixed time (for example, 5000 (ms)), thereby performing a plurality of variations. Regardless of which of the pattern tables A1 to C1 is referred to, the sub CPU 2301 executes an effect of notifying that the variable PTTB is changed as a common effect, although it is not essential. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of conditions B and the number of specific small hit B sections are not the same (when S2311 is NO determination), that is, when the number of specific small hit B sections is smaller than the number of conditions B, the main The CPU 2201 ends the specific variation pattern determination process. That is, the number of specific small hit B sections is used to determine whether or not the variable PTTB change condition is satisfied.

In S2312, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of specific small hit A sections is equal to or greater than the number of conditions A. When it is determined that the number of specific small hit A sections is equal to or greater than the number of conditions A (YES in S2312), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2313. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of specific small hit A sections is not equal to or more than the condition number A (NO determination in S2312), that is, when the number of specific small hit A sections is smaller than the condition number A, the main CPU 2201 The specific fluctuation pattern determination process is terminated.

In S2313, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of specific small hit B sections is equal to or greater than the number of conditions B. When it is determined that the number of specific small hit B sections is equal to or greater than the number of conditions B (YES in S2313), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2307. In this case, in S2307, the main CPU 2201 sets the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol to F2H (when the specific small hit A is won) or F3H (specific) according to the type of the specific small hit won in this specific small hit game. If you win the small hit B), the selection will be decided. By doing so, even if any of the variable PTTBs of the plurality of variable pattern tables A1 to C1 is referred to, the variable PTTB is changed by the sub CPU 2301 as a common effect, although it is not essential. It is possible to execute an effect of notifying that it will be done. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of specific small hit B sections is not equal to or more than the condition number B (NO determination in S2313), that is, when the number of specific small hit B sections is smaller than the condition number B, the main CPU 2201 The specific fluctuation pattern determination process is terminated.

By doing so, both that the number of times the specific small hit A is derived in the section is the condition number A or more and that the number of times the specific small hit B is derived in the section is the condition number B or more are both. When it is established, the fluctuation pattern of the specific fluctuation can be executed.

[5-3-4-2. Time saving management process]
FIG. 153 is an example of the time saving management process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment instead of the time saving management process performed in S2071 of the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 98) in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows.

As shown in FIG. 153, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is off in the time saving management process (S2321). When it is determined that the time saving flag is off (when the determination in S2321 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2322. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag is not off (when the determination in S2321 is NO), that is, when the time saving flag is on, the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2326.

In S2322, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the time saving type mode is larger than "6". When it is determined that the time saving type mode is larger than "6" (YES in S2322), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2323. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving type mode is not larger than "6" (NO determination in S2322), that is, the time saving type modes "1" to "6" are not used in the third embodiment, so that the time saving type is not used. When the mode is "0", the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving management process.

In S2323, the main CPU 2201 turns on the time saving flag. After executing the process of S2323, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2325.

In S2325, the main CPU 2201 performs a variable PTTB change condition setting process. The details of the variable PTTB change condition setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 154. When the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S2325, the time saving management process ends.

In S2326, the main CPU 2201 performs a time saving continuation determination process. The details of the time reduction continuation determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 155. After executing the process of S2326, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2327.

In S2327, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the time saving end flag is on. The time reduction end flag may be set in the time reduction continuation determination process (see FIG. 155) described later. When the time saving end flag is on (when the determination in S2327 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2328. On the other hand, when the time saving end flag is not on (when the determination in S2327 is NO), that is, when the time saving end flag is off, the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2330.

In S2328, the main CPU 2201 turns off the time saving flag. After executing the process of S2328, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2329.

In S2329, the main CPU 2201 initializes the selection table. This process is a process of returning the variable PTTB of the referenced special symbol to the normal table 1. When the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S2329, the specific variation pattern determination process ends.

In S2330, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the winning flag of the specific small hit A or the specific small hit B is on. The specific small hit A winning flag and the specific small hit B winning flag are both flags that can be set in the time saving continuation determination process (see FIG. 155) described later. When either the specific small hit A winning flag or the specific small hit B winning flag is on (when the determination in S2330 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2331. On the other hand, when the winning flag of the specific small hit A or the specific small hit B is not on (when S2330 is NO determination), that is, when both the specific small hit A winning flag and the specific small hit B winning flag are off, the main The CPU 2201 ends the time saving management process.

In S2331, the main CPU 2201 performs the variable PTTB change condition management process. The details of the variable PTTB change condition management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 156. When the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S2331, the time saving management process ends.

[5-3-4-3. Variable PTTB change condition setting process]
FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable PTTB change condition setting process. As described above, the variable PTTB change condition setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the time saving management process (see FIG. 153), and various settings are made with reference to the variable PTTB change condition table (see FIG. 146). Is.

As shown in FIG. 154, in the variable PTTB change condition setting process, the main CPU 2201 first sets the variable PTTB at the start of the variable PTTB in S2341 according to the time reduction type mode. After executing the process of S2341, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2342.

In S2342, the main CPU 2201 sets the variable PTTB change count N according to the time saving type mode. After executing the process of S2342, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2343.

In S2343, the main CPU 2201 sets the change type according to the time saving type mode. As described above, when the change condition of the variable PTTB is the first condition (“specific small hit A” is derived the first specified number of times), the change type is set to 1, and the change condition of the variable PTTB is the second condition. If the condition ("specific small hit B" is derived the second specified number of times), the change type is set to 2, and the change condition of the variable PTTB is the third condition ("special symbol A" is the third specified number of times). If it is derived and "specific small hit B" is derived the fourth specified number of times), the change type is set to 3. After executing the process of S2343, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2344.

In S2344, the main CPU 2201 sets a variable PTTB change condition according to the time saving type mode. As described with reference to the variable PTTB change condition table (see FIG. 146), the variable PTTB change condition is a condition for transitioning the referenced variable PTTB from the current variable PTTB to another variable PTTB. In this S2344, the initial value of the variable PTTB change count N, that is, the condition corresponding to the variable PTTB change count N set in S2342 is set. For example, if the time saving type mode is "9", the variable PTTB change condition corresponding to N = 2 is set. When the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S2344, the variable PTTB change condition setting process ends.

[5-3-4-4. Time saving continuation judgment processing]
FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of the time reduction continuation determination process. As described above, the time saving continuation determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the time saving management process (see FIG. 153).

As shown in FIG. 155, in the time saving continuation determination process, the main CPU 2201 first determines in S2351 whether or not the specific small hit A is derived. When it is determined that the specific small hit A has been derived (when the determination in S2351 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2352. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific small hit A has not been derived (when S2351 is NO determination), that is, when the specific small hit B or loss is derived (in the time saving continuation determination process, the large hit or V small hit is derived. The main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2356.

In S2352, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the total number of specific small hits A. That is, the process of S2352 is a process of counting the total number of times of the specific small hit A. The total number of specific small hits A is different from the number of specific small hit A sections used to determine whether or not the variable PTTB change condition is satisfied, and is used to determine whether or not the end condition of the A time saving game state is satisfied. It is something that can be done. After executing the process of S2352, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2353.

In S2353, the main CPU 2201 turns on the specific small hit A winning flag. After executing the process of S2353, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2354.

In S2354, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the time saving end condition set in the special symbol game end setting process (see S2142 in FIG. 103) is satisfied. For example, when the reduction of working hours condition is that the specific small hit A is derived 5 times or more and the specific small hit B is derived 10 times or more, the specific small hit A is derived 5 times or more, and the specific small hit B is 10 times. When both of the fact that the derivation has been performed more than once are satisfied, it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the set time saving end condition is satisfied (when the determination in S2354 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2355. On the other hand, when it is determined that the set time reduction end condition is not satisfied (NO determination in S2354), the main CPU 2201 ends the time reduction continuation determination process.

In S2355, the main CPU 2201 turns on the time saving end flag. After executing the process of S2355, the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving continuation determination process.

In S2356, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the specific small hit B has been derived. When it is determined that the specific small hit B has been derived (YES in S2356), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2357. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific small hit B has not been derived (NO determination in S2356), that is, when the loss is derived, the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving continuation determination process.

In S2357, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the total number of specific small hits B. That is, the process of S2357 is a process of counting the total number of times of the specific small hit B. The total number of specific small hits B is different from the number of specific small hit B sections used to determine whether or not the variable PTTB change condition is satisfied, and is used to determine whether or not the end condition of the A time saving game state is satisfied. It is something that can be done. After executing the process of S2357, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2358.

In S2358, the main CPU 2201 turns on the specific small hit B winning flag. After executing the process of S2358, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2354. The processing after S2354 is as described above.

[5-3-4-5. Variable PTTB change condition management process]
FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable PTTB change condition management process. As described above, the variable PTTB change condition management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the time saving management process (see FIG. 153). This variable PTTB change condition management process is a process of changing the variable PTTB of the special symbol to be referred to when the variable PTTB change condition is satisfied in the A time saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 156, in the variable PTTB change condition management process, the main CPU 2201 first determines in S2361 whether or not the variable PTTB change flag is on. When it is determined that the variable PTTB change flag is ON (YES in S2361), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2362. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable PTTB change flag is not on (when S2361 is NO determination), that is, when the variable PTTB change flag is off, the main CPU 2201 ends the variable PTTB change condition management process.

In S2362, the main CPU 2201 modifies the referenced variable PTTB. The change of the variable PTTB is performed based on the set variable PTTB change condition. After executing the process of S2362, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2363.

In S2363, the main CPU 2201 resets the number of specific small hit A sections and the number of specific small hit B sections. This is to count the number of specific small hit A sections and the number of specific small hit B sections again after the referenced variable PTTB is changed. After executing the process of S2363, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2364.

In S2364, the main CPU 2201 subtracts 1 from the variable PTTB change count N. After executing the process of S2364, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2365.

In S2365, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the variable PTTB change count N is greater than 0. When it is determined that the variable PTTB change count N is larger than 0 (YES in S2365), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2366. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable PTTB change count N is not greater than 0 (NO determination in S2365), that is, when the variable PTTB change count N is 0, the main CPU 2201 ends the variable PTTB change condition management process. do.

In S2366, the main CPU 2201 sets the change type in the same manner as in S2343. As the change type set here, the change type corresponding to the variation PTTB change number N after subtracting 1 in S2364 is set. When the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S2366, the process shifts to S2376.

In S2376, the main CPU 2201 sets the variable PTTB change condition in the same manner as in S2344. As the variable PTTB change condition set here, a condition corresponding to the variable PTTB change count N after subtracting 1 in S2364 is set. When the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S2376, the variable PTTB change condition setting process ends.

[5-3-5. Transition of referenced variable PTTB]
Next, the transition of the variable PTTB referred to in the A time saving gaming state will be described. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an example of the transition of the variable PTTB referred to in the A time saving game state for each time saving type mode. In FIG. 157, for convenience, the fluctuation pattern tables A1 to C1 are simply referred to as tables A1 to C1, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 157, when the time saving type mode is “7”, the variable PTTB set at the start of the A time saving gaming state is, for example, the variable pattern table B1. When the specific small hit A is derived four times in the section in which the variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table B1, the main CPU 2201 transfers the referenced variation PTTB from the variation pattern table B1, for example, the variation pattern table A1. Change to. Then, when the time saving end condition related to the number of times of deriving the specific small hit is satisfied (that is, when the specific small hit A is derived 5 times), the main CPU 2201 ends the A time saving gaming state and sets the referenced variable PTTB. Return from the fluctuation pattern table A1 to the normal table. That is, at the start of the A time-saving game state, the game progresses in the variable PTTB (for example, the variable pattern table B1) in which the progress speed of the game is relatively in the middle of the variable pattern tables A1 to C1, and this variable pattern. When the specific small hit A is derived, for example, four times in the section in which the table B1 is referred to, the game is played in the variable PTTB (for example, the variable pattern table A1) in which the game progress speed is relatively slow among the variable pattern tables A1 to C1. Will progress. After that, when the end condition of the A time saving game state is satisfied, the A time saving game state ends and returns to the normal gaming state, and the referenced variable PTTB also becomes a normal table.

When the time saving type mode is "8", the variable PTTB set at the start of the A time saving game state is, for example, the variable pattern table B1. When the specific small hit B is derived 10 times in the section in which the variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table B1, the main CPU 2201 transfers the referenced variation PTTB from the variation pattern table B1, for example, the variation pattern table A1. Change to. Then, when the time saving end condition related to the number of times of derivation of the specific small hit is satisfied (that is, when the specific small hit B is derived 10 times), the main CPU 2201 ends the A time saving gaming state and sets the referenced variable PTTB. Return from the fluctuation pattern table A1 to the normal table. That is, in the section where the game progresses in the fluctuation pattern table B1 in which the progress speed of the game is relatively medium among the fluctuation pattern tables A1 to C1 at the start of the A time-shortening game state, and the fluctuation pattern table B1 is referred to. When the specific small hit is derived, for example, nine times, the game progresses on the variable PTTB (for example, the variable pattern table A1) in which the progress speed of the game is relatively slow. After that, when the end condition of the A time saving game state is satisfied, the A time saving game state ends and returns to the normal gaming state, and the referenced variable PTTB also becomes a normal table.

When the time saving type mode is "9", the variable PTTB set at the start of the A time saving game state is, for example, the variable pattern table C1. When the specific small hit A is derived twice or more and the specific small hit B is derived four times or more in the section in which the fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table C1, the main CPU 2201 determines the reference fluctuation PTTB. The variation pattern table C1 is changed to, for example, the variation pattern table B1. When the specific small hit A is derived twice or more and the specific small hit B is derived four times or more in the section in which the fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table B1, the main CPU 2201 determines the reference fluctuation PTTB. The variation pattern table B1 is changed to, for example, the variation pattern table A1. Then, when the time saving end condition related to the number of times of deriving the specific small hit is satisfied (that is, when the specific small hit A is derived 5 times or more and the specific small hit B is derived 10 times or more), the main CPU 2201 sets the A time saving gaming state. The variable PTTB that is terminated and referenced is returned from the variable pattern table A1 to the normal table. That is, at the start of the A time-shortening game state, the game progresses in the fluctuation pattern table C1 among the fluctuation pattern tables A1 to C1 in which the game progress speed is relatively fast, and the fluctuation PTTB in the section in which the fluctuation pattern table C1 is referred to. When the change condition is satisfied, the game progresses on the variable PTTB (for example, the variable pattern table B1) in which the progress speed of the game is relatively medium. When the variable PTTB change condition is satisfied in the section to which the variable pattern table B1 is referred to, the game progresses in the variable PTTB (for example, the variable pattern table A1) in which the game progress speed is relatively slow among the variable pattern tables A1 to C1. Will be done. After that, when the end condition of the A time saving game state is satisfied, the A time saving game state ends and returns to the normal gaming state, and the referenced variable PTTB also becomes a normal table.

When the time saving type mode is "10", the variable PTTB set at the start of the A time saving game state is, for example, the variable pattern table C1. When the specific small hit A is derived once or more and the specific small hit B is derived twice or more in the section in which the fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table C1, the main CPU 2201 determines the reference fluctuation PTTB. The variation pattern table C1 is changed to, for example, the variation pattern table A1. Then, when the time saving end condition related to the number of times of deriving the specific small hit is satisfied (that is, when the specific small hit A is derived twice or more and the specific small hit B is derived four times or more), the main CPU 2201 sets the A time saving gaming state. The variable PTTB that is terminated and referenced is returned from the variable pattern table A1 to the normal table. That is, at the start of the A time-shortening game state, the game progresses in the fluctuation pattern table C1 among the fluctuation pattern tables A1 to C1 in which the game progress speed is relatively fast, and the fluctuation PTTB in the section in which the fluctuation pattern table C1 is referred to. When the change condition is satisfied, the game progresses in the variable PTTB (for example, the variable pattern table A1) in which the game progress speed is relatively slow among the variable pattern tables A1 to C1. Then, when the time saving end condition is satisfied, the A time saving game state ends, and the referenced variable PTTB returns to the normal table 1.

When the time saving type mode is "11", the variable PTTB set at the start of the A time saving game state is, for example, the variable pattern table C1. In the time saving type mode "11", the referenced variable PTTB does not transition, and when the time saving end condition is satisfied, the A time saving game state ends. When the A time saving game state ends, the main CPU 2201 returns the referenced variable PTTB from the variable pattern table C1 to the normal table. That is, in the A time saving game state, the game progresses in the fluctuation pattern table C1 in which the game progress speed is relatively fast among the fluctuation pattern tables A1 to C1, and when the time saving end condition is satisfied, the A time saving game state ends. The variable PTTB that returns to the normal gaming state and is referred to also becomes the normal table 1.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, by providing a plurality of types of specific small hits that can be a trigger for changing the variable PTTB and a trigger for ending the A time-saving gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine is further thrilled by the time-saving gaming state. It becomes possible to play a game, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in a short-time game state.

Further, for example, it is more difficult to predict the end time of the time-saving gaming state by using the sub CPU 2301 to perform an effect in which it is not possible to grasp which of the specific small hit A and the specific small hit B is derived or it is difficult to grasp. Can be.

When the time saving type mode is "9", the time saving end condition related to the number of times of deriving the specific small hit is that the specific small hit A is derived 5 times and the specific small hit B is derived 10 times, and the time saving type mode is ". In the case of "10", the time-saving end condition related to the number of times the specific small hit is derived is that the specific small hit A is derived twice and the specific small hit B is derived four times. That is, the time-saving end condition related to the number of derivations of the specific small hit is the number of times that the number of derivations of the specific small hit A and the number of derivations of the specific small hit B are different, but the number is not limited to this, and the derivation of the specific small hit A is not limited to this. The number of times and the number of times the specific small hit B is derived may be the same.

[5-4. Combination of Examples]
The first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment described above can be executed independently, but can also be executed in combination with each other. That is, it is as described above that both the game described in the first embodiment and the game described in the second embodiment can be executed, but in addition to this, the game described in the first embodiment and the third. Both the game described in the embodiment can be executed, both the game described in the second embodiment and the game described in the third embodiment can be executed, and in the first embodiment. It is also possible to perform all of the game described, the game described in the second embodiment, and the game described in the third embodiment.

As an embodiment in which both the game described in the first embodiment and the game described in the third embodiment can be executed, for example, the first special symbol game is the game described in the first embodiment, and the second special symbol is used. This can be realized by using the game as the game described in the third embodiment. In this case, when the result of the first special symbol game is a big hit, the selected symbol commands "z0" to "z4" are distributed (see FIG. 124), and the time saving end condition and the time saving are performed according to these selected symbol commands. The type mode (any of the time saving type modes "1" to "5") is determined (see FIG. 125). On the other hand, when the result of the second special symbol game is a big hit or a V small hit, it is distributed to the selected symbol commands "z26" to "z31" (see FIG. 144), and the time is shortened according to these selected symbol commands. The condition and the time saving type mode (one of the time saving type modes "7" to "11") are determined (see FIG. 145). By doing so, when the result of the first special symbol game is a big hit, the game described in the first embodiment is performed, and when the result of the second special symbol is a big hit or a V small hit, the third The game described in the embodiment will be performed.

Further, as a mode in which both the game described in the first embodiment and the game described in the third embodiment can be executed, the following mode can be used. For example, the types of jackpots when the result of the first special symbol game is a jackpot are the selection symbol commands "z0" to "z4" shown in FIG. 124 and the selection symbol commands "20" to "24" shown in FIG. 144. It is all of. Further, when the result of the second special symbol game is a jackpot, the types of jackpots are all of the selection symbol command "z6" shown in FIG. 124 and the selection symbol command "26" shown in FIG. 144, and the second special symbol. The types of big hits when the result of the symbol game is V small hit and V winning is detected are the selection symbol commands "z7" to "z11" shown in FIG. 124 and the selection symbol commands "27" to "27" shown in FIG. 144. 31 "is all. By doing so, when the result of the first special symbol game is a big hit, the game described in the first embodiment or the game described in the third embodiment is performed according to the selected symbol command. .. Similarly, when the result of the second special symbol is a big hit or a V small hit, the game described in the first embodiment or the game described in the third embodiment is performed according to the selected symbol command.

Further, as an embodiment in which both the game described in the second embodiment and the game described in the third embodiment can be executed, both the game described in the first embodiment and the game described in the second embodiment are performed. Is similar to the feasible aspect. For example, when the number of remaining limiters is, for example, 6 to 10 times, the transition of the referenced variable PTTB is made to transition in the manner described in the third embodiment. When the number of remaining limiters is, for example, 2 to 5 times, the referenced variable PTTB is set as the variable pattern table B1 so that the referenced variable PTTB does not transition. Further, when the number of remaining limiters is, for example, one, the referenced variable PTTB is set as the variable pattern table A1 so that the referenced variable PTTB does not transition. By doing so, when the number of remaining limiters is, for example, 6 to 10 times, the reference variable PTTB is changed while the end time of the A time saving game state is not determined. While it is possible to perform a game in a thrilling time-saving game state such as predicting the end timing of the time-saving game state, the progress speed of the game can be gradually slowed down as the number of remaining limiters decreases. ..

Further, the games that can execute all of the games described in the first embodiment, the games described in the second embodiment, and the games described in the third embodiment are the games described in the first embodiment and the games described above. 3 This can be realized by providing a limiter function in a time-saving game state in addition to the game described in the third embodiment. For example, when the number of remaining limiters is, for example, 6 to 10 times, the variable PTTB referred to in the game in which both the game described in the first embodiment and the game described in the third embodiment can be executed. Make the transition. Then, when the number of remaining limiters is, for example, 2 to 5, and when the number of remaining limiters is, for example, 1, the reference variation pattern table is transitioned in the manner shown in FIG. 140. By doing so, the game described in the first embodiment, the game described in the second embodiment, and the game described in the third embodiment can all be executed.

[6. Expansion example]
Hereinafter, an extended example common to the above-mentioned first pachinko gaming machine to the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described. Since the reference numerals attached to each configuration differ depending on the first pachinko gaming machine to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the following description describes specific pachinko gaming machines (particularly the third pachinko gaming machine to the fifth). Unless the description is limited to the pachinko gaming machine), the reference numerals are omitted.

Further, in the extended example common to the first pachinko gaming machine to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the term "small hit" is used, the fifth pachinko gaming machine shall be read as "V small hit".

[6-1. Extended example of probabilistic control]
In the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a big hit, it is determined whether or not to set the probability change flag on according to the type of the big hit. , The number of probability changes is determined when the probability change flag is set to on, but the number of probability changes is not limited to this, and for example, the following aspects may be used.

For example, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, for example, it is determined whether or not a specific area provided in the jackpot has passed, and if it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific region, the jackpot is determined. It may be a so-called V probability change machine that sets the probability change flag on at the end of the game control process. In the above specific area, for example, the movable member operates in a specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process, so that the game ball can pass through or is easily opened, and the game ball cannot enter. It is possible to displace it into a possible or difficult closed state.

In such a V probability variable machine, for example, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107, the case where the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit and the case where the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit When the result is a big hit, the ease of passing the game ball to the above specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process, that is, the probability that the probability change flag is set to on at the end of the big hit game control process. It may be different.

FIG. 104 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in the specific round game during the execution of the big hit game control process of the extended example, and is (A) specified. The figure which shows the case where the opening mode of a region is a 1st opening mode, (B) the opening mode of a specific area is a 2nd opening mode, and (C) the opening mode of a specific area is a 3rd opening mode. Is. The first open mode and the second open mode are modes in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific region, and the third open mode is a mode in which the game ball is difficult to pass through the specific region. In the example shown in FIG. 104, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

Note that FIG. 104 shows a mode in which the large winning opening is opened for a long time after being short-opened, but the opening mode of the large winning opening is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 104 (A), in the first opening mode, the specific area is also open while the large winning opening is open, except for a predetermined time after the long opening of the large winning opening is started. It has become. Therefore, during the execution of the big hit game control process, it is easy for at least one of the plurality of game balls that have won the big prize opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, if no game ball has passed through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 104 (B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in the open state from the start of the short opening of the large winning opening to the end of the long opening of the large winning opening. ing. Therefore, it is extremely easy for at least one of the plurality of game balls that have won the big prize opening to pass through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process. That is, the probability change flag is set on very easily at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball has passed through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104 (C), in the third opening mode, a predetermined time during the short opening of the large winning opening and after the long opening of the large winning opening is started (both of these two times are short time). ), The specific area is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, even one of the plurality of gaming balls winning in the jackpot can pass through the specific area in either the first opening mode or the second opening mode. It is also difficult compared to. That is, it is difficult to turn on the probability change flag at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability change flag is turned on at the end of the big hit game control process. Set.

Note that FIG. 104 is an example of an opening mode of a specific area in which at least one of the plurality of game balls winning in the big winning opening is easily passed through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process. , An example of providing two modes, a first open mode and a second open mode, has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of open modes of the specific region in which at least one of the plurality of game balls winning in the jackpot is easy to pass through the specific region is limited to two modes. However, only one aspect may be used, or three or more modes may be used.

Further, in FIG. 104, an opening mode of a specific area in which it is difficult to pass through a specific area even if only one of a plurality of game balls winning a prize in the big winning opening is being executed during the jackpot game control process. As an example of the above, an example of providing the third opening mode has been described. However, during the execution of the big hit game control process, the number of open modes of the specific area where it is difficult to pass through the specific area even if only one of the plurality of game balls winning the big prize opening is 1. The mode is not limited to this, and two or more modes may be provided.

FIG. 105 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the extended example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 105, when the determination value data is "big hit determination value data" (when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit), the first special symbol and the second Special symbol selection The symbol command is selected as follows. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, for the selected symbol command, for example, "z0" is selected with a selection rate of 40%, and "z1" is selected with a selection rate of 10%. , "Z2" is selected with a selectivity of 50%. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, for the selected symbol command, for example, "z3" is selected with a selection rate of 15%, and "z4" is selected with a selection rate of 50%. , "Z5" is selected with a selectivity of 35%. Since FIG. 105 is only a diagram showing an extended example of the probability variation control, the determination value data does not include the "time saving hit judgment value data", but the judgment value data includes the "time saving hit judgment value data". It may be included.

FIG. 106 is an example of the jackpot type determination table in the extended example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 106, the type of jackpot (for example, the number of rounds, the opening mode of a specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (3R normal jackpot A) of the third opening mode. When the selected symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R normal jackpot A) of the third opening mode. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot A) of the first opening mode. When the selected symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R normal jackpot B) of the third opening mode. When the selected symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot B) of the first opening mode. When the selected symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot C) of the second opening mode. As described above, since the determination value data shown in FIG. 105 does not include the "time reduction hit determination value data", the type of "time reduction hit" is not shown in FIG. 106, but the determination value data includes. When the "time reduction hit determination value data" is included, it may be determined to be one of a plurality of types of time reduction hits.

According to FIGS. 104 to 106 above, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the type of big hit is determined to be 3R normal big hit A with a selection rate of 40%, and 10% is selected. The rate is determined to be 10R normal jackpot A, and the selectivity is determined to be 10R probability variable jackpot A. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined to be 10R normal jackpot B with a selection rate of 15% and 10R probability variation jackpot B with a selectivity of 50%. , 35 is determined to be a 10R probability variation jackpot C. In this way, depending on whether the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit or the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the probability change flag is set at the end of the big hit game control process. It is possible to make the probability of being set on different.

In a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to the mode in which the specific area is opened by time control as shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (C), and is described later, for example. As shown in FIG. 107, it may be in an open state according to the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening.

FIG. 107 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in the specific round game during the execution of the big hit game control process of the extended example (the specific area is the big winning). (Example) in which the opening mode is controlled based on the winning of the mouth, (A) the opening mode of the specific region is the first opening mode, and (B) the opening mode of the specific region is the second. It is a figure which shows the case of an open mode.

As shown in FIG. 107 (A), in the first opening mode of another example, after the large winning opening is opened, the first game ball wins in the large winning opening, and the large winning opening count is obtained. When the switch detects the winning of the first game ball, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time based on this detection. Then, when the second game ball wins in the big winning opening and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning opening count switch, the big winning opening is closed based on this detection. Until then, the specific area is open. Therefore, during the execution of the big hit game control process, it is easy for at least one of the plurality of game balls that have won the big prize opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball has passed through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), in the second opening mode of another example, after the large winning opening is opened, the first game ball wins in the large winning opening, and the large winning opening is won. Only when the winning of the first game ball is detected by the mouth count switch, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time. Then, even if the second game ball wins in the big winning opening and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning opening count switch, the specific area is until the winning opening is closed. Does not open and remains closed. Therefore, it is more difficult than the first opening mode to pass through a specific area even if only one of the plurality of game balls that have won a prize in the big prize opening is executed during the execution of the big hit game control. That is, it is difficult to turn on the probability change flag at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even in this case, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability changes at the end of the jackpot game control process. The flag is set to on.

In the above, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, an example in which the probability change flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. If the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process, the time saving flag may be set to on at the end of the big hit game control process. Such specifications are particularly effective in the case of a type 1 and type 2 mixer such as, for example, a third pachinko gaming machine to a fifth pachinko gaming machine.

Further, in the above, the same opening mode is used as the opening mode of the specific area depending on whether the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit or the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit. Although the example to be provided has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an opening mode dedicated to the first special symbol or an opening mode dedicated to the second special symbol may be provided.

Further, in the above, the passage of the game ball to the specific area is performed in both the case where the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit and the case where the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit. An example that can be determined in the difficult third aspect has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the result of the hit determination process of any one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit, at least one. The game ball may be configured to be determined only in an aspect (first aspect or second aspect) in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through a specific area.

Further, in the above, in the third aspect in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area is set twice at a predetermined time during the short opening of the large winning opening and after the long opening of the large winning opening is started. It has been open for a short time (both for a short time), but if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area may be opened once or multiple times. There may be.

In addition, the closure of a specific area is closed according to the passage of a predetermined opening time or the end of a round in which the specific area is opened, or is closed according to a specified number of large winning openings or winning a prize in a specific area. It may be controlled to do so. Further, one or a plurality of conditions for closing may be combined.

Further, the jackpot game state and the game state in which the probability variation control is executed (for example, the high probability time-shortening game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.) are set to a predetermined upper limit number of times (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number"). It may be a so-called limiter machine that is repeatedly executed alternately until it reaches the limit. In such a limiter machine, when the above-mentioned number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as "loop number") reaches a predetermined number of times, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is the game state in which the probability change control is not executed. It is controlled to (for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.). At this time, the number of loops is also reset. In such a gaming machine, the number of limiters may be a fixed number, for example, may be determined according to a symbol random value of a special symbol, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. Further, if it is a setting machine, the number of limiters may be different depending on the set value.

In the above, the so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which the probability variation control is executed are alternately and repeatedly executed until the number of limiters is reached has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the jackpot gaming state. , The gaming state in which the time reduction control is executed may be alternately and repeatedly executed until the number of limiters is reached. In particular, it is effective when it is a one-kind two-kind mixer such as, for example, a third pachinko gaming machine to a fifth pachinko gaming machine.

Further, in the case of the above-mentioned V probability change machine, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the game state in which the probability change control is executed is continued. Therefore, in such a V probability change machine, if the number of limiters is, for example, N times, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the Nth big hit game control process, it is assumed that the predetermined number of limiters has been reached. The game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to the game state in which the probability change control is not executed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, the game does not reach the predetermined number of limiters, but the game is played in the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process. Since the ball has not passed, even in such a case, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to the game state in which the probability change control is not executed. The same applies to the gaming machine in which the time saving flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process.

Further, after the jackpot game control process is completed, the probability variation control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are played (for example, a high-accuracy time-shortening game state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, etc.). It may be a so-called ST machine that shifts to a gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.) in which the probability variation control is not executed when the special symbol game is played a number of times. In such a gaming machine, the number of special symbol games in which the probability variation control is executed (hereinafter, referred to as “ST number”) may be a fixed number or may be different each time. Further, if it is a setting machine, the expected value of the number of STs may be different depending on the set value. Further, for example, it may be a so-called fall type gaming machine in which a fall lottery is performed and the probability variation control is completed based on the result of the fall lottery. For example, when the gaming ball passes through a specific area during the big hit gaming state. It may be a so-called V probability variation type gaming machine in which probability variation control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

[6-2. Extended example of time saving control]
In the first pachinko gaming machine to the thirteenth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the C time saving control can be executed after the big hit game control processing is completed. However, the lottery for "time saving hit" is not limited to being performed in the hit determination process of the special symbol.

For example, among the random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, a specific random value different from the special symbol hit determination random value (for example, a special symbol hit determination random value, a special symbol symbol). (Random value, etc.) may be used to perform the time saving winning determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the time saving control, in addition to the hit determination processing for the special symbol. When the time saving winning judgment is performed when the result of the hit judgment processing of the special symbol is a small hit or a loss, for example, the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening is a specific symbol. When it is a random value, it can be determined to be a "time saving hit" in which the time saving control is executed. In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, the time saving winning determination process may be performed.

Further, when the time saving winning determination processing is performed separately from the special symbol hit determination processing, the time saving winning determination processing may be executed prior to the special symbol hit determination processing in the same frame.

Further, when the above-mentioned time-saving winning determination processing is performed, a random number for determining the time-saving winning, which is exclusively used for the time-saving winning determination processing, is generated in a predetermined range, and for example, the time-saving winning is applied based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port. A random number value may be extracted, and the time-saving winning determination process may be performed using the extracted random number value for time-saving winning.

Further, it is not essential that the random number value used for the time saving winning determination process is extracted based on the winning of the game ball at the starting opening, and it is not essential to extract it in other areas (for example, general winning opening, small hit winning opening, etc.). It may be extracted based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening, etc.). Further, for example, a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time saving winning determination processing is provided, and a random number value to be used for the time saving winning determination processing is extracted based on, for example, that the game ball has passed through this dedicated area. You may do so.

By the way, for example, when the time saving winning determination processing and the special symbol hit determination processing are executed at different timings, the time saving winning determination processing is performed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the stop display mode indicating the big hit is derived when the confirmation display is performed. Is executed, and the result of this time saving hit determination process may be "time saving hit". In such a case, the main CPU may forcibly derive, for example, a display mode indicating "time saving loss" even though the result of the time saving winning determination process is "time saving hit".

In addition, the sub CPU can visually grasp whether the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit" or "time saving loss", or an easy effect image (for example, a variation effect of a decorative pattern or a character). It is preferable to execute control to display the display effect (such as display effect by) on the display device. In this case, since the result of the time saving winning determination processing is displayed on the display device separately from the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In addition, it is possible to visually grasp whether the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit" or "time saving loss", or instead of displaying an easy effect image on the display device, the time saving winning judgment is made. A display device that displays an effect image (for example, a change effect of a decorative pattern, a display effect by a character, etc.) that is impossible or difficult to grasp from the appearance whether the result of processing is a "time reduction hit" or a "time reduction loss". You may perform the control to display in. In this case, it is possible to maintain the interest until the result of the time saving winning determination process is disclosed.

Further, in a general pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, the sub CPU gives, for example, a right-handed instruction as a method of launching a game ball which is regarded as a normal game mode in the big hit game state. It is controlled so that the effect image indicating the above is displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device). In this respect, in this embodiment, even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is not a big hit, when the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the sub CPU is executed when the time reduction control is executed. As a method of launching a game ball, which is regarded as a regular game mode, control is performed so that, for example, an effect image indicating a right-handed instruction is displayed on a display device. However, when the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the display device is always displayed with an effect image showing the method of launching the game ball, which is regarded as a normal game mode when the time reduction control is executed. However, it may be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, if the number of time reductions set based on "time reduction hit" is more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times or more), it is displayed, and if it is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, less than 2 times), it is not displayed. You may do so. The above-mentioned specific condition is not limited to the condition of the number of time reductions, and may be an arbitrary condition as appropriate.

Further, when the time saving winning determination processing is executed before the hit determination processing of the special symbol is executed, the sub CPU is in the situation where the time saving hit is set (that is, the time saving flag is set to ON). ) May be controlled to display an effect image that can be grasped or easily grasped by the appearance on the display device, whether or not the hit determination process of the special symbol is executed.

It should be noted that the type of random value used for the time-saving win judgment process, the extraction timing of the random value used for the time-saving win judgment process, the condition for determining the time-saving hit in the time-saving win judgment process, the execution timing of the time-saving win judgment process, and the time-saving win judgment process. The game state that can be executed, the mode of the time saving game state, the time saving number set at the time saving hit, the start timing of the time saving game state, the end timing of the time saving game state, the time saving number rewriting timing, the time saving hit probability, and the time saving winning judgment. The following is a summary of the processes related to time saving, such as displaying the results of the processes.

(Type of random value used for time saving winning judgment processing)
The random value used for the time saving winning judgment processing is, for example, a random value for determining a special symbol hit, a random value for determining a special symbol, a random value for determining a normal hit, a random value for determining a normal symbol, a random value for determining a special symbol fall, and a random value for determining a fall. It may be any one of a plurality of types of random values such as a dedicated time-saving winning determination random value. Further, if it is a setting machine, when the setting is changed, the time saving winning determination process may be performed using the changed setting value.

Further, the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing is not limited to one type (for example, only the time saving winning judgment random value), and a plurality of types of random values (for example, a special symbol hit judgment random value and a symbol determination random value). ) May be used to determine.

(Extraction timing of random value used for time saving winning judgment processing)
The extraction timing of the random number value used for the time saving hit judgment process is the game ball to the passing gate that triggers the execution of the hit judgment process of the normal symbol when the game ball wins the starting port that triggers the hit judgment process of the special symbol. It may be any timing, such as when the game ball passes through the dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time saving winning determination process. In addition, the extraction of the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment process may be performed based on the winning of a specific winning opening or the like in which the prize ball is paid out, or a specific gate or a specific out where the prize ball is not paid out. It may be done based on the passage to the mouth or the like.

In addition, when the random value for the time saving winning judgment processing is extracted based on the winning (passing) of the game ball to the starting opening, when the game ball wins in either the first starting opening or the second starting opening. Even if there is, the random value for determining the time saving win may be extracted, or the random value for determining the time saving winning may be extracted only when the game ball wins at one of the specific starting openings.

(Conditions for determining time reduction hit in the time reduction hit determination process)
When the time-saving winning judgment processing is performed using the extracted time-saving winning judgment processing random value, the extracted time-saving winning judgment random value is a specific time-saving winning judgment random value (for example, specific time-saving winning judgment value data). It is advisable to make it judged as a time saving hit at a certain time. In addition, when executing the time saving winning judgment processing using the special symbol hit judgment random value, the time saving is shortened when it is a specific loss judgment value data, a specific small hit judgment value data and / or a specific big hit judgment value data. It is good to judge it as a hit. In addition, when executing the time saving hit determination process using the symbol random value of the special symbol, it is preferable to determine that it is a time saving hit when it is a specific lost symbol, a specific small hit symbol, or a specific big hit symbol. .. Further, when the time saving hit determination process is executed using the special symbol fall determination random value, it is preferable that the time saving hit is determined when the specific special symbol fall determination random value value data is used. Further, when the time saving winning determination process is executed using the changed setting value, it is preferable that the time saving hit is determined when the setting value is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies to the case where the time saving winning judgment processing is performed using the normal hit determination random value or the normal symbol determination random value. Furthermore, the conditions for determining the time reduction hit in the time reduction winning determination process are not limited to the above conditions, and can be arbitrarily determined to various conditions.

In the third pachinko gaming machine to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, even if the result of the time saving hit determination processing is "time saving hit", the hit determination process of the special symbol (see, for example, S2023 in FIG. 95). If the result of the above is the opening of the accessory and the gaming ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 is opened passes through the V winning opening 2155, the time is shortened according to the type of opening of the accessory. It is advisable to determine whether or not control is executed and the number of time reductions. Then, even though the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory and the V attacker 2152 is opened, the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the big hit game control process is executed. If this is not the case, the main CPU 2201 may determine whether or not to execute the time reduction control and the number of time reductions based on the "time reduction hit" if the result of the time reduction winning determination process is "time reduction hit". However, the game in which the result of the time saving hit determination processing is "time saving loss", the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory, and the V attacker 2152 is opened, the game enters the V winning device 2150. If the ball does not pass through the V winning opening 2155, the time saving control is not executed.

(Execution timing of time saving winning judgment processing)
When the time saving winning judgment process is executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol using the random value for the time saving winning judgment acquired based on the winning (passing) of the game ball at the starting port, the main CPU performs the start information of the special symbol. Similarly, it is advisable to reserve the acquired random number value for determining the time reduction.

Further, the main CPU may execute the time saving winning determination process immediately (for example, before it is held) when the random number value to be used for the time saving winning determination processing is extracted, or the extracted random number value is reserved. The time saving winning determination processing may be executed until the variable display of the special symbol is started, or the time saving winning determination processing may be executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol.

(Game state in which the time saving winning judgment process can be executed)
The time reduction winning determination process may be executed in any of the normal game state, the high accuracy time reduction game state, the high accuracy non-time reduction game state, and the time reduction game state, and the time reduction control may not be executed in the game state (for example, normal). It may be executed only in the gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, etc.). Further, for example, conditions for executing the time-saving winning determination process, such as executing the time-saving winning determination process in any game state or executing the time-saving winning determination process only in a specific gaming state, are set in advance. When the specified conditions are satisfied, the time saving winning determination process may be executed.

(Mode of time saving control)
The mode of the time saving control executed according to the type of the jackpot and the mode of the time saving control executed according to the result of the time saving winning determination process may be the same mode or different modes. For example, a first time saving flag and a second time saving flag are prepared, and when the time saving control is executed according to the jackpot type, the first time saving flag is set to on and based on the result of the time saving winning determination processing. When the time saving control is executed, the second time saving flag may be set to on. In this case, it is preferable to execute the time saving control having different functions depending on whether the first time saving flag is set to on and the second time saving flag is set to on. For example, when the first time saving flag is set to on, both the special figure shortening control and the electric support control are performed, and when the second time saving flag is set to on, the special figure shortening control and the electric support are performed. Only one of the controls can be performed. When the first time saving flag is set to on, the control is performed in the first time saving game state in which only the special figure shortening control is performed among the special figure shortening control and the electric support control, and the second time saving flag is turned on. When set to, it may be controlled to the second time-shortening gaming state in which only the electric support control is performed among the special figure shortening control and the electric support control. However, which of the plurality of time saving flags is set to be turned on is not limited to the above, and may be determined based on, for example, the result of the time saving winning determination processing, or the time saving winning determination processing is executed. It may be decided according to the game state at the time of being played.

(Time reduction number set at the time of time reduction hit)
It is preferable that the number of time reductions set when the result of the time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit" is determined according to the gaming state when the time reduction winning determination processing is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a plurality of time saving winning judgment random numbers are specified as time saving hit judgment value data, the set time saving number of times is set to the gaming state when the time saving winning judgment processing is performed. Alternatively or in addition, it may be determined according to the extracted random value for determining the time saving. For example, if the random number value for determining the time reduction hit, which is extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, is the first time reduction hit determination value data, the number of time reductions is determined to be "100", and the second time reduction is performed. In the case of hit determination value data, it corresponds to determining the number of time reductions to "50".

Further, even in a gaming state in which the time saving control is executed (for example, a highly accurate time saving gaming state, a time saving gaming state, etc.), the time saving winning determination process is executed, and the result of this time saving winning determination process is "time saving hit". In the case of ", the main CPU may newly set the number of time reductions determined based on the" time reduction hit "instead of the number of time reductions remaining (that is, reset the time reduction remaining number). In this case, the degree of profit for the player changes depending on whether the number of times of time reduction newly set is larger or less than the number of times of time reduction remaining, and the range of gameplay is widened. It is possible to have a hobby and enhance the interest.

Further, even in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time reduction game state, the time reduction game state, etc.), the time reduction winning determination processing is executed, and the result of this time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". In the case of ", the main CPU may add the number of time reductions determined based on the" time reduction hit "to the remaining number of time reductions. In this case, since the number of remaining time reductions is not less than the current number of remaining time reductions, the player can play the game with peace of mind in the gaming state in which the time reduction control is executed.

Further, even in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time reduction game state, the time reduction game state, etc.), the time reduction winning determination processing is executed, and the result of this time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". In the case of ", the main CPU newly sets the time reduction number determined based on the" time reduction hit "instead of the time reduction remaining number, and the time reduction number determined based on the" time reduction hit "is the time reduction remaining number. Of the processes to be added to the number of times, one of them may be determined in advance, and the number of time reductions may be set in an embodiment satisfying the predetermined conditions.

In the pachinko gaming machine in which the time saving control having different functions is executed when the first time saving flag is set to on and when the second time saving flag is set to on, the time saving winning determination process is performed. When the result of is "time saving hit", the main CPU has a time saving of a function different from the case where the time saving control during execution and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are the time saving control of the same function. The process of setting the number of time reductions may be changed depending on the case of control. For example, when the time saving control during execution and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are the time saving controls having the same function, the time saving number determined based on the "time saving hit" is used as the remaining time saving number. If the time saving control that is added and executed and the time saving control that is executed based on the "time saving hit" are different functions, the time saving control is based on the "time saving hit" instead of the remaining number of times that the time saving is being executed. The number of time reductions determined in the above process may be newly set (that is, the remaining number of time reductions may be reset). In addition, when the time saving control during execution and the time saving control executed based on "time saving hit" are different functions, after all the remaining times during execution are exhausted, the time saving based on "time saving hit" is performed. Control may be performed.

In addition, when the number of time reductions is set based on the result of the time reduction winning determination process being "time reduction hit", the number of time reductions may be set to "0". That is, when the number of times of time reduction to be set is determined to be "0", the time reduction flag is set to on even though the result of the time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". Further, when the result of the time reduction winning determination process performed during the execution of the time reduction control is "time reduction hit" and the number of time reductions is set to "0", the execution time reduction control is terminated.

(Start timing of time reduction control)
The start timing of the time reduction control executed based on the result of the time reduction winning determination process being "time reduction hit" can be the end time of the special symbol game. For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss, the time reduction control can be started based on the elapse of the special symbol determination time for determining the special symbol. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a small hit, the time saving control can be started based on the end of the small hit game control process. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, the time saving control can be started based on the end of the big hit game control process.

The start timing of the time saving control executed based on the result of the time saving winning determination processing is the end time of the special symbol game, and the time saving winning determination processing is the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the same frame. If the result of the time saving hit judgment process is "time saving hit", if the result of the special symbol hit judgment processing is a big hit, "time saving hit" is invalidated ("time saving hit"). It is preferable that the time saving flag is not set on based on the above, and the time saving flag is set on based on the hit time selection symbol command (the time saving flag may not be set on depending on the type of big hit).

Further, the start timing of the time reduction control executed based on the result of the time reduction hit determination process is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the time saving winning determination processing is performed prior to the special symbol hit determination processing in the same frame, the time saving control is started immediately (before the special symbol hit determination processing is performed) based on the result of the time saving winning determination processing. You may. In this case, the game state (that is, whether or not the time saving control is executed) may differ between the time of extracting the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing and the time of executing the time saving winning judgment processing, which can enhance the interest. Will be.

Further, the start timing of the time reduction control to be executed based on the result of the time reduction winning determination process being "time reduction hit" may be set after a predetermined number of games have been executed. In this case, after the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the sub CPU executes a fanning effect of whether or not the time reduction control is started until the time reduction control is started. It will be possible to enhance the interest.

In the third pachinko gaming machine to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the jackpot game control is executed based on the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol being a jackpot (a jackpot in which the time saving control is executed). , It is preferable to start the time saving control based on the big hit based on the end of the big hit game control. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory (the opening of the accessory for which the time reduction control is executed) and the V attacker 2152 is opened, the game ball passes through the V winning opening 2155. Even when the jackpot game control is executed due to the detection, it is preferable to start the time saving control based on the end of the jackpot game control. Further, the V attacker 2152 is released based on the fact that the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 95) is the accessory opening hit. Nevertheless, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the big hit game control is not executed, the main CPU is based on the "time saving hit" based on the opening / closing winning opening 2151 being closed. It is advisable to start the time reduction control.

(End timing of time-saving game state)
The timing at which the time reduction game state ends is, for example, "when the variable display of the special symbol is executed over the set number of time reductions in the game state where the time reduction control is executed" and "in the game state where the time reduction control is executed". , When the jackpot game state is controlled based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol "or" When the number of time reductions is set to 0 even though the result of the time reduction hit determination process is a time reduction hit " And so on.

If the small hit game control process is executed based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed, the time reduction control continues even after the small hit game control process is completed. Will be executed.

In the third pachinko gaming machine to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the stop symbol mode indicating that the hit determination process of the special symbol is the accessory opening hit is derived during the execution of the time saving control. When the V-attacker 2152 operates and the open / close winning opening 2151 is opened, but the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control process is not started, the main CPU 2201 opens / closes the winning opening. Even after the 2151 is closed, the time saving control is continuously executed.

(Rewriting the number of time reductions)
When the time saving winning determination process is executed in the gaming state (for example, high accuracy time saving gaming state, time saving gaming state, etc.) in which the time saving control is executed, and the result of this time saving winning determination processing is "time saving hit", the main CPU , The time reduction number may be rewritten, or the time reduction number may not be rewritten (that is, the time reduction control may be executed until the time reduction number in the running time reduction control is exhausted).

When rewriting the number of time reductions, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of time reductions determined based on the "time reduction hit" when the number of time reductions in the running time reduction control is exhausted. It may be set at the time of executing the hit determination process of the special symbol, at the start or stop of the variable display of the special symbol, at the time of the time saving winning determination process, or at various timings. Can be set. When setting at the time of the time reduction winning determination process, the number of time reductions determined based on the "time reduction hit" is overwritten with the number of time reductions in the running time reduction control. Further, the number of time reductions may be set in any of "rewriting the number of time reductions" and "adding to the previous number of time reductions" in a manner satisfying the predetermined conditions.

(Probability of shortening the time)
When the time saving winning determination process is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening or the second starting opening, the time saving winning determination process performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening (hereinafter, "No. 1"). The time-saving winning determination process (hereinafter referred to as "the second time-saving winning determination process") and the time-saving winning determination process (hereinafter referred to as "the second time-saving winning determination process") performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening. May be different. For example, the time saving hit probability when the second time saving winning determination process is performed may be higher than the time saving hit probability when the first time saving winning determination process is performed, or the second time saving winning determination process may be performed. The time saving hit probability when the first time saving hit determination process is performed may be higher than the time saving hit probability in the case of being broken, or the time saving winning determination process when the first time saving winning determination process is performed and the second time saving winning determination process. The probability of hitting the time reduction may be the same or almost the same as that of the case where.

(Display of the result of the time saving winning judgment process)
The number of time reductions determined based on the time reduction winning judgment result display unit that displays the result of the time reduction winning judgment processing (whether it is a time reduction hit or the time reduction loss) and / and the result of the time reduction winning judgment processing (time reduction hit). May be provided with a winning time reduction number display unit to display. The time reduction winning determination result display unit and / and the winning time reduction number display unit may be provided in an LED display group provided with a special symbol display unit or the like, and may be controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub CPU may display the result of the time reduction winning determination process and / or the number of time reductions determined based on the time reduction hit on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. good.

(interval)
When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss and the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the main CPU sets the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game. The interval time may be longer than the above interval time when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss and the result of the time reduction hit determination process is a “time reduction loss”. Since the variable display of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol, in this case, the sub CPU displays, for example, an effect image indicating that it is a "time saving hit" until the above interval time elapses. It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is the winning of the accessory opening and the big hit game control processing is not executed based on the opening of the accessory. The main CPU 2201 determines the interval time after the end of the operation for opening the accessory when the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit", and the above when the result of the time saving winning determination process is "time saving loss". It may be longer than the interval time of, and may be the same or substantially the same time.

[6-3. Extended example related to management of game media]
The first pachinko gaming machine to the thirteenth pachinko gaming machine described in the present specification play a game using a game medium, and a privilege (for example, a prize ball, prize data, etc.) is given based on the result of the game. It can be applied to all the given forms of gaming machines. That is, if the game is played by launching or throwing a game medium (for example, a game ball, a medal, etc.) by the physical movement of the player, and the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game. Instead, the main control circuit itself may be capable of electromagnetically managing the game medium owned by the player and performing a game performed by circulating the enclosed game ball or a game performed without a medal. Further, it may be a game medium management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit and manages the game medium that electromagnetically manages the game medium owned by the player.

In the case of a gaming machine that circulates the enclosed gaming balls to play a game, the gaming balls as a gaming medium are configured to be playable without being discharged to the outside, so that the prize balls will be paid out when a prize is won. Instead, prize ball data as a game medium is given. In this specification, the "game value to be paid out" includes the meaning of both the prize ball and the prize ball data. For example, when a prize is won in a prize opening with 15 prize balls, prize ball data having a value corresponding to the 15 prize balls is given to the enclosed gaming machine. Further, the game value is not necessarily limited to the prize ball and the prize ball data, and may be any one corresponding to the prize ball and the prize ball data.

Further, when the gaming medium management device connected to the main control circuit manages the gaming medium management device, the gaming medium management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the gaming machine, and is an external device (not shown). It is connected to the two-way communication function via a game medium handling device and a predetermined interface, and provides a game medium necessary for a game medium lending operation (that is, a player performs a game medium loading operation). When the winning combination related to the payout of the gaming medium is won (the winning combination is established), the payout operation of the gaming medium (that is, the payout of the gaming medium to the player is performed, and the necessary gaming medium is provided. It may be possible to perform an operation of acquiring the game) or electromagnetically recording the game medium used for the game. Further, the gaming medium management device not only manages the actual number of gaming media, but also displays the number of gaming media possessed on the front of the pachinko gaming machine, for example, based on the management result of the number of gaming media. A medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device may be managed. That is, the game medium management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and also has a game. In addition to the case where a person directly operates the game medium, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from mobile terminals, other operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the game medium handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game medium handling device to the game medium management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium recording the number of game media. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the gaming media are transmitted to the gaming media handling device, but only the number of gaming media desired by the player is transmitted on the gaming machine or the gaming media handling device side, and the gaming medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, the recording medium is not limited to being discharged, and cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall, storing it in the member recording medium, and making it possible to replay the game at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device can be executed by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that only the player can know may be set, or the player may be recorded by an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to a pachinko gaming machine is described, but the game medium management device is also used in a pachi-slot machine, a slot machine using a game ball, and an enclosed game machine. It can also be provided so that the player's game medium is managed.

As described above, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can it be reduced, but it can also prevent the player from coming into direct contact with the gaming medium, improving the gaming environment, reducing noise, and reducing the power consumption of the gaming machine by reducing the number of parts. It will also be. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, a communication cable is used to transmit data on an enclosed game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and an increase / decrease in the game medium due to consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected so as to be able to transmit and receive by an optical signal via an optical signal, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be described below. In the enclosed gaming machine, the launching device is located above the gaming area and launches a gaming ball as a gaming medium from above with respect to the gaming area. When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid, and the ball feed pestle pushes the game ball in the standby state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When the game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. As described above, since the gaming ball is configured to be launched from above with respect to the gaming area, the enclosed gaming machine can avoid a so-called return ball (foul ball). Then, the game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The gaming balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed gaming machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of gaming balls are configured to circulate in a series of paths in the gaming machine. Further, without providing a ball polishing device, a discharge mechanism for discharging the game ball to the outside of the game machine and a taking-in mechanism for taking the game ball polished outside the game machine into the inside of the game machine are provided. May be good. In this case, the capture mechanism may be provided with a gutter dedicated to capture, or may be configured to capture from a winning opening provided in the game area.

In the enclosed gaming machine, since the gaming ball is not discharged to the outside of the gaming machine, an upper plate or a lower plate for temporarily holding the gaming ball is not provided. Since the gaming ball is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed gaming machine, the gaming ball is not actually in the player's hand, and the gaming ball does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In the enclosed gaming machine, the player starts the game after obtaining a ball by lending from the gaming medium management device. Here, obtaining a possession ball means that the player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. Then, when the game ball is launched from the launching device, the possessed ball is consumed and the number of possessed balls decreases. Further, as the game balls pass through each winning opening provided in the game area, the number of balls to be paid out is increased according to the conditions set according to the winning openings, and the number of balls held increases. Furthermore, the number of balls held will increase by lending from the game medium management device. Further, for example, at the end of the game, the entire game value (that is, the ball held) stored in the enclosed gaming machine may be settled, or a part of the ball held may be transmitted to the game medium management device. When all or part of the balls held is integrated into the game value managed by the game medium management device, the game value stored in the enclosed gaming machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls held is reduced. .. Furthermore, there is no concept of a foul ball in a type of gaming machine in which a gaming ball is launched from above the gaming area, but a foul ball is generated when a gaming ball is launched from below as in a conventional gaming machine. sell. Therefore, in the case of a gaming machine of a type in which a gaming ball is launched from below, the number of balls held increases or decreases depending on whether or not a foul ball is generated. In addition, "consumption, lending and paying out of game media" means that the ball is consumed, lent out and paid out. In addition, "increase / decrease in game media" means that the number of balls held increases / decreases depending on consumption, lending, and payout. Further, the "data on the increase / decrease in the game medium due to the consumption, lending and payout of the game medium" is the data on the decrease in the number of balls held due to the launch of the game ball and the increase in the number of balls held due to the lending and paying out.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of the game ball through each winning opening or the like. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the number of game balls to be paid out is added to the number of balls held. Also, when the game ball is launched, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game medium management device by the operation of the player. In addition, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is located at the upper part of the gaming machine, and accepts requests for conversion (ball lending) from the game value managed by the gaming medium management device to possession balls (ball lending) and counting (return) of possession balls. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held. Here, the "game value" refers to money / banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into holding balls by a game media management device. In the second embodiment, the game medium management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange or the like in a game field or the like where a game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, with this backup power supply, for example, the door frame opening may be continuously detected by the door opening sensor. As a result, it is possible to prevent cheating at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be output to the liquid crystal display device of the gaming machine or the like.

The enclosed gaming machine may be configured so that the player cannot touch the gaming ball. For example, the enclosed gaming machine is of a type in which the gaming ball is circulated only by the gaming machine without being circulated by the island equipment. , And the type in which the gaming ball circulates in the island equipment but the player cannot touch the gaming ball, etc. are also included in the enclosed gaming machine.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit / receive data (transmission signal) to / from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data to be transmitted and received are the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when the transmission source transmits a transmission signal with either one of the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device as the transmission source and the other as the transmission destination, the transmission destination receiving the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. The confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal to determine whether or not they are the same, so that the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with. You can confirm that it has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification of transmission / reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation unit is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit. It may have a demodulation unit for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device is read, it is difficult to decipher this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device is transmitted. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification.

Further, in the game system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, is set aside from the confirmation signal. It may be sent to the sender.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is not only confirmed that the regular signal has been transmitted / received, but also that the regular signal has been transmitted / received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent activities. Further, instead of directly connecting the main control circuit and the game medium management device by communication, a frame control circuit is provided between the main control circuit and the game medium management device, and the main control circuit is connected to the main control circuit via the frame control circuit. The communication connection with the game medium management device may be made. Further, a launch control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit, and a frame control circuit may be provided between the launch control circuit and the game medium management device. In this case, the error control of the main control circuit and the launch control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

Further, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU stops at the symbol combination in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol indicate the jackpot symbol. Process so that there is nothing to do.

More specifically, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the jackpot symbol, the other Control is performed to forcibly stop the special symbol of No. 1 with a symbol combination indicating a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the jackpot symbol, the game shifts from the general gaming state to the jackpot gaming state as described above. In this jackpot gaming state, the start condition of the first special symbol and the start of the second special symbol are started. None of the conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the general game is performed. The timekeeping of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted based on the transition from the state to the small hit gaming state (stopped at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol), and the transition from the small hit gaming state to the general gaming state ( Based on the end of the small hit game), the process of restarting the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the general gaming state shifts to the small hit gaming state as described above. In this small hit gaming state, the start condition of the first special symbol and the second special None of the symbol start conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed and one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the main CPU is in the variable display. Regarding the other special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol composed of the LED group is apparently performed in the same manner as during the variable display, but the timing of the fluctuation time is interrupted as described above.

[6-4. Status display of being in a time-saving game state]
When controlled to the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, or the C time-saving game state, a time-saving state display unit indicating that the time-saving game state may be provided. The time saving state display unit may be provided in an LED display group provided with a special symbol display unit or the like so as to be controlled by the main CPU.

Further, when a time-saving state display unit indicating that the game is in the time-saving game state is provided, an A time-saving state display unit indicating that the game is in the A time-saving game state, a B time-saving state display unit indicating that the game is in the B time-saving game state, and a B time-saving state display unit indicating that the game is in the B time-saving game state. A C time saving state display unit indicating that the game is in the C time saving game state may be provided. In this case, the main CPU controls the A time saving state display unit so as to display a specific mode in which it can be visually grasped that the A time saving game state is in the A time saving game state, and if it is the B time saving game state, the main CPU controls the A time saving state display unit. , The B time saving state display unit is controlled so that a specific mode that can grasp the B time saving gaming state by appearance is displayed, and if it is the C time saving gaming state, the C time saving gaming state can be grasped by appearance. It is preferable to control the C time saving state display unit so that the mode is displayed. Further, when a plurality of time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, the main CPU may display all of the time-saving state display units executed in an overlapping manner.

Further, even if the A time saving state display unit, the B time saving state display unit, and the C time saving state display unit are not provided respectively, for example, the time saving gaming state having the same time saving performance may be a common time saving state display unit. For example, if the time saving performance in the B time saving game state and the time saving performance in the C time saving gaming state are the same, and these time saving performances are different from the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state, it means that the time saving performance is A. It is preferable to provide a time saving state display unit and a BC common time saving state display unit indicating that the B time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state is provided so as to be controlled by the main CPU.

Further, the sub CPU displays, for example, in the display area of a liquid crystal display device or the like, the time-saving game state, the type of the time-saving game state in the case of the time-saving game state, and / and the time-saving number of times (including the time-saving remaining number of times). You may try to do it.

[6-5. Outer end signal about time-saving game state]
When controlled to the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state, the main CPU sends a time saving signal indicating the time saving game state from the external terminal board 4184 to the outside (for example, an island computer). In this case, a time saving signal that does not distinguish between the types of the time saving gaming state may be transmitted, or a signal indicating which time saving gaming state is controlled, that is, the time saving gaming state. You may send by distinguishing the type. When transmitting the time saving signal by distinguishing the types of the time saving game state, the main CPU transmits, for example, the A time saving signal in the case of the A time saving game state, and the B time saving signal in the case of the B time saving game state. Is transmitted, and if the game is in the C time reduction game state, the C time reduction signal is transmitted. Further, when a plurality of time saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, the main CPU may transmit a plurality of executed time saving signals.

Further, for the time-saving gaming states having the same time-saving performance, a common time-saving signal may be transmitted. For example, if the time saving performance in the B time saving game state and the time saving performance in the C time saving gaming state are the same, and these time saving performances are different from the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state, the main CPU is in the A time saving gaming state. In this case, the A time saving signal may be transmitted, and in the case of the B time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, the BC common time saving signal may be transmitted.

[6-6. Interval in case of "time saving hit"]
When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU loses the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game, and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost. It may be longer than the above interval time in the case. Since the variable display of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol, in this case, the sub CPU displays, for example, an effect image indicating that it is a "time saving hit" until the above interval time elapses. It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU stops the variable display of the special symbol in the game. The interval time may be longer than when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a bonus hit and the jackpot game control process is not executed based on this bonus hit, the same or abbreviated. It may be the same time.

[7. Addendum]
[7-1. Appendix 1]
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a variable display of a symbol is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied and the result of a hit determination is displayed. When the variable display of the symbol is stopped and a big hit is displayed as a result of the hit determination, the game shifts to the big hit game state.

As this type of gaming machine, in addition to the normal gaming state, a gaming machine controlled to a time-saving gaming state in which the frequency of satisfying a predetermined condition is increased is known. As a gaming machine controlled to a time-saving gaming state, one that ends when a big hit is displayed and one that ends when a variable display of a symbol is performed a predetermined number of times is known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-170697 discloses a gaming machine that may end when the variable display of a symbol is performed 50 times, or may end when the variable display of a symbol is performed 100 times. Has been done.

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-170697, the time-saving gaming state ends when the variable display of the symbol is performed 50 times, and the time-saving gaming state ends when the variable display of the symbol is performed 100 times. Although it is possible to enhance the interest of the game, there is a risk that the game will be monotonous because the end of the time saving is determined only by the number of times the variable display of the symbol is performed.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest.

In this respect, the gaming machine of Appendix 1 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A first variable display game execution means (for example, main CPU 2201) capable of executing a first variable display game (for example, a first special symbol game) based on the satisfaction of the first start condition, and
A second variable display game executing means (for example, main) capable of executing a second variable display game (for example, a second special symbol game) based on the establishment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition. CPU2201) and
The processing of the determination means (for example, S2023) for determining whether or not the execution result of the first variation display game or the second variation display game satisfies a predetermined special condition (for example, big hit derivation, small hit derivation). The main CPU 2201) to be executed and
When it is determined by the determination means that the special condition is satisfied, the player is given a predetermined game value after the end of the first variation display game or the second variation display game determined to satisfy the special condition. A special game state control means (for example, main CPU 2201) capable of shifting to a possible special game state (for example, a big hit game state), and
A game state control means (for example, main CPU 2201) for controlling a game state in which the first variable display game or the second variable display game can be executed is provided.
The game state control means
It is possible to control to any one of the game states including at least a normal game state and a specific game state (for example, a time-saving game state) in which the second start condition is relatively more likely to be satisfied than the normal game state.
When any one of a plurality of predetermined conditions is satisfied while being controlled to the specific gaming state, the normal gaming state can be controlled.
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, when one of a plurality of predetermined conditions is satisfied while being controlled to the specific gaming state, the normal gaming state can be controlled, so that the specific gaming state ends. The player pays close attention to whether or not to play the game, and it is possible to improve the playability in the specific game state and enhance the interest.

(2) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
The plurality of predetermined conditions are
The first condition (for example, condition A) on the condition that the number of executions of the first variable display game and the second variable display game reaches the first number (for example, 10 times), and
It is a condition that the number of executions of any of the first variable display game and the second variable display game reaches the second number (for example, 10 times of the first special symbol game and 1 time of the second special symbol game). It is preferable to include the second condition (for example, the condition B or the condition C is satisfied).

According to the gaming machine according to the above (2), a first condition (for example, condition A) and a second condition (for example, condition B or condition C is satisfied) are included in a plurality of predetermined conditions. Therefore, regarding whether or not the specific gaming state ends, the player pays close attention to the first condition and the second condition to play the game, improving the playability in the specific gaming state and enhancing the interest. Is possible.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
The plurality of predetermined conditions are
A third condition (for example, 10 times) on the condition that the number of times determined to be a loss result as the execution result of the first variable display game or the second variable display game reaches the third number (for example, 10 times). For example, it is preferable to include the condition D).

According to the gaming machine described in (3) above, since the third condition (for example, condition D) is included in the plurality of predetermined conditions, the player determines whether or not the specific gaming state ends. The game will be played by paying close attention to the conditions, and it will be possible to improve the playability in a specific game state and enhance the interest.

(4) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
A third variable display game (for example, a normal symbol game) based on the fact that a third starting condition (for example, a starting condition for a normal symbol) different from both the first starting condition and the second starting condition is satisfied. Is feasible and
The first variable display game and the second variable display game are games (for example, special symbol games) that cannot be variablely displayed during the execution of the special gaming state.
The third variable display game is a game (for example, a normal symbol game) that can be variablely displayed even during the execution of the special gaming state.
It is preferable that the plurality of predetermined conditions include a fourth condition (for example, condition W) on which the number of executions of the third variable display game reaches the fourth number (for example, 100). ..

According to the gaming machine described in (4) above, since the fourth condition (for example, condition W) is included in the plurality of predetermined conditions, the player determines whether or not the specific gaming state ends. The game will be played by paying close attention to the conditions, and it will be possible to improve the playability in a specific game state and enhance the interest.

(5) In the gaming machine according to the present invention
Does the determination means satisfy specific conditions (for example, time saving hit derivation) different from the special conditions (for example, big hit derivation, small hit derivation) as the execution result of the first fluctuation display game or the second fluctuation display game? It is possible to judge whether or not
When the game state control means is determined to satisfy the specific condition as the determination result of the determination unit, the first variation display game (for example, the first special symbol game) determined to satisfy the specific condition or the game state control means. It is preferable that it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state (for example, the C time saving gaming state) after the end of the second variable display game (for example, the second special symbol game).

According to the gaming machine described in (5) above, the first variable display game (for example, the first special symbol game) or the second variable display game (for example) determined to satisfy a specific condition (for example, time saving hit derivation) is satisfied. Since it is possible to shift to a specific gaming state (for example, a C time saving gaming state) after the end of the second special symbol game), the player pays close attention to the establishment of the special conditions as before. , It will be possible to pay close attention to the establishment of specific conditions, expand the range of playability, and enhance the interest.

According to the gaming machine described in (5) above,

(6) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
The plurality of predetermined conditions are
As the execution result of the first variation display game or the second variation display game, the number of times determined to be a loss result and the number of times determined to satisfy the specific condition (for example, derivation per time reduction) is the fifth number (for example). It is preferable to include a fifth condition (for example, condition J) on condition that the condition (2 times) is reached.

According to the gaming machine described in (6) above, since the fifth condition (for example, condition J) is included in the plurality of predetermined conditions, the player determines whether or not the specific gaming state ends. The game will be played by paying close attention to the conditions, and it will be possible to improve the playability in a specific game state and enhance the interest. In particular, since a specific condition that can trigger a transition to a specific gaming state in a normal gaming state can be a trigger to transition to a specific gaming state in a specific gaming state, it is possible to provide unprecedented playability and enhance the interest. It becomes possible.

(7) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
The plurality of predetermined conditions are
As a result of executing the first variation display game or the second variation display game, the number of times it is determined that the specific condition (for example, derivation per time reduction) is satisfied reaches the sixth number (for example, twice). It is preferable to include a sixth condition (for example, condition G) conditioned on the above.

According to the gaming machine described in (7) above, since the sixth condition (for example, condition G) is included in the plurality of predetermined conditions, the player determines whether or not the specific gaming state ends. The game will be played by paying close attention to the conditions, and it will be possible to improve the playability in a specific game state and enhance the interest. In particular, in the normal gaming state, a specific condition that can trigger the transition to the specific gaming state is set, and in the specific gaming state, when the sixth number of times is reached, the transition to the normal gaming state is triggered, thus providing unprecedented game performance. It is possible to enhance the interest.

(8) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
The specific condition (for example, derivation per time reduction) includes a first specific condition (for example, derivation per C1 time reduction) and a second specific condition different from the first specific condition (for example, derivation per C2 time reduction). , Including
The plurality of predetermined conditions are
It is a condition that the number of times it is determined that the first specific condition is satisfied reaches the seventh number (for example, twice) as the execution result of the first variation display game or the second variation display game. The seventh condition (for example, condition M) and
It is a condition that the number of times it is determined that the second specific condition is satisfied reaches the eighth number (for example, twice) as the execution result of the first variation display game or the second variation display game. It is preferable to include an eighth condition (for example, condition P).

According to the gaming machine described in (8) above, since the seventh condition (for example, condition M) and the eighth condition (for example, condition P) are included in a plurality of predetermined conditions, the specific gaming state is set. As for whether or not to end the game, the player pays close attention to the seventh condition and the eighth condition to play the game, and it is possible to improve the playability in the specific game state and enhance the interest. In particular, the seventh condition and the eighth condition are both conditions that can trigger a transition to the specific gaming state in the normal gaming state. By using the seventh condition and the eighth condition as an opportunity to shift to the normal gaming state in the specific gaming state, it is possible to provide unprecedented playability and enhance the interest. Become. Further, the seventh and eighth times may be the same number or different times. When the number of times is different, the degree of advantage for the player differs between the seventh condition and the eighth condition (the larger the number is, the more advantageous the player is), so that the range of playability is widened. It is possible to provide unprecedented playability and enhance the interest.

(9) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
The specific game state (for example, a time-saving game state) is a first specific game state that can be transferred when the first transition condition (for example, the small hit derivation of the selected symbol commands "z7" to "z11") is satisfied. When (for example, A2 time saving game state) and the second transition condition (for example, the small hit derivation of the selected symbol command "z5" or the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value (for example, 1200 times)) are satisfied. It is preferable to include at least a second specific gaming state (for example, A3 time saving game state or B time saving gaming state) that can be transferred.

According to the gaming machine described in (9) above, the case where the first transition condition (for example, the small hit derivation of the selected symbol commands "z7" to "z11") is satisfied and the second transition condition (for example, for example). Since the specific gaming state of the transition destination is different depending on whether the small hit derivation of the selected symbol command "z5" or the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value (for example, 1200 times) is established, the range of playability is widened. , It is possible to enhance the interest.

(10) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
Does the determination means satisfy specific conditions (for example, time saving hit derivation) different from the special conditions (for example, big hit derivation, small hit derivation) as the execution result of the first fluctuation display game or the second fluctuation display game? It is possible to judge whether or not
When the game state control means is determined to satisfy the specific condition as the determination result of the determination unit, the end of the first variation display game or the second variation display game determined to satisfy the specific condition. It is possible to later shift to the specific gaming state (for example, the C time saving gaming state).
It is determined that the first specific gaming state (for example, A2 time saving gaming state) satisfies the specific condition (for example, time saving hit derivation) as an execution result of the first variation display game or the second variation display game. It can be terminated on condition that the number of times has reached the ninth number (for example, once).
The second specific gaming state (for example, A3 time saving game state or B time saving gaming state) is the specific condition (for example, derivation per time saving) as an execution result of the first variation display game or the second variation display game. It is preferable that the game can be terminated on condition that the number of times determined to satisfy the condition reaches a tenth number (for example, three times) different from the ninth number.

According to the gaming machine described in (10) above, the number of times the player is determined to satisfy the specific condition (for example, derivation per time reduction) in the first specific gaming state (for example, A2 time saving gaming state) is the first. When the number of times of 9 (for example, 1 time) is reached or not, and the specific condition (for example, time saving hit derivation) is satisfied in the second specific gaming state (for example, A3 time saving game state or B time saving gaming state). It is necessary to pay attention to whether or not the determined number of times reaches the tenth number of times (for example, three times) different from the ninth number of times. In this way, by making the end condition of each specific gaming state different between the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state, the range of game playability can be expanded and the interest can be enhanced.

(11) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
The special condition includes a first special condition (for example, small hit derivation) and a second special condition (for example, big hit derivation).
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that can be transferred based on the determination that the first special condition (for example, small hit derivation) is satisfied, and the second special gaming state. It is possible to shift based on the determination that the special condition (for example, the derivation of a big hit) is satisfied, and the second special gaming state (for example,) in which the gaming value given to the player is relatively larger than that of the first special gaming state. , Big hit game state), including,
The first transition condition (for example, the small hit derivation of the selected symbol commands "z7" to "z11") is the first variation display game or the second variation display game executed while being controlled to the normal gaming state. It is a condition that can be satisfied based on the execution result of the variable display game.
The second transition condition (for example, derivation of a small hit of the selected symbol command "z5" or the ceiling counter reaching the ceiling value (for example, 1200 times)) is set to the specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state). It is a condition that can be satisfied based on the execution result of the first variable display game or the second variable display game executed while being controlled.
When it is determined that the first specific gaming state (for example, A2 time saving gaming state) satisfies the first special condition (for example, small hit derivation) and the second special condition (for example, big hit derivation). It is set so that the first specific gaming state being executed can be terminated in any case where it is determined that the condition is satisfied.
When it is determined that the second specific gaming state (for example, A3 time saving gaming state or B time saving gaming state) satisfies the first special condition (for example, small hit derivation), the second specified gaming state is being executed. While the specific gaming state of is not terminated, it is set so that the second specific gaming state being executed can be terminated when it is determined that the second special condition (for example, jackpot derivation) is satisfied. , Is preferable.

According to the gaming machine described in (11) above, when it is determined that the first specific gaming state (for example, the A2 time saving gaming state) satisfies the first special condition (for example, small hit derivation) and the first. In any case where it is determined that the special condition 2 (for example, derivation of a big hit) is satisfied, the first specific gaming state being executed ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second specific gaming state (for example, A3 time saving game state or B time saving gaming state) satisfies the first special condition (for example, small hit derivation), the second specific gaming state is being executed. While the second specific gaming state is not terminated, if it is determined that the second special condition (for example, jackpot derivation) is satisfied, the second specific gaming state being executed is terminated. In this way, by mounting the first specific gaming state that ends when the second special condition is satisfied and the second specific gaming state that does not end even if the second special condition is satisfied, the playability can be achieved. It will be possible to spread the sword and enhance the interest.

(12) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
It is preferable that different variation patterns can be referred to in the first specific gaming state (for example, A2 time saving gaming state) and the second specific gaming state (for example, A3 time saving gaming state or B time saving gaming state).

According to the gaming machine described in (12) above, the first specific gaming state (for example, A2 time saving gaming state) and the second specific gaming state (for example, A3 time saving gaming state or B time saving gaming state) are different. Since the fluctuation pattern can be referred to, it is possible to perform different effects in the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

(13) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 2301) capable of controlling the effect, and
An effect executing means (for example, a display device 2007) capable of executing an effect controlled by the effect control means is provided.
The effect control means is
The first variable display game or the said When the second variable display game is executed, the first effect (for example, big hit system reach E, small hit system reach E) can be executed.
The first, which is controlled to the second specific gaming state (for example, A3 time saving gaming state or B time saving gaming state) and is determined to satisfy the special conditions (for example, big hit derivation, small hit derivation). When the variable display game or the second variable display game is executed, a second effect different from the first effect (for example, a special effect performed as a big hit system reach F or a small hit system reach F (for example). For example, 1G continuous final production)) can be executed.
It is possible that the variation pattern in which the first effect is executed and the variation pattern in which the second effect is executed are variation patterns in which the variation time is different (for example, 5 seconds and 20 seconds are different). preferable.

According to the gaming machine described in (13) above, it is performed when it is determined that the special conditions (for example, big hit derivation, small hit derivation) are satisfied in the first specific gaming state (for example, A2 time saving gaming state). When it is determined that the special conditions are satisfied in the first effect (for example, big hit system reach E, small hit system reach E) and the second specific gaming state (for example, A3 time saving game state or B time saving gaming state). Since the variation time is different between the second effect performed (for example, a special effect performed as a big hit system reach F or a small hit system reach F (for example, a 1G continuous fixed effect)), the effect performed is It is possible to make the player watch the game and enhance the interest.

(14) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
The variation pattern in which the second effect (for example, a special effect performed as the big hit system reach F or the small hit system reach F (for example, 1G continuous fixed effect)) is executed is the first effect (for example, the big hit system). It is preferable that the fluctuation pattern has a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern in which the system reach E and the small hit system reach E) are executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (14) above, a variation in which a second effect (for example, a special effect performed as a big hit system reach F or a small hit system reach F (for example, a 1G continuous fixed effect)) is executed. Since the pattern has a shorter variation time than the variation pattern in which the first effect (for example, big hit system reach E, small hit system reach E) is executed, the second specific gaming state (for example, A3 time saving gaming state or B) In the short-time game state), it is possible to perform a production that can give the player a sense of expectation at a good tempo, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

In the gaming machines of Appendix 1 of (1) to (13) above, the first to tenth times do not have to be different from each other, and unless otherwise specified, any one of them. And the other times may be the same number of times.

Further, the gaming machine of the appendix 1 has the configuration of the gaming machine of the appendix 1 described in the above (1) and the configuration described in the above (2) to (13) to the extent that matching can be achieved. Some configurations or all configurations may be arbitrarily combined. For example, in the gaming machine of Appendix 1 described in (1) above, among the configurations described in (3) above, to the extent that the configuration described in (2) above is not provided and matching can be achieved. It may have some or all configurations.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest.

[7-2. Appendix 2]

Conventionally, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a gaming machine that determines a variation pattern by referring to a variation pattern table, displays variation of a symbol according to the determined variation pattern, and displays the result of a symbol game is known. Has been done.

As a gaming machine of this type, for example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that switches a variation pattern table to be referred to according to the number of times a variation display of a symbol is performed (particularly, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2021-191336). See paragraph [0446] of the gazette.).

According to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2021-191336, it is possible to change the variation display of the symbol by switching the variation pattern table to be referred to, but it depends on the number of times the variation display of the symbol is performed. Since the variable pattern table to be referred to is switched, the switching of the variable pattern table is fixed, and there is a risk that the interest will be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest.

In this respect, the gaming machine of Appendix 2 has the following features.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Display means for variable display of patterns and
Based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, the display means displays the variation of the symbol, and a specific result (for example, a specific small hit) and a special result (for example, a special result that is more advantageous to the player than the player than the specific result). , Big hit, V small hit), and a symbol control means (for example, main CPU 2201) capable of performing a symbol game capable of deriving any of the lottery results including.
A game state control means (for example, main CPU 2201) capable of controlling a game state, and
Equipped with
The game state control means
A specific game state control means (for example, main CPU 2201) that can be controlled to a specific game state (for example, A time saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.
When the special result is derived by the symbol control means, the special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 2201) that can be controlled to the special game state (for example, the big hit game state) that can give the player a predetermined game value. ) And,
The symbol control means can select any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns (for example, variation pattern tables A to D) when the gaming state is controlled to the specific gaming state by the gaming state control means. ,
The specific game state control means is
When controlled to the specific gaming state, the specific result is a specific number of times (for example, once (in the case of the time saving type mode 1), 10 times (in the case of the time saving type mode 2, 4, 5), 100 times (time saving). (In the case of type modes 3 and 6), etc.) It is possible to terminate the specific gaming state based on the derivation.
The first specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 1) and the second specific gaming state different from the first specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 2). ), And can be controlled to any one of a plurality of specific gaming states including at least.

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, it is possible to enhance the interest.

(2) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
The symbol control means is
When the control of the first specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 1) is started, the first fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern table A) can be selected as the fluctuation pattern. can be,
When the control of the second specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 2) is started, the variation pattern is a second variation pattern (for example, different from the first variation pattern). Fluctuation pattern table B) can be selected,
The first variation pattern (eg, variation pattern table A) has a relatively longer variation time (eg, variation time) than when the second variation pattern (eg, variation pattern table B) is selected. It is preferable to have a fluctuation pattern (with a long average time).

According to the gaming machine described in (2) above, since the variation pattern selected according to the specific gaming state can be different, it is possible to enhance the interest of the gaming.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
The symbol control means is in the first specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving game state corresponding to the time saving type mode 1) or the second specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 2). When controlled, the specific result (for example, a specific small hit) is less than the specific number of times (for example, 10 times) (for example, 8 times (in the case of the A time saving game state corresponding to the time saving type mode 2)). ) It is preferable that the selected variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table B) can be switched to a different variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table A) based on the derivation.

According to the gaming machine described in (3) above, since the fluctuation pattern is switched based on the number of times a specific result (for example, a specific small hit) is derived, the switching timing of the fluctuation pattern is variable, which makes the game interesting. It will be possible to increase. In particular, by making the switching timing of the fluctuation pattern variable according to the specific game state, the player can pay attention to the switching of the fluctuation pattern and play the game, which can further enhance the interest of the game. Will be.

(4) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
The symbol control means is
When controlled to the first specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 1), the first variation pattern among the plurality of types of variation patterns (for example, the variation pattern table A). ) Can be selected,
The specific result (for example, the specific small) is controlled when the second specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 2) is controlled and the second specific gaming state is controlled. When the hit) is not derived, the second variation time is relatively shorter than when the first variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table A) is selected among the plurality of types of variation patterns. It is preferable that the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table B) can be selected.

According to the gaming machine described in (4) above, since the fluctuation time of the symbol can be made variable according to the specific gaming state, it is possible to improve the playability in the specific gaming state and enhance the interest. Become.

(5) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
The symbol control means is
The specific result (for example, a specific small hit) is not derived when the specific game state is controlled to the third specific game state (for example, the A time reduction game state corresponding to the time reduction type mode 6) among the plurality of specific game states. In this case, a third variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table C) can be selected from the plurality of types of variation patterns (for example, variation pattern tables A to D).
When the specific result is derived a number of times (for example, 99 times) less than the specific number of times (for example, 100 times) while being controlled to the third specific gaming state, the variation pattern of the plurality of types is described. It is preferable that a fourth variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table A) having a relatively longer variation time than when the third variation pattern is selected can be selected.

According to the gaming machine described in (5) above, when a specific result (for example, a specific small hit) is not derived, a third variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table C) can be selected, and the specific result can be selected. When is derived less than a specific number of times (for example, 100 times) (for example, 99 times), a fourth variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table A) having a relatively long variation time can be selected. Therefore, when the end timing of the specific game state is near, the progress of the game can be slowed down, the staying time of the specific game state can be made as long as possible, and the interest can be enhanced.

(6) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
In the first specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 1), the first specific number of times (for example, once) is set as the specific number of times.
The second specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 2) is a second specific number of times (for example, one time) that is larger than the first specific number of times (for example, one time) as the specific number of times. 10 times) is preferably set.

According to the gaming machine described in (6) above, since the number of times of derivation of a specific result that can trigger the termination of the specific gaming state differs depending on the type of the special gaming state, the specific result related to the termination of the specific gaming state (for example). , It is possible to make the player pay close attention to the derivation of the specific small hit), and it is possible to enhance the interest. In particular, the derivation of a specific result involves not only the end of the specific game state but also the switching of the fluctuation pattern, so that it is possible to further enhance the interest.

(7) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
The symbol control means is
When it is controlled to the fourth specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 5) among the plurality of specific gaming states and is controlled to the fourth specific gaming state, the said. When a specific result (for example, a specific small hit) is not derived, a fifth variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table D) among the plurality of types of variation patterns can be selected.
The third specific number of times that the number of times the specific result is derived is less than the second specific number of times (for example, 10 times) when controlled to the fifth specific gaming state and controlled to the fifth specific gaming state. (For example, once), the sixth variation time is relatively shorter than when the fifth variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table D) is selected among the plurality of types of variation patterns. A variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table C) can be selected.
When controlled to the fifth specific gaming state and controlled to the fifth specific gaming state, the number of times the specific result is derived is less than the second specific number of times (for example, 10 times), and the third. When the fourth specific number of times (for example, nine times) is larger than the specific number of times (for example, one time), the fifth variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table D) and the sixth variation pattern among the plurality of types of variation patterns are used. It is possible to select a seventh variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table A) whose variation time is relatively longer than when at least one of the variation patterns (for example, variation pattern table C) is selected. preferable.

According to the gaming machine described in (7) above, various variations can be given to the switching of the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern is triggered by an unpredictable result such as the derivation of a specific result (for example, a specific small hit). Since it can be switched, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

(8) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
The plurality of specific gaming states (for example, A time saving gaming states corresponding to time saving type modes 1 to 6) include a third specific gaming state (for example, A time saving gaming state corresponding to time saving type mode 3).
The third specific gaming state includes the first specific gaming state (for example, A time saving game state time saving corresponding to time saving type mode 1) and the second specific gaming state (for example, A time saving game corresponding to time saving type mode 2). A fifth specific game state (for example, A time-saving game state corresponding to the time-saving type mode 3) different from the specific game state (state), which is a number larger than the second specific number of times (for example, 10 times) as the specific number of times. The number of times (for example, 100 times) is set,
When the symbol control means is controlled to the third specific gaming state, the symbol control means can be selected in the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table A) that can be selected in the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. It is preferable that an eighth variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table C) having a relatively shorter variation time than any of the variation patterns (for example, variation pattern table A and variation pattern table B) can be selected.

According to the gaming machine described in (8) above, the number of times of derivation of a specific result that can trigger the termination of the specific gaming state is relatively large as compared with the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. When controlled to the third specific gaming state, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation time is shorter than that of either the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, so that the progress of the game can be accelerated, which is faster. It is possible to increase the possibility of being controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) at a stage, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

(9) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
When the symbol control means is controlled to the third specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving game state corresponding to the time saving type mode 3), the number of times the specific result (for example, the specific small hit) is derived. Regardless of the variation pattern that can be selected in the first specific gaming state (for example, A time saving game state time saving corresponding to the time saving type mode 1) and the second specific gaming state (for example, A corresponding to the time saving type mode 2). It is preferable that the eighth specific variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table C) having a shorter variation time than any of the variation patterns that can be selected in the time-saving gaming state) can be selected.

According to the gaming machine of (9) above, in the third specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 3), the specific result (for example, the specific small hit) is derived regardless of the number of times. , Eighth specific variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table C) can be selected. That is, in the third specific gaming state, regardless of the number of times a specific result (for example, a specific small hit) is derived, the first specific gaming state (for example, the time saving game state A corresponding to the time saving type mode 1) is always used. And since it is possible to select a variation pattern in which the variation time is shorter than that of the second specific gaming state (for example, the A time reduction gaming state corresponding to the time reduction type mode 2), it is possible to give a special feeling to the player, and by extension, the second. 3 It is possible to make the player understand that the specific gaming state is controlled, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

(10) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
A predetermined counting means (for example, main CPU 2201) capable of counting the number of times the special result (for example, big hit, V small hit) is derived, and
A specific counting means (for example, main CPU 2201) capable of counting the number of times the specific result (for example, a specific small hit) is derived is provided.
The symbol control means is controlled by the count number based on the predetermined counting means (for example, the count number by S2270) and the specific gaming state as the fluctuation pattern selected in the specific gaming state. It is preferable to control so as to select one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on the number of counts by the specific counting means (for example, the number of counts by S2242).

According to the gaming machine described in (10) above, a variation pattern is based on the number of times a special result (for example, a big hit or a V small hit) is derived and the number of times a specific result (for example, a specific small hit) is derived. Is selected, it is possible to have variations by switching the fluctuation pattern, and it is possible to further enhance the interest.

(11) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
The specific result includes at least a first specific result (for example, specific small hit A) and a second specific result different from the first specific result (for example, specific small hit B).
The symbol control means is controlled to the sixth specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving game state corresponding to the time saving type mode 7 and the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 8) among the plurality of types of specific gaming states. When the first specific result (for example, the specific small hit B in the case of the A time saving game state corresponding to the time saving type mode 7 and the specific small hit A in the case of the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 8) is obtained. When derived, the selected variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table B1) is not switched, while the second specific result (for example, time saving type mode) is controlled when the sixth specific gaming state is controlled. The type of the variation pattern selected when the specific small hit A in the case of the A time saving game state corresponding to 7 and the specific small hit B) in the case of the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 8 are derived. Is preferably switchable to a different type (for example, the variable pattern table B1 can be switched to the variable pattern table A1).

According to the gaming machine described in (11) above, since a plurality of types of specific results (for example, specific small hits) that can trigger the switching of the fluctuation pattern and the termination of the specific gaming state are provided, the interest of the game in the specific gaming state is provided. Can be further enhanced.

(12) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
The specific result includes at least a first specific result (for example, specific small hit A) and a second specific result different from the first specific result (for example, specific small hit B).
A specific first counting means (for example, a main CPU 2201 capable of executing the process of S2352) capable of counting that the first specific result has been derived, and
A specific second counting means (for example, a main CPU 2201 capable of executing the process of S2357) capable of counting that the second specific result has been derived is provided.
The specific gaming state includes the first specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 1) and the second specific gaming state (for example, the A time saving gaming state corresponding to the time saving type mode 2). Includes a different seventh specific gaming state (eg, A time saving game state corresponding to time saving type mode 9 and A time saving gaming state corresponding to time saving type mode 10).
In the specific game state control means, the first specific result (for example, the specific small hit A) is the sixth specific number of times (for example, 5 times in the case of the A time saving game state corresponding to the time saving type mode 9 and the time saving type mode 10). It was derived (twice in the case of the A time saving game state corresponding to), and the second specific result (for example, the specific small hit B) is the seventh specific number of times (for example, A time saving corresponding to the time saving type mode 9). Derived 10 times in the case of a game state, 4 times in the case of A time-saving game state corresponding to the time-saving type mode 10), and if both are satisfied, the 7th gaming state (for example, corresponding to the time-saving type mode 9) is supported. It is possible to end the A time saving game state (A time saving game state corresponding to the time saving type mode 10).
The symbol control means can select the type of the variation pattern in the seventh specific gaming state based on the combination of the count number of the specific first counting means and the count number of the specific second counting means (for example,). In the case of the A time saving game state corresponding to the time saving type mode 9, the variation pattern table B1 can be selected by deriving the specific small hit A 2 times and deriving the specific small hit B 4 times, and the specific small hit A 4 times is derived and the specific small hit is derived. The variation pattern table A1 can be selected by deriving B8 times. In the case of the A time saving game state corresponding to the time saving type mode 10, the variation pattern table A1 can be selected by deriving the specific small hit A1 time and deriving the specific small hit B2 times.) Is preferable.

According to the gaming machine described in (12) above, based on the combination of the number of times the first specific result (for example, the specific small hit A) is derived and the number of times the second specific result (for example, the specific small hit B) is derived. Since the type of variation pattern can be selected, the player can pay attention to the derivation of the first specific result and the derivation of the second specific result, and it becomes possible to further enhance the interest.

(13) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
Further provided with an effect control means (for example, sub CPU 2301) capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The effect control means is
When switching from the variation pattern selected by the symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 2201) to another variation pattern is performed, the selected variation pattern may be any of the plurality of types of variation patterns. , It is preferable that the notification effect indicating that the fluctuation pattern is switched can be executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (13) above, regardless of whether the selected variation pattern is any of a plurality of types of variation patterns, it is possible to execute a notification effect indicating that the variation patterns are switched. , It is possible to enhance the interest.

(14) In the gaming machine according to the present invention.
It is preferable that the notification effect is at least partly common to the effect executed when the variation pattern is not switched.

According to the gaming machine described in (14) above, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the switching of the fluctuation pattern while suppressing the control load, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

In the gaming machines (1) to (14) above, unless otherwise specified, the first specific gaming state to the seventh specific gaming state do not have to be different specific gaming states and can be matched. It may be in the same specific gaming state within the range. Similarly, in the gaming machines (1) to (14), the first variation pattern to the eighth variation pattern do not need to be different variation patterns (for example, variation pattern table) unless otherwise specified. , The same fluctuation pattern may be used as long as matching can be achieved. Similarly, in the above-mentioned gaming machines (1) to (14), the first specific number of times to the seventh specific number of times do not have to be different times, and are the same as long as matching can be achieved, unless otherwise specified. It may be the number of times.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a configuration of a part of the configuration described in (1) above and the configuration described in (2) to (14) above, to the extent that matching can be achieved. Any combination of all configurations may be used. For example, the gaming machine described in (1) above may not have the configuration described in (2) above, but may have a part or all of the configurations described in (3) above. can.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest.

201,1201,201 main CPU
301, 1301, 301 Sub CPU
120, 120A, 120B, 1120, 2120, 5120 1st start port 140A, 140B, 1140, 2140 2nd start port 2126, 5125A, 5125B Passage gate 2007 Display device

Claims (14)

Display means for variable display of patterns and
A lottery result including a specific result and a special result that is more advantageous to the player than the player than the specific result by displaying the variation of the symbol by the display means based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition. A symbol control means that can perform a symbol game that can be derived from
A game state control means that can control the game state,
Equipped with
The game state control means
A specific game state control means that can control a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
It has a special game state control means that can control a special game state that can give a predetermined game value to the player when the special result is derived by the symbol control means.
The symbol control means can select any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns when the game state is controlled to the specific game state by the game state control means.
The specific game state control means is
It is possible to terminate the specific gaming state based on the fact that the specific result is derived a specific number of times while being controlled to the specific gaming state.
A gaming machine characterized in that it can be controlled to any one of a plurality of specific gaming states including at least a first specific gaming state and a second specific gaming state different from the first specific gaming state. The symbol control means is
When the control of the first specific gaming state is started, the first fluctuation pattern can be selected as the fluctuation pattern.
When the control of the second specific gaming state is started, a second fluctuation pattern different from the first fluctuation pattern can be selected as the fluctuation pattern.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time as compared with the case where the second fluctuation pattern is selected. The symbol control means is selected based on the fact that the specific result is derived a number of times less than the specific number of times when the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state is controlled. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the variation pattern can be switched to a different variation pattern. The symbol control means is
When controlled to the first specific gaming state, the first fluctuation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns.
If the specific result is not derived when the second specific gaming state is controlled and the second specific gaming state is controlled, the first of the plurality of types of variation patterns is described. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein a second fluctuation pattern having a relatively shorter fluctuation time than when the fluctuation pattern of 1 is selected can be selected. The symbol control means is
When the specific result is not derived when the specific gaming state is controlled to the third specific gaming state among the plurality of specific gaming states, the third variation pattern among the plurality of types of variation patterns can be selected.
When the specific result is derived a number of times less than the specific number of times while being controlled to the third specific gaming state, as compared with the case where the third variation pattern is selected from the plurality of types of variation patterns. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein a fourth fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time can be selected. In the first specific gaming state, the first specific number of times is set as the specific number of times.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein in the second specific gaming state, a second specific number of times, which is a number larger than the first specific number of times, is set as the specific number of times. .. The symbol control means is
When the specific game state is controlled to the fourth specific game state among the plurality of specific game states and the specific result is not derived when the control is performed to the fourth specific game state, the plurality of types of variations The fifth variation pattern can be selected from the patterns,
When the number of times the specific result is derived is the third specific number of times less than the second specific number of times when the specific game state is controlled and the fifth specific game state is controlled. It is possible to select a sixth fluctuation pattern having a relatively shorter fluctuation time than when the fifth fluctuation pattern is selected from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns.
When controlled to the fifth specific gaming state and controlled to the fifth specific gaming state, the number of times the specific result is derived is less than the second specific number of times and more than the third specific number of times. A seventh variation in which the variation time is relatively longer than when at least one of the fifth variation pattern and the sixth variation pattern is selected among the plurality of types of variation patterns when the number of variations is specified. The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein a pattern can be selected. The plurality of specific gaming states include a third specific gaming state.
The third specific gaming state is a specific gaming state different from the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state, and the fifth specific number of times is larger than the second specific number of times as the specific number of times. Set and
When the symbol control means is controlled to the third specific gaming state, the symbol control means is more variable than any of the variation patterns that can be selected in the first specific gaming state and the variation patterns that can be selected in the second specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to claim 6 or 7, wherein an eighth variation pattern having a relatively short time can be selected. When the symbol control means is controlled to the third specific gaming state, the variation pattern that can be selected in the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state are selected regardless of the number of times the specific result is derived. The gaming machine according to claim 8, wherein an eighth specific fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time than any of the fluctuation patterns that can be selected depending on the state can be selected. A predetermined counting means capable of counting the number of times the special result is derived, and
A specific counting means capable of counting the number of times the specific result is derived is provided.
The symbol control means has, as the fluctuation pattern selected in the specific gaming state, a count number based on the predetermined counting means and a count number by the specific counting means when controlled in the specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the gaming machine is controlled so as to select one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on the above. The specific result includes at least a first specific result and a second specific result different from the first specific result.
While the symbol control means does not switch the selected variation pattern when the first specific result is derived while being controlled to the sixth specific gaming state among the plurality of types of specific gaming states, the symbol control means does not switch. Claims 1 to 1, wherein the type of the variation pattern selected when the second specific result is derived while being controlled to the sixth specific gaming state can be switched to a different type. The gaming machine according to any one of 10. The specific result includes at least a first specific result and a second specific result different from the first specific result.
A specific first counting means capable of counting that the first specific result has been derived, and
A specific second counting means capable of counting that the second specific result has been derived is provided.
The specific gaming state includes the first specific gaming state and the seventh specific gaming state different from the second specific gaming state.
The specific game state control means is the seventh game when both the first specific result is derived the sixth specific number of times and the second specific result is derived the seventh specific number of times. It is possible to terminate the state,
The symbol control means can select the type of the variation pattern in the seventh specific gaming state based on the combination of the count number of the specific first counting means and the count number of the specific second counting means. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 11, characterized in that. Further equipped with an effect control means capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The effect control means is
When switching from the variation pattern selected by the symbol control means to another variation pattern, the variation pattern can be switched regardless of whether the selected variation pattern is any of the plurality of types of variation patterns. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 3 to 12, wherein a notification effect indicating that the game is to be performed can be executed. The gaming machine according to claim 13, wherein the notification effect is at least a part in common with the effect executed when the variation pattern is not switched.

Images